SAUDI ARAMCO CONSTRUCTION SAFETY MANUAL PREFACE

Dhahran, Saudi Arabia February, 1993 The purpose of the Saudi Aramco Construction Safety Manual (CSM) is to prevent injury, loss of life, and damage to assets. This is the fourth revision of the CSM. Since its 1974 introduction, the Construction Safety Manual has provided safety criteria for all construction work performed by Saudi Aramco and its contractors. Many of the requirements in this manual detail the need for Saudi Aramco services or equipment. Where references indicate that certain equipment (fall protection, safety shoes, etc.) should be provided or services rendered (bio-monitoring, etc.), the intent is that contractors must provide equivalent equipment or services (as approved by Saudi Aramco) from their own resources. The construction industry functions in a dynamically changing work environment in which updating of equipment and standards is a continuous process resulting from changes in operating variables, regulatory requirements, and safety practices. Although this manual has been updated to reflect the latest Saudi Aramco and construction industry practices, as time goes on there may be a need to consider new procedures, standards, or operating conditions. Such new developments, including potential conflicts with existing provisions, should be referred to the Loss Prevention Department for resolution. The Loss Prevention Department will issue interim revisions or updates where appropriate. Good loss prevention is an integral part of good project management. For our projects and maintenance programs to proceed safely, all Saudi Aramco and contractor personnel involved in construction activities, whether management or line employees, need to understand and follow the provisions in this Manual. Only with the active commitment of everyone can we ensure that Saudi Aramco maintains the safest possible work environment.

Senior Vice President, Engineering and Project Management

February 1993 - Construction Safety Manual: Table of Contents

Page 1

I. Administration.................................................................................30
1.0 SAUDI ARAMCO LOSS PREVENTION POLICY AND PROGRAM......................................31 1.1 Loss Prevention Policy Implementation.................................................................31 1.1.1 Compliance With Construction Requirements .......................................31 1.1.2 Operating Standards and Instructions.....................................................31 1.1.3 Personal Protection.....................................................................................31 1.1.4 Inspection ....................................................................................................31 1.1.5 Education and Training..............................................................................32 1.1.6 Motivation and Recognition .....................................................................32 1.1.7 Job Placement ..............................................................................................32 1.1.8 Response to Accidental Occurrences......................................................32 1.1.9 Contractor Safety ........................................................................................32 1.1.10 Off-The-Job Safety......................................................................................32 1.1.11 Traffic Safety................................................................................................32 1.1.12 Accountability.............................................................................................33 1.1.13 Compliance Reviews ...................................................................................33 1.2 Saudi Aramco Loss Preve ntion Requirements For Contractors.......................33 1.2.1 Non-Compliance..........................................................................................33 1.2.2 Assistance....................................................................................................33 1.2.3 Standards and Instructions .......................................................................34 1.3 Contractor's Loss Prevention Program.................................................................34 1.3.1 Written Program..........................................................................................34 1.3.2 Hazard Identification Plan..........................................................................35 1.3.3 Safety Supervisor........................................................................................35 1.3.4 Safety Discussion .......................................................................................35 2.0 SAUDI ARAMCO LOSS PREVENTION DEPARTMENT SERVICES ....................................36 2.1 Loss Prevention Program.........................................................................................36 2.2 Program Management Services ..............................................................................37 2.3 Program Maintenance Services ..............................................................................38 3.0 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION, ANALYSIS AND REPORTING..............................................39 3.1 Reports Required by Saudi Aramco........................................................................39 3.2 Accident Investigation ...............................................................................................40 3.2.1 Responsibilities for Investigation.............................................................40 3.2.1.1 Supervisor/Safety Representative............................................40 3.2.1.2 Project Manager..........................................................................40 3.3 Cases to be Investigated.............................................................................................41 3.4 Accident Investigation Guidelines...........................................................................41 3.5 Accident Analysis ....................................................................................................41 3.5.1 Classification................................................................................................41 4.0 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR SAFETY...............................................................................................45 4.1 Contractor Senior Management..............................................................................45 4.2 Design Engineer.........................................................................................................45 4.3 Contractor's Safety Officer......................................................................................45 4.4 Construction Manager/Superintendent.................................................................46 4.5 Site Safety Supervisor ...............................................................................................47 4.6 Equipment Manager/Supervisor ..............................................................................47 4.7 Engineer/Supervisor..................................................................................................47

February 1993 - Table Of Contents

Page 2

4.8 4.9

Foreman........................................................................................................................47 Worker.........................................................................................................................48

5.0 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES .........................................................................................................49 5.1 Action to be Taken......................................................................................................49 5.2 Contact After Office Hours ......................................................................................49 5.3 Help in an Emergency................................................................................................49 6.0 SAFETY TRAINING...........................................................................................................................51 6.1 Safety Training for Supervisors..............................................................................51 6.2 Safety Training for Workmen.................................................................................51 6.2.1 Integrated Practices ....................................................................................51 6.2.2 Specialized Training....................................................................................52 6.2.3 Use of Persuasion .......................................................................................52 6.2.4 Course Requirements..................................................................................52 6.3 Scope of Training .......................................................................................................53 6.3.1 Safety Training Topics For Supervisors..................................................54 6.3.2 Induction Safety Topics For Workmen ...................................................55 7.0 SITE PLANNING AND HOUSEKEEPING.....................................................................................57 7.1 Initial Planning ...........................................................................................................57 7.1.1 Hazard Identification Plan..........................................................................57 7.1.2 Loss Prevention Program...........................................................................58 7.1.3 Protection of Employees and Equipment.................................................58 7.1.4 Transportation.............................................................................................58 7.1.5 Lifting Equipment........................................................................................58 7.1.6 Demolition ....................................................................................................58 7.1.7 Excavations ..................................................................................................58 7.1.8 Scaffolding ...................................................................................................58 7.2 Site Layout...................................................................................................................59 7.2.1 Site Accommodation...................................................................................59 7.2.2 Adequate Access Roads ...........................................................................59 7.2.3 Project Sign ..................................................................................................59 7.2.4 Safe Means of Access and Egress ...........................................................60 7.2.5 Parking Facilities..........................................................................................60 7.2.6 Drainage........................................................................................................60 7.2.7 Vehicle / Heavy Equipment Paths On Site Vs Pedestrian Paths..............................................................................................................60 7.2.8 Sand...............................................................................................................60 7.2.9 Fire Prevention.............................................................................................60 7.2.10 Site Illumination...........................................................................................60 7.3 Storage Areas .............................................................................................................60 7.4 Welfare Facilities.......................................................................................................61 7.5 Good Housekeeping....................................................................................................61 7.6 Construction Sites and Materials Storage Yards ................................................62 8.0 FIRST AID ...........................................................................................................................................65 8.1 Provision of First Aid Facilities...............................................................................65 8.2 First Aid Attendants...................................................................................................66 8.3 First Aid Facilities At Work Site............................................................................67 8.4 Labor And Workmen Law.........................................................................................69

February 1993 - Table Of Contents

Page 3

9.0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT.....................................................................................71 9.1 Head Protection...........................................................................................................72 9.2 Eye and Face Protection.............................................................................................72 9.2.1 Eye Protection from Impact........................................................................73 9.2.2 Eye Protection from Radiant Energies......................................................73 9.2.3 Face Protection............................................................................................73 9.3 Hand Protection ..........................................................................................................73 9.4 Foot Protection............................................................................................................73 9.5 Hearing Protection.....................................................................................................74 9.5.1 Ear Plugs.......................................................................................................74 9.5.2 Ear Muffs ......................................................................................................74 9.6 Fall Restraining/Arresting Devices .......................................................................74 10.0 BREATHING APPARATUS .........................................................................................................81 10.1 Selection of Equipment ..............................................................................................81 10.1.1 Requirements For Use................................................................................82 10.1.2 Misuse ..........................................................................................................82 10.1.3 Hazardous Substances ...............................................................................83 10.1.4 Contaminants ...............................................................................................83 10.2 Respiratory Protective Devices................................................................................83 10.2.1 Air Purifying Respirators ...........................................................................83 10.2.1.1 Gas Masks ....................................................................................83 10.2.1.2 Chemical Cartridge Respirators .................................................84 10.2.1.3 Particulate Filter Respirators (Dust Respirators)....................84 10.2.2 Supplied Air Respirators ............................................................................84 10.2.2.1 Air Line Respirators ....................................................................84 10.2.2.2 Abrasive Blasting Respirators ..................................................85 10.2.2.3 Air Supplied Suits .......................................................................85 10.2.3 Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA).........................................85 10.3 Training .......................................................................................................................86 10.4 Safety Precautions .....................................................................................................86 10.4.1 Air Compressors..........................................................................................86 FIRE PREVENTION.......................................................................................................................89 11.1 Before the Job Starts .................................................................................................89 11.2 Layout ...........................................................................................................................90 11.3 Equipment Protection.................................................................................................90 11.4 Control of Ignition Sources ......................................................................................91 11.5 Flammable Liquids 91 11.5.1 Storage..........................................................................................................91 11.5.2 Handling of Flammable Liquids.................................................................92 11.5.3 Ventilation ....................................................................................................92 11.6 Combustible Materials ..............................................................................................92 11.7 Housekeeping..............................................................................................................92 11.8 Emergency Equipment ...............................................................................................92 11.8.1 Water-Type Fire Extinguisher...................................................................93 11.8.2 Carbon Dioxide Type Extinguisher...........................................................93 11.8.3 Dry Chemical Type Extinguisher...............................................................93 11.8.4 Pressurized Water.......................................................................................93 11.9 Reporting a Fire..........................................................................................................94 11.10 End-of-Shift Checks...................................................................................................94

11.0

February 1993 - Table Of Contents

Page 4

12.0

RADIO COMMUNICATIONS .....................................................................................................96 12.1 Equipment.....................................................................................................................97 12.1.1 Remote Control Unit ...................................................................................97 12.2 Safe Operation ............................................................................................................97 12.3 Radio Phrases .............................................................................................................97 12.4 Phonetic Alphabet.......................................................................................................98 12.5 International Communications Union Agreement ...............................................99 12.5.1 Monitoring of Circuits ................................................................................100 12.5.2 Secrecy Act..................................................................................................100 12.5.3 Penalties........................................................................................................100 12.6 Message Priorities for Company Operations .......................................................100 12.7 Distress Messages .....................................................................................................102 12.7.1 MAYDAY.....................................................................................................102 12.7.2 Urgency Signal............................................................................................103 12.7.3 Priority Traffic ..............................................................................................104

13.0 TRANSPORTATION ......................................................................................................................105 13.1 Driver Requirements .................................................................................................105 13.2 Driver's Responsibilities ..........................................................................................105 13.3 Motor Vehicle Regulations: Saudi Arab Government and Saudi Aramco.........................................................................................................................107 13.4 Vehicle Condition.......................................................................................................107 13.5 Driver Training ..........................................................................................................109 13.6 Enforcement of Safe Driving Practices ..................................................................109 13.7 Action Taken After a Saudi Aramco Motor Vehicle Accident...........................110 13.7.1 Emergencies .................................................................................................110 13.7.2 Remain at Scene...........................................................................................110 13.8 Passenger Seating and Seat Belts ..........................................................................111 13.9 Desert Driving ............................................................................................................111 13.9.1 Stay With Vehicle........................................................................................111 13.9.2 Sand Tires.....................................................................................................111 13.10 Vehicle Admittance to Restricted Areas................................................................112 13.11 Operation of Motor Vehicles Within Saudi Aramco Communities ..................112 13.11.1 Seat Belts ......................................................................................................112 13.11.2 Traffic Regulations......................................................................................112 14.0 AIRCRAFT OPERATION...............................................................................................................113 14.1 General Operating Responsibilities .......................................................................113 14.1.1 Captain/Pilot.................................................................................................113 14.1.2 Camp Supervisors .......................................................................................113 14.2 Passenger Briefing/Instructions, General (All Aircraft Types)......................114 14.3 Transportation of Dangerous Goods .......................................................................115 14.4 Hours of Operation for Single-Engine Helicopters .............................................115 14.5 General Precautions for Helicopters......................................................................115 14.5.1 Life Vests ......................................................................................................115

February 1993 - Table Of Contents

Page 5

II. General And Civil...........................................................................116
1.0 WORK PERMIT SYSTEM................................................................................................................117 1.1 Definitions ...................................................................................................................117 1.1.1 Restricted Areas ..........................................................................................117 1.1.2 Issuer (Operation Supervisors).................................................................118 1.1.3 Receiver (Authorized Craftsmen)..............................................................118 1.1.4 Work Permit..................................................................................................118 1.2 Issuance and Approval ...............................................................................................118 1.2.1 Power Distribution Department Clearances ............................................119 1.3 Precautions..................................................................................................................119 1.3.1 Checklist.......................................................................................................119 1.3.2 Clear Area.....................................................................................................119 1.3.3 Work Stoppage............................................................................................110 1.4 Handling of Issued Work Permit............................................................................119 1.5 Closing Out and Filing the Permit..........................................................................120 1.6 Certification ................................................................................................................120 1.7 12 Rules on Work Permit Procedure ....................................................................120 1.8 Hold Tags and Multiple Lockouts............................................................................120 2.0 EXCAVATIONS, TRENCHING AND SHORING.........................................................................125 2.1 Before Work Starts ...................................................................................................128 2.2 Work Permit...............................................................................................................128 2.2.1 Excavation near Saudi Telephone Cables................................................128 2.3 Underground Obstructions.......................................................................................129 2.4 General Precautions ..................................................................................................129 2.4.1 Shoring Protective Systems .......................................................................129 2.4.2 Personnel Protection...................................................................................129 2.4.3 Inspection.....................................................................................................130 2.4.4 Clearance ......................................................................................................130 2.4.5 Mechanical Excavator.................................................................................130 2.4.6 Walkways.....................................................................................................130 2.5 Access and Egress......................................................................................................130 2.6 Hazardous Atmospheres and Materials .................................................................130 2.6.1 Ventilation 101 2.6.1.1 Hazardous Atmospheres............................................................131 2.6.1.2 Emergency Rescue Equipment..................................................131 2.6.2 Exhaust Gases ..............................................................................................131 2.6.3 Organic Lead................................................................................................131 2.7 Edge Protection, Markers and Fixed Lighting......................................................132 2.8 Roads, Streets, and Sidewalks .................................................................................132 2.9 Backfilling...................................................................................................................132 2.10 Borrow Pits..................................................................................................................133 3.0 DEMOLITION .....................................................................................................................................153 3.1 Before Work Starts ...................................................................................................154 3.1.1 Responsible Supervisor.............................................................................154 3.1.2 Original Drawings........................................................................................154 3.1.3 Disconnections............................................................................................154 3.1.4 Adjacent Structures and Public Areas.....................................................154 3.1.5 Barricades/Signs..........................................................................................154

February 1993 - Table Of Contents

Page 6

3.2

3.3 3.4

3.5 3.6

3.7 3.8

Method of Demolition.................................................................................................154 3.2.1 Demolition of Equipment Containing PCB: Polychlorinated Biphenyl (ASKAREL).................................................................................155 3.2.2 Demolition Of Buildings With Asbestos / Insulation Materials .......................................................................................................155 Stability During Demolition.....................................................................................155 Working Place Clearance........................................................................................155 3.4.1 Access ..........................................................................................................155 3.4.2 Glass Removal..............................................................................................155 Structural Steel Removal..........................................................................................155 Tanks, Vessels and Pipe Work (Explosion Prevention)......................................156 3.6.1 Welding and Hot Cutting...........................................................................156 3.6.2 Cold Cutting.................................................................................................156 3.6.3 Steaming and Ventilation ...........................................................................156 3.6.4 Residue Cleaning.........................................................................................166 Protective Clothing and Equipment.........................................................................156 Mechanical Equipment Guards ................................................................................157

4.0 ASBESTOS AND OTHER FIBERS.................................................................................................158 4.1 Types of Asbestos .......................................................................................................158 4.2 Health Risks................................................................................................................158 4.3 Before Work Starts ...................................................................................................159 4.3.1 Air Sampling.................................................................................................159 4.3.2 Job Details ....................................................................................................159 4.3.3 Chest X-rays ................................................................................................159 4.4 Storage and Transportation......................................................................................159 4.5 Work Area...................................................................................................................160 4.6 Handling and Use........................................................................................................160 4.6.1 Wetting/Ventilation ....................................................................................160 4.6.2 Cutting ..........................................................................................................160 4.6.3 Protective Equipment..................................................................................160 4.7 Protective Clothing ....................................................................................................160 4.7.1 Types ............................................................................................................160 4.7.2 Contamination..............................................................................................161 4.7.3 Review...........................................................................................................161 4.8 Respiratory Equipment..............................................................................................161 4.8.1 Type ..............................................................................................................161 4.8.2 Use.................................................................................................................161 4.8.3 Care................................................................................................................161 4.9 Washing and Changing Facilities...........................................................................161 4.10 Disposal of Waste Asbestos Materials/Clothing..................................................162 4.11 Cleanliness of Work Areas and Equipment ..........................................................162 5.0 WELDING, CUTTING, AND BRAZING.........................................................................................163 5.1 Gas Welding: Oxy-Acetylene Equipment and Use...............................................163 5.1.1 Gases .............................................................................................................163 5.1.2 Color Coding of Cylinders .........................................................................164 5.1.3 Storage Of Cylinders..................................................................................164 5.1.4 Handling of Cylinders.................................................................................165 5.1.5 Inspecting Equipment.................................................................................166 5.1.6 Faults.............................................................................................................167 5.1.7 Fuel Gas and Oxygen Manifolds...............................................................169

February 1993 - Table Of Contents

Page 7

5.2

5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7

Electric Arc Welding.................................................................................................169 5.2.1 Voltage..........................................................................................................169 5.2.2 Welding Connections.................................................................................169 Protective Measures ..................................................................................................171 Welding and Cutting: Tanks, Vessels and Drums .............................................173 Confined Spaces..........................................................................................................173 Personnel Protection.................................................................................................173 Health Hazards ............................................................................................................174 5.7.1 Radiant Energy ............................................................................................174 5.7.2 Respiratory Effects......................................................................................174

6.0 EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS ...............................................................................................................176 7.0 PILING OPERATIONS......................................................................................................................177 7.1 Before Work Starts ...................................................................................................177 7.1.1 Cranes ...........................................................................................................178 7.1.2 Pile Gates ......................................................................................................178 7.1.3 Inspection.....................................................................................................178 7.1.4 Wedges .........................................................................................................178 7.1.5 Timber Block................................................................................................178 7.1.6 Ground Support ...........................................................................................179 7.2 Driving Piles ...............................................................................................................179 7.2.1 Pitching.........................................................................................................179 7.2.2 Driving ..........................................................................................................179 7.3 Pile Extraction.............................................................................................................179 7.4 General Precautions ..................................................................................................180 8.0 ROADWORKS ...................................................................................................................................181 8.1 General .........................................................................................................................181 8.2 Street and Road Construction, Excavations, and Maintenance Traffic Controls........................................................................................................................182 9.0 WORKING PLACES, LADDERS, AND SCAFFOLDING..........................................................183 9.1 Working Places, General .........................................................................................184 9.1.1 Falls ...............................................................................................................184 9.1.2 Access and Egress......................................................................................184 9.1.3 Lighting.........................................................................................................184 9.1.4 Prevention of Falls ......................................................................................184 9.1.5 Ramps............................................................................................................184 9.1.6 Falling Material............................................................................................185 9.1.7 Hot Surfaces.................................................................................................185 9.1.8 Slipping and Tripping.................................................................................185 9.1.9 Roof Work....................................................................................................185 9.1.10 Insecure Structures .....................................................................................185 9.1.11 Work Over Water........................................................................................186 9.2 Ladders and Stepladders ...........................................................................................186 9.2.1 Selection .......................................................................................................186 9.2.2 Condition......................................................................................................187 9.2.3 Position.........................................................................................................187 9.2.4 Use.................................................................................................................188 9.2.5 Stepladders...................................................................................................190 9.2.6 General..........................................................................................................190

February 1993 - Table Of Contents

Page 8

9.3 9.4

9.5 9.6

9.7

9.8

9.9 9.10 9.11

Scaffolding Components............................................................................................191 Requirements Common to All Scaffoldi ng ............................................................195 9.4.1 Foundations .................................................................................................195 9.4.2 Posts ..............................................................................................................195 9.4.3 Runners.........................................................................................................197 9.4.4 Bearers ..........................................................................................................197 9.4.5 Board Bearers...............................................................................................197 9.4.6 Bracing..........................................................................................................198 9.4.7 Ties ................................................................................................................198 9.4.8 Platform Units ..............................................................................................199 9.4.9 Guardrail Systems and Toeboards............................................................200 9.4.10 Access ..........................................................................................................200 9.4.11 Scaffold Ladders..........................................................................................200 9.4.11.1 Portable Straight and Extension Ladders.................................200 9.4.11.2 Vertical Ladder.............................................................................200 9.4.12 Workmanship...............................................................................................202 9.4.13 Inspections...................................................................................................202 Fabricated Tubular Frame and System Scaffolding .............................................202 Tube and Coupler Scaffolds ......................................................................................204 9.6.1 Independent Tied Scaffold ........................................................................204 9.6.2 Light Duty Tube and Coupler Scaffolds..................................................204 9.6.2.1 Design, Loading and Dimensions.............................................204 9.6.2.2 Platform.........................................................................................204 9.6.2.3 Limitations....................................................................................205 9.6.3. Medium Duty Tube and Coupler Scaffold ..............................................205 9.6.3.1 Design, Loading, and Dimensions............................................205 9.6.3.2 Platform.........................................................................................205 9.6.3.3 Limitations....................................................................................205 9.6.3.4 Bearers ..........................................................................................206 9.6.4 Heavy Duty Tube and Coupler Scaffolds ...............................................206 9.6.4.1 Design, Loading and Dimensions.............................................206 9.6.4.2 Platform.........................................................................................206 9.6.4.3 Limitations....................................................................................206 9.6.4.4 Bearers ..........................................................................................206 Free-Standing Tower Scaffolds ................................................................................207 9.7.1 General Requirements .................................................................................207 9.7.2 Design, Loading and Dimensions.............................................................207 9.7.3 Runners and Bearers...................................................................................207 9.7.4 Bracing..........................................................................................................207 9.7.5 Ties ................................................................................................................207 9.7.6 Platform.........................................................................................................208 9.7.7 Access ..........................................................................................................208 9.7.8 Limitations....................................................................................................208 Mobile Tower Scaffolds .............................................................................................208 9.8.1 Foundations .................................................................................................208 9.8.2 Operation......................................................................................................208 9.8.3 Limitations....................................................................................................209 Scaffolds for Tanks and Vessels .............................................................................209 9.9.1 Bracket Scaffolds.........................................................................................209 Special Scaffolds .........................................................................................................210 Scaffold Terminology.................................................................................................210

February 1993 - Table Of Contents

Page 9

...6.................................................................................3 Power Tools.....................................................2 Flash Point (Definition)...........................4 Personal Protective Equipment .............7 Use.................. General........ Precautions .2 Repair and Storage..................................................................10 Hand saws ...........................................................................................235 10..250 11.........2 Hammer.................3 Repair and Storage.........................................................................2..........................................................................................4.......231 10...................................................1......226 10.........................................................................................................2....................................236 10..4.................................................5 Issue and Returns ..............5 Spanners and Wrenches .............223 10..........1 Grinders.......................................225 10.........4 Fire Precautions...10..........................4.............................5...........2..........................5................4 Pneumatic Tools .............2............................224 10..............................................................236 10..................................1 General...................1 Flammability Hazards of Coating Materials...................................................3..........4...............1.........................................................2 Individual Hand Tools...............................................1 Flammable Materials ................4..........................................................................................2....................221 10............251 February 1993 .......................................................3 Saws ......225 10.......................2......................................................3 Flammable (Explosive) Limits (Definition)..............................250 11...................1....................1 Hand Tools......231 10....................................................226 10.....................224 10..........236 10...............................231 10.........224 10.......232 10......................................................................................................1.....3 Grinding Machine.250 11...................2...................237 10.9 Hacksaws.......232 10..232 10.....................................................8 Maintenance and Repair ...................2..........1 Quality.....................2 Individual Tools................2.................... Precautions..4 Radial Saws .......223 10.................224 10......................................237 10..5..........................................................................232 10...........................6...6................2 Drills .........................................................................................................................................................................6.........................1 Screwdrivers............0 HAND TOOLS AND POWER TOOLS.......6.....1....1 Quality................................................7 Pliers ........3 Chisels .........................................2................................................222 10................................................225 10..........2 Cleanliness ....................................6 Electrically Operated Tools ..............................224 10..............2........4 Individual Tools.............4 Selection .......................................................................................................3............5.6 Work Permits....................................................250 11.....................................1..223 10...............6............1 General.....................222 10............225 10..5.................2 Storage...........................2.......................Table Of Contents Page 10 ...........4....................................0 PAINTS AND COATINGS ........................................ Precautions .......................................5.....................2 Maintenance and Storage.......................................225 10...................231 10..............................223 10..............................................................................3 Selection and Training of Personnel......................................................................5....................1.........................................250 11..........................................................................................................4...................222 10................4.6.................................................................3 Personal Protective Equipment ......................................................................................................................................8 Jacks ................222 10..............................................223 10................222 10.....222 10..................................222 10.......................................6...............2 Rock Drill ...........................1......................237 11.....................................................................................224 10........234 10......... General.........................................1 Jack Hammer and Concrete Breakers..........5 Cartridge Operated Tools ........235 10.2..............4.......................1 General..............236 10..........................................................................4 Picks and Shovels ...............................5......5 Electrical Risks ...................1.....................................................................6 Pipe Wrenches...............................222 10.............

.........................4..........................4.............................................................251 11...........................................................................................................0 CONCRETE...................................4................................263 12..................2...........................................................................2 11.................263 12.............................................................4.252 11..............2...........4....5 11...........................................................5 Vertical Shoring.........8 Discharging on Slope ..6.......... AND SHORING.................................................................. Truck Spotter...............................................................................................................6.......................263 12...........259 General Safety for Paints and Coatings........................................262 12.......................................................259 12................3 Prevention of Health Hazards.................................................................6.4.........................7 11........................4.....................................251 11.........................2 Dermatitic Materials ................................................4.6.2 Tubular Welded Frame Shoring............6 Pumpcrete Systems ....262 12.........................254 11........263 12...............................................255 Personal Protective Equipment...........1 Concrete Mixers...........................................263 12......................................................................................................................................................................................7 Concrete Buckets .........................................................................................3 Hand and Power Tool Cleaning ............................259 Tarring Operations....................4...................................2 General Safety In Paint Application ...................................................................................264 12........5...............................................................................253 11........................................4.............................1 General .........1 General Provisions ........4................................................2.............262 12.............258 11.............258 Scaffolding and Ladders ......2 Vertical Slip Forms .......................................................................................9 Back-Up Man................264 12.............................263 12...........258 11..............265 12...............................................263 12...................................Table Of Contents Page 11 ....... CONCRETE FORMS.1 General Requirements .................................266 February 1993 ........1 Toxic Materials ............................................................................................3 Tube and Coupler Shoring.....................................4 Chemical Cleaning..........6..................3 Bull Floats..........................6............................................................1 Abrasive Blast Cleaning.............................................254 11.........1 Paint Materials .....................4 11.......2 Hydroblast and Steam Cleaning........8 11...................................................262 12......9 Health Hazards Associated With Paints .....................6 Forms and Shoring..............................................................262 12.2 Reinforcing Steel ...........................................................264 12..............................................2 Guardrails ......4 Powered Concrete Trowels ...............254 11....5 Concrete Buggies .................263 12.............4......................10 Pneumatic Hose.252 Surface Preparation....................................................265 12...............262 12................................4..4 Concrete Placement......259 12...3 11..................256 Paint Application ...255 11..........................................................................6 11...............................................4 Single Post Shores ..........................4........3 Bulk Concrete Handling .........11...5 General Safety in Surface Preparation.........................................................................................................................................252 Ventilation in Confined Spaces...263 12...4.....................262 12..............................................................................................................5......................................

..................................11 Rigger.........................................................................................2 Repairs .III..........................................................279 2...................................................275 2...............................................278 2......................... Loaders And Miniloaders ............................................................................279 2.........8 Spreader Bars ...........290 3..................3 Wire Rope Slings................................................................11 Woodworking Machinery...........7 Excavators .............................................................................................2..................................................................................... Chain Slings..........................3 Saudi Aramco Crane Operator Qualifications ..281 2..287 3....................296 4.........................................................................4 Special Crane Operating Procedures ..............267 1........................................................1 Qualifications...2 Licensing Requirements .......................................2...............................1 Competent Person .............................6 Overhead Power Lines.....280 2.......................................................9 Eyebolts And Safety Hoist Rings ..........276 2...........................................................................................................................2..............300 4................................................4...................................295 3.....................................1..................................0 MATERIALS HANDLING...........2 Tractors and Trailers........................2 Machinery Guards ...........2 Saudi Aramco Crane Operations (General Requirements).................................................276 2....................................... Scrapers..........3 Site Stores ............................................................................................................................................................2............................1 Removal from Service ........................ Safe Working Load (SWL)..................................1...........................2......................................................289 3.................................................2 Machine Transport....................................................................5 Effect of Wind Speeds on Crane Operations .........................276 2..............299 4.........1 Planning ....4 Compressors ..................................................................................................269 1.........10 Graders.............................277 2.....276 2..................280 2..299 4.....................................6 Dumpers and Dump Trucks .....................................................1 Grades .................................................288 3....................1 Operators ..............4 Concrete Pumps.............................................................................................................................................1 Multi-Piece Tire Rims and Locking Rings ..........................................................281 3..............................................................................277 2............288 3..................................................................................................Table Of Contents Page 12 ..........270 2................................................................................. Mechanical Equipment And Materials............................................................................................................298 4.........................................7 Hooks.............................8 Fork Lift Trucks .........0 SLINGS AND LIFTING GEAR (RIGGING)..........................300 February 1993 ..270 1.................................................270 1............................................3 Conveyor Belts and Monorails ........................................6 Care of Slings .....3 General Requirements .......................................0 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT....................293 3..............................2...................................................................292 3...........294 3..........................................269 1...5 Concrete Mixers and Batching Plants .................................289 3.......................298 4.................................2.................................................275 2.....................................................................................................2 Repaired Slings.....................................................................................................................288 3...........................................10 Shackles..270 1......................................................................289 3...........................300 4........................................0 CRANES AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT......................................291 3........................................1............2............................................................................5 Synthetic and Natural Fiber Rope Slings .............300 4........................................277 2............ Dozers.....296 3....4 Synthetic Webbing Slings..............9 Generators ..........................4........................................................................................................................1 Dumpers......268 1.........................................................

............................4..4 Manual Handling .............Table Of Contents Page 13 .....301 February 1993 ...........................................................

.........5 Overhead and Underground Cables.....................................................................9.......309 1...........................6.......2 Time....................................................5 Attaching the Load........6...........0 ELECTRICITY.....................................................................................................314 1.....3 Mechanized Equipment................9........322 2...6.................2 De-energizing Lines and Equipment....................................................306 1...........12.......3 Storage........312 1..3 Grounding Distance...6...2 Temporary Installations .313 1......................................312 1.326 2....................................................317 1..........6.............6.............................2 Applying and Removing Grounds....6..............................................3 Shielding....1 Metal Tower Construction....................................7 Electric Shock..........................................6............314 1..............................6..............9..................................313 1.......................6....................1 Isolation and Voltage Testing.............2...........................6 Grounding Cables And Clamps....6.....................6 Overhead Power Transmission and Distribution............................6.............1 Initial Inspections...................................................4 Work on Live Equipment.........5 Grounding Electrode.....313 1...............320 1..........................................................................313 1.10..........................................................9.................................12.............314 1....................................1 Methods of Protection Against Radiation .............................313 1.......................6.....................................310 1...........................4 Framing ..8................................311 1................................1......3 Stringing Adjacent to Energized Lines ........321 1....1......................8............................6...........................8 Material Handling...............320 1........................9................6.......1 Barricades and Barriers............................................8.......................................................................................................... Electrical And Radiation ..............................325 2........................................................................................................1 Unloading................................325 2..........314 1...311 1...............4 Night Work........307 1.......2 Trenching and Excavating ................313 1.......................................11.....................................6.........................307 1...4 Removal of Grounds for Testing Purposes .318 1................3 Hand Tools and Lighting .................6...................................................6....... or Determinations....................6....5 Work Near/Over Water....12...................315 1.................6 Hydraulic Fluids ....................4 Substation Fences................................................321 1...............................IV.1 Voltage.................................. Tests........313 1.......................10..319 1....9...12 Construction in Energized Substations ....6...11 Underground Lines ...........................................321 1.....2 Stringing/Remo ving De-energized Conductors..........................................10...................................................11...................314 1................1.321 1.7 Live-Line Tools (Hot Sticks)..6.........................6..............2.........312 1..........................................10 Overhead Lines.321 1.....8.........9 Grounding for Protection of Workers ....2 Classification of Personnel and Exposure Limits ................................0 IONIZING RADIATION ..................2 Control Panels ...........12...............................................................................312 1..........6......6......................................6...........................6..............6..........................................6..................314 1..............325 2.................................1 Work in Manholes .............314 1......326 February 1993 ..................................................314 1.........................................................................................................................................................................8.......326 2.............2 Non-Radiation Workers ..................................315 1...........325 2............6......................................................................6.................................1 Distance....Table Of Contents Page 14 .....................................................305 1.......................1 Radiation Workers ..3 Emergency Procedures and First Aid.............................6........................................2 Pole Hauling............326 2...................................................................................6...............................................308 1.....

.............................................. Radiographer..........328 February 1993 .......................................4 2.........327 2................................3....3 2....3 Exposure Limits...............................................................................................2...........327 2...........................3......328 Storage Areas ...................327 Shipping and Transportation.....................1 Contractor...327 2...................................................................................3........................3.........................................................2 Competent Person...............................................5 2........................................Table Of Contents Page 15 ..............326 Responsibilities for Safe Handling ...............................2..................................

........................2..................................349 4............343 3......................... Storage and Disposal .........................................1...............................................338 2...........................2 Skin Hazards........................................................................................................................................................0 CHEMICALS .................................................................330 1........336 2...................331 1..................................2..............1.......349 4...3 Handling of Cylinders........................... Chemicals And Operations ................................................................................................................................347 4..339 2...................................................................................................344 4...........................................4 Valves....................................................................0 PLANT OPERATIONS..........2 Supports .......................................................332 1...................................................................................3 Hazards of Swallowing Chemicals ........................................................................................342 3......8 Bulk Installations..............................................................333 1.....1...........349 4..............................338 2.......................................................5 Commissioning ..........343 3...................................................7 Action in Case of Fire.................................................338 2............348 4.....................................................................348 4.............................................................340 3................335 1...1 Hazard Identification System................................................1 General ...............................................................3........................................................................6 Operation .......................1.6 Emergency Procedures: Saudi Aramco Disaster Plan ................................343 3.....................................................341 3.........339 2............................1 SAES-A-004 (Pressure Testing)...............................................................................................................1..............................2 Health Hazards ..........................3 Refinery Instruction Manual.............5 Reactivity Hazards .........1.....................................................V.............2.........................................................................................................1 Gas Release Emergency Procedures.........................3..................................................1 Inhalation Pathway Hazard ...................................................................................................................4 Shutdown and Maintenance in Plant Operations.............................................1 Artificial Respiration.........332 1.......................................6........3 Emergency Treatment ................................5 Pipings And Joints ..........1 Preparation....2 First Aid ...........................................................................338 2..........................................................................0 LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GASES.........................336 1..Table Of Contents Page 16 ..........349 4........................6 Vacuums ..........................................................337 2...................................3 Test Liquid...........................1........................................3..............338 2.............3 Vents and Drains..................2 Work Permit System...4 Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards .............................3 Operation of Plant Equipment ..........................................334 1................................................................349 4................6 Transportation....339 2......................1...........................................................................................................................................4 Fire Hazards ...............................................................342 3....................................351 4........343 3................334 1...................331 1.................9 First Aid...................................................337 2...2 Storage .......351 February 1993 .......................................2 General Requirements ......................................................1.........................................................................................................................338 2...................................2 Producing Instruction Manual...342 3............................................................................................346 4..............................................................3 Showers and Eyewash Fountains...5 Transportation ......1...............0 PRESSURE TESTING....................................................................................349 4..............................................................................................................................4 Leakage......................................................343 3.............1 General Instruction Manual.......................................351 4...............1 Additional Information On Saudi Aramco Instructions and Standards ..............................

............................................................................6.............355 February 1993 ....2 Storage...............................354 4...6.......6..................................................................................4.............Table Of Contents Page 17 ....................................6..............................................................................................................................................3 Containers ........................352 4...................1 Introduction .......................1 Transportation...................7............7 4..................................................352 Work on Equipment Which Has Contained Tetraethyl Lead (Organic Lead Compounds)....7.................351 4......................352 4...........................................2 Precautions.........................................4 Disposal.354 4..................

....................................365 2.....................................369 3.........3 Construction................5 Inspection............4.............................................................................................................................................2 Before Work Starts .......................370 3..........................................................................................................................375 3.............................................................................5 Medical Diving Emergencies: Procedures and Responsibilities....................4 Diving Medical Team.............367 3..................................0 MARINE OPERATIONS ........................................6 Leaks .......................................367 3..........................................1 Employment of Qualified Divers ............2 Reserve Air Supply ........................4 Maintenance ....................7 Housekeeping.....................................5....................................................................................................5 Tide and Sea Effects .............................................................................................................5.........................................................................368 3.......................................................365 3......................................................364 2...........................................................................................................369 3...........................363 2.......................362 2...............................................364 2...............................VI.....0 DIVING OPERATIONS .........2 Diving Equipment.375 3...........................3 Behavior on Floating Craft .............................................................1 Structural Collapse..............................................................360 1...............361 1............................................................ Marine..........................2.....4...........2..................................................................................................................................5...2.2 Overhead Loads .....................1 Compressors ..........................374 3.........................................................361 1.................0 COFFERDAMS ...........364 2.....................................360 1..........................................................................................................................375 3....................................361 1.................................................359 1........................3 Safeguards ..................................................................................1 Sports Divers ...............375 3...........................363 2.............................................................................................................3 Bail-Out Equipment.................4 Physical Fitness..............................................................369 3........................360 1. Diving Emergencies ..............360 1......1 Other Publications ....5...............................................................................5........................6 Care of Tools and Equipment................................................................................Table Of Contents Page 18 .................................4 Preparation for Transportation by Sea..........368 3...............375 3.........376 3...........................................361 1......................................365 2.................376 February 1993 ...........361 1........................................................2............................................3 Coordinator.............................2 General ...............................................2 Commercial Divers........................6 Personnel Transfer at Sea........4 Potential Hazards ...........................................................3 Dis lodgment of Struts and Wales......................................1 Design.5 Marine Department ........................4..............................................................................................................................

.................................Table Of Contents Page 19 ..............................................................................................................................387 2........................ Injury And Damage Reporting ....382 A..........................................379 11..............................388 7.......... Cartridge Operated Tools .............. Sandblasting ... RULES OF COMPETITION ...............390 17........................................................................................ Saudi Aramco Plant Operations ...2 CONTRACTOR SAFETY COMPETITION............................................................. Explosives ...................381 A...............391 23.......................................................395 I.................. Ionizing Radiation ............................................... Transportation .....................391 25..................................................................................................................................................................................................... Scaffolding .......................396 February 1993 ..............................389 14.........389 16....................... Mechanical Equipment................ Work Permits .........................387 5...............................................395 IV.............................................................................................. Hazard Classification ........388 6.................................................... Conduct Hazards Identification Review.............................................................................................................................. Welding And Cutting Equipment...... List Potential Hazards............................................391 24.......395 III.391 22......388 8................................................. Transportation And Disposal Of Hazardous Materials And Waste ....................... First-Aid Facilities .......................389 12......................... Tools And Portable Power Tools............392 26............................................................................................ Deviations From Safety Rules ...................................................................................379 INDEX TO APPENDIX A...........388 10....................................... Electrical Installations And Equipment............... Cranes And Rigging Equipment............393 27..............................Appendix A................. Handling..............................................................395 II................................................................................................................ Corrective Action......................................Schedule 'D' ...................................... Excavations..................................................................................................389 13........................................ Failure To Comply................... Compliance With Safety Rules ......................... Ladders .................387 4........ Formwork...............................................................380 A.......................................................................................................... Health and Environmental Requirements .389 15................................................................................................................................................................. Personal Protective Equipment................................ Saudi Aramco Assistance............................. Loss Prevention Program................................3 Saudi Aramco Safety...................................................................388 9........................................................................................................................................................................391 20........................................ ..............................................390 19................................. Work Over Or Adjacent To Water....................................................1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY COMPETITION SITE REGISTRATION FORM.....390 18..........393 A............................. Fire Prevention ............................387 3.........................394 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION PLAN:....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................391 21....387 1..........4 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION PLAN (HIP) ........................................

....................................................................Appendix B: Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response ............................398 B.................3 Plan Development Action Items .......2 EMERGENCY/DISASTER PLANNING AND RESPONSE...............................................407 February 1993 ..............399 B.................400 B........2 Definitions ...........................................................Table Of Contents Page 20 .............................................................401 B............1 General Provisions............................................................401 B.....2.........................2........1 SEARCH AND RESCUE PROCEDURES.2...........................

...................Appendix C: Fire Safety Checklist For Evaluating Construction Materials Store Yard.............Table Of Contents Page 21 ..............1 Fire Safety Checklist For Evaluating Construction Materials Store Yard.................427 C........428 February 1993 ..............

...Table Of Contents Page 22 ................Appendix D: Saudi Aramco Crane Safety Handbook ............................433 February 1993 ...........1 Crane Safety Handbook ..........................................432 D............................................

...........................Appendix E: Suggestion Form .................434 February 1993 ..Table Of Contents Page 23 ................

.....Appendix F: Distribution Form.......Table Of Contents Page 24 ................436 February 1993 .................................

.........438 Implementing The Saudi Aramco Sanitary Code .......006..............................................GI 151...........Appendix G: Sanitary Code ...............................439 February 1993 ........Table Of Contents Page 25 ..............

.......................440 General Instructions (GI) Master Index..............................Appendix H: General Instructions Master Index .....Table Of Contents Page 26 ......................................................441 February 1993 ..................

........Appendix I: List Of Figures ......................445 List Of Figures ..........................Table Of Contents Page 27 .......................................................................446 February 1993 ..............................................................................

....................................................Table Of Contents Page 28 ...........449 List Of Tables.............................................Appendix J: List Of Tables ........................................................450 February 1993 .............................................

..............................................................459 Project Management And Contractor's Safety Competition Site Registration Form..........................................453 Contractor Monthly Safety Report..................................................................................................455 Lift Plan For Cranes .....................460 February 1993 ...................454 Injury Summary.........Table Of Contents Page 29 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................451 Preliminary Accident Report.................................................................................................................457 Cartridge/Tool Issuance Control .....................................................................................458 Emergency Reporting Instructions....................................................456 Wire Rope Sling Inspection Log .......................................................................................................................................Appendix K: Forms .........................

Administration February 1993 . Administration Page 30 .Construction Safety Manual: I.I.

1.) which cannot be eliminated. Reviews for compliance with this policy will be performed on a selective basis.1. Saudi Aramco will provide and maintain a safe and healthful work environment and protect the public against foreseeable hazards resulting from operations. operation and maintenance of facilities and equipment and construction as practiced by Saudi Aramco and/or contractors. When conformity with any of these requirements is not practicable or cost effective.1 Loss Prevention Policy Implementation 1. When conformity with any of these requirements is impractical or not cost effective. February 1993 .. operation.1. All management functions.Construction Safety Manual: Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Policy And Program Page 31 . 1. a waiver will be sought from the Chief Engineer.1 Compliance With Construction Requirements The application of the best petroleum industry loss control practices minimizes risk to personnel and property. maintenance and construction of facilities and/or equipment. H2S. radiation. Loss in production and property resulting from accidental occurrences can be minimized through good management. which is as essential and equally important as production objectives.2 Operating Standards and Instructions Risks that cannot be eliminated through design are controlled by operating standards and instructions. including business line and associated management. periodic environmental monitoring and biosurveillance will be used to help to protect all employees against exposure to safety and health hazards (e. etc. The design. will comply with Saudi Arab Government and Company loss prevention requirements applicable to the design. 1. 1. will meet Saudi Arab Government and Saudi Aramco safety requirements as covered in this manual and in relevant General Instructions.1. Compliance with safety standards and instructions will be consistently enforced for both Saudi Aramco operations personnel and contractors alike.0 SAUDI ARAMCO LOSS PREVENTION POLICY AND PROGRAM Saudi Aramco is committed to prevention of accidents to minimize loss of life or bodily injury to its employees and damage to its physical assets. modification.3 Personal Protection Personal protective equipment. Loss prevention is one aspect of this loss control philosophy and is the direct responsibility of line management. construction.1.4 Inspection Inspections to detect and correct unsafe practices and conditions will be conducted periodically by Saudi Aramco and/or contractor. In fulfilling this commitment. including the Company's E ngineering Standards. an amendment to such a requirement will be considered.g. 1.

9 Contractor Safety Saudi Aramco proponent departments will monitor all construction activity to ensure that services are performed in conformity with Saudi Aramco loss prevention policies.11 Traffic Safety Operators of Company vehicles must receive defensive driving training and driver evaluations and be in possession of a current Saudi Arab government driver's license.1.7 Job Placement Employees must only be assigned tasks that are consistent with their physical capacities and job skills. 1. 1.1. seat belt use) shall be vigorously practiced to provide the means for all employees to protect themselves and their families from harm during off-duty hours.1. A vehicle operator will be held accountable for the vehicle assigned to him and he must ensure that it is always operated in a safe and lawful manner.1.1.1. principles and practices and do not imperil any person or property. supervise and manage assigned tasks without mishap. 1.3.1.5 Education and Training All employees shall be provided with ongoing safety education and training as well as helping to develop those skills that are required to perform. and the adoption of corrective actions to avoid a recurrence.10 Off-The-Job Safety Off-the-job safety training (e. These should include measures to contain or control an emergency or disaster when an accident occurs to minimize the loss of resources.1.0 Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Policy And Program Page 32 . February 1993 . A. Proponents will register each contractor employing 50 or more persons in the Saudi Aramco Contractor Safety Competition. 1. this enable employees to work without endangering themselves or others. encourages employee participation in loss prevention programs.) 1. a reporting and investigation system to determine the cause of the accident.g.1.8 Response to Accidental Occurrences Site specific effective emergency response plans must be established as per the guidelines of Appendix B. a viable suggestion system and the recognition of good safety performance. (See Appendix A .Figures A.2 of this manual.2 and A.1.6 Motivation and Recognition Good communications. 1.

Such notices when delivered to the contractor's representative at the site of the work shall be deemed sufficient notice to the contractor under Schedule 'D'. 1. In order to ensure the credibility and effectiveness of the review.0 Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Policy And Program Page 33 . additional costs or damages. the contractor shall immediately take corrective action. 1.12 Accountability All employees shall be held accountable for personal and functional safety performance.2 Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Requirements For Contractors Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention requirements for contractors are contained in Schedule 'D' of contracts (See Appendix A . An important factor in an employee's overall job performance evaluation will be how well the employee meets his safety responsibilities. February 1993 . The company representative will assist the contractor's representative by providing guidance on good safety practices. 1.2 Assistance The contractor may request advice on establishing feasible and effective safety practices for the job. Any deviation from the requirements of Schedule 'D' must be signed in writing by the Company representative. and applying his experience and judgment in helping to improve the contractor's overall job safety.Figure A. Compliance with the provisions of Schedule 'D' by subcontractors shall be the responsibility of the contractor. The contractor shall also take any additional measures which the Company representative may determine to be reasonable and necessary to protect against the injury (or death) of any person. or damage (or loss) of any property during the contractor's performance of the work under the contract.1.1.1.2. The safe practices specified in Schedule 'D' shall be followed by all contractors during the performance of all work under each contract with Saudi Aramco. the team members must be detached from the operation being reviewed. After receipt of such notice. pointing out unsafe conditions. in writing. The contractor will not be eligible to use any part of the lost time incurred as a result of such stop orders as the subject of a claim for extension of time. compliance reviews will be conducted by teams that include people with related expertise to determine compliance with this policy.13 Compliance Reviews On a selective basis.1 Non-Compliance The Company representative will notify the contractor. the company representative may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. If the contractor fails to take corrective action promptly.4). 1.1.2. of any violation of the requirements of Schedule 'D' and provide corrective action to rectify the situation. The requirements in Schedule 'D' are the minimum acceptable to Saudi Aramco.

18. 19. 2.I. 28. The term.1 Written Program Prior to the commencement of contractual activity. 1. 25. 4.0 Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Policy And Program Page 34 . the contractor shall request that Saudi Aramco specify the standard of work or equipment required. 27.2. 1.3 Contractor's Loss Prevention Program The contractor shall develop and implement a loss prevention program that will conform with Saudi Aramco loss prevention policies and procedures. 3. the contractor shall submit a written job-specific loss prevention program to the Saudi Aramco company representative.3 Standards and Instructions All work and equipment must conform to Saudi Aramco Standards and General Instructions. 23. The Contractor's written loss prevention program shall address the following: 1. Title page (B. The latter is required to forward a copy of the program to the Loss Prevention Department. 9. 26. 17. 20. 5.O. 8. 22. Where no standard or instruction is available to cover a particular item.3. 14. 7. 11. 16. 10. 6. 24. 21.1. 13. "Approved Standards" in Schedule 'D' refers to standards which are approved by Saudi Aramco. 15.) Project title and brief scope of work Organization chart Vicinity map and key plan Hazard identification plan Traffic plan Safety polity and assignment of responsibilities • Prime and sub contractors Desert driving • Search and rescue procedures Safety inspections Safety reports and records Contractor camp sanitation and safety Work permit Welding and cutting equipment Personal protective equipment Tools and portable power tools Ladders Cartridge operated tools Electrical installation and equipment Scaffolding Cranes and rigging equipment Mechanical equipment Transportation Saudi Aramco plant operations Injury and damage reporting Excavation Fire prevention Form work First-aid facilities • Medical evacuation procedures February 1993 .1./J. 12.

) 1. 33. (See Appendix A . 39. 35.3. Once this has been completed. 30.3. 37.1. Prior to the start of construction. 40. 32.4 Safety Discussion The contractor shall ensure that every craft and crew supervisor holds a weekly ten-minute safety meeting with his men to discuss hazards on the job.3 and A. 34.29. the contractor will prepare and submit a Hazard Identification Plan. 1. The names and addresses of the Saudi Aramco approved safety supervisors shall be included with the written program. 36. the contractor shall develop a detailed Hazard Identification Plan based on the initial hazard identification data supplied by Saudi Aramco Project Management Team.3 Safety Supervisor The contractor shall designate one or more full-time safety supervisor(s) to coordinate and monitor the loss prevention program. the contractor shall conduct a hazard identification tour with the Company representative and the Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention representative.2 Dust control Job site inspections General safety rules Emergency evacuation procedures Hazardous material and waste management Security procedures Ionizing radiation Demobilization plan Work over or adjacent to water Explosives Abrasive blasting & painting/coating Lock out and tag system Hazard Identification Plan As part of the Contractor Loss Prevention Program. February 1993 .0 Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Policy And Program Page 35 . 38.3. 1.Figures A. These weekly meetings shall be documented and such documentation shall be maintained and made available for review at the Contractor's on-site office. 31.4. and review and update procedures to prevent accidents.

US. position papers and standards.6 Directing in-depth program reviews of area operations involving procedures and facilities with follow-up on implementation of recommendations resulting from these reviews. 2.1 Directing the review of new plant design in the assigned area of operation to ensure conformity of facilities to loss prevention engineering standards.1. 2. and local area management.1.1.2. 2. Support Services Unit and a Planning and Program Group.1.1.1 Loss Prevention Program Loss Prevention superintendents ensure that a range of loss prevention engineering services are provided to organizations within their assigned areas through such activities as: 2.3 Managing major safety reviews and incident investigations with Saudi Arab Government officials. 2.Construction Safety Manual: Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department Services Page 36 . The area divisions are in turn provided support from the central Planning and Technical Services Division consisting of Technical Services Unit.5 Serving on special committees and task forces such as the Radiation Protection Committee. 2.0 SAUDI ARAMCO LOSS PREVENTION DEPARTMENT SERVICES A full complement of loss prevention services is provided by the area Loss Prevention divisions.4 Administering safety-related training programs for local area operations management and personnel in an effort to enhance the safety awareness of operations personnel and proper acceptance of responsibilities. Companies. and providing personnel to develop or assist in the development of General Instructions.2 Providing input to the Board of Engineers in the development of Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards. February 1993 .1. 2.

interpreting and reporting accident statistical data.2.2.2.2.7 Serving on special accident investigation committees.5 Initiating and administering safety management training.2 Program Management Services Superintendents and their subordinates provide department heads with program management services such as: 2.6 Coordinating response to government concerns about fire and safety issues.2 Monitoring and evaluating loss prevention systems through the Compliance Review Program.7 Interfacing with Government Affairs to provide input on safety related is sues to non-Saudi Aramco projects and providing monitoring of these projects to assure conformity.2. 2. and providing consultative services in their implementation.2.4 Analyzing. 2. principles and practices.0 Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department Services Page 37 . February 1993 .2. 2. recommending revisions to Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards. and developing new hazard control standards as required.2. 2.2. 2. waiver and other technical consulting services. ensuring consistency with Company and business line policies.1 Assisting with the development of formal loss prevention programs. 2.1. 2.3 Providing project review.

conducting accident investigations and recommending corrective measures.7 Advising on proper selection and use of personal protective equipment and evaluating its effectiveness.3.3.3. 2.1 Providing technical interpretation of standards.2.3. operations and other risks (or hazards) and recommending solutions.3 Program Maintenance Services Superintendents and their subordinates provide program maintenance services such as: 2. principles and practices.2. 2.3 Identifying and assessing processes. 2.3. and consulting services in their application from a loss prevention standpoint. 2.8 Monitoring and providing input on other activities as required to ensure proper response to accidental occurrences.0 Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department Services Page 38 .6 Acting as Saudi Aramco's representative to the Saudi Arab Government on local safety issues.3.4 Initiating and administering supervisory and highly specialized safety training beyond the capability of operating management or training specialists. February 1993 . 2.3. program and procedural surveys and inspections.5 Administering work permit and certain other safe work procedures.2 Conducting loss prevention policy. 2. 2. procedures. including the development of containment and mitigation methods for liquid chemical spills or vapor releases.3.

A thorough investigation and analysis of an accident can help to prevent future accidents.003 Notification Requirements for Incidents (Including Fires) Guide for Committees Investigating Major Incidents or Engineering Reviews of Other Incidents Reporting and Recording Of Motor Vehicle Accidents Lifting/Elevating and Mobile Equipment Accident Reporting Procedures GI 6. With such a system operational. In addition.001 GI 6. in any amount. ANALYSIS AND REPORTING Much is learned through experience. serious injury to two or more Contractor employees. Analysis And Reporting Page 39 . means that a system for the retrieval of information must be set up and statistical records must be kept of injury.1). Saudi Aramco may convene an engineering review or investigation committee in accordance with the requirements of GI 6. February 1993 .000 to contractor's plant or equipment Damage.003 (see Figure I.0 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION. to Saudi Aramco's equipment or property Fires Damage and near misses to cranes and heavy equipment (GI 7.3. To learn by experience. information can be collated and analyzed to show accident patterns.1 Reports Required by Saudi Aramco Reports are required by Saudi Aramco as per Schedule 'D' of the contract. The contractor can then emphasize those areas in which safety education and training is needed most. Contractor shall ensure that an immediate report is made to the Company Representative in the case of all: • • • • • • Fatal injuries Injuries requiring medical attention which result in lost time Damage over SR 10. however. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 6. death and property damage.Construction Safety Manual: Accident Investigation.026 3. The contractor is responsible for reporting accidents to Saudi Aramco and in some cases to the Saudi Arab Government as required.026) For accidents involving Contractor employee fatalities.001 and GI 6. a preliminary written report shall be submitted within 24 hours followed by a detailed written report submitted within three days to the Company Representative. This section covers these reporting requirements and the principles behind accident investigation and analysis.029 GI 7. or damage to Saudi Aramco equipment or property.

3. In the case of serious accidents. A final report on the incident shall be submitted within three days detailing any additional information and corrective action needed. however. February 1993 . The main reasons for conducting an accident investigation are: 1. witnesses' statements and descriptive photographs are required. The preliminary accident report must be completed and submitted within 24 hours to the Saudi Aramco Company representative with a copy to the Loss Prevention Department. 3. Monthly summary reports are required in addition to the individual reports.1.) A final written report shall be prepared and submitted to the Company as per the provisions of GI 6.000 Motor vehicle accident Incidents involving damage to Saudi Aramco equipment and property Damage and near misses to cranes and heavy equipment (GI 7. to determine facts rather than to find faults. (See Figure I.2.003.2 Project Manager The project manager shall review all accident reports to ensure that all the necessary corrective action has been taken and that he has addressed any items that may require action on his part. Analysis And Reporting Page 40 . To determine the point at which "unplanned" events took over from the "planned" sequence of events.Contractor shall maintain. A copy of this record shall be sent to the proponent department and to the contractor's project management.2 Accident Investigation The point of an accident investigation is to prevent recurrence of similar accidents. In addition to the reports required above. in a format approved by the Company Representative. 3. To recommend what corrective action should be taken.2. Responsibilities for Investigation 3.3.1 Supervisor/Safety Representative The supervisor and/or safety representative shall carry out an immediate investigation of any accident which occurs within his area of responsibility.1 To find the causes so that similar accidents may be prevented.2. 3.2.0 Accident Investigation.026) The record shall be available for inspection at all times and shall be submitted to Saudi Aramco on request. the contractor must keep a record of all injuries and damages on a form approved by the Company (Figure I.1. a current record showing all: • • • • • • Work injuries Fires Incidents of property damage over SR 10. a detailed account of the circumstances. 2.2).

4 Accident Investigation Guidelines The scene of an accident must be left undisturbed until Government Affairs. Recommending items of corrective action and methods of implementing them to prevent the recurrence of the incident. However precautions shall be taken to keep the accident scene intact as much as is possible. but not be limited to the following: 1. Analysis And Reporting Page 41 . establishing the reason why the "unplanned" events took over from those that were "planned".5.0 Accident Investigation. Questioning the witnesses separately as to what they actually saw. The near-miss incident is equally important from the point of view of prevention and should also be thoroughly investigated. In turn. 3. Unless the real cause is known. 8. 2. Studying the equipment or plant layout and noting any signs of misuse. 3.3 Cases to be Investigated Incidents that result in property damage or serious injuries to personnel and hospitalization of two or more employees must be fully investigated and reported. 7. the hazard cannot be controlled in the future. this helps the Loss Prevention Department (Saudi Aramco) evaluate their safety program and modify or upgrade it as needed. to assist local police in their investigation. Finding the explanation of any irregularities. 6. 9. Every contractor should go through the following classifications and their breakdowns to determine which of these (if any) apply to the incidents in which they were involved. These records help to illustrate accident trends. This information is supplemental to the findings and reporting requirements of the preceding "Accident Investigation" sections. Questioning the injured man as soon as possible.5 Accident Analysis 3. 4. From the information obtained. Questioning the man in charge and finding out what was planned. Making a scaled drawing of the accident scene and supplement that with supporting photographs. February 1993 . Finding out the injured man's job or the normal configuration and function of the damaged equipment or plant. the Loss Prevention Department and the safety supervisor have conducted their investigation.3. In some cases the accident site must be rendered safe so as not to contribute to further accidents. Industrial Security.3. The investigation should include.1 Classification Contractors can use nine main classifications to analyze industrial accidents. 3. 5. not what they think happened.

Falls (Of Persons from Heights) To the ground or another level From scaffolding From ladders Into holes. Struck by Objects Falling objects Foreign bodies in eyes Flying objects February 1993 . Striking Against Objects Protruding nails Scaffold tubes and fittings Stepping or kneeling on objects 8. Transportation Road Site 2. etc. Lifting Appliances Cranes Hoists and winches Pull-lifts. Handling Objects From lifting From pulling or pushing Handling materials Electric shock 3. trenches. Piling frames A-frames Excavations 9. Falls (Of Persons on the Level) To the ground Against objects 5. Hazardous Atmospheres Hydrogen Sulfide Others 4. pulleys.3. Equipment Moving Parts Equipment in motion Hot surfaces 6. Analysis And Reporting Page 42 . Into water 1a. etc. Hand Tools Cartridge hammers Power tools Non-power tools 7. wheels.The nine classifications with their individual breakdowns are: 1.0 Accident Investigation.

1: PRELIMINARY ACCIDENT REPORT Detailed Report Required Within 3 Days Accident Location: Company: Date Of Accident: Personnel Injured: Control No_________________ Time Of Accident: Badge Number: Type Of Injuries: Property Damage And Estimated Cost Damage: Description Of Accident: Witness Statement(s) What Caused The Accident: What Corrective Action Has Been Taken Signed:_______________________________________________________Badge No:________________________ Date Of Report:________________________________________________ Name (Printed):_____________________________________________________________________ Company:__________________________________________ Job Title:_________________________________ February 1993 .FIGURE I.0 Accident Investigation. Analysis And Reporting Page 43 .3.

0 Accident Investigation. Incidents Or Property Damage (Over SR 10. 5. 3.2: CONTRACTOR MONTHLY S AFETY REPORT PROJECT TITLE:________________________________ LOCATION:_________________________________ CONTRACTOR:________________________________________________________________________________ BUDGET ITEM No:. Analysis And Reporting Page 44 . Work Injuries: 2. Motor Vehicle Accidents: 5. 2._________________________________ CONTRACT No. Fires: 3.3.:________________JOB No:_______ 1. Incidents Involving Damage To Saudi Aramco Equipment: 6.FIGURE I. Crane. Safety Meeting: (A) Topics Discussed: 1.000): 4. (B) Attendance: (C) Instructor(s): Prepared By:_____________________________ Contractor Safety Officer:________________________________ Signed By:__________________________________ Saudi Aramco Representative:____________________________ Date:___________________________ February 1993 . 4. Heavy Equipment & Manlift Accidents: 7.

3. Ensure that a formal Hazard Identification Plan is prepared in order to identify and correct hazards which may be encountered during construction. Know the requirements of Schedule 'D' and the relevant parts of Saudi Arab Government Workmen's Regulations. 9. Coordinate safety activities between Saudi Aramco.) 6. February 1993 . damage and fire. 7. 8. Reprimand any supervisor for failing to discharge satisfactorily the responsibility allocated to him. at planning stages and throughout the contract. 4. Make sure that in tendering. (See Appendix A. Legal and contractual requirements affecting safety.2 Design Engineer Design for safety. and be aware that their safety record will be taken into account during performance appraisals. Ways to improve existing work methods. Initiate analysis to discover accident trends and promote action to prevent recurrence. allowance is made for suitable and sufficient equipment to enable the jobs to be done with minimum risk. property damage and fire loss. 5. Provision and use of protective clothing and equipment. subcontractors and any other individual contractors who may be working on the same site.3 Contractor's Safety Officer 1. Changes in safety requirements. The main responsibilities of various members of a construction team are cited in the following: 4. Advise management on the following: • • • • • • Ways to prevent injury to personnel. and ensure they are observed by his company. All employees should satisfactorily discharge the responsibilities of their job.4. Set a personal example.0 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR SAFETY The Saudi Aramco proponent must ensure the company's safety and accident prevention policies are clearly understood by all employees and contractor personnel. Institute proper system for investigation. Potential hazards on site before work starts and on the safety organization and fire precautions required. taking into consideration those risks that might arise during construction or in the operation of plant or equipment.1 Contractor Senior Management 1.4. Administer the policy himself or appoint a senior member of staff to do so. The duties and responsibilities of employees. and management must be stated in writing by the company's management. supervisors. 4. 4. 2. damage to plant and/or equipment and fires. reporting and estimating the cost of injury. health and welfare. Follow established process hazard analysis techniques to evaluate and correct hazards during the design process.Construction Safety Manual: Responsibilities For Safety Page 45 . 10. Initiate the company's policy for the control of injury. Ensure that all supervisors are qualified and that they receive adequate and appropriate training.

and indicate precautions to be adopted. Circulate information applicable to each level of employees. 8. Allocation of responsibilities for Saudi Aramco.4. Create safety awareness by promoting safety meetings. access. 8. Facilities for welfare. Determine the following at the planning stage: • • • • • • • 5.2. open forum discussions and by implementing safety training. Storage areas. 3. Attend job progress meetings where safety is an item on the agenda. 4. Carry out site surveys to see that only safe work methods are in operation. 3. 4. Ensure that tenders adequately allow for sound working methods and reasonable welfare facilities. Assess accident trends and review overall safety performance. 2.0 Responsibilities For Safety Page 46 . Keep up-to-date with recommended codes of practice and safety literature. outline potential hazards at each stage. Report on job safety performance. Assist with training employees at all levels. Understand the company's safety policy and the responsibility allocated to each grade of supervision. Supervise the recording and analysis of information on injuries. sub-contractors. Check over work methods and precautions with supervision before work starts. Know the requirements of Schedule 'D' and relevant Saudi Arab Government Workmen's Regulations. and other contractors. first aid and sanitation. Basic precautions for dealing with fire hazards. February 1993 . Determine the cause of any accident (or dangerous occurrence). damage and production loss. Set a personal example on site by wearing appropriate protective clothing and equipment at all times. The most appropriate order and method of performing the job.4. 9. 7. Take part in discussions on injury.4 Construction Manager/Superintende nt 1. etc. 6. and recommend means of preventing recurrence of such an incident. and welfare and first aid facilities are adequate and properly maintained. damage and loss control. 9. 5. Provide written instructions to establish work methods. presentations. 4. 6. Work permit procedures and requirements. that health and safety requirements are being observed. Any hazards identified under the hazard identification procedure described in Appendix A. 7. Ensure that all accidents are reported to Saudi Aramco in accordance with Section 3. explain the sequence of operations. and ensure that they are observed. Foster within the company an understanding that injury prevention and damage control are an integral part of business and operational efficiency.

11. 4. They should also know how to summon assistance in case of emergency and nominate others to act in your absence. 2.5 Site Safety Supervisor (If different from contractor's safety officer) 1. 4. Plan and provide for good housekeeping. 6. 7 8.8 Foreman 1. Inspect the work site daily to report and correct unsafe methods and conditions. Check that equipment and tools (both power and hand tools) are maintained in good operating condition. 5. used and maintained correctly. 5. is guarded and equipped with safety devices and has been subjected to all necessary tests.4. 4.4. Be familiar with work permit procedures. 3. 4. property damage and crane/heavy equipment accidents which have occurred at the site. Keep a permanent record of all injuries. Coordinate with sub-contractors and other contractors on site to avoid any confusion about areas of responsibility. Make sure that suitable personal protective equipment is available and that it is used. fires. 2. 13. Set a personal example. Organize sites so that work is carried out to the required standard with minimum risk to men. 14. 12. inspections and maintenance are carried out when due. 4. Release supervisors and men when necessary for safety and fire training. 9. Keep a record of every weekly safety meeting on site complete with subject discussed and a list of attendees. 3. equipment and materials. 2. Make sure that all men know how to obtain and administer first aid properly and efficiently to all injured persons. Position equipment effectively and ensure that electricity supply is installed. Be familiar with those parts of Schedule 'D' applicable to the work on which subordinate workers are engaged. Cooperate with the safety engineer and the fire department. motor vehicle accidents (MVAs).0 Responsibilities For Safety Page 47 . Incorporate safety procedures in routine tasks and see that they are obeyed. Give precise instructions on responsibilities for correct work methods. Know the requirements of Schedule 'D'. 4. 2.6 Equipment Manager/Supervisor 1. February 1993 . Understand the requirements of Schedule 'D' and the company's loss prevention policy. Set a personal example.7 Engineer/Supervisor 1. Conduct weekly safety meetings with subordinates. Make certain that operators and attendants are employed only on equipment for which they have been thoroughly trained. Check that periodic tests. Attend promptly to all equipment defects and advise site management of the need for any dangerous equipment to be taken out of service until properly repaired. 3. 3. by acting on their recommendations. Ensure that all equipment purchased or hired is safe.

4. 5. 5. by action or initiative. 8. eliminate hazards. February 1993 .9 Worker 1. 3. 4.4. Report accidents. near misses or hazardous conditions to immediate supervisor. 2. such as horseplay or the taking of unnecessary risks. Document and coordinate the safety inspection activities and findings with the job site safety supervisor. 9. Use the correct tools and equipment for the job. 4. Report any accidents. . Conduct daily work site inspections to identify and correct any existing unsafe conditions. Keep tools in good condition. Read the Company safety rules and take note of special safety precautions in restricted areas. Use protective clothing and equipment provided. 6. Ensure that new employees are properly instructed in precautions to be taken before they are allowed to start work. 7. equipment and welfare facilities. Refrain from horseplay and abuse of safety devices. Correct unsafe acts. 7.0 Responsibilities For Safety Page 48 . Do nothing to endanger self or work mates. unsafe conditions and defects in equipment to immediate superiors. 6. Commend men who. Obey all posted warning signs. Set a personal example.

Details of the written procedures may be obtained from the Saudi Aramco representative.5. 5. All equipment is shut down. 5. All men are evacuated to a pre-determined assembly point. All work is stopped at once. 2. These telephone numbers are to be kept current and posted at the job-site. terminal instruction manuals (TIMs). fire. critical damage to operating equipment. 2. department operating instruction manuals (OIMs).3.2 Contact After Office Hours The contractor's supervisor shall give his home address and telephone number (and that of his replacement) to the company representative so that he may be contacted after hours in case of emergency involving the contractor's job or equipment. Refer to the specific procedures established in each Company operating area. All managers and supervisors are exp ected to become familiar with the emergency procedures of the plants and areas in which any of their staff are working. October 1989 5.Emergency Procedures Page 49 .Construction Safety . General guidelines for preparing emergency response plans can be found in the following Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department publication: Guidelines For Preparing Emergency Response Plans. etc. By radio: Radio an operations group that has a telephone in the Saudi Aramco system and ask them to dial 110 when the Main Gate or Security Control Center cannot be contacted directly. or loss prevention engineer. 3. etc.1 Action to be Taken In an emergency.3 Help in an Emergency 5. February 1993 . By telephone: Dial the emergency telephone number 110. every supervisor shall ensure the following: 1. 4. operating supervisor. A roll call is taken and every man is accounted for. or on hearing the "Stop Work Alarm".1 In the event of an emergency situation (serious personal injury. and refinery instruction manuals (RIMs). 5.) help may be obtained by contacting the nearest Saudi Aramco Main Gate or Security Control Center. This may be done: 1.0 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES Saudi Aramco departments and organizations have established disaster and emergency response plans that are documented in general instructions (GIs). Construction site-specific written emergency procedures shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted as part of the Contractor's loss prevention program plan. No one is permitted to return to work until notification has been received from operations or from the company representative that it is safe to do so.

radio. ensure that you clearly identify yourself by giving: • • • • • Your exact location Nature of emergency Service required and repeat the message Your name Your badge number Stay on the telephone until you are told to hang up. post a lookout to direct the ambulance. By messenger: Send a messenger to the nearest telephone. If possible.3.3. radio. fire truck or helicopter to the right location.2 When transmitting a message by telephone. or messenger.5. or Saudi Aramco Main Gate or Security Control Center. 5. February 1993 .0 Emergency Procedures Page 50 .

2 The course for supervisors should include legal requirements.1.3.2 Specialized Training Before their training is complete.6. company and administrative policies and safety aspects of the work likely to be undertaken by the supervisors.2.1.1 Safety Training for Supervisors 6. 6.1 Integrated Practices Safe working practices must be integrated into training for specific skills. Contractor's must provide safety orientation and training for new employees. Health and Environmental Requirements . 6. Measures can then be taken to prevent a recurrence.Safety Training Page 51 . It is expected that those who have attended recognized training establishments will have received the necessary safety instructions.2.3. People who are trained to do their jobs correctly can also be expected to do them safely.2 Safety Training for Workmen Accident prevention training for workmen should incorporate the items listed in 6. Safe working practices are learned when employees understand how an accident was caused.2. It should also cover the main requirements of the February 1993 .Loss Prevention Program 6.0 SAFETY TRAINING Good safety training is important to employees who are learning a new trade but it is also necessary to keep supervisors and skilled operators up-to-date with current safety technology and practices.1 of this section. An outline of such a course is given in 6. Induction training should teach new workers to identify common on-site hazards and how to guard against them. but because accident prevention and production control are closely associated supervisory functions. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety. The most direct way to develop the desired attitudes and to impart the necessary information about safety to supervisors is to give them safety training.Construction Safety Manual . new employees and new entrants to industry are more susceptible to accidents. 6. 6.1 The immediate job of preventing accidents falls upon the supervisor not because it has been arbitrarily assigned to him.

February 1993 .6. but they are no substitute for organized training.3 Use of Persuasion The training providing skill and information should be supplemented by the techniques of persuasion. 6. Posters can stimulate thought on accident prevention.g.. It is commonly applied by the use of posters which graphically indicate bad habits.2. then this should be made clear and they should be told how and where to obtain them).4 Course Requirements An induction safety course for workmen should be aimed at specific hazards which they could encounter at a specific job site. 6.. ladder hazards in ladder storeroom). They are displayed where workmen spend some time when not working and specific posters are displayed where most appropriate (e.2. Persuasion has an important function and should not be overlooked in any comprehensive program. Only a few posters are displayed simultaneously. or instruction on special safety points to remember. The most effective posters are those that help to reinforce safety training.2. A suggested outline of such a course is given in 6. however. if it is company policy that safety helmets and protective footwear should always be worn. Site supervision. pin-point the advantages of a safe working environment and give detailed information.g.0 Safety Training Page 52 . must ensure that correct job methods are being utilized and workmen are periodically reminded to be aware of hazards in the work place. They are mounted on properly designed and maintained bulletin boards. advice.company's accident prevention policy and instruct newcomers specifically in those areas which affect them personally (e. Posters can be useful provided that: • • • • • They are designed with due regard for the industry and its type of operation.3. Suitable induction courses together with job training containing an integrated safety content will go a long way towards achieving safe working conditions. They are changed at frequent intervals.

3. but also impresses upon them the high value that the employer places on job safety. (See 6.6. A limited training effort.3 Scope of Training Safety training needs to be ongoing if it is to accomplish optimum results. may prompt supervisors to do a better job for a short time. Good job safety instruction not only produces more skilled workers. The program material and presentation should cover the safety subject and be interesting enough to hold the trainee's attention.1.) February 1993 .0 Safety Training Page 53 .6. Frequent follow-ups and attention by the supervisor to correct work practices also help to create understanding and to eliminate resentment. which is a source of some undesirable work attitudes. but interest starts to lag unless an effective safety training program is in place. such as an occasional safety meeting.

Human Behavior Motivating agencies Individual behavior Environmental effects Techniques of persuasion 1.6. Personal Protective Equipment Eye. Safety and the Supervisor Safety and efficient production go together Accidents affect morale and public relations and 5. Site Inspection The role of management Hazard Identification Procedure Records results Follow-up procedures Feedback 7. Health Medical examination Hazard to health on site Sanitation and welfare Protective clothing First Aid/CPR 10. objectives 4. The Law and Safety Statutory requirement Appropriate regulations Duties of employer and employee Schedule 'D' (Contractual Safety Requirements) 3.6. Principles of Accident Prevention Attitudes of management. Electricity Appreciation of electrical hazards Power tools Arc welding Low voltage system Lighting and power system on sites Grounding/Ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCIs) 11. face. feet and legs Respiratory protective equipment Protection against ionizing radiation 8. Oxygen and Acetylene Equipment Cylinder storage and maintenance Condition and maintenance of valves. supervision operations Methods of achieving safe operations Accident and injury causes 6.1 Safety Training Topics For Supervisors 2. Site Tidiness Site organization Relationship of site housekeeping to accident occurrence Site access Equipment storage Material stacking Materials handling 9. aims. hands. regulators.3.0 Safety Training Page 54 . and gauges Condition and maintenance of hoses and fittings Pressures 12. Policy and Administration Effect of incentive on accident prevention Human relations Consultation Safety Officer: duties. Equipment Accidents related to moving parts of machinery Appreciation of principles of guarding Importance of regular maintenance February 1993 .

and Scaffolding Hazards connected with the use of ladders Maintenance and inspection Type of scaffold Overloading Work on roofs Fragile material Openings in walls and floors 14. Lifting Tackle Slings . Transportation Transport to and from site Hazard connected with site transport Competent drivers Dumpers Tipping trucks Movement near excavations 15. Fire Prevention and Control Principle causes determining fire Understanding fire chemistry Fire fighting equipment Fire fighting training 19.0 Safety Training Page 55 . Working Places. Excavations Method of shoring Precautions while shoring Precautions at edge of excavations Removal of shoring Sheet steel piling Use of safety belts and nets 17.13. Cranes and other Lifting Machines Licensing.single and multi-legged Safe working loads (SWLs) Safety hooks and eyebolts Cause of failure Maintenance and examination 16. Communications Effective methods of communication (particular interest to non-English speaking workers) Method and preparation of reports Safety committees Safety meeting February 1993 . Ladders. certification and training required for operation of cranes Slinging methods Signaling Access to crane(s) Maintenance and examination Ground conditions Hazards and accident prevention methods connected with the use of different types of cranes/heavy equipment Crane Lift Plan for all lifts 18.6.

Personal Protective Equipment • • • What is available How to obtain it Correct use and care 4.6. Health • • • Site welfare facilities Potential health hazards First Aid/CPR 5. Precautions Against the Above Hazards • 3.2 Induction Safety Topics For Workmen 1.6. Simple precautions that can be taken by workmen on site. Hazard Identification Procedure Hazards on site: • Machinery • Transport • Flammables on site (hydrocarbon) • Fire • Falls • Electricity • Site housekeeping • Handling materials 2. Employee's Duties • • Brief outline of responsibilities of employee under law Explanation of how new employees fit into the Company's plan for accident prevention.3. February 1993 . Duties of the Company • • • • Brief outline of the responsibilities of the Company by law Details of Company's accident prevention policy Saudi Aramco Safety and Loss Prevention Requirements For Contractors (Schedule 'D') Saudi Arab Labor Law 6.0 Safety Training Page 56 .

so that the contractor will be able to eliminate or reduce accidents. scaffolding and work in restricted areas requiring work permits. but it does provide a detailed logical process to serve as a guide in deciding upon a plan of action. Health and Environmental Requirements (See Appendix A) National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 80-A Protection of Buildings from Exterior Fire Exposures NFPA 231 .Appendix 'C' Protection of Outdoor Storage 7. an analysis is made by the contractor to ensure that construction will be conducted in a safe manner. Illumination Requirements Portable. both at the planning stage and throughout the contract. Reinstatement And Traffic Controls Lighting.000 SAES -P-123 SAES -B-007C Appendix C: Street And Road Closure And Excavations.1.Construction Safety Manual: Site Planning And Housekeeping Page 57 . Similarly.0 SITE PLANNING AND HOUSEKEEPING This section outlines the procedure to be followed prior to and during a contract. transportation. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco Standards: GI 1021. accident prevention is analyzed. 7. lifting equipment. Accident prevention is a real factor in the economic success of all contracts.1 Initial Planning Prior to the start of any contract. February 1993 . Mobile and Auxiliary Fire-Fighting Equipment Typical Construction Materials Store Yard.7. Among other factors that must be considered at the initial planning stage are: results of a Hazard Identification Plan. protection of employees and equipment. It cannot claim to cover every type of contract that is likely to occur.1 Hazard Identification Plan The contractor shall conduct a Hazard Identification tour with the Company and Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention representatives to identify potential hazards prior to construction start-up. excavation. Fire Safety Checklist for Evaluating Construction Materials Store Yard Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety. loss prevention program.

7.1.2

Loss Prevention Program A loss prevention program required in Schedule 'D' for specific job-related activities part of proposed construction work will be developed and coordinated by the contractor's safety supervisor. Part of this program will be a ten-minute safety discussion with the workmen, at least once a week, on the hazards at the site and the procedures to be followed to prevent personal injury and minimize property damage.

7.1.3

Protection of Employees and Equipment Schedule 'D' details the requirements to be followed by the contractor to reduce losses. It places the responsibility for the protection of men and equipment on the contractor and outlines general minimum acceptable standards.

7.1.4

Transportation The contractor must provide transportation to and from the site for his employees. Saudi Aramco requires that employees must be transported only in the passenger compartment of vehicles. (See Section I.13.) The provision of buses for larger sites will have to be considered. Inspection and maintenance of vehicles and the selection and training of drivers are other major considerations.

7.1.5

Lifting Equipment Cranes, hoists and lifting equipment should be considered well ahead of actual requirements both from the point of view of economical use and the safety of personnel and equipment. Lift plans shall be submitted as required. (See Section III.1 and III.2.)

7.1.6

Demolition Some contracts in existing plant areas may require demolition before new work can begin. Only minor demolition should be done by construction personnel. Specialist contractors should be employed for the demolition of larger structures. (See Section II.3.)

7.1.7

Excavations Timber for shoring, steel sheet piles, etc. should be present on site prior to starting excavation work. All excavation work will be closely supervised by experienced staff. (See Section II.2.)

7.1.8

Scaffolding For all work carried out above ground level where no permanent work place is available, temporary work places in the form of scaffolding must be provided. An adequate supply of scaffold material must be on site. There must be sufficient experienced men capable of erecting and dismantling the scaffolding properly. Ladders, built to an acceptable standard, must be supplied and readily available for access to elevated work areas. (See Section II.9.)

February 1993 - 7.0 Site Planning And Housekeeping

Page 58

7.2

Site Layout
The site layout must be planned before any work is started. This will assist in making the job easier and more efficient, thus increasing productivity and profit. Items to be considered under site layout include the following: 7.2.1 Site Accommodation This includes shacks, storage huts, compounds, racking areas, lock-up boxes, office buildings, etc. 7.2.2 Adequate Access Roads To be kept clear and unobstructed at all times. 7.2.3 Project Sign Erect project sign at the main entrance to the construction site and other sites, i.e., office, laydown yard, fabrication yard, etc., as designated by the Company representative. The sign shall be a minimum of four feet in height, and eight feet in width. The printing on the sign shall be black and white and shall be in both Arabic and English. The Arabic text will be above, or to the right of the English text. The sign shall list: • • • • • PROJECT MANAGEMENT ORGANIZATION PROJECT TITLE BUDGET ITEM NUMBER (BI NO.) PRIME CONTRACTOR NAME, ADDRESS, AND TELEPHONE NUMBER HOUR EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBERS FOR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE AND CONTRACTOR

The sign shall be erected within two weeks after the contractor has started work on site. Contractor shall also erect and maintain sufficient signs on or near the site to direct delivery vehicles and visitors to the work site. Example of Job Site Sign: SAUDI ARAMCO/CENTRAL AREA PROJECTS SAUDI ARAMCO BUILT GOVERNMENT SCHOOLS BOYS SECONDARY - DAMMAM BI (2510) (ERC. 1990) CONTRACTOR: NAME PO. BOX LOCATION TELEPHONE NUMBER SAUDI ARAMCO REPRESENTATIVE TEL. - OFFICE/TEL. - HOME

February 1993 - 7.0 Site Planning And Housekeeping

Page 59

7.2.4

Safe Means of Access and Egress To be provided on site wherever employees are likely to go; these must be kept clear and unobstructed at all times.

7.2.5

Parking Facilities To be provided in clearly defined areas on site.

7.2.6

Drainage The site should have good drainage and be graded in such a way that water does not pool up during construction.

7.2.7

Vehicle / Heavy Equipment Paths On Site Vs Pedestrian Paths Pathways for workmen must be clearly marked and distinct from vehicular travel routes on site.

7.2.8

Sand In sand dune areas that might lie adjacent to or around a construction site, consideration should be given to the movement or build up of sand.

7.2.9

Fire Prevention Suitable fire extinguishers must be readily available on site. The area around fire extinguishers or hydrants must be kept clear so that they are readily accessible in case of emergency. They must be regularly inspected and maintained. Site personnel must be trained in the use of fire fighting equipment. (See Section I.11).

7.2.10

Site Illumination Adequate lighting must be provided in all areas of the job site in accordance with SAES-P-123. The National Electric Code a National Fire Protection Association standards nd should be consulted for specific areas. Grounding requirements will be per NFPA. In hazardous areas (e.g., tank farms and indoor fuel areas), NFPA 30, 37, 58 and 70 will be enforced.

7.3

Storage Areas
Note: See Appendix C. Fire Protection Checklist for Evaluating Construction Materials Store Yard; and Figure III.13 (Typical Construction Materials Store Yard). 7.3.1 Storage areas must be adequate for all material and equipment to be stored.

February 1993 - 7.0 Site Planning And Housekeeping

Page 60

7.3.2 They should not be within 15 meters (50 feet) of permanent or temporary structures. 7.3.3 Storage areas should be clearly marked. 7.3.4 They should have directional signs to facilitate speedy delivery.

7.4

Welfare Facilities
Adequate welfare facilities must be provided. The following are minimum requirements: 7.4.1 Canteen or eating area adequate for total work force must be provided. This area shall be clean of refuse and meet Saudi Aramco Sanitary Code requirements. 7.4.2 Rest area must be provided. 7.4.3 Adequate toilet and washing facilities must be provided. Toilets shall be provided in places where they may be easily accessible at the rate of one toilet for every fifteen workmen or less. These shall be maintained in a sanitary condition. 7.4.4 An adequate supply of drinking water must be available. Common drinking cups or dips are prohibited. 7.4.5 First aid facilities must be supplied and arrangements made for medical care and for emergency situations. 7.4.6 Where necessary, safe smoking areas m be provided, with the concurrence of ust the responsible area Loss Prevention office.

7.5

Good Housekeeping
The required standard of housekeeping must be established on site and all personnel informed of this standard. Trash, debris and refuse should be collected daily. All employees shall clean their respective work areas daily before quitting.

February 1993 - 7.0 Site Planning And Housekeeping

Page 61

Covered containers, drums, etc., should be provided at various, clearly marked locations throughout the work site. The containers should be emptied daily at approved rubbish dumps.

7.6

Construction Sites and Materials Storage Yards
(See Appendix C) 7.6.1 The contractor's engineer shall establish the perimeter of the site by agreement with the proponent department. He may consult the Loss Prevention Department for assistance. 7.6.2 The perimeter fence for construction sites and materials storage yards shall be properly grounded and of sound construction and design appropriate for the intended protection of the area. The Saudi Aramco Industrial Security organization should be consulted for details. 7.6.3 The fence shall be frequently inspected by a representative of the contractor's engineer. 7.6.4 Any access paths through the proposed site shall be rerouted outside the perimeter. Loss Prevention Department is to be consulted on any such rerouting. 7.6.5 Where a fence crosses existing roads, red and white, blue and white, or black and reflective yellow (or white) flags shall be fastened to the fence. If access is blocked, a dead-end sign will be erected on the approach to the fence with the distance of the obstruction marked below the sign. However, if there is a temporary by-pass, a "DIVERSION AHEAD" sign shall be erected on the approach to the fence and diversion arrows showing the route shall be displayed on the fence in black and yellow (or white) reflective material. 7.6.6 A suitable number of soundly constructed access gates shall be provided. The number of access gates will be kept to a minimum on main thoroughfares (See NFPA 231 Appendix 'C'). A minimum of two fifteen-foot wide gates are required. 7.6.7 Standard Saudi Arab Government stop signs will be fixed to the inside of the vehicle access gates.

February 1993 - 7.0 Site Planning And Housekeeping

Page 62

7.6.8 Temporary signs should be erected to route traffic in the safest manner to, from, and within the site. Temporary signs shall not be placed on public highways and roads (reference Saudi Arab Government traffic regulations). 7.6.9 While not in use all power driven construction equipment must have the ignition locked and key removed. If there is no lock for the cab and access can be readily made into the engine compartment, then the machine must be made immobile by disconnecting the battery or by any other means especially if the equipment is left outside the perimeter. This must be carried out before leaving the equipment unattended. 7.6.10 Crane booms, bulldozer blades, and front end loader buckets on all construction equipment should be lowered when the equipment is left overnight. For a crane boom where this is not possible, the boom will be locked off in such a manner that it cannot be dropped or blown over by the wind. 7.6.11 Job site electrical power must be de-energized at night unless required for specific lighting facilities or used by a night watchman. 7.6.12 The project will provide its own barricades. Barricades will only be supplied by the area Industrial Security Departments on a short term emergency basis. 7.6.13 Any excavation or obstruction of any kind likely to create a hazard to vehicular traffic at night will be adequately lit and a sign posted. (See GI 1021.000.) 7.6.14 If large pools of water are formed which cannot be adequately drained, these shall be separately fenced or barricaded if they constitute a safety hazard.

February 1993 - 7.0 Site Planning And Housekeeping

Page 63

7.6.15 There shall be no indiscriminate dumping of excavation spoil or building materials. Fire hydrants, manholes and electrical conduits will be kept clear at all times. The contractor's engineer shall designate sites for dumping. 7.6.16 All manhole covers will be replaced or the manhole properly barricaded. 7.6.17 Guy ropes will be clearly marked day and night as will any rope used as a barricade. 7.6.18 Refuse must be disposed of at a job site approved for such purposes and the contractor must have permission to use the site. Approved disposal sites can be those of Saudi Aramco or local municipalities. It is forbidden for contractors to dump refuse in any unauthorized area. 7.6.19 Clock stations can be requested from Industrial Security provided sufficient notice is given to ensure their availability. 7.6.20 The Saudi Aramco Project Representative shall notify the Loss Prevention Department representative and also the area Industrial Security Department about the time and place for the pre-construction meeting and also the first weekly site meeting which these departments should plan to attend. 7.6.21 It is the responsibility of the Company representative to initiate road closure requirements on work activity to ensure that all construction/maintenance adheres to the conditions of GI 1021.000 (See Appendix D) and that a notice of intent is placed in the company "Highlights and Notices" publication before work start-up.

February 1993 - 7.0 Site Planning And Housekeeping

Page 64

8.0

FIRST AID

First aid is the immediate help that is provided at the site to an injured or seriously ill person before professional medical help can be obtained. It is the responsibility of all contractors to ensure that proper first aid is available to their employees on all job sites. Provisions shall be made prior to start-up of the project for prompt medical attention in case of medical emergencies. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 1321.015 GI 150.002 Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety, Health and Environmental Requirements Injury and Damage Reporting First Aid Facilities Request for Air Medical Evacuation First Aid / CPR Training and First Aid Kits - Remote Areas

8.1

Provision of First Aid Facilities
Every contractor shall provide first aid facilities on all sites for his employees. The first aid facility shall be kept in a sanitary condition at all times. Minimum requirements shall include the following: a telephone; desk; hot and cold water; wash basin; examining table; air conditioning; adequate lighting; and dust tight medical supply cabinet. 8.1.1 First aid supplies shall be kept readily available in a cabinet designated for those supplies only. (See 8.3 for a recommended list of cabinet contents.) 8.1.2 This cabinet shall be placed under the charge of a first aid attendant, who shall ensure the cabinet is well stocked at all times. 8.1.3 A suitable type of stretcher must be available on all sites.

February 1993 - Construction Safety Manual - First Aid

Page 65

8.1.4 Contractors shall post notices indicating the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 8.1.5 Contractors on pipeline and power line work or who are working in remote areas shall ensure that one vehicle is equipped with a well-stocked first aid kit for each crew, and that at least one man in every crew is trained in first aid. The vehicle shall be marked to indicate that it carries a first aid kit. (See GI 150.002. First Aid Training and First Aid Kits - Remote Areas.) 8.1.6 A site register shall be maintained by all contractors listing all injuries treated. (See Figure I.3 Example.) The name of the person who is in charge of the first aid cabinet. The hospital to which any injured person who requires hospital treatment is to be sent. The telephone number of the doctor or first aid attendant employed by the contractor. The emergency telephone number to be called for assistance.

8.2

First Aid Attendants
8.2.1 When more than 50 persons are emp loyed within a radius of 15 kilometers, first aid facilities run by a nurse familiar with first aid cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) requirements and exclusively assigned to medical duties. 8.2.2 Those persons in charge of first aid supplies on smaller sites with less than 50 workers should be trained in first aid procedures. 8.2.3 The contractor shall provide, or make arrangements to provide, a dedicated emergency vehicle (ambulance), properly supplied and marked, to transport injured personnel to the nearest designated health care facility. Each ambulance shall be equipped, as a minimum, with the following supplies: • • • • • Stretcher and blankets Portable oxygen Splints for bone fractures Bandages/rubber tourniquet Sterile wash water

February 1993 - 8.0 First Aid

Page 66

16. 12. 9. A sufficient number of not less than 6 sterile medium-size hand dressings. 4.015 and shall be incorporated in the Contractor's Loss Prevention Program plan. A sufficient number of not less than 12 gauze bandages 11 cm. a wooden palm splint. Not less than 4 yards of adhesive tape in rolls. 1 cm.2. A medium-sized Thomas' thigh splint.4 Medical Evacuation Capabilities Saudi Aramco has the ability to provide air medical evacuations (Medevac) for both onshore and offshore medical emergencies with helicopters or fixed wing aircraft. A sufficient number of not less than 12 gauze bandages 7 cm. 14. 6. 3. 8. a wooden posterior leg splint. February 1993 . Ointment for burns containing a disinfectant and an analgesic. or who holds a certificate from a hospital attesting that he has practiced first-aid and is qualified to administer it. Article II The employer shall assign one or more persons to be responsible for administering first aid to the injured at all times during working hours. a wooden elbow splint. medicines. A sufficient number of not less than 12 sterile. 17. A minimum of ten 70 x 70 bandages for burns. small-size finger dressings. Such supply shall not be less than 200 grams of cotton wool in small 25-gram packages and two 500-gram packages. A sufficient number of not less than 6 sterile large-size hand dressings. 1974) Decision No. in width. a wooden Carr splint for the forearm. A minimum of safety pins. 7. A minimum of 6 triangle bandages. a separate cabinet shall be provided for every group consisting of more than ten workmen. 11. No. in width. Not less than 100 grams of Mercurochrome in aqueous solution. If work is carried out in scattered locations which are more than 300 meters apart. 5. 2534 July 26.0 First Aid Page 67 .8. 10. 2. The procedures to initiate a Medevac are covered in GI 1321. A sufficient number of stretchers for moving injured persons.8. 8. 100 grams of aromatic ammonia solution in a glass bottle with a glass stopper. 404 Based on Articles 245 of Labor Law Article I An employer who employs less than fifty workmen shall provide at the work site a first aid cabinet containing bandages. A sufficient supply of absorbent cotton wool for packing and firming up splints.3 First Aid Facilities At Work Site (Originally Published in Umm al-Qura. 15. in width. Two 10-gram shakers of sulfa powder for sterilization of wounds. provided that the person-in-charge shall be one of the establishment's employees who will either be trained in first-aid procedures in accordance with a program to be agreed upon with the Saudi Red Crescent Society. 13. A pair of scissors with blunt ends. and disinfectants as follows: 1. and other types of ready-to-use splints.

Signs shall be posted in conspicuous places at the various work sites to indicate the location of the cabinet and the name of the workmen in charge of first aid. Article V The first aid cabinet shall be of hard wood or sheet metal. Article VII The Director General of the Department of Labor Inspection shall be charged with implementing this decision. measuring 85 cm. provided that they are in proportion to the number of workmen. A licensed nurse shall be on duty at all times during working hours under the supervision of a physician. The cabinets shall bear the Red Crescent insignia and the words "First Aid Cabinet". February 1993 . in depth. Where quick means of transporting for the injured are not available. They shall be painted white and shall be provided with one lock and more than one key. It shall be conveniently located and readily accessible to injured persons and stretcher-bearers. All first aid cabinets shall be conveniently located in clean place above floor level and shall always be ready for use and easily accessible at all times. and 30 cm. An adequate number of stretchers shall be available for moving the injured to the first aid room. Article VI An employer who employs less than fifty workmen shall assign an appropriate number of his workmen to receive first aid training in accordance with Article II. First aid materials and supplies shall be no less than those specified under Article I.8.Article III An employer who employs 50 or more laborers shall provide at the work site a first aid room which meets the following standards: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) It shall meet all sanitary specifications. to stipulate special first aid procedures to implement the above articles. in width. in length. to determine the placing (if he deems it necessary) of first aid cabinets for any group comprising less than ten workmen. the said room shall not be more than 300 meters from the farthest work site.0 First Aid Page 68 . Article IV Supplies of any item in the first aid cabinets and rooms shall be replenished whenever they fall below the levels specified herein. and to fix the number of stretchers and the number of workmen to be trained. He is authorized to increase the contents of the first aid cabinets or rooms in those industries and trades requiring such an increase. 45 cm.

If in the cases mentioned above. if the number of workmen is less than fifty. and of the names of the hospitals which he has designated for that purpose. The costs of treatment. as well as in cases of incurable diseases. and the employer shall provide them with the medicines necessary for their treatment. Article 135 Every employer who employs more than fifty workmen shall inform the appropriate Labor Office of the name of the physician who he has selected to treat his workmen. as well as the party who will assume such costs. provide them with all other means of treatment in cases requiring treatment by specialists. or within a radius of fifteen kilometers. If the number of his workmen in a single location or town. medicines and hospitalizations in government or charitable hospitals. and the periods of his absence from work. February 1993 . In case he employs more than an hundred workmen.8. he must notify the appropriate Labor Office of the minimum number of days fixed for the examination of workmen. the employer shall. shall be determined pursuant to the decision to be made by the Minister of Labor in agreement with the Minister of Health. he shall employ a nurse who shall be familiar with first-aid services and shall be exclusively assigned to rendering such services. or to the rules laid down in the Social Insurance Law. a description of the cases of his illness.0 First Aid Page 69 . he shall inform the Office of the names of the physicians and specialists whom he has selected to treat his workmen. the employer shall assign a physician to examine and treat the workmen at the place to be provided by the employer for this purpose. In both cases. or performance of surgical other operations.8. In case operations are performed. the employer must provide the workmen with a medical aid cabinet which shall be maintained in a good condition and shall contain the bandages. the expenses shall be taken from the Social Insurance Funds. The aforementioned services shall be free of charge whether during work hours or otherwise. and antiseptics to be determined by the Minister of Labor in agreement with the Minister of Health.4 Labor And Workmen Law Saudi Labor And Workmen Law Chapter 7 Protection An Social Services Labor And Workmen Law Articles 134-6 Article 134 The employer shall provide first-aid services for the workmen in accordance with the standards to be determined by the Minister of Labor in collaboration with the Minister of Health. the stages of his treatment. in order to provide the workmen with first aid. Article 136 Every employer shall prepare for each workman a medical file showing the result of the medical examination performed on the workman upon his employment. medicines. exceeds fifty. in addition. the number of workmen exceeds a hundred. provided that this minimum shall not be less than three times a week. provided that mention shall be made in the file of the kinds of ordinary and occupational diseases and labor injuries. However.

FIGURE I.:_________________________ Injury No. How. Where.3: INJURY S UMMARY Injury Summary (Page ___of___) Project:__________________________________Proje ct No. Name Of Injured Badge Numbe r Craft Date Of Accident Carry Over Yes/No Days Lost This Month Nature O f Injury And Part Of Body Affected Brief Description Of Accident State What.First Aid Page 70 . Why Total Lost Time Injuries This Month: Total Days Lost: Total Man-hours Worked This Month: Report Prepared By:________________________________ Signature:_________________________________ Title And Telephone:__________________________________________________________________ February 1993 .:________________________Month & Year:____________________ Contractor:__________________________________File No.

steps should be taken to eliminate the hazard by engineering controls.Fire Prevention Page 71 . Health and Environmental Requirements OSHA: Code Of Federal Regulations 1910. in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufacturer and Saudi Aramco.002 GI 8.020 GI 7.1-86 Personnel Protection .) INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 6.003 GI 8. Should it prove impractical to eliminate the hazard. (See Table I.9. then personal protective equipment must be used that meets the requirements of ANSI or equivalent standards.1-89 Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection ANSI Z 89. 1915 and 1926 ASTM D120.Protective Headgear For Industrial Workers .0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT When a hazardous situation is recognized.Construction Safety Manual .E1 -87 Standard Specifications For Rubber Insulating Gloves ANSI Z 41-83 Personnel Protection .027 GI 8.1. When it has been decided that personal protective equipment is required.Requirements February 1993 . On Or Near Water Personnel Work Platform Operations Prescription Safety Glasses Breathing Apparatus Protective (Safety) Footwear Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards: SAES -A-105 SAES -H-102 Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety.005 Personal Flotation Devices For Work Over. steps must be taken to select the proper type of equipment and ensure that the supervisor instructs his employees in the use and care of that equipment.Protective Footwear Noise Safety Requirements For Painting ANSI Z 87.

are prohibited from all Saudi Aramco work areas. Each helmet consists of a shell. flying particles. and used with regard to both the type of hazard and the optical condition of February 1993 . can be obtained to fit on helmet shells. They must be selected.1. The type of protection selected will depend on the hazard. shall be protected by protective helmets as per ANSI referenced standards or equivalent. 9.1. 9. electric shock. Helmets should be scrapped following any penetration. from falling or flying objects. or whenever there are overhead hazards.5 The complete helmet should be cleaned regularly with soap and water.3 Ancillary equipment such as ear muffs. etc. a suspension cradle. 9. therefore.9. or subjection to extreme heat.1. 9. fitted.2 Eye and Face Protection Protection of the eyes and face from injury by physical or chemical agents or light radiation. welders shields. 9.1.2 The suspension cradle gives a helmet its impact distribution qualities. or from electrical shock and burns. high impact.6 A safety helmet should be worn by all persons at all times when on a construction job site.4 Safety hats or helmets shall not be painted. Metal hard hats do not afford proper impact or electrical protection and.1.1.11. but it should be borne in mind that all eye protection and most face protection devices must be considered as optical instruments. and a chin strap.1 Head Protection Safety hats or helmets are rigid headgear made of materials designed to protect the head from impact. It is therefore essential that it be properly adjusted to the wearer's head so there is a gap of at least one and a half inches between the top of the suspension cradle and the helmet shell. 9. Holes should not be drilled into helmet to facilitate use of such equipment as this can seriously impair both the mechanical strength and the electrical resistance of the helmet.0 Fire Prevention Page 72 . is of prime importance in an industrial environment. 9.1 Employees working in areas where there is danger of head injury from impact. etc. in an operating plant area.

9. Separate rigid plastic eyecups with lens. Chipping goggles. Chemical goggles. and other abuses to which the footwear may be subjected. so safety footwear must fit properly. 2. Where required. etc. February 1993 . they afford limited protection against side impact and should not be worn while driving if they interfere with peripheral vision.2. with special soles to resist oil. A flexible frame surrounding the lens gives protection against flying objects. safety spectacles and chemical goggles shall be worn under the face shield. A rigid plastic frame surrounding the lens and a separate cushioned fitting surface on the facing contact area gives protection against flying objects. 4. abrasion. When fitted with side shields. (See Figure I. Visible and non-visible bands of the light spectrum can produce harmful effects upon the eyes and special attention must be paid to the selection of eye protection from these hazards. 9.3 Face Protection Face shields protect the face and neck from flying particles.9 and I. and hot solutions.0 Fire Prevention Page 73 . 3. Four basic types of protection are: 1.4 Foot Protection Foot protection used must be manufactured to the referenced ANSI standard Z41-83 (or its equivalent).11. cold.the user. slipping. acid. 9.). general wear and tear. 9. Cushion fitting goggles. Designed in two shapes. caustic.2. Flexible fitting goggles. fire. 9.9A.) The wearing of contact lenses is not recommended in areas where eye protection is required.1 Eye Protection from Impact Factors to be considered in selecting impact resistant eye protection include the degree of protection required and the comfort provided as required by ANSI or equivalent requirements.5.2. 5. oil. splashes of molten metal. one for individuals who do not wear spectacles and one to fit over prescription spectacles. sprays of hazardous liquids. sharp edges.2 Eye Protection from Radiant Energies In addition to damage from physical and chemical agents. (See Figures I. Comfort is particularly important for the wearer. wear. Spectacles used for protection against frontal impact. heat. Gloves should not be used near moving machinery as they can be caught and trap the hand before it can be withdrawn from the glove. the eyes are vulnerable to the effects of radiant energy such as that produced during welding.3 Hand Protection The kind of gloves used depends primarily upon the material or equipment being handled and can be resistant against one or more of the following: heat. Safety footwear is available in many styles.

hearing protection devices shall be provided and used. where fall restraining and arresting protection is February 1993 .) Hearing loss will result from over-exposure to excessive noise levels. The effectiveness of ear muffs varies considerably due to differences in manufacturer. but they would present material leakage problems. size. The use of hearing protection devices shall be properly evaluated to ensure that the selected devices give the necessary noise attenuation and protection. The two most commonly used ones are the full body safety harness and the safety belt.Approved safety footwear are sturdy work shoes with leather uppers and/or leather composition with steel toe caps. (See reference SAES -A-105. five day work week may endanger a person's hearing.5. There are two types of hearing protection available. 9. plastic.2 Ear Muffs Ear muffs cover the external ear to provide an acoustic barrier. 9. Fashion type safety "toe" shoes with canvas.0 Fire Prevention Page 74 . shell mass. Whenever it is infeasible to reduce the noise levels or duration of exposure to within the limits of SAES -A-105. Only after engineering and mechanical methods of reducing noise levels have been explored. wax. foam or Swedish wool. Disposable types are preferred as they give good protection and are very sanitary. the plug type and the cup (or muff) type. Soles and heels are "non"-slip type. The safe period of exposure to a noise level is inversely proportional to the level of the noise. Harnesses are used for above ground work. Head size and shape can also affect their performance. The proper individual fitting of both types of hearing protection is critical as any sound leakage can seriously impair efficiency of these devices. Medical authorities state that continual exposure to noise levels above 90 dBA for an eight hour day. shape.1 Ear Plugs Ear plugs are placed into the canal of the outer ear.5. seal material.6 Fall Restraining/Arresting Devices There are several types of fall restraining devices used throughout the construction industry. The intensity of noise is commonly expressed in terms of decibels (dBA) and measured by a sound level meter. 9. Liquid or grease filled cushions between the shell and the head are more effective than plastic or foam-filled types. Exposure to impulsive or impact noise shall not exceed the requirements of SAES -A-105. and type of suspension.5 Hearing Protection Increasing attention is being paid to the problem of excessive noise in industry. Noise. Materials used for these plugs are rubber. nylon and/or other soft composition uppers or soles are not considered safety shoes and are not approved by Saudi Aramco.11. Noise. should consideration be given to providing hearing protection to individual workmen. 9. Noise can be defined as "any unwanted sound".

66. All fall arresting/restraining devices and hardware shall be manufactured to ANSI or equivalent standards and fully described in the Hazard Identification Plan (HIP). Exceptions shall require the review and concurrence of the Loss Prevention Department.2 Special attention should be given to achieve a snug fit of the safety harness as it is easy for a man to slip through sound but badly adjusted equipment and fall.82 meters (6 feet) or for potential falls of six feet or greater.450 kilograms (5.6. Safety belts should not be used as part of the fall arrest system. Safety belts are used to restrain the wearer at his place of work.6. Therefore.3 No fall restraining or arresting device is any stronger than the point of attachment. 9.5 Fall protection devices shall be capable of supporting a minimum dead weight of 2450 kilograms (5400 pounds).) The maximum length of standard lanyards shall be limited to provide for a fall of no greater than 1.6.4 Fall restraining/arresting devices must be stored in clean and dry conditions away from sunlight.6 During all operations conducted from a personnel platform (man basket) at any height above ground level.0 Fire Prevention Page 75 . 9.1 Full body harnesses are required when working in areas with no guard rails at heights above 1. fall protection devices (lanyards) shall be secured to an anchorage point or a structural member located on the basket which can support a minimum dead weight of 2. 9.6.11. 9.6.400 pounds). including type.) 9.6. Appendix C 1991. all users should be carefully instructed in the importance of a firm anchorage. and must be thoroughly inspected both on issue and at the start of each shift.82 meters (6 feet) except in the case of mechanical fall arresting devices which have been reviewed and received concurrence by the Loss Prevention Department. February 1993 .required.400 pounds). model and manufacturer. (Refer to OSHA 29 CFR 1910. 9. (See Figure I. The lanyard shall have a minimum breaking strength of 2.450 kilograms (5.6.

& 14 A/B. conditions.11. 8. Goggles. 15A 1. 8. 8.7 1. 13 & 14 A/B. chemical cartridge 7. 8./E. 8. 8. local hazards. Respirable air fed hood with filter 6.11. 8. Breathing quality air shall be supplied to the worker through the use of an air fed hood or self contained breathing apparatus. 10D. 10C = General purpose. shall wear a full body harness and standard lanyard. 9.82m (6FD). or B 1. 15A See Section II. 9. 15B=Fire Resistant) Notes: All personal protective equipment shall meet ANSI/OSHA or their equivalent requirements. 9. 9. 15A 1. 4. Full body harness 14. 15A 1. Safety foot wear (9A=shoes. 9. 14B=Shock Absorbing) 15. 9. 15A 1. 15A 1. 8. safety impact (3A=Clear.1: BASIC PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT The table below is a list of basic personal protective equipment. (10A= Rubber coated. 15A 1. The Loss Prevention or Industrial Hygiene office in your area should be contacted for further details. 15A. 1B=Shaded) 2.11. 9B=boots) 10. 10 C/D.7 1. 9. Standard safety belt 13. 10B= Rubber molded. type of job. 10D= Leather.0 Fire Prevention Page 76 . 9. 8. 10C/A. and when an oxygen deficient atmosphere could be encountered. 15B Key To Personal Protective Equipment 1. 15A 1. 12/13. 10D. 10C.structural Lineman Mason Material Control Man Mechanic/Machinist Painter Pipe fitter Plumber Rigger Roof worker Scaffold erector Sheet metal worker Welder Basic Personal Protective Equipment To Be Worn (see key below) See Section II. Face shield 3. 15A 1. 11B=Ear muffs) 12. Welding hood and skull guard (Lens shaded to suit work) 5. Any worker 1. Many job classifications may require additional personal protective equipment depending on the work location. 8. 10E=Heat resistant) 11. (14A=Standard. 9. 15B 1. 10B. 15A 1. Respirator. 9. 10C. 10D. 10C. Safety hat helmet 9. Respirator dust 8. Lanyard 1. 10 C/D. or in a confined space. One piece coverall (15A=Standard. February 1993 . 9. 10C. 10C/A.TABLE I. 9. 10C. Table II. Gloves. 9. 8. 9. 8.82 m above ground without the protection of a guard rail system. 8. 12/13 & 14 A/B. 10C. Respiratory protection shall be used anytime workers could inhale air contaminants exceeding permissible exposure limits (PEL). Ear protection (11A=Ear plugs. 3B=Shaded) 4. 10C. 15A 1. 9. 2. 8. etc. Table II. Safety glasses with side shields (1A=Clear. Typical Job Classifications Abrasive blast cleaner Boiler maker Carpenter Electrician Iron worker . 8. 15A 1A &B. 12/13 & 14 A/B.

E. F I G. C. G G. H (Severe +C) A. flying particles Splash. B. C. B. G February 1993 . E (A or B tinted + C) A. G D.11. G C. D. F A. molten metal Flying particles Flying particles Chemical splash. E. cutting burning Electric arc welding Chemical handling Chipping Furnace operations Grinding (light) Grinding (heavy) Laboratory Machining Molten metals Spot welding Hazards Sparks. splash Flying particles. FACE S HIELDS AND HELMETS TYPICAL EYE PROTECTION APPLICATIONS Operation Acetylene-welding. G D. harmful rays. C.0 Fire Prevention Page 77 . molten metal. flying particles Sparks. E. sparks. E.4: PROTECTIVE GOGGLES . F. sparks Protection D. fumes Flying particles Glare. molten metal. S PECTACLES . intense rays. glass breakage Flying particles Heat. acid burns. glare. heat. H (A or B +C) A. B.FIGURE I. B. C.

1/8-. over 1/2-inch Air-carbon arc cutting Comfort Shade number 10 11 12 12 14 10-14 14 2 3 or 4 3 or 4 4 or 5 5 or 6 4 or 5 5 or 6 6 or 8 12 February 1993 . 7/32-.0 Fire Prevention Page 78 . 3/32-. 1/8-. up to 1 inch Medium oxy fuel gas cutting. 5/32-inch diameter electrodes Gas-tungsten arc welding and gas-metal arc welding (ferrous) 1/16-.11. over 6 inches Gas welding (light). 5/32inch diameter electrodes Gas-tungsten arc welding and gas-metal arc welding (nonferrous) 1/16-. 1/4-inch diameter electrodes Shielded metal-arc welding 5/16-. 3/8-inch diameter electrodes Atomic hydrogen welding Carbon-arc welding Soldering Torch brazing Light oxy fuel gas cutting. FILTER LENS S HADE NUMBERS FOR PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY Welding Operation Shielded metal-arc welding 1/16-. The table below shall be used as a guide for the selection of the proper shade numbers of filter lenses or plates used in welding. 5/32-inch diameter electrodes Shielded metal-arc welding 3/16-. 1/8-inch to 1/2 inch Gas welding (heavy). 1/8-.4A: PROTECTIO N AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY Protection against radiant energy requires the selection and use of the proper shades of welding filter lens or plate. Shades more dense than those listed may be used to suit the individual's needs.FIGURE I. 3/32-. 3/32-. 1 inch to 6 inches Heavy oxy fuel gas cutting. up to 1/8-inch Gas welding (medium).

FIGURE I.0 Fire Prevention Page 79 .5: S PECIALIZED HAND PROTECTORS February 1993 .11.

6: TYPICAL S ELF-POWERED PLATFORM FOR BUILDING MAINTENANCE February 1993 .FIGURE I.0 Fire Prevention Page 80 .11.

Health and Environmental Requirements .0 BREATHING APPARATUS Where industrial processes create hazardous atmospheric contaminants. the first consideration should always be the application of engineering measures to control the contaminants. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 6. In those cases where engineering control measures are not possible. Dhahran.1980 Practices for Respiratory Protection US.10. As each type is suitable for certain applications. it is necessary to develop an orderly m ethod for determining the appropriate device to be employed.Personal Protective Equipment American National Standards: ANSI Z88. Persons should not be assigned tasks requiring the use of respirators unless it has been predetermined by medical examination that the worker is physically able to perform the work and use the breathing apparatus properly. as well as demonstrations and practice in how to fit and wear it.2.Oil By-Products Protection Program (Saudi Aramco Medical Services Organization.0 Fire Prevention Page 81 . Personnel shall not be placed in a hazardous environment for which the respirator is not designed. February 1993 . affected personnel must be supplied with personal respiratory protective equipment. Each user must receive instructions on the proper use and limitations of the device.021 GI 8. Saudi Arabia) Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety. . Bureau of Mines: Respiratory Protection (See 30 CFR Part II) 10.003 TM-3 Safety Requirements For Abrasive Blast Cleaning Air Supplied Breathing Apparatus Technical Memorandum And Attachment . such as a location where there is a lack of sufficient oxygen.11.1 Selection of Equipment A wide variety of respiratory protective equipment is available.

and its concentration. Using incorrect cartridges or filters for the type contaminant and the concentration encountered. However.1 Requirements For Use As with all personal protective equipment. Always keep the respirator clean and well-maintained. chemical properties. d. Do not hesitate to consult your supervisor if there are any questions concerning your personal respiratory protection. He should not permit respiratory equipment to be used for protection against hazards for which it was not designed. The state of health of the personnel or users involved. b. dentures and facial bone structure can affect the fit of the respirator.11. The functional and physical characteristics of the respiratory protective devices.1. including its physical properties. respirators only work if you use them correctly. The period of time for which respiratory protection must be provided. physiological effects on the body. February 1993 . follow manufacturer's specifications for proper cartridge use and established safety procedures. The location of the hazard with respect to a source of uncontaminated respirable air. Common misuses of respiratory protection equipment include: a. Finally. e. The type of air contaminant. Using equipment without having received adequate on training on it. The contractor must know the specific hazards for which a given type of respiratory equipment is approved. 10. that there is a tight seal and no air leakage.Consider the following factors when selecting a suitable respiratory protective device: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The nature of the hazardous operation or process. This attitude can be changed by education and training. any worker refusing to wear the necessary respiratory equipment will not be allowed to work without it.1. The use of approved respirators only. Never alter or modify the respiratory equipment. not realizing that failure to wear it may endanger their lives. 10. as the risk of injury or death is very real when safety precautions are ignored. Beards. c. Proper fit is important to prevent contaminants from leaking in. For face mask respirators.0 Fire Prevention Page 82 . Using air-purifying (chemical cartridge type) respirators when toxic levels are above the respirator-rated capacity. Using air-purifying (chemical cartridge type) respirators in oxygen deficient atmospheres. Using defective or improperly inspected equipment. always make sure that the mask fits properly. Be sure to wear the right respirator for the hazard.2 Misuse Workers sometimes consider respiratory equipment a nuisance.

003. not more than 10 parts per million (ppm) Carbon dioxide. but are not limited to.2 Respiratory Protective Devices Respiratory protective devices can be classified as follows: 1 2 3 Air purifying respirators Supplied air respirators Self-contained breathing devices Air Purifying Respirators 10. so the canister must be carefully chosen to fit the 10.76 mg/l Particulates.1 February 1993 . not less than 19-23% vol.2. vortex tubes) may be necessary. not more than 0. Carbon monoxide. 1) and referred to as Grade 'D' breathing air.) Respirable air shall be controlled to the following conditions at all times: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Oxygen. the following: • • • • • • • • Asbestos Creosol (cresylic acid) Hydrogen cyanide (hydrocyanic acid) Tetraethyl lead and its compounds Mercury and its compounds Nitroglycerine Organic phosphate insecticides Solvents 10.3 Hazardous Substances Protection is required against those hazardous substances which can be inhaled into the respiratory system.1 Gas Masks The gas mask type of respirator consists of a face piece and filter. Respirable air quality must meet this standard. Air cooling devices (e. not more than 0. none The above standards are based on Compressed Air Gas Association (Table No. at a minimum.0 Fire Prevention Page 83 .10% vol.11.10. 10. (See GI 8. not more than 5 mg/m3 @ NTP Water vapor. Hazardous substances which can enter the body through the respiratory system.2.g. ingested via the digestive tract and absorbed into the skin causing systemic injury to the human body. No one chemical agent has been found that will remove all gaseous contaminants.1. Oil mist. The air delivered to the user must be less than 100o F (38o C) and supplied at 6 standard cubic feet per minute (6 SCFM).1.1.4 Contaminants Air supplied to respiratory equipment must be free from contaminants. the digestive tract and the skin include.

the fineness of the particles to be filtered out. A canister designed for a specific gas will give longer protection than a canister designed for a multitude of gases and vapors. and their toxicity. Particulate Filter Respirators (Dust Respirators) A particulate filter respirator protects against the inhalation of nonvolatile particles.3 Supplied Air Respirators A supplied air respirator permits the user to breathe respirable air while working in a hazardous atmosphere. 10. 10. February 1993 . welding. For example.1. they do not provide protection against oxygen deficiency.specific need. The chemicals used are similar to those found in gas mask canisters. but cartridge respirators are for use only in atmospheres not immediately dangerous to life or health. Equipping the respirator with a small cylinder of compressed air to provide an emergency air supply qualifies the respirator for use in immediately hazardous atmospheres.2. and good protection (when properly selected. It is critical that the cartridge be matched to the specific application.0 Fire Prevention Page 84 . It is particularly suited to some types of jobs because it is light and may be worn for long periods of time without appreciable discomfort.2 The resistance to breathing offered by the filtering element. There are two basic types of air line respirators: 1 2 the continuous flow.2. insecticide spraying. An area where the chemical cartridge respirator works very well is in spray painting.2 Chemical Cartridge Respirators Chemical cartridge respirators consist of a face piece (usually half mask) connected directly to one or two small containers of filters/chemicals. However.2. it is often used for spray painting. usage under diverse conditions.1 Air Line Respirators The air line respirator (see Figure I. The major items to be considered are: 1 2 3 10.1. and used for the purposes for which they were designed and approved). 10. adequately supplied with respirable air. the adaptation of the face piece to faces of various sizes and shapes.2.11.2. the pressure demand flow. metalizing and prolonged production work in hazardous areas. Important advantages are simplicity of design.8) is suitable for respiratory protection in atmospheres not immediately hazardous to life. Canister gas masks with full face pieces are effective against higher concentrations of contaminants.

a cylinder valve. A person who wears glasses or who has a beard cannot wear this type of breathing apparatus as a proper seal cannot be obtained between the mask and face. or hood. whereas the demand flow type must always be used with a tight-fitting face piece.The continuous flow respirator may be assembled to a half mask. 10. self contained breathing apparatus shall be used. 2 10. (See Figure I. a set amount of air is continuously fed to the face piece.3 Air Supplied Suits The most extreme condition requiring respiratory equipment is rescue or emergency repair work done in atmospheres which are extremely corrosive to the skin and mucus membranes. This equipment must be used only by welltrained and qualified personnel. The requirements for this type of respirator are the same as those for an air line respirator of the continuous flow type with the addition that mechanical protection from abrasive particles is needed for the head and neck. This equipment typically consists of a high pressure cylinder of air. February 1993 . 1 In the continuous air line respirator. full face piece.2. a face piece and tube with an exhalation valve.) 10. in addition to being acutely poisonous and immediately hazardous to life. The need to have the mask properly fitted before use is important. The pressure demand flow air line respirators are normally used when air must be conserved.3 Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) When entry into a hazardous atmosphere is necessary.2. full suits of impervious clothing with respirable air supplies are available. They contain a regulator at the lower end of the breathing tube. a regulator.9.2. Consideration must be given for the clearance of safety equipment through manholes and other accessways. as may be the case when the supply is from a cylinder of compressed air.0 Fire Prevention Page 85 . For these conditions. The amount is regulated by an air control valve of special inlet design which is not susceptible to accidental changes of the setting even when jarred.11. A slight positive pressure on the inside of the mask is always maintained to prevent inward leakage of the contaminated outside atmospheric air.2.2.2 Abrasive Blasting Respirators Abrasive blasting respirators are used to protect personnel engaged in sand or other abrasive blasting operations. This permits air to flow under slight preset positive pressure to the face piece only when the wearer breathes.

The air. 10.1 February 1993 .3 Training In many cases.11. However. an exception from this requirement is made in an emergency situation where use of such equipment is necessary to escape from a hazardous condition. Employees determined by a medical evaluation to be physically fit to use equipment. (See section 10.1.2-1980. it is essential that the potential users have been thoroughly trained and are medically fit (per TM 3 or equivalent) to cope with the increased level of physical activity and stress.) Intake air filters to compressors and outlet filters to operator mask/hood are required. Under such conditions. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10. (See manufacturers' specifications. A rescue man with a self-contained breathing apparatus (SCAB) is required when equipment is used in immediately dangerous to life and health (IDLH) atmospheres. Air supplied respirator's maximum intake temperature and pressure are 140o F (60o C) and 125 psig respectively.4. respirators are used in emergency situations where there is heightened physical demands on the body. the following safety precautions are required: 1 Breathing air compressors shall have: • Pressure Relief Valve • High temperature alarm • Periodic carbon monoxide (CO) testing to ensure it meets the CGA Grade 'D' limit • Breathing air tested to meet requirements.supply rate is 6 CFM for hoods without vortex tube and 25 CFM for hoods with vortex tube. Fit testing of mask/hood prior to each use. Air Compressors • • • Air compressors shall operate at 245o F and 150 psig maximum.4 Safety Precautions When air supplied respirators are used. 10. Proper cleaning and inspection program for equipment. Filter outlet temperature to operator's mask/hood is 100o F maximum.4. Life lines shall always be attached to the safety belt worn by employees using a respirator.0 Fire Prevention Page 86 .) Proper training of employees in the use of this equipment. Written standard operating procedures for using the equipment. The local Loss Prevention Division and the Industrial Hygiene Unit will assist contractors in the selection and use of respiratory protective equipment. due to stress and excitement.SCBAs must be used in lieu of airline respirators when the distance from the source of fresh air supplied via the air line hose is greater than 91 meters (300 ft) per ANSI Z88.

11.7: RESPIRATORY PROTECTION February 1993 .0 Fire Prevention Page 87 .FIGURE I.

0 Fire Prevention Page 88 .11.FIGURE I.8: CLEARANCE CONSIDERATIONS FOR S AFETY EQ UIPMENT February 1993 .

11.Fire Protection Equipment Fire Reports Abqaiq Plants Operations Instruction Manual: No. Health and Environmental Requirements . Mobile. in order to avoid injury to personnel and loss of time and materials. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2. Protection of Outdoor Storage.0 FIRE PREVENTION This section covers measures to prevent fires and protect against all their possible harmful effects. 2. February 1993 . because of a large amount of fuel present at both locations.11. 1. The factors which must be considered before the job starts include site preparation. types of work permits required and type/quantity of equipment required on-site.1 Before the Job Starts Construction within a petroleum industry complex requires careful planning since plants and support facilities being constructed are frequently next to those already in operation. "Fire Safety Checklist for Evaluating Construction Materials Store Yard" 11. work permit schedules.100 GI 2.001-1 GI 1787.0 Fire Prevention Page 89 .711 GI 1781. and Auxiliary Fire Fighting Equipment Saudi Aramco Sanitary Code Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety.Fire Extinguishers National Safety Council Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations NFPA: National Fire Codes NFPA 231-Appendix C.000-1 Work Permit System Fire and Safety Watch Inspection/Maintenance .102 Fire Fighting Dispatching Procedure Refinery Instruction Manual: No.806 Fire Watch Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards: SAES -B-7A SAES -B-7C Fire Water System and Design Portable. An accident at a construction site can have serious effects on a nearby oil or gas facility and vice-versa.

As part of this process. (See Appendix C attachment). staff training. 11. 11.2.0 Fire Prevention Page 90 . protection of machinery and equipment.3 Equipment Protection Some items of plant equipment need special handling and care after they arrive on site and until they are commissioned. 11. which could be caused by storing it near combustible material and against water or other fire fighting agents that might be used to put out a fire.2.2 Operations having a high fire risk. Examples are computer (and other electronic instrumentation and control gear) and large pumps and compressors. housekeeping.2. and end-ofshift checks. should be isolated from flammable and explosive materials or specially protected. dust. Such equipment should be covered and protected against possible damage that could result from its exposure to normal construction activity. The following principles of project layout and organization can help minimize fire risks: 11. paint spray. Overall requirements for site planning are in Section 7. storage of flammable and combustible materials. secondary storage site outside the plant area where possible. etc.2 Layout Good layout helps ensure the project can be carried out efficiently.4 Storage of flammable and explosive materials in the plant site should be restricted to minimum quantities necessary for an uninterrupted cycle of operations. February 1993 . such as welding and spray painting. Consideration should also be given to protecting it against fire. the contractor must take into account the potential hazards that can be encountered on site. 11. 11.2.3 Be sure to provide adequate emergency access and egress.1 Avoid congestion around machinery and equipment where there is a high level of activity and traffic. use a larger.11. This section focuses on means of avoiding and controlling fires. These subjects are addressed in the Hazards Identification Procedure prior to construction start-up in Appendix A of this manual. control of ignition sources.

11.3 Welding equipment. asphalt kettles. Gasoline. Care in handling flammable fluids is of prime importance.4 Beware of indirect sources of ignition: hot welding slag dropped from a height for example.4. acetone. No other materials should be stored with flammable liquids. non-combustible huts or sheds. and fuels used in the job itself.5. 11. 11.4. heating appliances and other open flames or hot surfaces s hould be segregated from combustible materials. February 1993 .2 Smoking is permitted only in designated areas. or sparks from a fire under an asphalt kettle are familiar examples of this.4. 11.11.4. 11.6 Proper bonding and grounding techniques shall be used for any operation where static electricity could become an ignition source. 11.4 Control of Ignition Sources Compliance with work permit procedures and conditions protects against possible ignition of oil or gas from process operations.1 Storage All flammable liquids must be kept in securely capped metal containers or steel drums on which the contents are clearly marked.1 Electrical equipment should be checked regularly for defects. spirits and other volatile liquids with flash points below 32o C (90o F) should be kept in strong metal lockers located in well-ventilated. Drums containing flammable fluids shall be provided with proper bung vents. In Saudi Aramco. Flammable storage areas must be securely locked (or fenced). 11. posted with a warning sign "Danger: Flammable Area" and must be located at least 15 meters (50 feet) away from the nearest building or storage area for combustibles.4. 11.0 Fire Prevention Page 91 .5 Flammable Liquids Flammable liquids are those that can produce a flammable mixture in air at ambient temperature. lubricants.4.5 Open fires and/or open burning of materials are strictly prohibited.11. The contractor must also take steps to prevent ignition of construction materials. Authorization must be obtained from Saudi Aramco Fire Protection Department. this is defined as a fluid (liquid or gas) having a flash point of 55o C (130o F) or lower.

001. Metal bins with closefitting lids should be provided for oily rags. paints. and diesel fuel. 11. form lumber. etc. well-ventilated sun shade. Therefore. solvents) mentioned above. in addition to the flammable liquids (fuels. chlorine. tires and other rubber goods. Inspection and Maintenance of Fire Protection Equipment. Waste should be removed at regular intervals and always at the end of a working day. and other highly combustible wastes. preferably under an open.) shall be segregated from other materials.) shall be stored separately.8 Emergency Equipment The Fire Protection Department area offices can assist in training Saudi Aramco employees in the proper use of fire fighting equipment.6 Combustible Materials Although the main material used in the construction of plants for the petroleum industry is non-combustible steel or concrete. accumulated at a job site. The contractor should consult February 1993 .5. etc.) Each contractor has a contractual obligation to provide and maintain adequate. Good housekeeping on the site can eliminate many of the situations where a fire can start.5. Screw tops and stoppers should be replaced immediately. electrical insulation. nitrous oxide.0 Fire Prevention Page 92 .7 Housekeeping Rubbish.) Transfer operations should be carried out with funnels and there should be no open flames within 15 meters (50 feet) of the operation unless conditions warrant greater clearance.11. provides a good starting point for a fire. Engines must be stopped before refueling takes place. Exhaust pipes should be kept away from combustible materials. Contents of ash trays should not be mixed with other waste.2 Handling of Flammable Liquids (Reference NFPA 30) In handling. daily site clean up of combustible materials is required to reduce fire hazards. scaffold planks. (Plastic containers are prohibited. on a construction site many materials are potential fuel for a fire: packing material. Containers are to be grounded and bonded during transfer operations. 11. 11.3 Ventilation Gasoline and diesel powered equipment should only be used in well-ventilated areas. wood shavings. Use non-combustible absorbents to remove spills or leaks of oil.Flammable gases in cylinders (acetylene. 3 4 5 11. 11. Any metal container holding flammable liquid must be a FM (or UL) approved type of safety container. (See GI 1781. the following precautions should be observed: 1 2 Transportation must always be in (closed) metal containers. lubricating oil and grease. Oxidizing gases (oxygen. easily accessible fire extinguishers on the job site (Schedule 'D'). propane.

11.8. "B". so this type of extinguisher will have limited use.4 Pressurized Water Where a pressurized water system is available on site. the contractor is responsible for supplying hoses and nozzles. or packing crates. Charged water hoses. such as wood. switch-gear.11. 11.0 Fire Prevention Page 93 . 11. a petroleum liquid. Since most fires at construction sites involve Class "A" materials.2 Carbon Dioxide Type Extinguisher The carbon dioxide (CO2) type extinguisher is normally used for controlling electrical fires.with the local Fire Protection Unit for advice on selection of such equipment.8. Contractor personnel should be aware of the fire fighting equipment available on site and be familiar with its use. ready for use. does not further contribute to the damage. If there is no permanent system installed at a particular location. When the oxygen level in the environment is reduced sufficiently to put out a fire.3 Dry Chemical Type Extinguisher A dry chemical type extinguisher is normally used in controlling Class "B" fires in flammable liquids. 11.5 liters (2-1/2 gallon) size. On construction sites within Saudi Aramco facilities a pressurized system of fire water hydrants and hoses will normally be available.6 kilograms (30 pounds) sizes.8. and so forth and are usually very easily controlled by de-energizing the circuits that supply the power. are a necessity. A larger wheeled extinguisher of 68 kilograms (150 pounds) and above is available. therefore. paper. a water tanker and portable water extinguishers will have to be supplied in order to take care of any Class "A" fires. but is usually found only within petroleum operating areas. and "C" fires. A dry chemical extinguisher normally comes in portable 9 kilograms (20 pounds) and 13. waste material.8. because the gas displaces oxygen from the immediate environment. the oxygen level is also incapable of supporting human life. February 1993 . The typical portable water extinguisher comes in a 9. carbon dioxide and dry chemical types. 11.8.1 Water-Type Fire Extinguisher Water extinguishers should be available around sites where there will be Class "A" material. These fires take place in motors. or electrical equipment. they can be fought with water. There are three types of fire extinguishers normally found on construction sites: water. This multipurpose ABC powder gives this particular fire extinguisher a good chance of controlling any type of fire involving a wood.1 CAUTION A CO2 extinguisher should never be used in enclosed areas where people are present. Some dry chemical extinguishers today have a powder which is good in controlling Class "A". The advantage of using CO2 in this particular instance is that it leaves no residue in the mechanisms of the electrical equipment and.2.

10 End-of-Shift Checks A routine inspection shall be made at the end of the working day to see that everything is left in a safe condition. to be sure there is no possibility of delayed ignition resulting in a fire. February 1993 . including those extinguished by contractor personnel. Make a special check of smoking areas. Cover valuable equipment to protect it against dirt and against the effects of water that might be used in an emergency. Return flammable liquids and gas cylinders to designated storage areas.0 Fire Prevention Page 94 . to offer suggestions for preventing a recurrence. Switch off electrical equipment at the mains. should be reported to the Saudi Aramco representative. The Fire Protection Unit will inspect the area. The emergency telephone number used for reporting a fire or any emergency that requires Saudi Aramco assistance is 110. etc. 11. hot equipment. Separate circuits should be provided for security lights and other equipment that has to be left turned on. The following itemized checklist shall be followed: • • • • • Clean-up and removal of rubbish and waste materials. The contractor must ensure that this number is posted at all telephones and that instructions are placed indicating how to report the emergency correctly. and to ensure the contractor has re-established his fire fighting capability by recharging extinguishers or replacing equipment.9 Reporting a Fire Every fire. welding areas.11.11.

access is unobstructed and extinguisher is clearly visible. contact your local fire control unit. indicate extinguisher is serviceable.FIGURE I.Fire Prevention Page 95 . where fitted. corrosion. Check contents gauges. Check for signs of leakage. If in doubt. or physical damage. February 1993 .9: KNOW YOUR FIRE EXTINGUISHER MAINTENANCE: Maintenance should comprise of a monthly check by proponent organization .Check extinguisher is in correct location. Check seals are unbroken and up to date inspection tag is fitted.

002 GI 1602.001 Disaster Contingency Plan . 554. The continuous development of the Saudi Aramco radio communications system has enabled us to convey messages to the most remote corner of the Company's operational area. 85.002 GI 1602. 525.0 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS In a widespread area such as that covered by Saudi Aramco operations.003 GI 1603. This section is mainly concerned with the two-way radio network which is installed in vehicles. it is not cost effective to lay down telephone lines and establish subsidiary installations for communication.001 No.Udhailiyah Area Disaster Control Plan .500 GI 1600. This network is extensively used by many employees in their day-today business.001 GI 1602.002 February 1993 . Unneeded Communication Equipment Radio Asset Control And Accountability Program (RACAP) Residential Telephone Service Business Telephone Service Inside Aramco Communities And Facilities Business Telephone Service Outside Aramco Communities And Facilities Data Circuits. 554.001 Disaster Control Plan . offices.Safaniya (also in Saudi Aramco GI Manual) Disaster Control Plan . RIMs. No. and TIMs.Refinery and Terminal .Abqaiq Producing and Udhailiyah Producing Divisions (also in Saudi Aramco GI Manual) Disaster Control Plan . Message Switch And Facsimile Terminals See also OIMs.001 No. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 70. outlying plants and allied facilities.12.Qurayyah Seawater Treatment Plant No. It is more feasible to develop a radio communications network instead.003 GI 1601.Dhahran Area Disaster Control .500 GI 80.Construction Safety Manual: Radio Communications Page 96 .Plants and Pipelines Department . Standard procedures must be followed in these radio operations.Ras Tanura Destruction Of Obsolete/Damaged.

0 Radio Communications Page 97 . All operators must stop transmitting unless involved in the disaster and should standby unless told to transmit by Disaster Control or the Disaster Control Post. DISASTER: When used on Company communications systems. or a combination of the three. fire.12.Radio Telephone Procedure Guide: Communications Department .1. The unit controls used by operating personnel are the volume control.Dhahran 12. Water Damaged Equipment: Vehicle drivers and maintenance personnel are requested to exercise great caution when washing vehicles containing radio equipment.. DISASTER DRILL: This is an exercise for training personnel to handle disaster situations.1 Remote Control Unit The remote control units located in offices are used to control radio equipment at some other location. CORRECTION: This means that An error has been made. February 1993 . Radio equipment must be shut down within 91 meters (100 yards) of any blasting operations or where electric detonators are used or stored. and the portable hand radio set.2 Safe Operation Adjustment of equipment must always be carried out by authorized personnel. Under certain circumstances. DISASTER warns all operators that a sudden misfortune has occurred.3 Radio Phrases AFFIRMATIVE: This means Yes BREAK: The work BREAK means the message will continue. 12. the stationary radio set with remote control. All other controls must be set by technical personnel. and the frequency switch. the correct message is . Unauthorized tampering with equipment can result in electric shock or equipment malfunction leading to circuit interference. HOW DO YOU READ?: This means that the operator is trying to determine if the message is being received well. 12. radio waves can cause ignition of electric blasting caps. 12. hand set switch. property. but due to the length of the message the operator will break the circuit to allow the reception of EMERGENCY messages. causing either loss of life..1 Equipment There are a minimum of three types of radio sets used in the Saudi Aramco network today: the mobile radio set.

12. an operator intends to make clear "ABQAIQ".4 Phonetic Alphabet In a radio message. If a message is to be repeated. NEGATIVE: This means No. but one station is waiting for the other to transmit. TRAFFIC: The information or signals transmitted over a communications systems. and wants each word said twice. and. URGENT TRAFFIC: A message requiring the attention of all operators. OVER AND OUT: Do not use this phrase. "I" as in "INDIA". The expression "I have priority traffic" means the operator has listened to the messages being transmitted and has determined that his message is of greater urgency. ROGER: This means that the operator has received and understood the message and accepts responsibility to carry out any instructions therein. Whenever a word is not properly understood by the receiver. the operator shall instruct the station to "say again your message". some letters of the alphabet are likely to be confused with others: as "B" with "P" and "D" with "T". PRIORITY TRAFFIC: This is a message having preferential rating over the routine.0 Radio Communications Page 98 . STANDBY: Any or all operators told to STANDBY shall cease further use of the communications circuit until further notice. RESUME TRAFFIC: All stations are free to transmit routine messages. so on. "B" as in "BRAVO".12. For example. "Q" as in "QUEBEC". it is advantageous to utilize the Phonetic Alphabet. Use the phonetic alphabet which is listed which follows: February 1993 . OUT: An operator using the word OUT at the end of a transmission indicates that he is finished with the communications circuit and any other station may begin its call. He will spell it out like this: "A" as in "ALPHA". VERIFY: Check with originator and make certain the message is correct. READ BACK: This means that the operator wants to make sure that his message has been correctly understood.MAYDAY: This is an international radio distress signal which is primarily intended for ships and aircraft requiring assistance to save human lives or property. OVER: This means that the transmission of a message has ended. SPEAK SLOWLY: This phrase is used mostly in cases where technical difficulties are causing the circuit to cut in and out. A standardized international phonetic alphabet for radio operators is in use to clear up such ambiguities. SAY EVERY WORD TWICE: This phrase is used when the operator is having trouble understanding. SAY AGAIN: Do not use the word "repeat".

Regulations which shall be binding on all members include the operating of telegraph. Any violation or infringement of any communication system or network shall be reported to the violator's administration by the control organization. or identification signals.5 International Communications Union Agreement All Company communications systems and networks come under the regulations of the International Communications Union Agreement. All stations must be established and operated in such a manner as not to result in harmful interference to associated members or members of recognized private operating organizations.PHONETIC ALPHABET Letter A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Word ALPHA BRAVO CHARLIE DELTA ECHO FOX-TROT GOLF HOTEL INDIA JULIET KILO LIMA MIKE NOVEMBER OSCAR PAPA QUEBEC ROMEO SIERRA TANGO UNIFORM VICTOR WHISKEY X-RAY YANKEE ZULU Pronunciation AL fah BRAH vo CHAR lee DELL ta ECK oh FOKS trot GOLF hoh TELL IN dee ah JEW lee ETT KEY loh LEE mah MIKE No VEM ber OSS car Pah PAH keh BECH ROW me oh See AIR rah TANG go YOU nee form VIC tor WISS key ECKS ray YANG key ZOO loo 12. the transmissions of superfluous signals. or inspectors detecting them. or false (or deceptive) distress. telephone and radio. NOTE: All stations are forbidden to carry out the following: unnecessary transmissions. Use of profane or obscene language is a violation of the International Agreement. February 1993 .12.0 Radio Communications Page 99 . stations. The Saudi Arab government is a signatory of the Communications Agreement and a member of the International Telecommunications Union (ITU). safety.

or any use whatever. without authorization. simple disclosure of the existence. 12. It is forbidden to disclose or divulge any information intercepted over the Company communications systems." * Supervisors should be especially alert for violations of this kind and use maximum disciplinary action toward violators.3 Penalties All persons operating the communications systems will be held responsible for any improper operation and will be held subject to disciplinary action.1 Monitoring of Circuits Most voice transmissions are transmitted by radio waves and can easily be monitored by outside agencies. Tampering can also cause off frequency operation and other technical problems which are violations of the ITU Agreement.12. publication. 12. 12.International Frequencies) PRIORITY TRAFFIC ROUTINE February 1993 .0 Radio Communications Page 100 . The divulgence of the contents.6 Message Priorities for Company Operations 1 2 3 4 5 6 MAYDAY PAN/DISASTER DISASTER DRILL SAFETY SIGNAL (Number 3 Priority . 12.2 Secrecy Act All member nations of the ITU bind themselves to the Secrecy Act which states: "They will take the necessary measures to prohibit and prevent: * The unauthorized interception of radio communications not intended for public use.5.5.Tampering with equipment is highly dangerous because of the high voltage involved.5. Adjustments to equipment are only to be made by competent and authorized personnel. of information of any nature obtained by the interception of radio or telephone communications.

The French pronunciation of SECURITE will be spoken three times and followed by the station identification. followed by the name of the area.0 Radio Communications Page 101 .International Frequencies This need only be understood by those operating on international circuits or frequencies. The message has absolute priority over all other messages. or DISASTER messages.6. The nature of distress may be such that the operator may not be able to complete the message or repeat. All persons operating radio equipment must be thoroughly acquainted with this type of priority message. When the message is heard. aircraft.12. Company operators use the word DISASTER. 12.6.1 MAYDAY (Broadcast to all stations) When MAYDAY is spoken three times and followed by the words: "this is (the call station. 3 Priority . Messages of this nature carry priority over all messages except MAYDAY. URGENCY. Within Company operations DISASTER has the same priority as the word PAN for those operating on international circuits or frequencies. indicates that the station has a critical emergency concerning injury. The difference between DISASTER and DISASTER DRILL must be thoroughly understood.3 DISASTER DRILL At various times the Company conducts training exercises which are associated with familiarization and indoctrination programs. 12. or other vehicle is threatened by grave and imminent danger and requires immediate assistance to save human life or property. When a DISASTER DRILL is in progress.2 URGENCY SIGNAL (International PAN. oil operations or other extreme operating situation.4 SAFETY SIGNAL No. International Search and Rescue Monitor Stations shall 'fix' the bearings of the signal and alert ships and aircraft in the area to assist with the rescue. Company DISASTER) This message is usually directed to a particular station. all stations shall stop transmitting and listen to the message.12. PAN/DISASTER. except those having MAYDAY. At the beginning of such a drill. radio stations will announce "A DISASTER DRILL is being conducted".6. indicates that a ship.6. The SAFETY SIGNAL is used February 1993 . or other identification of the mobile station)". all stations whether mobile or fixed must standby. 12. station identification. when spoken three times and followed by the words: "This is (the call sign or station identification)".

your Mayday Message. MAYDAY. 2 Stations Receiving Message From the location given. The station in the immediate vicinity shall acknowledge receipt by transmitting the following message: "(Give name of station in distress. Give the nature of the distress." This station assumes the full responsibility of a control station for all further radio transmissions and all other stations remain off the air unless directed to transmit by the control station. It may use any means at its disposal to carry out the rescue operation.1 MAYDAY 1 Distress Signal The distress signal is MAYDAY. MAYDAY followed by the name of station or station call letters repeated three times.7. 12.6 ROUTINE All messages except those classified above should be ROUTINE.12. By virtue of acknowledging the MAYDAY message. February 1993 . the receiving station assumes control and becomes fully responsible.5 PRIORITY TRAFFIC Repairs to facilities involved in disasters should be classified as PRIORITY TRAFFIC.This is the (name of station). All stations shall cease transmission. Roger.6. Complete message with any other information which can be of assistance to rescue operations. second. the receiving stations can determine if they are in the immediate vicinity. 12. first.7 Distress Messages (Forms and Examples) 12.6.when a station is going to broadcast a message concerning the safety of navigation or giving important meteorological warnings. Give the kind of assistance required. repeat three times) . Give location. 12.0 Radio Communications Page 102 .

The procedures are outlined in the General Instruction Manual. Dhahran.7. If the stations receiving the message can be of any assistance. 12." The message should be repeated at intervals in order to assure that all stations standing by receive the message.2 Urgency Signal This signal indicates that the calling station has a very urgent message to transmit concerning the safety of a person. they shall cease transmitting until the DISASTER is over.12. to all stations. the responsible parties outlined in the General Instruction shall clear the radio circuits for normal traffic. 1 Signal Radio operators. to all stations . 3 Procedures All persons operating Company communications equipment shall be familiar with the word DISASTER. Ras Tanura. IMPORTANT: The transmission of MAYDAY messages for the purpose of training is not permitted under any circumstances. ship. the control station shall transmit the following message: "To all stations. All stations resume normal traffic.This is (control station identification. otherwise. February 1993 .3 End of Mayday Distress When the distress traffic has ceased or when silence is no longer necessary on a circuit or frequency which has been used for distress traffic. under Disaster Procedure. repeated three times) distress traffic has ended with (station in distress identification). 4 Return to Normal When the disaster has ended.0 Radio Communications Page 103 . they shall cease transmission until the urgency traffic has been cleared. repeated three times followed by the station call letter or identification. 2 Response All stations shall cease transmitting and listen to the message that follows. operating on international circuits or frequencies. Abqaiq. or aircraft. they shall acknowledge and render all assistance possible. The Company equivalent to urgency signal is DISASTER. shall be alert for the urgency signal which is PAN. When it is heard.

7.12. February 1993 .3 Priority Traffic Repairs to facilities involved in disasters would be classified as priority traffic and the priority would depend on the situation.12.0 Radio Communications Page 104 .

In addition.0 TRANSPORTATION This section outlines the procedures and responsibilities for preventing motor vehicle accidents in Saudi Aramco's jurisdiction. February 1993 .1 It is the responsibility of the driver to ensure that his vehicle is safe to operate.2 Driver's Responsibilities 13. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 1183.Remote Areas Control of Remote Area Travel and Search/Rescue Procedures Reporting and Recording Of Motor Vehicle Accidents Traffic and Vehicle Safety Request for Air Medical Evacuation Driving in Saudi Arabia: A Saudi Aramco guide to safer driving and desert travel. 13. It is Saudi Arab Government law and a Company rule. Health and Environmental Requirements . Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety. 13.1 Driver Requirements All contractors must employ only qualified personnel as drivers of motor vehicles.2. or superintendent to verify the driver's credentials prior to his employment. All drivers are expected to drive in a defensive manner and maintain control of their vehicles at all times. 13. responsibility. that each person driving a motor vehicle must possess and have on his person a valid Saudi Arab Government driver's license. and vehicle maintenance expected of all contractor.029 GI 6. it sets the standards for driver performance.2 It is the responsibility of each driver to take his vehicle to the proper facility for servicing and repairs when they are required or scheduled.002 GI 6.13.215 GI 150.Transportation. foreman. It is the responsibility of the driver's supervisor.030 GI 1321.Construction Safety Manual: Transportation Page 105 . service organization and Saudi Aramco drivers.2.025 GI 6.015 Transporting Explosives in Company Owned/Leased/Rented Motor Transport Vehicles First Aid / CPR Training and First Aid Kits .

Conversely. 13.3 The driver of the vehicle is fully responsible and accountable for the mechanical and physical condition of the vehicle.2.13. 13.7 Drivers shall not transport unauthorized persons in Company vehicles. Materials should not extend over the sides of the truck.5 Tires which have breaks in the casing. 13. 13.2. or with exposed fabric.9 Drivers have full authority to refuse to transport any passenger who refuses to use seat belts. passengers may refuse to ride with a driver who refuses to wear his seat belt. beyond normal wear and tear.6 Sand tires present a hazard if used on vehicles which are operated at excessive speed especially when they are not properly inflated. 13. He must report any damage.11 Drivers should not transport more passengers than the number of seat belts provided in the vehicle. 13.2.0 Transportation Page 106 . shall not be used.2.4 The driver is responsible for transporting materials properly and ensuring that a load does not exceed the manufacturer's design load capacity.2.2. immediately.2. The driver's supervisor shall authorize all passengers in the vehicle. Proper inflation pressures are posted at the Department's tire shops. 13. Loads extending beyond the front or rear shall be marked with a red flag.2.8 The driver and all passengers of a Company vehicle shall wear seat belts at all times while the vehicle is in motion.2. All loads must be properly secured and tied down. 13. February 1993 . It is the driver's responsibility to ensure that Saudi Aramco Transportation Department tire inflation standards are maintained.10 Passengers shall not be transported in the rear of pickups or on truck beds.13. Also such loads must be equipped with visible brake and tail lights at their rear end points.

February 1993 . 13. company name. (See GI 6. speed must be reduced below the allowable speed limit at night.) 13.030. 2.4 Vehicle Condition It is the responsibility of the driver to ensure his vehicle is safe to operate. accessways or fire hydrants. the Saudi Arab Government Traffic Regulations. The driver is responsible for inspecting a vehicle before operating it to determine if the following items have been provided and are in satisfactory condition: Vehicle Inspection Checklist: 1.0 Transportation Page 107 . 13. Parked vehicles shall not obstruct other vehicles. An English translation of these regulations is available from the Loss Prevention Department.3 All vehicles shall be parked correctly and/or in designated parking areas. 13.1 Where there is no sign post indicating the maximum speed limit.13.030. 100 kilometers per hour for light motor vehicles outside city limits.2 Drivers shall comply with all Saudi Arab Government and Saudi Aramco traffic signs..3. (See GI 6.13. Every driver is expected to reduce his vehicle's speed under hazardous weather or road conditions. 13.3. rain or sand storm. This is the maximum speed allowed in a certain area. To drive safely. and abide by.) 70 km/hr for vehicles with sand tires. The vehicle number. The driver must not exceed the posted speed limit. or during fog.3 Motor Vehicle Regulations: Saudi Arab Government and Saudi Aramco Each driver shall become familiar with.12 All drivers shall be familiar with what the Company considers unsafe driving practices and avoid them at all times.3. roadways. no vehicle may be driven at a speed greater than the following: 1.2. It is the responsibility of the driver to bring the vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. current inspection stickers and license plate (front and back) must be in place.

Tires should have no breaks in the tire casing or exposed fabric and must be inflated to correct air pressure as specified by the Transportation Department. Inspect the rear window wiper. The windshield washer should work properly and there should be water in the washer container. Check that the windshield wiper blades are in good condition. and operate properly. All lights (high and low beam headlights. the coupling must be intact and working correctly. listening for sounds and spotting any leaks associated with it. The tail pipe emissions should be released February 1993 . tail lights. If the treads show any signs of wear like bare patches.0 Transportation Page 108 . 7. The automatic transmission must be in good operating condition and should shift into the parking position correctly. they must be also be in good working order. 14. dash lights. 9. There should be no excessive movement of the steering wheel and no signs of damage. Check the wheels for rim damage. this could indicate defective steering. tail lights and rear license plate lights. if fitted. 3. springs and/or shock absorbers. and the rear license plate light) must be in working order. turn signals. 6. Test the exhaust system by starting up the engine of the vehicle. 10. adjusted. Make sure that the inside and outside rear view mirrors are clean. 8. 4. The trailer should have safety coupling chains. The speedometer should be in good working order. secured and undamaged. Steering knobs and loose coverings are prohibited.2. When fog lights (front & rear) and clearance lights have been provided. Windows and windshield must be clean and free of cracks or damage. rear brake lights. turn signal lights. 5. Two reflective warning triangles should be in each vehicle. Springs and shock absorbers must be in good condition with no alignment or control problems. 12. Check to see if the tail pipe extends at least three inches from the body of the vehicle. 16. All brakes (foot and hand brakes) must be in good working order. 15. Seat belts are mandatory for all vehicle occupants.13. Check the foot and hand brake mechanism for correct operation. 13. stop lights. Make sure the wheels are not buckled or out of alignment and wheel lug nuts are in place and secure on the rim. The glass must be in good condition. 11. If the vehicle is fitted with a trailer. The windows must open and close properly.

(See GI 6. 13.1 Saudi Aramco drivers who commit traffic offenses are given penalty points.5 Driver Training The Company conducts driver training courses for Saudi Aramco employees.6. Do not place materials (hard hats. especially in hot weather. 20. thereby causing any adverse health affects to any of them. process the proper reports and have the damage repaired. • • • • • NOTE: Radiator coolant Oil Brake fluid Transmission oil (checked with engine running) Distilled water for the battery The driver should check the radiator coolant level only when the engine is cool.030. Loose materials are to be kept out of the driving compartment. All vehicle occupants must wear seat belts. Each driver must conduct a vehicle inspection whenever taking charge of a vehicle and periodically thereafter (at least once a month) to ensure that all systems are operating properly and there is no damage. Details about the courses are available from the On-the-Job Training Unit.13. Note all damage on the vehicle.) on rear window shelf. Drivers shall insist that all passengers wear seat belts before starting the vehicle. Repeat offenders may receive disciplinary action. and back up reports for minor parking lot "dings and scratches". You could be charged with a hit and run accident unless you have a police vehicle release for major damage. 13.from a point where they do not directly come into contact with the driver of the vehicle or its occupants.6 Enforcement of Safe Driving Practices The Industrial Security Organization issues "Unsafe Driving Practice Warning" notices. 17. Fluid should be added to the level mark on the overflow expansion tank only if provided.) February 1993 . etc. 13. Check the following fluids for leaks and proper levels. Drivers can receive a moving violation for not adhering to this regulation. The tire wrench should be the correct size to fit the wheel nuts of the vehicle. 18. Passengers will be carried only in the passenger compartment of a vehicle. 19. The vehicle's horn must be operational.0 Transportation Page 109 . A properly inflated spare tire with a jack and tire wrench must be provided.

For emergencies occurring off Saudi Aramco facilities.2 Remain at Scene A driver shall not leave the scene of an accident or move his vehicle after an accident unless he needs to take an injured person to a hospital.029 must then be followed.1 Emergencies In the event of serious injury. This will allow both the Main Gate/Security Control Center and Medical Controller to be informed and they will ensure that the proper unit will respond to assist. The Saudi Aramco Government Affairs Representative will advise you of this release. a Main Gate/Security Control Center telephone number can be used (see above). contract may be reviewed for cancellation.029 must then be followed. This is a Saudi Arab Government law and the Traffic Department investigating officer is the only one delegated the authority to release vehicles involved. Other procedures in GI 6.7. the emergency telephone number 110 should be used. including counseling and revocation of driving privileges within Saudi Aramco. 874-2055 673-5231 572-5291 577-8114 321-4284 577-2344 678-2228 678-7226 February 1993 .7 Action Taken After a Saudi Aramco Motor Vehicle Accident All motor vehicle accidents (MVAs) shall be reported to the closest main gate or security control center. 13. For repeat offenders.6. The Main Gate/Security Control Center telephone numbers are: Dhahran: Ras Tanura: Abqaiq: Udhailiyah: Yanbu: Mubarraz: Abu Ali: Berri: Other procedures as detailed in GI 6. radio. reflective triangles must be used to warn approaching traffic of the vehicle's presence. Offenders will be referred to proponent organizations for appropriate action. When reporting any accident. or by sending a message with a passing driver. This must be done by telephone. make sure the message is understood before hanging up.7. 13. 13. fire or hazardous road block caused by an accident on Saudi Aramco facilities.2 Contractors driving on Saudi Aramco facilities or in the communities are required to abide by all Saudi Aramco and Saudi Arab Government traffic regulations. If a damaged vehicle is blocking traffic or is stopped on the highway.13.0 Transportation Page 110 .13.

4x4.00x16 11. It is the driver's responsibility to ensure the following requirements are met for sand tires: VEHICLE TYPE TIRE S IZE RECOMMENDED TIRE PRESSURE MIN MAX 15 35 15 35 15 35 15 35 15 35 15 35 15 35 15 35 13.2 Sand Tires Sand tires are hazardous to use when they are not properly inflated. and water.00x16 11. 5.0 Transportation Page 111 . any person who drives in the desert shall ensure that: 1. 3. 4x4. 13. when they are driven at high speeds or when the roads are wet.3/4 Ton Utility. 4x4. trucks and buses. 1 Ton 9. The number of passengers being transported in the passenger compartment of a vehicle must not exceed the manufacturer's specifications. 4x4. oil.3/4 Ton Pickup.00x16 9." the Saudi Aramco guide on safe driving tips and desert travel. 2.13.00x16 February 1993 .8 Passenger Seating and Seat Belts Passengers shall be transported only in passenger compartments of cars. 4. where seat belts are only required for drivers. 4x4. 1 Ton Welder's Truck. Seat belts shall be worn by the driver and passengers in all vehicles except buses with more than 14 seats. He is familiar with survival and rescue techniques and procedures. His vehicle has tools. Copies may be obtained from any Loss Prevention area office. 1 Ton Utility. should he be stranded.9. Stay With Vehicle A person lost or stranded in the desert must stay with the vehicle as it provides shelter and to make it easier for searchers to locate him. Crewcab. Driver shall pass the off-the-road vehicle test conducted by Saudi Aramco Driver Training Unit before being permitted the use of 4-wheel drive vehicles. 4x4.00x16 11.1/2 Ton Pickup. and spares for emergency use.00x16 11. In particular. His immediate supervisor knows his destination and route. 13. He has sufficient food and drinking water to sustain him until rescue. 1 Ton Stake Truck.9 Desert Driving All persons who drive in the desert should study "Driving In Saudi Arabia.00x15 9.00x16 9.13. It is recommended that the driver have a copy with him in the vehicle.1 Carryall.9. equipment. 4x4. His vehicle is in good condition with adequate fuel. Crewcab. 6. 4x4 Pickup.

13.0 Transportation Page 112 . Upon successful completion of the inspection.Maximum speed for sand tires (on hard dry road): • • 70 KPH at maximum sand tire pressure 20 KPH at minimum sand tire pressure Since sand tires have a larger diameter than standard tires. a window sticker is issued for the vehicle. February 1993 . File form 7575 (Restricted Area Access Sticker Request).10 Vehicle Admittance to Restricted Areas Vehicles requiring admittance to a restricted area (e. 13. If the vehicle fails inspection. Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO) and Saudi Aramco rules for the safe operation of motor vehicles while driving within any Saudi Aramco community.g.2 Traffic Regulations All posted speed limits shall never be exceeded and all local traffic signs shall be obeyed. 13.11 Operation of Motor Vehicles Within Saudi Aramco Communities All contractor. refinery and terminal areas) shall be inspected by the Saudi Aramco Transportation Department. hydrocarbon facilities. speedometer readings will not be accurate. the driver should remember that he is traveling approximately 10-15% faster than the speedometer reading. Unless the vehicle speedometer has been corrected to account for the oversize tires. it will not be permitted entry into any restricted area until all deficiencies have been corrected. service organization and company operated vehicles must be constructed to comply with the Saudi Arabian Traffic Regulations. 13. This sticker is valid for three months after which the vehicle must be inspected again.13.11.1 Seat Belts All vehicles shall be equipped with seat belts for each passenger seat in accordance with Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO).11.

Although some of the safety standards imposed will seem to restrict use.Construction Safety Manual: Aircraft Operation Page 113 . 14.00 Transportation of Dangerous Articles Onboard Saudi Aramco Aircraft Aircraft Guidelines For Crew Managers And Aviation Remote Airfield Operations Personnel (February 1988) IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations (33Rd Edition. No one is allowed to "pressure" the pilot into carrying more weight than the pilot states is acceptable. February 1993 . It is to the mutual advantage of the user department and the pilots of the Aviation Department that rules of Aviation Safety be reviewed and applied to all operations in remote areas. but also for the safety of the aircraft and the crew.1 Captain/Pilot The Captain/Pilot is in command of the aircraft at all times and is responsible for the safety of his passengers and cargo.0 AIRCRAFT OPERATION This section will deal with both passenger and cargo transportation for which Saudi Aramco aircraft are used.14. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 1310. He is the sole judge and will make all decisions in determining if the weather is acceptable for flight or if landing and take off conditions are within Company minimum standards. these regulations were designed not only with the safety of the passengers and aircraft cargo in mind. Complete cooperation and understanding between pilots and camp supervisors is essential for the safe and efficient operation of all inbound and outbound aircraft.1 General Operating Responsibilities 14. 1992) US Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 49 Part 175 .2 Camp Supervisors All camp supervisors in remote areas will familiarize themselves with all the relevant instructions on the movement of aircraft to and from their areas as detailed in the "Saudi Aramco Aviation Department Policy and Guidelines for Camp Managers".1.1."Carriage By Aircraft" 14. The Captain/Pilot is authorized to follow any course of action which he judges requires immediate decision or action in the interests of safety.

ICAO and KSA President of Civil Aviation (PCA) regulations. February 1993 .4 Smoking is prohibited on all Saudi Aramco aircraft and on all ramp and apron areas.14. 14. 14.2.2. termination of service.2. General (All Aircraft Types) 14.5 Seat belts must be fastened during all flights.2.2.3 A flight crew member or designated safety observer should monitor passenger movement while they are boarding or leaving an aircraft. 14.2 Passenger Briefing/Instructions. 14.7 Ear protection is supplied by Saudi Aramco where appropriate.2. 14.14. Do not unfasten the seat belt until the aircraft has come to a complete stop and you are instructed to do so. or prosecution.1 The pilot shall either orally brief his passengers or direct their attention to the aircraft safety instructions. and they must keep well clear of props and engines at all times.6 Passengers will comply with all flight crew or flight attendant instructions. Failure to comply with these regulations and instructions could endanger the lives and property of others and could be refused future use of the Saudi Aramco aircraft.2 Passengers should never approach fixed-wing aircraft for boarding from the front. 14. FAA.9 Other areas of briefing may include the use and handling of special material or equipment which must be declared and will be shipped only at the Captain's discretion.0 Aircraft Operation Page 114 . 14.8 All Saudi Aramco aircraft carry US registration.2. 14.2.2. The Company complies with US DOT.

14. the float gear is capable of supporting the helicopter. Carry long objects below waist level. Never walk around the rear of the helicopter.5.10 In the event of forced landing. personnel shall exercise special caution to keep clear of the main and stabilizing rotors. Hold onto your headgear when approaching aircraft. Aviation Safety Officers. 14. Life vest must be worn on all over-water flights. a helicopter may fly overland up to 30 minutes after sunset if warranted by extenuating circumstances. A helicopter is required to be at its final destination no later than 30 minutes before sunset. Only the vests provided in the helicopter should be used. Any questions on Dangerous Goods Transport should be addressed to Central Area Loss Prevention Department. February 1993 .00. All persons shall approach the helicopter from the front in full view of the pilot.3 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Saudi Aramco complies with the provisions of ICAO regulations as published in the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations.0 Aircraft Operation Page 115 . 14.14.1 Life Vests In the event of a forced landing at sea. the pilot and passengers will stay with the aircraft. Further requirements are contained in GI 1310.2.5 General Precautions for Helicopters No loose clothing should be worn which may entangle on any aircraft surface or impede egress or flotation in any way. The Aviation Department will conduct a day and night search for the disabled aircraft. The Captain will direct rescue/survival activities.14. All shippers and passengers intending to transport dangerous goods on Saudi Aramco aircraft are required to be familiar with and comply with the IATA Regulations. Operations may also authorize short flights to continue until sunset if rescue facilities are immediately available. When visibility is reduced by dust or other conditions. or the Terminal Supervisor of the nearest Saudi Aramco airfield terminal.4 Hours of Operation for Single-Engine Helicopters Normal hours of single-engine helicopter operations are from sunrise to 30 minutes before sunset. 14. By permission from the area supervisor.

II. General And Civil February 1993 . General And Civil Page 116 .Construction Safety Manual: II.

and material supply storage areas. However. confined space entry. stored. gasoline service stations.708 GI 2. specified locations on marine vessels. 3. or oxidizing agents are handled.1.0 Hold Orders. piped. Saudi Aramco's restricted areas are potentially hazardous.0 Power Distribution Operations No. hydrocarbon pipelines.1 Restricted Areas Restricted areas are those areas or activities which have been designated by department managers as requiring the work permit system. The following are examples of restricted areas: petroleum processing plants. knowledgeable people using proper procedures can perform work tasks efficiently and safely. pump stations.1.100 GI 2. loading piers. areas where explosives and industrial X-ray or radioactive materials are used or stored. 11. flammable liquids or gases. gas plants. oil wells.012 Work Permit System Gas Testing Procedures Fire & Safety Watch Isolation. work areas under or near power lines.1 Definitions 1.0 Definitions of Terms and Approved Abbreviations No.711 GI 6.Construction Safety Manual: Work Permit System Page 117 . These include (but are not limited to) all areas where hydrocarbons. The Saudi Aramco work permit procedure is important in maintaining a safe work environment and is a requirement for all Saudi Aramco jobs in restricted areas. tank farms. Clearances and Permission to Test 1. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2. 10. February 1993 . Lockout And Use Of Hold Tags Power Distribution Instruction: No.0 WORK PERMIT SYSTEM The Work Permit System incorporates procedures commonly used in industrial facilities to ensure that necessary communication takes place and hazards are controlled. or processed in significant quantities. and critical non-hydrocarbon operations.

addition. 1. Form 924-2 (red) This form is required when using spark or flame producing equipment and for vehicle entry into a restricted area. work in sewers or excavations of 4 feet or deeper.1. The issuer will grant the work permit after he has visited the site with the receiver.2 Issuer (Operation Supervisors) Operation supervisors are those supervisors who are certified by their division or department head to issue and approve work permits in restricted areas under their supervision. or deletion in the facility.1. 2 Hot Work. tank inspection.1. Form 924-4 (green) This form is required for tank cleaning. All work in restricted areas must have at least one of the listed work permits.2 Issuance and Approval The authorized receiver (authorized craftsman) must request a work permit from a certified issuer (operation supervisor) before doing any work in a restricted area. 1. or others who have been certified by their division or department head to sign and receive work permits in the case of Company employees and by sponsoring organization heads in the case of contractors. the work should be reviewed by an engineer and appropriate authorization is necessary.3 Receiver (Authorized Craftsmen) Authorized craftsmen are the craft supervisors. If the work contemplated involves any change.4 Work Permit There are four work permits: 1 Release of Hazardous Liquids or Gases. Form 924-3 (blue) This form is for work that will not produce sufficient energy to ignite flammable atmospheres/materials. and is satisfied that the work can be done safely.0 Work Permit System Page 118 .1.1. Form 924-1 (yellow) This form is required when opening lines or vessels that may release hazardous or toxic materials. 4 Confined Space Entry. craftsmen. February 1993 . Work must be performed according to the instructions and precautions specified in the work permit. 1. 3 Cold Work. reviewed the hazards applicable to the particular job.

Usually clearance receivers are PDD employees.0: Definitions of Terms and Approved Abbreviations Power Distribution Operations Hold Orders.0: PDD 10.2 Clear Area One specific precaution applying to all work is to clear the area of people not required for the job to avoid their being exposed to unnecessary hazards. the issuer or local supervisor may stop the work and cancel the permit.3 Work Stoppage If conditions change or become unsafe during the course of work. anticipate what hazards might arise. check for flammable gases in the area and see that proper precautions have been specified on the permit before it is signed.4 Handling of Issued Work Permit A work permit is valid for only one shift. the work should be stopped until they are cleared from the area. It is the duty of both the issuer and the receiver to review the job. If people enter an area where they could be exposed to undue danger. Clearances and Permission to Test 1.1. The following instructions apply to PDD clearances: PDD 3. 1.0 Work Permit System Page 119 .3 Precautions 1.3. Non-PDD employees and contractors should request PDD Electric System operators for assistance. 1.100 for details. issues clearances to enable work to be accomplished on high voltage electrical apparatus that has been de-energized and isolated from the power system in an approved manner. Exceptions in excess of 16 hours may be granted in special cases.1 Power Distribution Department Clearances Power Distribution Department (PDD).3.1 Checklist Each permit contains a checklist of precautions against common hazards.2. The receiver has the responsibility to stop the work and advise the issuer or supervisor any time he feels the safety of the job does not meet the conditions of the work permit.0: PDD 11. 1.Both the issuer and the receiver must hold valid work permit certificates issued by Saudi Aramco. Such a list cannot include precautions against all hazards. (See GI 2.) The receiver of the work permit must keep the permit posted at the job location at all times. provided certain precautions are taken. These clearances are issued by PDD dispatchers in addition to any work permits that are required. 1. February 1993 .3. but it may be extended for one additional shift with proper approval.

). i.0 Work Permit System Page 120 . he shall give the permit to a responsible senior crew member to keep until he returns. hydrocarbon.8. The purpose for the Lockout System is to render controllers inoperative.2 1.1.6 Certification In order for a person to be a certified receiver of work permits.5 Closing Out and Filing the Permit When the job is completed or at the end of the shift..8. each work permit must be closed out by both issuer and receiver.1 Instructions contained in GI 6. Contact the local Loss Prevention office for work permit certification information. valves. so that it may be presented upon request. 1. he must attend the work permit Receivers Course conducted by the Loss Prevention Department and pass a test on work permit System (GI 2.The receiver of a work permit must keep a copy in his possession or within view of the job site for the duration of the job.7 12 Rules on Work Permit Procedure (See below) 1. where the operation of the control device could be hazardous to personnel working on the system.8. The use of hold tags/lock outs shall be strictly enforced. water. Records of current certificate holders. Hold tags and locks are primarily intended to protect the individual doing the work from being injured by an inadvertent start-up. Work permit issuers and operations supervisors shall ensure that hold tags and lock outs are used and so noted on the work permit. The work permit will be filed and kept by the issuing department for three months. on any systems (electrical.012 outline the use of tagging and lockout for controllers which are to be held inoperative or for work clearance. 1.8 Hold Tags and Multiple Lockouts 1. must be kept by each superintendent or organization head. disconnect switches.4 February 1993 . The superintendent of the construction organization will assure Saudi Aramco by his signature that his employee knows both the general instruction and his job. receiver and the senior crew member must sign the work permit transferring the work permit to the senior crew member. etc.8. with their names and the dates issued. circuit breakers.e.100) given at the end of the course. acid. If the receiver leaves the job site. and it is so stated when the work permit is issued. The only exception shall be when the distance and remoteness make signing impractical. steam. The issuer. 1. 1. etc.3 1.

If an emergency develops.TWELVE RULES ON WORK PERMIT PROCEDURE 1) 2) Issuer and receiver must inspect job site together before signing the work permit. and blinds must be used where applicable (multiple clips with lock. To extend time work permit beyond one shift. Scott air packs. issue permits for a single pump. the oncoming shift issuer must inspect job site. The work permit must remain on the job site in a conspicuously visible place while work is going on. Proper lockouts. Be specific. life lines. Two or more permits may be required for the job. barricades.1. the permit must be withdrawn immediately and all work stopped without questions. 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) February 1993 . vessel or confined space entry. Work permits should be issued for the specific period of time required to complete the job. etc.hot. drum. The work permit must be closed out after a job is completed. etc. Issuer and receiver must inspect the job site and sign off the work permit.0 Work Permit System Page 121 . cold. hold tags. J-W Sniffer gas test and/or H S gas test and/or oxygen analysis test must be made before 2 issuing work permit. Issuer and receiver must both have in their possession a valid work permit certification card (issuer and receiver respectively). must be written on the permit. and/or chains with padlocks). and/or gas release. Issue the correct permits for the job . write in extended time and sign permit. All tick boxes must be correctly filled in and gas readings indicated. Special precautions such as requirements for fire watch. Job description and equipment used must be clearly stated on the work permit.

Contractors will establish their own lock issuing procedure complete with logging and a numbering system. Saudi Aramco has special rules requiring the use of locks on switches and controls when it would be unsafe to work on an energized or operating system. When more than one man is going to work on a system or on a number of pieces of equipment within the system. Teach your men the lockout procedure and insist they follow it.LOCK OUT AND TAG Workers may be injured while working on equipment when the controls have not been locked and tagged in the off position. If your man can't get his lock on the clip. Tags are useful to tell who is working on the equipment and who authorized the shutdown.0 Work Permit System Page 122 . vibrations and ineffective mechanisms can cause controls to move or valves to open. tags under stock number 39-378419.012 .1. work should not proceed until a suitable clip is found. Each supervisor of operations and maintenance should know the rules in GI 6. Clips may be ordered under stock number 21-350-487. People do make mistakes and start equipment on which maintenance men are working. Note: Contractors are required to establish a lock out and TAG system compatible with the Saudi Aramco system as part of the contractor Loss Prevention Program plan requirements of Schedule 'D'. Protection is simple: lock the control in the off position and prevent an accident.Isolation. February 1993 . Lock Out and Use of Hold Tags. the multiple lockout clip enables each man to lock out the circuit or machine control. locks under stock number 08-323-261. Locks belonging to contractor personnel must have one key only and should be compatible with the Saudi Aramco system.

FIGURE II.1.1: HOLD TAG February 1993 .0 Work Permit System Page 123 .

FIGURE II.0 Work Permit System Page 124 .2: LOCKOUT CLIP (TYPICAL) February 1993 .1.

walls.100 Saudi Aramco Engineering Standard: SAES -A-111 Borrow Pit Requirements OSHA Safety And Health Standards: 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P Excavations DEFINITIONS: 1. Trench Excavation A narrow excavation made below the surface of the ground. by falls of equipment and persons. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 1021. benched or sloped back to a safe angle of repose.Excavations. by persons being struck by excavating equipment. Trenching And Shoring Page 125 . or faces. The sides of an excavation may need to be suitably shored. In general.0 EXCAVATIONS.000 Street and Road Closure. 3. 2.5 meters (15 feet). but the width of a trench is not greater than 4. Excavation Any man-made cavity or depression in the earth's surface. Other types of excavation accidents are caused by contact with underground pipes and cables. Even rock that looks solid from a cursory inspection can collapse without warning. Excavation Reinstatement and Traffic Controls (See Appendix D) Work Permit System GI 2. TRENCHING AND SHORING Accidents due to cave-in can occur for excavations which are not shored or otherwise supported. and soil composition. depth. and by hazardous atmospheres. including its sides. formed by earth removal and producing unsupported earth conditions by reason of the excavation. the depth is greater than the width. Accepted Engineering and Construction Practices Plans for excavations and protective system methods shall be submitted to Loss Prevention before work start up. February 1993 .Construction Safety Manual .2.

or similar effects. Protective Systems Methods used to protect employees from cave-ins. sloping and benching. 8. no soil is Type A if one or more of the following conditions are true: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) The soil is fissured. There is no single angle of repose. 7. sandy clay.0 Excavations.) 9. Soil Classification System A method of categorizing soil and rock deposits as types A. designed to prevent cave-ins. February 1993 .4. (The safe angle required varies with different types of soil. Soil classification must be identified to select safe sloping and benching methods. and C in decreasing order of stability. The soil is part of a sloped. timber or mechanical systems that support the sides of an excavation. 5. from materials that could fall or roll into the excavation onto the workers or from collapse of adjacent structures. Examples of cohesive soils are: clay. Protective systems include supports. clay loam and in some cases. The soil is subject to vibration from heavy traffic. silty clay. shields and other means to protect workers. silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. pile driving. Type A: Cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength of 1. Sloping A method of excavating in which the sides of an excavation are laid back to a safe angle to prevent cave-ins.2. Soil type is determined by analysis of the soil's properties and how it performs under exposure to the elements and superimposed loads. B. Hydraulic Shoring A pre-engineered support system of aluminum hydraulic cylinders (cross-braces) used with vertical rods (uprights) or horizontal rods designed specifically to support side walls of an excavation to prevent cave-in. The soil has been previously disturbed. However. 6. exposure to the elements and superimposed loads.5 ton per square foot (tc) (144kPa) or greater are classified as Type A. Cemented soils such as caliche and hardpan are also considered Type A. Trenching And Shoring Page 126 . Benching A method of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating the sides of an excavation to form one or a series of horizontal steps. with a vertical rise between steps. layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V) or greater. Shoring Hydraulic.

and loamy sand. (ii) Granular soils including gravel. layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope less steep than four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V) but only if the material would otherwise be classified as Type B. in some cases. sandy loam and. silty clay loam and sandy loam clay. (Plans for trench boxes are to be submitted to Loss Prevention. but is fissured or subject to vibration. (v) Material in a sloped layered system where the layers dip into the excavation or a slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V). (iv) Soil that meets the unconfined compressive strength or cementation requirements for Type A. and in the process. Type B: Soils classified as Type B are: (i) Cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength greater than 0. (vi) Material that is part of a sloped.5 tsf (48 kPa) or less. Type C: Soils classified as Type C are: (i) Cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength of 0. (iv) Submerged rock that is not stable. protects employees inside the structure.0 Excavations. Trench Boxes: A structure that is able to withstand the forces imposed on it by cave-ins. (ii) Granular cohesionless soils including angular gravel (similar to crushed rock). 10. silt.) February 1993 .5 tsf (144 kPa). (iii) Previously disturbed soils except those which would otherwise be classed as Type C soil. (v) Dry rock that is not stable.5 tsf (48 kPa) but less than 1.(v) The material is subject to other factors that would require it to be classified as a less stable material. (iii) Submerged soil or soil from which water is freely seeping. silt loam. Trenching And Shoring Page 127 .2.

electric cables. Nature of the ground including the proximity of made-up ground. It is important to provide adequate and suitable protective systems for use whenever excavation work is to be carried out to a depth of 1. Dammam Area Communications. etc.) 7.2 Work Permit Work permits must be obtained from the appropriate operations supervisor before excavation work is started in any Saudi Aramco facility. Consideration of these factors will indicate the safety measures which must be implemented to proceed with the job and whether the sides of the excavation can be sloped and benched to a safe angle or whether other protective systems will be required.2. such as timber shoring. plant and equipment and to enable the work to proceed without interruption. Utilities and the Communications Foreman.) 8. 843-3247 during normal Government working hours or telephone no. February 1993 . railroads.) Size and purpose of the excavation. sloping.) 3. Contractors may contact the Saudi Telephone Cable Locator Division on telephone no.) 4.1 Before Work Starts In order to begin excavation work with minimum risk to men. Weather and soil moisture conditions. (See GI 2. they may be required to submit a written application to the Saudi Telephone Cable Locator Division providing a site plan of the proposed excavation and stating when it will be done.). the following factors must be considered well before the job starts: 1. 906 at any hour. Contractor letters may be addressed to the Director. Trenching And Shoring Page 128 . work permits shall be obtained from the Superintendent. benching.) 5. Sources of soil vibrations (highway traffic.0 Excavations.5 meters (5 feet) or more.) 6. shielding.2 meters (4 feet). Subsequently. sheet piling and freezing must be designed in accordance with Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention requirements. Excavation plan submitted to Loss Prevention. A Confined Space Entry Work Permit is a second work permit and is required for trenches deeper than 1. 2. 2. hydraulic and pneumatic systems. especially high water table. including residential areas and roadways. Oil and Gas Dispatch Unit or their delegated representatives. Ministry of Telegraph Post and Telephone.) All protective shoring systems and configurations. and other utilities.5 meters (5 feet) may also require protective systems.) 9.1 Excavation near Saudi Telephone Cables To avoid disruptions of service and unnecessary costs which result from the accidental cutting of Government telephone cables by contractors working on Saudi Aramco projects. Adjacent roads and footpaths.) 2. and in any place where the presence of underground/utility obstructions is known or suspected. Outside of clearly defined responsibility areas.100 for work permit requirements. proponents should urge their contractors to inquire about the location of such cables prior to excavation.2. machinery.2. Stability of adjacent structures. Dammam. Position of underground obstructions such as pipes. Excavation plans must be submitted to Loss Prevention before work start up. Excavation work to a depth of less than 1. Method of excavation.

vessels. or water. Shields shall be installed in a manner to restrict lateral or other movement of the shield and be capable of withstanding any sudden application of lateral loads.3.1 Shoring Protective Systems As soon as an excavation reaches a depth of 1.Saudi Aramco proponent inquiries may be addressed to the Contractor Liaison Division of Government Affairs. or other sources.2 meters (4 feet) or soil banks are greater than 1. suitable shoring shall be installed or the sides sloped back to a safe angle. Contractor Liaison/GAO). depth of cut. Mechanical excavators shall not be used within 3 meters (10 feet) of any such obstruction. Trenching And Shoring Page 129 .0 Excavations. Shoring may be of timber or any other suitable material. (See Figure II. anticipated changes in materials from exposure to air. constructed and maintained to provide protection equal to or greater than the sheeting or shoring required.5.4. loading imposed by structures. sun. 2.3) or the choice and design of other protective systems shall be based on evaluation of pertinent factors such as: type of soil (Type A. such as steel sheet piling. overlying material. equipment. II. the design shall be approved by Saudi Aramco Consulting Services Department. benches.4.2. Trench boxes shall be designed. The determination of the angle of slopes. Excavations shall not be sloped at an angle greater than one and one-half horizontal to one vertical (340 measured from the horizontal). or stored material.3 Underground Obstructions Whenever the presence of underground pipes. telephone 874-1461 (Corporate Advisor. February 1993 . II. blasting.2 Personnel Protection Portable trench boxes or sliding trench shields may be used for the protection of personnel in lieu of a shoring system or sloping.4 General Precautions 2. or structures is known or suspected. Pneumatic breakers shall only be used where necessary to break concrete or other hard surfaces. and vibrations from equipment. mechanical excavators shall not be used until all such obstructions have been exposed by hand digging. (See Figures II. possible variations in water content of the material while the excavation is open. B. Materials used shall be in good serviceable condition. and timbers shall be sound. or C). 2.) Shoring systems shall be designed by a qualified person and meet accepted engineering requirements. 2. cables. free from large or loose knots. Where such trench boxes are used. Plans for sloping and benching systems shall be sent to Loss Prevention for review. traffic.5 meters (5 feet). and of p roper dimensions.4.

2. or members of the public are required or permitted to cross over an excavation. Ladders shall be securely fixed. and extend at least 0. (See Figure II. or other appropriate precautions shall be taken before men enter.Shields shall be extended above the excavation to protect employees working inside the shields and when entering or exiting the areas protected by shields. 2.2.4.6 meter (2 feet) wide shall be maintained on all sides. removed or moved (see Figure II.5 meters (25 feet). equipment. 2.6 Walkways Where employees.4. 2. 2. shall be inspected every day by a competent person to ensure that there is no danger of collapse and all observations shall be noted in the site safety log book. Note: Toxic.6 Hazardous Atmospheres and Materials 2. a clear space at least 0. No sidewalk shall be undermined unless properly shored. Where necessary. be placed at an angle of 75o .0 Excavations. a close planked bridge or walkway with standard guard rails shall be provided and kept clear of excavated materials or other tripping hazards.4. Ladders shall conform to the requirements set out in Section 9. Employees shall not be allowed inside the shielded areas whenever shields are being installed.1 Ventilation Where there is reason to suspect oxygen deficiency or the presence of a hazardous atmosphere in an excavation.100). Trenching And Shoring Page 130 .4.4 Clearance In order to provide a safe footing at the edge. including the shoring.5 Access and Egress Safe means of getting into and out of an excavation shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 7. gas tests must be carried out by a qualified person.2. oxygen and flammable gas tests are to be conducted before entering hazardous excavations in Restricted Areas (as mentioned in GI 2.3 Inspection All parts of an excavation. February 1993 . mechanical ventilation shall be used.9 meter (3 feet) above the stepping-off point. and to prevent spoil falling into an excavation.) 2.5 Mechanical Excavator Men shall not be permitted to work underneath loads or in places where they could be struck by any part of a mechanical excavator.8: Guide to Safe Distance Back From Top Of Slope For Storage of Materials / Equipment Placing.6.7).

2. Trenching And Shoring Page 131 . The lifeline shall be separate from any line used to handle materials.2.6. testing shall be conducted as often as necessary to ensure that the atmosphere remains safe. and H2S is 0 ppm. Corrective measurers may include use of air movers.05 LEL to 0.2.100 (Work Permit System) as shown below: • • • • Above 0. or confined spaces.0 LEL .2 Exhaust Gases Where an internal combustion engine is used in an excavation. use the guidelines given in GI 2.5 LEL . shall wear a harness with a lifeline attached to it. sewers. open tanks or other measures to return the breathing atmosphere to normal readings. For an atmosphere with a concentration of any flammable gas below its lower explosive limit (LEL). special precautions must be taken to ensure that exhaust gases are discharged so as not to be a hazard to men working in the excavation. Mechanical devices shall be available to lift incapacitated employees from excavations. or a basket stretcher. • Precautions shall be taken to prevent employee exposure to an atmosphere containing a concentration of any flammable gas above its lower explosive limit (LEL).2 Emergency Rescue Equipment (i) Emergency rescue equipment.6. identification and isolation of sources from fuel lines. February 1993 .100. combustible gases 0.0 Excavations. This equipment shall be attended by a standby man outside the trench when in use.0 LEL.1. For elevated levels of gases tested follow requirements of GI 2.5 LEL . Subsequent testing is required to monitor the area during the work so appropriate precautions can be taken as necessary. and shall be individually attended at all times while the employee wearing the lifeline is in the excavation. shall be readily available where hazardous atmospheric conditions exist or may develop during work in an excavation.1 Hazardous Atmospheres Prior to entry into excavations greater than four feet deep.No entry permitted • When controls are used that are intended to reduce the level of atmospheric contaminants to acceptable levels. such as breathing apparatus.Breathing apparatus must be used Above 0.1. a safety harness and line.No hot work permitted 0. or other similar deep and confined footing excavations. a work permit shall be issued. Gas tests shall verify that the oxygen level is 20-21%.6. (ii) Employees entering bell-bottom pier holes. 2.

fixed warning lights shall be used to mark the limits of the work. If men or vehicles are in the vicinity after dark. and the surface shall be left in good condition as soon as is practicable. sub-stations. 2. residential. When mobile equipment is utilized or allowed adjacent to excavations. streets. etc. Trenching And Shoring Page 132 . Removal of trench supports shall progress together with the backfill from the bottom of the trench.e. Streets.2. industrial plants. and braced as necessary to resist the extra pressure due to such superimposed loads. materials.2. 2. 2. asbestos or any other hazardous chemical is known or suspected. soil banks or other heavy objects on a level above and near an excavation.10. substantial stop logs or barricades shall be installed. and security fencing associated with borrow pit operations shall be in accordance with Saudi Aramco Safe Operating Procedures.9 Backfilling Backfilling and removal of trench supports shall be accomplished first by backfilling up to a level allowing for the removal of the lower braces. 2. Excavation work on public highways will have to be cleared in advance with Government Affairs and any special measures that they might specify must be implemented (See Section II. whether in a Restricted Area or not.1 A separate traffic flow plan is required to keep pedestrian traffic away from vehicle traffic areas. Roadworks). derricks. warning personnel to stay out of borrow pits. 2.8 Roads.2 February 1993 . Signs in Arabic and English shall be posted in roped-off areas.7 Edge Protection. Markers and Fixed Lighting Whenever it is necessary to place or operate power shovels.10 Borrow Pits Location of borrow pit boundaries (i. the side of the excavation shall be sheet-piled. excavation work shall not be started (or continued) until the Industrial Hygiene Service and Loss Prevention Departments have identified the hazard and specified the precautions to be taken and a new work permit has been issued. In unstable soil. the grade should be away from the excavation. 2. and sidewalks shall not be undertaken without the prior approval of the relevant authorities (See Section II. If possible.1. highways. ropes shall be used to pull out the jacks or braces from above after employees have cleared the trench. Dust concentration.) shall be located at the distance noted in SAES -A-111. shored.3 Organic Lead Where the presence of buried organic lead (TEL) sludge. Work Permit System). and Sidewalks Excavation work in roads.0 Excavations. Another layer of backfill shall be positioned in the trench to the next layer of braces to be removed.10.. trucks. Traffic is strictly prohibited in borrow pit areas.6.8. noise levels. All excavations shall be backfilled and consolidated.

15 and II.0 Excavations.10. II. II. and II. (See Figures II.) February 1993 . It is not intended that the aluminum hydraulic specifications apply to every situation that may be experienced in the field.4 Timber Shoring For Trenches Timber shoring is provided as a method of protection from cave-ins in trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6.9.1m) in depth. (See Figures II.3 Hydraulic Shoring For Trenches Hydraulic shoring is provided as a method of protection against cave-ins in trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6. Loss Prevention requirements must be used when timber shoring protective systems are designed. Situations that are not covered require specific designs for specific applications and will be subject to Loss Prevention review.1 m) in depth.2.10.13. II.) 2.1 m) require Loss Prevention review.14. II.16. These data were developed to apply to the situations that are most commonly experienced in current trenching practice.10. Trenching And Shoring Page 133 . Trench depths exceeding 20 feet (6.2.12.11.

Slope Configurations (All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio) 2.67 m) or less in depth. Trenching And Shoring Page 134 . 3.1: MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE S LOPES SOIL OR ROCK TYPE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SLOPES (H:V) [1] FOR EXCAVATIONS LESS THAN 20 FEET DEEP [3] VERTICAL 3/4 : 1 1:1 1-1/2 : 1 (90O) (53O) (45O) (34O) STABLE ROCK TYPE A [2] TYPE B TYPE C NOTES: 1.2. February 1993 . Numbers shown in parentheses next to maximum allowable slopes are angles expressed in degrees from the horizontal. Short-term maximum allowable slopes for excavations greater than 12 feet (3.TABLE II. A short term maximum allowable slope of 1/2H : 1V (63O) is allowed in excavations in Type A soil that are 12 feet (3. Sloping or benching for excavations greater than 20 feet deep shall be reviewed by Loss Prevention. Angles have been rounded off.67 m) in depth shall be 3/4 H : 1V (53O).0 Excavations.

0 Excavations. Trenching And Shoring Page 135 .2.FIGURE II.3: EXCAVATIONS MADE IN TYPE A S OIL February 1993 .

2. Trenching And Shoring Page 136 .0 Excavations.FIGURE II.3A February 1993 .

0 Excavations.FIGURE II.3B February 1993 .2. Trenching And Shoring Page 137 .

2.FIGURE II.0 Excavations. Trenching And Shoring Page 138 .4: EXCAVATIONS MADE IN TYPE B S OIL February 1993 .

Trenching And Shoring Page 139 .FIGURE II.2.0 Excavations.4A February 1993 .

0 Excavations.FIGURE II.2. Trenching And Shoring Page 140 .5: EXCAVATIONS MADE IN TYPE C S OILS February 1993 .

Trenching And Shoring Page 141 .2.FIGURE II.6: EXCAVATIONS MADE IN LAYERED S OILS February 1993 .0 Excavations.

6A: EXCAVATIONS MADE IN LAYERED S OILS February 1993 .0 Excavations. Trenching And Shoring Page 142 .2.FIGURE II.

7: EXAMPLES OF TRENCH SHIELDS February 1993 .FIGURE II.0 Excavations.2. Trenching And Shoring Page 143 .

Trenching And Shoring Page 144 .2.FIGURE II.0 Excavations.8: GUIDE TO S AFE DISTANCE BACK FROM TOP OF S LOPE FOR S TORAGE OF MATERIALS OR PLACING EQUIPMENT February 1993 .

FIGURE II.2.0 Excavations.9: EXAMPLES OF S CREW TRENCH J ACKS February 1993 . Trenching And Shoring Page 145 .

Trenching And Shoring Page 146 .2.FIGURE II.10: ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC S HORING TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS February 1993 .0 Excavations.

5 5.5 Maximum Vertical Spacing 4 4 4 Up to 8 Over 8 up to 12 2 inch diameter 2 inch diameter 2 inch diameter Over 12 up to 15 3 inch diameter 3 inch diameter 3 inch diameter 2 inch diameter 2 inch diameter 2 inch diameter Loss Prevention Review February 1993 .11: ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC S HORING Vertical Shores for Soil Type A Hydraulic Cylinders Width Of Trench Depth of Trench Feet Over 5 up to 10 Over 10 up to 15 Over 15 up to 20 Over 20 Vertical Shores for Soil Type B Maximum Horizontal Spacing 8 8 7 Maximum Vertical Spacing 4 4 4 Up to 8 Over 8 up to 12 2 inch diameter 2 inch diameter 2 inch diameter Over 12 up to 15 3 inch diameter 3 inch diameter 3 inch diameter 2 inch diameter 2 inch diameter 2 inch diameter Loss Prevention Review Hydraulic Cylinders Width Of Trench Depth of Trench Feet Over 5 up to 10 Over 10 up to 15 Over 15 up to 20 Over 20 Maximum Horizontal Spacing 8 6. Trenching And Shoring Page 147 .FIGURE II.0 Excavations.2.

0 Excavations. Trenching And Shoring Page 148 .FIGURE II.2.12: ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC S HORING WALER S YSTEMS FOR S OIL TYPE B February 1993 .

13: EXAMPLE OF TIMBER S HORING PROTECTIVE S YSTEMS February 1993 . Trenching And Shoring Page 149 .FIGURE II.2.0 Excavations.

0 Excavations. Trenching And Shoring Page 150 .MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS * February 1993 .2. 14: TIMBER TRENCH S HORING .FIGURE II.

FIGURE II.MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS * February 1993 .15: TIMBER TRENCH S HORING .2. Trenching And Shoring Page 151 .0 Excavations.

MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS * February 1993 .FIGURE II. Trenching And Shoring Page 152 .2.16: TIMBER TRENCH S HORING .0 Excavations.

711 GI 6.2-80 Standard Practice for Respiratory Protection ANSI Z 117.001 GI 402. Of prime importance are the age of the structure. Lockout And Use Of Hold Tags Safety Requirements For Scaffolds Asbestos Regulation Operational Chemical Cleaning of Boilers Refinery Instruction Manual: No. These factors must be known before any planning can begin.100 GI 2.6-83 Safety Requirements for Demolition ANSI Z 88. the method of construction. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2. the state of preservation.1-89 Safety Requirements for Working in Tanks and Confined Spaces American Petroleum Institute: API 2217-84 API 2015-91 Guidelines for Confined Space Work in Petroleum Industry Safe Entry And Cleaning Of Petroleum Storage Tanks February 1993 .001 GI 150. Many problems are peculiar to the demolition of tanks. vessels. and the surrounding environment. its previous use.Construction Safety Manual: Demolition Page 153 . For instance. many serious accidents have resulted when due consideration was not given to the cleaning and gas-freeing of this equipment before work began.185 Precautions for Working in Leaded Product Tanks American National Standards Institute: ANSI A 10.012 GI 8. and ancillary pipe work associated with the oil industry.001 Work Permit System Fire and Safety Watch Isolation. 10.3.0 DEMOLITION Numerous factors must be taken into account before the method of demolition is decided.

and Industrial Hygiene Services. however. public buildings.1.Demolition in Progress" in Arabic and English must be erected at each approach to the barricade.3.1. There are. February 1993 . gas.1 Before Work Starts The contractor shall submit a Hazard Identification Plan as a part of his loss prevention program to the Company Representative. shall be protected from demolition debris that can likely cause hazards to the general public. outlet. An examination of them should be made to ascertain whether any major changes from the original construction have been made and where utility connections may be found. Also. The man appointed should be experienced in demolition operations. 3. The re-use of salvage materials should be considered prior to this decision. Section 1.3 Disconnections All utility services such as electricity.3. 3. pedestrian walkways.5 Barricades/Signs Barricades must be erected around the work area.4). and liaison with other contractors working in the general area and with operators and construction or maintenance engineers. vessels.) 3. and water must be shut off and the main supplies disconnected outside the line of the demolition work. bracing must be installed to insure stability of adjacent structures. All such programs must be reviewed and concurred with by the Loss Prevention Department before start-up. a competent supervisor must be appointed in writing as the person responsible for all work on site. shall be contacted. etc. 3. (See Chapter I. Any portion of the job which contains asbestos insulation should be cleared under the general procedures (See Section II. and overflow points. ensuring that work permit requirements are met.1. and paperwork must be completely disconnected from inlet. Signs bearing the words "Danger . Tanks. Loss Prevention and all contractors involved. His duties will include the direct supervision of the work force.1 Responsible Supervisor Before any demolition work is started. 3.1. Preventive Medicine Services Division.2 Original Drawings The original drawings of the structure to be demolished should be obtained.0 Demolition Page 154 .2 Method of Demolition The method of demolition to be used should be decided upon in consultation with the Saudi Aramco representative. cases where such a method is impractical or uneconomical and where other methods have to be considered.3.2. It should be remembered that the safest and most efficient method is to start at the top and dismantle in the reverse order of construction. 3.4 Adjacent Structures and Publ ic Areas Adjacent structures. parking lots.1.

2 Glass Removal Nails in timber must be removed or bent over.4. Immediate steps shall be taken by bracing or by other means to prevent the premature collapse of the whole or any part of the structure.5 Structural Steel Removal All steel construction should be demolished column length by column length and tier by tier.004. doors.4 Working Place Clearance 3. or the timber must be stacked where it will not be a source of danger. Proper personnel protection equipment and disposal systems must be utilized. When a wall from which support has been removed must be left standing at anytime. 3.3. continuing inspections must be made to detect hazards arising through weakened or overloaded floors. Proper personnel protective equipment and disposal systems must be utilized.2 Demolition Of Buildings With Asbestos / Insulation Materials Before demolition of buildings with asbestos and insulation.) 3. adequate bracing (guying) must be provided to prevent collapse and to guard against wind pressures. or loose material. (See GI 355. 3. Members being cut or dismantled should be chained or lashed in place to prevent uncontrolled swinging or dropping.3.4.001.3 Stability During Demolition As work progresses. partitions. unsupported walls. A structural member being removed must not be under any stress other than its own weight. etc. All glass in windows. February 1993 .0 Demolition Page 155 .2.) 3. should be completely removed prior to structural demo lition. (See Chapter 4 and GI 150. notify Loss Prevention and Industrial Hygiene Services to ensure safe procedures are followed.3.2. 3. the Loss Prevention Department and the Industrial Hygiene Unit shall be notified to ensure safe procedures are used. 3.1 Lateral support should not be removed from more than one story of wall at any time before starting to demolish it.1 Demolition of Equipment Containing PCB: Polychlorinated Biphenyl (ASKAREL) Before equipment containing or suspected of containing PCB(s) is removed in demolition work. Work places and the areas around ladders and stairways must be kept clear of material and debris.1 Access A safe means of access to and egress from all working places must be provided. including overnight and off-shift work hours.

Although this is often more costly and laborious. both vapors and residues can usually be removed by steaming out.7 Protective Clothing and Equipment All demolition workers should be provided with and make use of the following protective equipment: 1 2 3 4 5 Safety helmet Goggles Heavy duty gloves Appropriate respiratory equipment (whenever necessary to prevent inhalation of dust and fumes) Safety boots with steel toe caps and preferably with penetrant resistant soles. can substantially reduce the risk of explosion. 3. Vessels and Pipe Work (Explosion Prevention) 3. 3.6. relatively easy to eliminate explosive concentrations of vapor within the tank by forced ventilation using a blower or eductor system approved for hazardous locations. Safety belts or harnesses (with lifelines where required) shall be used by men working in isolated or dangerous locations where there is the possibility of them falling and where other preventive measures are impractical.3. Because of the high capacity of a large tank.0 Demolition Page 156 . It is. steaming cannot be relied on to volatilize all residues unless very large quantities of steam are available. however.3 above will rapidly reduce vapor concentrations. the main danger lies in the hot cutting setting fire to any residues in the tank.3 Steaming and Ventilation In the case of vessels and tanks up to about 22. With materials less volatile. the advice of the area Fire Chief and the Loss Prevention Department should be sought.1 Welding and Hot Cutting No tank.712 liters (6000 gallons) capacity. It is. there are times when it is the only safe method which can be used. use of such methods as in 3.6. February 1993 . therefore.4 Residue Cleaning With volatile materials. and pipe work. however. or pipe work which has contained explosive or flammable material shall be subjected to welding or hot cutting operation until all steps have been taken to remove the substance and any vapors. essential that any residues are removed before work starts.6 Tanks.6. When hot cutting is planned. 3.6. with larger tanks the problems are somewhat different. 3.6. vessel.2 Cold Cutting The use of cold cutting techniques for the dismantling of tanks. vessels.3.

February 1993 .8 Mechanical Equipment Guards Mechanical equipment such as cranes and bulldozers should be equipped with wire mesh guards over windows and with solid protection over the driving position so that there is no danger of the operator being struck by flying debris.3.0 Demolition Page 157 .3.

and. fibrous anthophyllite has also been used in industry in a few applications. the Saudi Aramco Industrial Hygiene Unit must approve the use of asbestos materials. In addition. but some products contain blue asbestos (crocidolite). For the purpose of these regulations. Chrysotile was commonly used as the reinforcing material in asbestos-cement products. ropes. At present. its presence could be masked by other materials. may change the characteristic blue color of crocidolite to a white or fawn color. under GI 150. fibrous anthophyllite or any mixture containing any of these minerals. chrysotile. The most important factors in the development of the disease are the amount of dust to which the individual is exposed.Construction Safety Manual: Asbestos And Other Fibers Page 158 .Cement 4.100 GI 8. breathing asbestos dust can cause asbestosis (scarring of the lung). INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2. gaskets. and the personal susceptibility of the individual to the asbestos fiber. The majority of asbestos products has been made of white asbestos. asbestos fibers can February 1993 . Due to the superior heat resistance of amosite it has been used principally for the manufacture of fire-resistant insulation boards. which includes crocidolite (blue asbestos) and amosite (brown asbestos). fire resistant boards. Because crocidolite has high resistance to acids. molded insulation.0 ASBESTOS AND OTHER FIBERS Asbestos is the generic name given to a number of naturally occurring inorganic fibrous silicate minerals. asbestos is defined as any of the minerals crocidolite. However. The use of asbestos is restricted. however. which includes chrysotile (white asbestos). 4. Since prolonged exposure to heat. blocks. All forms of asbestos are capable of causing asbestosis.4. it has been extensively used in chemical plants. Asbestos materials have been widely used in the construction industry and may be present in a number of manufactured products such as cement sheeting.003 GI 150.2 Health Risks Over a period of time.001. which may go undetected for years after exposure. Blue asbestos can usually be recognized by its dark lavender blue color.001 Work Permit System Breathing Apparatus Asbestos Regulations American National Standards: ASTM C460-88 Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Asbestos . duration of exposure. amosite. Of the asbestos products manufactured blue asbestos has the higher health risk.1 Types of Asbestos These exist in two main rock-forming mineral groups: 1) Serpentine group. 2) Amphibole group. etc. as would be the case with boiler or hotpipe lagging. These two main groups were the most widely used asbestos minerals.

These records shall be available to Saudi Aramco upon request.3. he must notify.3. the Industrial Hygiene Services will take random samples of air at the point of operation during the working period. (See Administration I. and the type of equipment being used to work the asbestos material.4 Storage and Transportation All asbestos materials removed from or used on a job shall be stored in an approved container at all times.3 Before Work Starts The contractor shall submit a Hazard Identification Plan to Loss Prevention Department and to the Industrial Hygiene Service. Preventive Medicine Services Division for review and concurrence prior to job start-up. February 1993 . When informed.2 Job Details The contractor shall then inform the Industrial Hygiene Services of details of the work involved. For new construction. when removing or using asbestos materials.3 Chest X-rays It is the contractor's duty to ensure that each man employed on asbestos work be given a chest X-ray prior to commencement of the job and thereafter at two-year intervals. 4. The maximum allowable concentration of airborne asbestos dust shall not exceed 0. 4. asbestos products shall not be used in new construction.4. 4. the number of persons employed. These asbestos tumors are usually found on the palms or fingers.2 asbestos fibers longer than five microns in length per cc of air on a time-weighted average (TWA) exposure for an eight-hour work day. 4. the type of asbestos being used.4. Section 1.3. in writing. Approved containers shall be used during the transportation of asbestos materials. warts. or corns. Bulk samples may be sent for the analysis and identification of asbestos to either Industrial Hygiene Services or to the Laboratories Department.Contains Asbestos".penetrate the skin.) Unless approved of in advance by the Industrial Hygiene Unit. Preventive Medicine Services Division. the Industrial Hygiene Services. the anticipated duration of the operation.1 Air Sampling Where the contractor knows that some part of an operation requires the use or removal of asbestos materials. Detailed records shall be kept by the contractor of all persons employed in the process. All such containers that contain asbestos shall be clearly marked in English and Arabic: "Caution: Health Hazard .3. causing small tumors.0 Asbestos And Other Fibers Page 159 . They may not be cured unless every minute fiber is removed. 4. only that amount of asbestos material that is immediately required for the operation shall be moved to the work area.

7.6.6. or shipping containers.001. 4. 4.2 Cutting Shearing or punching shall be used in preference to sawing or drilling of asbestos. Where it is necessary to cut or saw materials containing asbestos using hand or power tools. February 1993 . Work practices for using or removing asbestos are given in Section 4. grouting.6. These signs shall be posted at readily visible locations near work areas and these notices shall read in both English and Arabic: Caution: ASBESTOS HEALTH HAZARD Respirator and protective overalls must be worn when entering this area. removing. Only persons directly concerned with the operation shall be permitted inside the area.1 Wetting/Ventilation The handling. wetting. it shall be done in a separate cordoned off area with an approved exhaust and dust collection system. foot protection. 4.4. mixing.1 Types The contractor shall provide approved disposable overalls. etc. GI 150. cutting. and gloves to prevent any airborne asbestos fibers from coming into contact with the body. cartons.7 Protective Clothing 4. or similar material containing asbestos from bags. 4. Before removing asbestos cement mortar.4.3 Protective Equipment Protective equipment shall be required for all instances where asbestos is used regardless of ventilation.6 Handling and Use 4. coating.0 Asbestos And Other Fibers Page 160 .5 Work Area The work area shall be clearly defined and where feasible roped off and notices displayed warning persons of the presence of asbestos dust. applying. head covering. the material shall be wetted or enclosed. Signs shall be posted at all approaches to the work area. or the operation shall be carried out under total exhaust ventilation. plaster. and spraying of asbestos materials shall be done in a wet state so as to prevent the emission of harmful fibers in excess of allowable concentration.

8.2 Contamination At the end of each shift.1 Type In normal circumstances. 4.3 Care All respiratory equipment shall be thoroughly checked. GI 150. 4. it is the contractor's responsibility to make sure that each worker be supplied with equipment that provides the level of protection required and of the proper fit.001. 4. however. dusty jobs (e.8. 4.9 Washing and Changing Facilities The contractor shall provide showering/washing facilities for all employees engaged in asbestos work. February 1993 . etc. 4.2 Use All employees shall be properly trained in the use of respiratory equipment before being engaged in any work with asbestos.7. 4. Under no conditions shall contaminated clothing be worn from the work site. Asbestos-contaminated clothes shall be packed and carried in sealed impermeable bags or containers and disposed of in accordance to Section 6.0 Asbestos And Other Fibers Page 161 .8. an approved filter type dust respirator will be adequate protection.3 Review The Loss Prevention Department and Industrial Hygiene Services shall review the types and applications of contractor's protective clothing for its' acceptability to Saudi Aramco. cleaned.) involving asbestos materials require air-supplied positive pressure respiratory equipment.7.8 Respiratory Equipment Where there is an unavoidable emission of asbestos dust.4. delogging. contaminated personal protective equipment shall be collected and disposed of in accordance to GI 150.001. 4. disinfected and stored at the end of each work period and before use by other persons.g. stripping.The contractor shall provide a sufficient amount of clothing to each employee working with asbestos to ensure that a complete change of clean protective clothing is available for the start of each shift. Also. Employees shall be careful to prevent contamination of street clothes from work clothes. demolition. the contractor shall supply a respirator approved by Industrial Hygiene Services and Loss Prevention Department to each employee.

11 Cleanliness of Work Areas and Equipment The contractor shall ensure that all machinery. The contractor shall provide suitable changing accommodations. equipment.001. The bags and containers shall be handled and disposed of in accordance to Section 6. GI 150. 4.0 Asbestos And Other Fibers Page 162 . work areas. 4.The contractor must ensure that employees use these facilities before leaving the job site at the end of each shift.Contains Asbestos".10 Disposal of Waste Asbestos Materials/Clothing All waste asbestos materials and disposal clothing shall be disposed of in sealed impermeable bags or containers.001. GI 150. All bags and containers shall be marked in both English and Arabic: "Caution: Health Hazard .4. and adjacent areas are kept free from asbestos dust and waste as provided in Section 5. February 1993 . disposal facilities for protective clothing worn during asbestos work and separate accommodations for street clothing not worn during working hours.

and provided with personal protection equipment. therefore.1. helmets. February 1993 . Where equipment is defective or there is no well-arranged.0 WELDING. forced ventilation and similar equipment shall be provided to all workers and to trainees in the immediate area. 5. Welding/cutting are safe operations if carried out in the correct manner. well-lit. and brazing and electric arc welding operations. cutting.Oxygen and Acetylene Equipment and Electric Arc Welding Equipment American National Standards: ANSI Z49. AND BRAZING This section outlines the principles involved and the precautions to be taken in gas welding.100 GI 355. It can promote rapid combustion.081 Work Permit System Control of Compressed Gas Cylinders Performance Qualifying Tests Of Welders And Welding Operations Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards: SAES W-4 SAES W-5 Welding Alloy Steels Field Stress Relieving Saudi Aramco Bottled Gas Manual: Section 6 Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety. grease and oil must never be used near oxygen as this could cause fire.1 Gases Oxygen (O2) is odorless.020 GI 401.1 Gas Welding: Oxy-Acetylene Equipment and Use Personnel working with welding equipment shall be trained. screens.1 ANSI Z87. hazards can arise. And Brazing Page 163 . CUTTING. Health and Environmental Requirements . INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2. Welding goggles. Cutting.1 NFPA 70 Safety In Welding and Cutting Practice For Occupational And Educational Eye And Face Protection National Electrical Code Safe Handling of Compressed Gases 5.Construction Safety Manual: Welding.5. or properly ventilated working place. competent.

acetylene is dissolved in acetone to prevent internal explosion. cylinders stored in the open should be protected from ground contact. (See GI 355.3 Storage Of Cylinders 5. furnaces. therefore. dry. Under no conditions shall acetylene be generated.0 Welding.1. or contact with water. piped (except in approved cylinder manifolds) or utilized at a pressure in excess of 15 psi gauge pressure. Control of Compressed Gas Cylinders. A jet of oxygen must never be permitted to strike an oily surface. Valve caps shall be kept in place when cylinders are not in use. And Brazing Page 164 . well-ventilated place prepared and reserved for that purpose. oil or other storage tanks.) 5. for Saudi Aramco color coding requirements. February 1993 .Oxygen cylinders or apparatus shall not be handled with oily hands or gloves.1.5. 1. Flammable substances shall not be stored within 50 feet of cylinder storage areas. handled.2 Color Coding of Cylinders Color coding can be of great help but also a potential source of danger as there is no internationally recognized standard color code. 5. Oxygen cylinders and flammable gas cylinders shall be stored separately.5% .6 meters (20 feet) apart or separated by a fire proof. Acetylene becomes unstable at pressures above 103 kPa (15 psig) which means it may explode. at least 6.2 Cylinders shall not be stored at temperatures exceeding 54o C (130o F). All cylinders should be chained or otherwise secured in an upright position. it is essential that acetylene cylinders be stored.020-4. Acetylene (C2H2) has a distinct odor often likened to that of garlic or sour apples.1. Acetylene burned with oxygen can produce a higher flame temperature than any other commercial gas. greasy clothes or enter fuel. Accordingly.1. or near highly flammable substances like gasoline. Warning: Regulated Acetylene pressures must never be allowed to exceed 103 kPa (15 psig) or it may explode.6 meters (5 feet) high partition. Inside the cylinder.020. and used in the vertical position to prevent the liquid acetone from escaping and damaging the valves and other equipment. Flammable substances such as oil and volatile liquids or corrosive substances should not be stored in the same area.3. extremes of weather. 5. All storage areas shall have Arabic and English "No Smoking Permitted" signs prominently displayed.81%). To prevent rusting. It is combustible when mixed with air over a wide range (2.1 Cylinders should be stored in a safe. they should not be stored near sources of heat such as radiators. Cutting.3. Refer to GI 355.

the valve shall be protected with the valve cap.1. for moving.Cylinders shall be stored out of the direct rays of the sun. Cutting.1. Unless a trolley or special carrier is used. 5. to avoid confusion.3. Smoking or any other source of ignition shall be prohibited near storage areas.3 Cylinder storage should be planned so that cylinders will be used in the order in which they are received from the supplier.2 All valves must be fully closed before a cylinder is moved.1. All wiring shall be in conduit and electric switches shall be located outside the room.3.4.1.4 All cylinder storage rooms shall be ventilated sufficiently so that explosive concentrations of gas cannot accumulate. February 1993 . 5. Empty and full cylinders must be stored separately with empty cylinders plainly marked as such.1 above. regulators and hoses should be detached from the cylinders.3. All electrical installations shall meet the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) for hazardous areas.1 Cylinders should never be lifted by their valves since the valves are not designed to take such stress. abuse.5. And Brazing Page 165 . and appropriately marked "No Smoking" as in Section 5. Empty cylinders should be segregated according to the type of gas they have held. in protective enclosures or sun shelters.0 Welding. 5. 5.4 Handling of Cylinders Serious accidents may result from the misuse. 5. or mishandling of cylinders.1.4.1. When the cylinder is not in use.

And Brazing Page 166 . dragged. even those marked empty.5. Loading and unloading shall take place carefully. thrown.3 If cylinders are to be lifted by a crane. Cylinders and valves should be kept clean. Valve sockets shall be kept free of grit. February 1993 . or as a support. Depleted cylinders shall be returned to the supplier with the valves closed and the valve protection caps in place. 5.5 Inspecting Equipment All equipment should be examined immediately before use and regularly maintained. Cylinders.4. 5. Cutting. Where a trolley is to be used for slinging.1.4.1.0 Welding. 5. Cylinders shall be secured to avoid any violent contact. used as rollers.5. its base should be strong enough to take the weight of the cylinders.1. the Bottled Gas Coordinator (Central Area Storehouse Department). should be treated as a possible hazard and handled with great care as they still contain some gas. No damaged or defective cylinder shall be used. Chain and wire rope slings can allow cylinders to slip. All welding operations shall be conducted in well ventilated areas.1.1 Only soapy water should be used to check for leaks.4 Cylinders in transit on vehicles shall have valve caps in place and be firmly secured to prevent movement.5. 5. the supplier of the gas. Do not lift a cylinder with an electromagnet.4. dirt.1. Presence of a leak is often indicated by a hissing sound or unusual changes in the torch flame. grease or oil. specially designed bottle holders with lifting eyes should be used. or Loss Prevention Department should be consulted. Cylinders shall not be dropped.5 When in doubt as to the proper handling of a compressed gas cylinder or its contents.

Equipment should be fitted with the correct pressure regulators and a regular check should be made to ensure that the regulator is working properly.4 Means of torch ignition should be readily available. The torch nozzle should be kept closed.1.7 Cylinders in use should be kept upright on a custom-built stand fitted with a bracket to accommodate the hoses and equipment or otherwise secured. even extinguished ones. 5.5.2 Hoses should be used for one type of gas only and color coded for identification. Joint fittings or lines made of copper should not be used and acetylene should not be allowed to come into contact with copper pipe work or tubing. 5.5. It is equally dangerous to rest blowpipes.1.6 It is dangerous to let the torch flame come into contact with gas cylinders or for the lighted torch itself to be left unattended.5. Only approved materials shall be used for acetylene systems.5. A friction lighter shall be used for this purpose.5 Acetylene can form explosive compounds in contact with certain metals or alloys. Cutting. "Empty" drums which have contained low flash point liquids are known to have become lethal bombs when a hot welding torch was laid down on them. 5.5.5.5. All connections should be made by clips or crimps. particularly unalloyed copper or silver. An acetylene cylinder valve wrench shall be available at all times for the cylinder in use. but some can lead to very dangerous conditions. Most are more frightening than harmful.1. The hoses used for acetylene and for oxy gen shall not be interchangeable. Torches shall never be sat down while lit.1. on old drums. 5. And Brazing Page 167 .5.1. February 1993 . 5. They should be examined before use for any signs of splitting which might give rise to leakage.1.6 Faults It is not uncommon for minor "explosions" to occur during welding or cutting.3 Connections and check valves should be regularly examined.0 Welding.1. The metal cap should be kept in place to protect the valve when the cylinder is not connected for use. 5.

There are four general groupings of these faults: 1 Snapout can occur during use when: • • • Both regulators are set at an incorrect pressure Torch nozzle obstructed Nozzle held too close to the work Corrective action: • • • • • • 2 Completely shut both torch valves Check regulator setting Check cylinder pressures Check nozzles Re-light Ensure adequate gas flow Backfire can occur on lighting up when: • • Regulators not set to correct pressure Light applied before flow of gas mixture properly established Corrective action: • • • • • 3 Close both torch valves. Usually this mixing of gases occurs when the hoses have been disconnected from regulators or torches or when a new hose is being used for the first time. Usually one of the hoses will have burst and possibly ignited. oxygen first Check cylinder pressures Check and adjust regulator settings Cool torch and check nozzle orifice for obstruction Re-light A flashback is very dangerous.0 Welding. Flashback is caused by gases being mixed in the hose(s). Cutting. And Brazing Page 168 . Preventive action: • • • • • • • Use flashback flame arrestors for regulator and torch Ensure all connections are tight Ensure cylinder valves are open and torch valves closed Set regulators to the required pressures Purge each hose separately and consecutively by opening the torch valve and allowing gas to flow for sufficient time to ensure only pure gas remains in the hoses Close the valve for each gas as the purge is completed This purge should be carried out only in the open or in extremely well-ventilated areas Corrective action: • Close both torch valves February 1993 .5. Sometimes it is due to loose connections.

Hose connections shall be kept free of grease and oil.7 Close both cylinder valves Extinguish hose if alight Repair equipment and hoses Fuel Gas and Oxygen Manifolds Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall bear the name of the substance they contain in English and Arabic letters at least 1-inch high which shall be either painted on the manifold or on a sign permanently attached to it. well ventilated.2 Weldi ng Connections In each welding circuit there are three main connections: 1) the welding lead. manifold and header hose connections shall be capped. DC should be used for welding operations in any situation where the effect of electric shock is likely to be extreme. however. It should be remembered that a nominal 100V supply has. They shall not be located within enclosed spaces. 2) the welding return.2. Using DC. When not in use. And Brazing Page 169 . Adapters shall not be used to permit the interchange of hose.• • • 5. Manifold hose connections. 5.2. Using AC. etc. a 60-80V supply will usually suffice. including both ends of the supply hose that lead to the manifold.1.2. in fact. Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall be placed in safe. 5.0 Welding. a peak voltage of 141V. Nothing shall be placed on top of a manifold. and accessible locations. such as in damp and confined spaces (tanks. needs to be somewhat higher so that means of stabilizing and regulating the arc current can be introduced into the circuit.). Cutting. For arc welding. an 80-85V supply will suffice although some of the latest techniques need an open circuit voltage of up to 100V between electrode and work. 5.2 Electric Arc Welding Arc welding is a process for joining metals by heating with an electric arc. For these reasons. are required. two welding leads.5.1 February 1993 . when in use.2. shall be such that the hose cannot be interchanged between fuel gas and oxygen manifolds and supply header connections. which will damage the manifold or interfere with the quick closing of the valves. The voltage supplied. 3) the welding ground.1 Voltage The voltage across the welding arc is normally within the range 20-40V. boilers. 5. the electrode lead and the work lead.

5.2.2 The welding return is the conductor carrying the current back from the work to the point of supply.2. Bolts are unsatisfactory for stranded conductors. cables should be additionally protected by stringing overhead or by using cable covers. 5. because all the current fed to the arc has to be conducted back to the supply point. It is recommended that the welding ground be bonded to the ground of the main supply system by a separate substantial conductor. Welding grounds and returns should be securely attached to the work by cable lugs. If joints become necessary. spent stubs. 5. Cutting. The frames of all fixed arc welding and cutting machines shall be grounded either through a third wire in the cable containing the circuit conductor or through a separate wire which is grounded at the source of the current.2. standard plug and socket coupling shall be used.4 Welding cable insulation needs to be abrasion resistant to withstand normal treatment over rough ground and the wear inflicted by foot and vehicular traffic.0 Welding.2. The ground should be of low impedance so that there can be no rise in the potential of the work and so that sufficient fault current passes quickly enough to cut off the supply if necessary. The current involved could be as high as 300 amperes on a hand welding operation. This high current capacity is essential. And Brazing Page 170 .The welding lead is the conductor carrying the welding current from the point of supply to the electrode holder. by clamps in the case of stranded conductors. If joints become necessary. Holders should be unplugged when not in use. since the strands can loosen under the bolt head and become detached (see Manufacturers Grounding Specifications for Electrically Powered Equipment and Engine Powered Equipment).5. The welding return should be used to ground the metal case of the welding machine. February 1993 . damaged cable shall not be used.2.5 Electrode holders shall be constructed to accommodate all sizes of electrodes and with an ejector for hot. or by bolts for strip conductors. 5. Splices are not allowed in welding cables.2. standard plug and socket couplings shall be used.2.2. Its conductivity should at least equal that of the welding lead. Where feasible.3 A continuous welding ground is essential and indispensable for conductors since electric currents as low as 50 milliamperes can be fatal. They should be regularly examined for cuts or abrasions to the insulation.

However. Other sources of safety hazards related to cables and connections are: cracked insulation is an obvious source of hazard producing shorts to ground eventually leading to increase of conductor resistance. covers and panels in place. With noload voltages approaching 100+ volts. The handle itself shall be made of non-flammable insulating material and be free from joints or holes. and removal of these covers and panels will reduce the cooling of the engine and generator.2. it may not return to its 'off' position without assistance. this button will 'pop out' once the engine is switched off. 3.3 Protective Measures 5. and loss of point-of-use welder capacity is a set of welder leads in poor condition. • February 1993 .1 The need for the operator to take safety precautions and preventive measures during the operation of welding machines to ensure that no safety-related incident occurs cannot be overemphasized. And Brazing Page 171 . The resulting failure to start will delay your work while a new battery is fitted. A major source of safety hazards. 5. 5. Ground Fault Interrupters are required. Placards must be placed on the welding machine. for example. significant hazard of electrocution to personnel exists. They ensure the optimum flow of cooling air.7 Auxiliary Power Outlets Most welding machines are furnished with an alternator which produces 3 KVA of 115 and 230 volts. The following is a list of precautions and operating considerations to take into account when operating a 400 amp arc welding machine.2. As a safety factor. dust or sand.0 Welding. or a recharge cycle is completed. covers and panels in place when operating the machine: the arc welding machine is designed to operate with all its doors. poor and inconsistent welding performance. Ensure that the engine protection push button 'pops out' when the engine is switched off.3. where power output exceeds 5 KV.2. or of the wrong size for the length of cable being run.6 A shield should be fitted between electrode holder and handle to prevent live elements from being touched. it will quickly drain the unit's battery. Maintain welding and ground cables and connections in good condition. 1. especially in wet areas or when working on metal structures. if the unit becomes clogged with dirt. 2.5. If the button remains depressed. resulting in overheating and premature failure of the unit.5. Under normal circumstances. Cutting. all power hand tools which are not double insulated should be grounded to the welder frame. All users are strongly encouraged to read the equipment's operating manual to ensure reliable and safe operation.2. Keep all doors. a 'jump start' arranged.

Cable sizes and lengths must be as recommended by the manufacturer.4 When welding or cutting material that is supported by a crane. Grounding cables shall only be connected to the work. Inadequate or weak cable connections can also introduce sparking hazards.• combining sets of low capacity cables to reach a distant welding site can greatly reduce the effective welding power available to the welding machine. 5. Cutting.3 Operators of arc welding equipment must always switch off the current to the electrode holder and remove the electrode whenever it is to be set down and is not actually in use. Wherever possible.3. 5.5 Forced ventilation shall be arranged wherever work is to be carried out in a confined area. When welding is in progress. This can damage the control. not to the crane or rigging.0 Welding.3. all combustible material should be removed from the work area. All completed work should be marked "HOT".3. February 1993 . and extra resistance which reduces effective welding machine capacity. potential shorts to ground. 5. 5. And Brazing Page 172 . Gas cylinders should be protected from falling sparks. Leaving the cable coiled on the machine alters the current flow and disrupts the welding process.2 Sparks and molten or hot metal coming from the work area can easily set fire to combustible materials near or below the working area.5. as follows (for 400 amp machine): Combined length of electrode and work cable up to 150 feet 150-200 feet 200-250 feet Minimum Cable Size 2/0 3/0 4/0 4. Do not adjust the 'current control' while welding is in progress. If it cannot be removed. 5. because of the buildup of resistance from the extra length of the leads. a shield or an effective screen should be provided to protect the suspension ropes or chains. Larger-capacity cables must be used to reach distant sites. the full length of cable must be stretched out on the ground. Suitable metal bins shall be provided for spent electrode stubs as they are usually hot when discarded and can easily cause a fire. it should be covered with fireproof material. Dry chemical fire extinguishers should be kept available while work is in progress.3.

And Brazing Page 173 . If there is any doubt or if the tank is known to have had any kind of flammable or explosive content. Screens should be designed and placed so as not to restrict the flow of air for ventilation purposes.1.4 February 1993 . Note: The use of oxygen for blowing out containers and small tanks is forbidden.4 Welding and Cutting: Tanks. Air line respirators may be needed for men working inside such places. Extreme care should be taken in considering methods of tank welding and cutting as these jobs are hazardous operations unless correct safety measures are taken. welding hoods.1 Helmets. the hoses and equipment shall be taken outside overnight in case of any leakage that could occur. No gas cylinders should ever be allowed into such an area.2 Goggles are required to protect the eyes of the welder from pieces of flying slag chips during electric arc welding.6. and goggles are necessary to protect eyes and face against heat and the effect of the intense light emitted by welding operations. The hoses and equipment used inside must be in excellent condition. 5. The responsible supervisor should make a check before permitting any work to begin. Vessels and Drums Careful tests should be made to establish that the tank. ) 5.5. Cutting.6. It is essential that past contents of the tank. (See General And Civil II. These goggles should also be worn under the regular welding hoods. Contact area Loss Prevention for guidance and information.5. 5.) Welding and cutting on drums is strictly controlled and. vessel or drum be identified. They should be fitted with opaque side pieces.3 Electric welding operations must be effectively screened to prevent nearby personnel from being affected by harmful radiation.1. Work Permit System. in most cases. Screens should be made from fire resistant materials or should be suitably treated with a fire resistant compound.6.6. Work Permit System. resulting in a build up of gas.0 Welding. 5. vessel or drum is free from explosive flammable vapors or substances. 5. Where work in confined spaces has to take place over several days. it should be cleaned and purged thoroughly prior to welding or cutting. prohibited. (See General And Civil II.5 Confined Spaces It is vital that forced ventilation be maintained in confined spaces at all times.6 Personnel Protection 5.

Gloves should be long enough to protect wrists and forearms. The risk of this energy harming the operator or other personnel can be minimized by the proper use of protective clothing and shielding. Arc-eye or flash burn is a well known condition in welding operations and is due to the eyes being exposed to ultraviolet rays. And Brazing Page 174 . and infrared rays. shielding. Cutting. protective sleeves of similar materials should be worn. when working in confined areas. molten metal. and radiation. Leather. Lens shall be distinctively marked to identify approved lens shade. suitably reinforced at points of maximum wear.Gloves are necessary protection to the hands against heat.0 Welding. Arc Welding2. Lens Shade Guide: 1. is the material most generally worn. Torch Brazing3. 5.2 Respiratory Effects The risk of being gassed in normal welding operations is slight. Pant cuffs shall never be worn inside of the safety boot. health hazards in welding operations fall into two classes: hazards from radiant energy and hazards from dusts and fumes. however. and falling metal.7. ultraviolet rays. and distance. The effects normally wear off within two days. The risk of exposure is lessened by wearing protective clothing.2.7.1 Radiant Energy The process of welding produces radiant energy in the form of visible light. and generally no permanent damage is caused. This condition is a superficial burn on the outer layer of the eye.7. When gloves are not long enough. extremely painful and can easily be avoided by the use of eye protective lens or shields.6.1 Oxy-acetylene welding operations can cause the oxygen and nitrogen of the air to unite to form nitrogen oxides. In well ventilated areas this 10 to 14 3 to 6 4 to 8 February 1993 . flying sparks. 5. Gas Welding5.7 Health Hazards Apart from the obvious hazards of physical burns. 5.5. 5. however. The condition is. Exposure of the skin to infrared and ultraviolet rays can result in irritation and burning. Welding protective lens shall be tempered glass. sparks. a forced ventilation system should be in operation to remove any build up of hazardous gases.5 Safety boots and leggings are essential to provide effective protection against heat.

exposure to concentrated fumes may be irritating and in some cases dangerous. the amount produced is small and providing adequate ventilation is used. In oxy -acetylene and electric arc welding. The main problem with this gas is that the welder does not appear to be affected at the time. the real effects take place some 6 to 24 hours after exposure. February 1993 . Although welding cannot be regarded in general as an extremely hazardous occupation.0 Welding. And Brazing Page 175 . 5. and safe practices for dealing with them must be established.7. There are many other dangers which can arise when welding or cutting under specific conditions or on particular metals.2. These problems must be recognized before the job starts.5. It is essential that each operation be analyzed before work starts and that the control measures are correctly applied. copper-bearing. Hazardous operations include: welding on manganese steel. in confined areas or where the welder is working very close to the job. a highly toxic gas.does not cause any problems. galvanized material. Cutting. the risk is negligible. however. material which has been degreased or on material which has been painted with lead. or chromate-containing paint. Significant and sometimes dangerous amounts of ozone can be formed when inert gas shielded welding is being carried out. the amount of nitrogen oxides breathed can rapidly reach toxic levels.2 All welding operations produce quantities of ozone.

fire. accident. transporting. storage.6.002 GI 610. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2. as well as the emergency procedures to be adopted in the case of misfire.Construction Safety Manual: Explosive Materials Page 176 . and Use of Commercial Explosives and Blasting Agents in Construction and Demolition Explosive Materials Code Work Permit System Requisitioning.7-89 Safety Requirements for Transportation. contact the Resources Planning Department.001 GI 1183.215 GI 1310. Health and Environmental Requirements American National Standards: ANSI A10. whose requirements must be adhered to at all times.015 GI 475. All blasting operations in Saudi Aramco are strictly controlled and the use of explosive materials by contractors is prohibited without prior written approval by Company representatives. Handling. handling and use of explosive materials.00 Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety.0 EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS The use of explosive materials within construction is extensive and. Those responsible must consider the acquisition. For contractor In-Kingdom blasting operations. Receiving.001 GI 475. Blasting Services Unit for all blasting requirements. etc. The acquisition and use of explosive materials in Saudi Arabia are strictly controlled by the Saudi Arab Government. Storing and Issuing Explosives Blasting Near Existing Facilities Use Of Explosives In Construction Special Regulations for the Use of Explosives in Seismic Operations Transporting Explosives on Company Owned/Leased/Rented Motor Transport Vehicles Transportation Of Dangerous Articles Aboard Saudi Aramco Aircraft NFPA 495-90 National Safety Council Industrial Data Sheets: I-644-90 I-730-86 Treatment Of Extraneous Electricity In Electric Blasting Ammonium Nitrate / Fuel Oil Mixtures As Blasting Agents February 1993 . the responsibilities falling upon supervisory staff are considerable. Project Support Services Division.100 GI 355. Storage. whether large or small quantities are handled.

which may be driven vertically or raked. housekeeping. timber or any combination of the three.0 PILING OPERATIONS Piling operations attract many of the problems associated with other types of construction work: access. Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety. GI 7. Soil investigation reports of the area. • • The nature and purpose of the operation.1 Before Work Starts In order that piling operations may be undertaken with the minimum risk to men and equipment.Excavations Crane Safety Handbook (Page 99) National Safety Council Data Sheet: Special Hazard Bulletin X128. Property Damage from Blasting. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2. GI 7. Piles may be of steel. GI 7. concrete. Piling operations fall into two categories: driving load-bearing piles. driving sheet piles.025. GI 7. Piling equipment can vary from a simp le air-operated hand-held hammer to a large complex rig. Testing and Maintenance of Wire Rope Slings Inspection And Testing Requirements Of Elevating / Lifting Equipment 7.026. The standard of supervision should be high. unguarded machinery. Health and Environmental Requirements . Heavy equipment and the stress and vibration imposed upon that equipment give rise to hazards peculiar to piling operations. February 1993 . the following factors should be considered before work starts. etc. as well as the standard and maintenance of equipment.7.Construction Safety Manual: Piling Operations Page 177 . and Similar Sources ASME Standard: Section I Section VII Power Boilers Pressure Vessels Work Permit System Mobile Heavy Equipment Operator Testing and Certification Crane and Heavy Equipment Accident Reporting Procedures Inspection. and.029.030.100. Pile Driving.

then.) 7.1. In all such cases.8 meters (6 feet) high. shall be provided to maintain stability of the pile driver rig. Proper ladder access must be provided to the pile gates. the proper Work Permits should be obtained before any work is undertaken.3 Inspection Air compressors or steam boilers must be carefully examined and all hoses and couplings checked both for leaks and general condition. Where piling operations are within a restricted area.1 Cranes Cranes used for both lifting and piling operations should be of an adequate size and capacity to perform the work safely.1. 7. Guards shall be provided across the top of the head block to prevent the cable from jumping out of the sheaves. February 1993 . All steam and air hoses should be fitted with a regulator valve and a quick acting shut-off valve for emergency. experienced in piling operations. under competent supervision.2 Pile Gates Sufficient timber or steel must be available for the construction of pile gates. All equipment must be carefully inspected before being used with particular attention to the following. and where they are over 1. 7. Equipment of adequate capacity to perform the operation should be assembled.5 Timber Block Stop blocks shall be provided for the leads to prevent the hammer from being raised against the head block.• Location and nature of any underground services in the area. handrails or rigger's belts must be provided.1.030. the distance of the hammer from the center point of the crane must be calculated and this distance used to ascertain the safe working load.1.7. which should be checked with the various departments through the Saudi Aramco Construction Engineer. (See GI 7. Competent supervision.. counterbalances.0 Piliing Operations Page 178 . Where cranes are to be used for driving raking piles with a drop hammer or driving piles below the level of the crane using extended leaders. Softwood wedges are likely to split and must not be used. is essential for piling work. 7. the hammer will be suspended from the crane at a greater radius than the boom angle indicator will show. 7.4 Wedges An adequate supply of hardwood wedges should be obtained for adjusting piles while pitching. precisely located by careful hand digging. Outriggers.1. etc.

When driving raking piles. Particular attention should be paid to the extractor wedges and the condition of the gripping faces. the winch or crane operator. the pile. Adequate access. such as a cradle or a properly secured ladder. 7. and machine must all be in the same line. The topman must wear stout gloves when pitching.2. must be provided for the topman when pitching sheet piles. leaders. The foreman must be present and so positioned that he can be seen by the crane or winch operator and the man standing by the valve. air. no attempt should be made to clear it from the leaders by lifting or booming up. If loft platforms are provided.2 Driving Workmen should stand clear of the operation while driving is in progress.6 Ground Support The ground upon which the crane or rig will stand should be firm and level. timber or burlap packing should be placed between the lifting gear and the pile. A system of signals must be arranged between the foreman. The pile head should be cut off and the debris cleared from the leaders.2. The emergency shut-off valve and the crane or winch controls must be manned at all times during driving.Fixed leads shall be provided with ladder and adequate attachment points so that the loft worker may engage his safety belt lanyard to the leads. Workmen must not walk under piles that are suspended from extractors. February 1993 .1. Where the head of a pile becomes distorted through driving.7. so that the emergency shutdown does not depend on verbal communication. Digger mats or a hard-core standing should be provided if the ground is likely to subside under the high ground loading imposed by driving or extracting piles. Where hollow section or concrete piles are lifted with chains or wire slings. 7. or electric operated extractor should be used. Steam/air hose leading to the hammer or jet pipe and all hoses shall be securely attached with 1/4" chain or cable to prevent whip lash. A steam.3 Pile Extraction No attempt should be made to extract piles which have been hammer-driven by lifting or booming up with a crane. which should not be smooth. and the valve operator.2 Driving Piles 7. they shall be protected with standard guardrails. Quick release shackles should be examined before each use.1 Pitching Piles should only be lifted and positioned in the pile gate or onto the leaders or rig with sound lifting gear adequate for the purpose.0 Piliing Operations Page 179 . 7. Under no circumstances should any man touch the hammer until all valves are closed. 7.

men are exposed to the hazards commonly associated with all types of construction work. preferably of the muff type. 7.4. etc.0 Piliing Operations Page 180 . In addition to these special hazards.030).4 Piling operations should never be undertaken except under competent supervision and with a crew experienced in this class of work. 7. stout gloves.2 At the start of each shift. safety shoes.1 Men handling piles or working on piling operations should always wear safety helmets.3 All other equipment should be inspected daily for defects.7. 7.4. February 1993 .4. safety glasses.7. Crane operators shall have a valid Saudi Arab Government heavy equipment license and a valid Saudi Aramco certificate (See GI 7. 7.4.5 Piling operations are a construction process with special hazards.4 General Precautions 7. hammers and extractors should be carefully checked for loose bolts.4. and be equipped with ear protection. and precautions against these general hazards must not be neglected.

6 Should there be any doubt as to the type of marking and protection required for roadwork in any location. lights. 8.0 ROADWORKS A contractor engaged in roadwork is not only responsible for the safety of his own men. Failure to do this can have disastrous results.Construction Safety Manual: Roadworks Page 181 . Road closure plans must be submitted to Loss Prevention before roads are closed.100 8.1 Saudi Aramco organizations can obtain barriers.4 Permanent road signs and striping shall be restored before the roadway is returned to service. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 1021. at night and in all weather conditions. February 1993 . Consequently. and Maintenance of Traffic Controls (Appendix D) Work Permit System GI 2.1.1.3 Activities which produce dust shall be kept to a minimum. warning devices must not be put in place until they are needed. he also has an obligation to protect the public from potential construction hazards.1. Excavation. the Loss Prevention engineer for the area should be consulted.1. Contractors shall provide their own barriers..5 The surface of any highway. during the day. They must be promptly removed when work is complete.8. 8.2 To avoid creating a traffic hazard.1 General 8.1. etc. 8.1. lights.000 Street and Road Construction. 8. from the Maintenance Department during normal working hours. or sidewalk shall be level and in good condition before any barriers and markers are removed. 8. the marking of construction sites and the safe and efficient diversion and control of traffic must be properly planned and executed. street. etc.

8.2 Street and Road Construction.8. February 1993 .000).1. If conditions do not permit this.9 In addition to the foregoing. excavation work in residential areas shall be entirely enclosed.000. Both flagmen shall be in sight of each other. covered over. the work area will be marked by lights spaced 10 meters (30 feet) apart.6 meter (2 feet) and 0.8. 8.7 A flagman. then a third man shall be positioned where he can see and be seen by the other two men in order to signal them to start or stop traffic. and use reflective signs or flags. 8. Flagmen shall be stationed in an illuminated area.1. 8.9 meters (3 feet) wide and equipped with standard guardrails. industrial.1. It shall be the duty of the flagmen to control the flow of traffic in a safe manner. At night. flagmen shall wear light-reflecting vests and gloves. Traffic control signals shall be in accordance with GI 1021. shall be posted at least 50 meters (165 feet) from the work site at the entrance barricade and another flagman at the exit barricade.0 Roadworks Page 182 .9 meter (3 feet) above grade. Warning lights used in oil operations.10 Excavations in sidewalks or areas of expected pedestrian traffic shall be provided with close-planked walkways or bridges 0. and Maintenance Traffic Controls See Appendix D (GI 1021. equipped with a safety vest and a red flag. or company housing areas shall be weather proof and positioned 0.8 During darkness. or roped-off.1. Excavations.

scaffolds.Construction Safety Manual: Working Places.Fixed-Safety Requirements Work Permit System Personal Flotation Devices for Work Over. ladders.1985 Ladders . On or Near Water. Scaffold products from different manufacturers shall not be mixed on a scaffold.001.1a.100.28.2 . Inc. American National Standards Institute: Uniform Building Code ANSI A10.020. On or Near Water Safety Requirements For Scaffolding (formerly 1009. AND SCAFFOLDING Every contractor and every employer of workmen has a legal and contractual responsibility to ensure that each place at which his men work is safe and that it remains safe so long as men work there. each supervisor is responsible for ensuring that every man working under his direction or control has a safe working place and a safe means of getting to and from every working place. Saudi Aramco Instructions and Standards: GI 2. Similarly. SAES -P-123. Personal Flotation Devices for Work Over. or other means of support shall be provided and properly maintained. GI 8. Health and Environmental Requirements .1982./ANSI A14. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS The Standards used for guidance in this section of the Construction Safety Manual are those of the American National Standards Institute. Scaffolding.1990 Portable Metal Ladders ANSI A14.Portable Wood Safety Requirements ANSI A14. and Scaffolding Page 183 . (ANSI) and US Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1910.9. Ladders.3 .006) Lighting Utilization February 1993 .0 WORKING PLACES. GI 6.Ladders.8 . Where work cannot safely be done on the ground or from part of a building or permanent structure. then those products can be used. unless they are specifically designed to be used together.1988 Scaffolding-Safety Requirements ANSI A14. Where scaffold manufacturers products meet other scaffold standards that are equivalent to or higher than ANSI requirements. Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety. LADDERS.1 .1984 Ladders .

Stairs (permanent or temporary) shall have all treads properly secured and shall be fitted with handrails throughout their length and conform to the Uniform Building Code.1. (9. footbridges. and Scaffolding Page 184 . Where men. CFR Part 1910. Ladders. Holes and gaps shall be guarded or securely covered. Should the provision of these safeguards be impracticable. parts of a structure. shall be provided with a guardrail system and toeboards (permanent or temporary) at all edges from which men.2. the ramp shall be fitted with stepping cleats at 0.0 Working Places. When a ramp is to be used by the general public.9. every working place shall be safe and of adequate dimensions.8 meters (6 feet) or more. which men use in the course of their work or for a permanent or temporary access.28. etc. etc. General 9.6.1.1 Working Places.1990 Vehicle . Code of Federal Regulations. 9. or materials could fall 1. or materials could fall 1. 9.1. a guardrail system (consisting of toprails and midrails) and toeboards shall be provided.90 National Electrical Code (NEC) 9.. Handrails shall be provided. its slope shall not exceed 1 vertical to 4 horizontal.5 and 9. Section I.5 Ramps Where the slope of a ramp exceeds 1 vertical to 4 horizontal.ANSI A92. Safety Requirements for Scaffolding National Safety Council Data Sheets: Data Sheet 568. Job-Made Ladders NFPA 70 . Ladders shall conform to the requirements set out in 9.Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices US. (See SAES -P-123) 9. shall be used.3 meter (1 foot) intervals.3 Lighting Every working place and every means of getting to and from a working place shall be provided with adequate lighting which shall be properly maintained. other means of preventing falls. such as safety belts.2 Access and Egress A safe means of getting to and from a working place shall be provided and used. see Personal Protective Equipment.1 Falls Within Saudi Aramco. February 1993 .9.4 Prevention of Falls Permanent decking. tools.2 . tools.1. 9. For further information.8 meters (6 feet) or more. walkways.6) of this Manual.6. 29.1.

February 1993 . unless such wall was originally designed to do so and is in a safe condition to be self-supporting. 9. and other debris must be cleared up immediately.1. 9.1. If work being done is likely to reduce the stability of an existing structure or building.9. No wall sector which is more than one story in height. mud. Unstable structures shall not be left unsupported over night.1.8 Slipping and Tripping Contractors are responsible for maintaining good housekeeping to prevent slipping. Oil spills.10 Insecure Structures Unstable or weak structures shall be supported by guys. taking wind force and storm conditions into consideration.9. bracing or other means of support shall be used. or other fixings where necessary. tripping. shall be securely fixed between the toeboard and midrail to prevent falling objects. supports. and falling. 18 gauge wire.0 Working Places. Temporary guardrails shall be placed to prevent workers from falling. All walls shall be left in a stable condition at the end of each shift by bracing support jacks. 9. timbers and/or guywired. shall be permitted to stand alone without lateral bracing. or where men have to cross. 1/2 inch mesh or equivalent.9 Roof Work Where work is done on or from the roof of a building or structure. Men shall not be permitted to walk or work on steel work or other surfaces on which paint or cement wash is still wet. workers shall be equipped with safety belts that are securely anchored to the structure. 9. Ladders. or other suitable covering must be provided to prevent men and materials falling from or through the roof.1. work on. adequate protection in the form of crawling boards. If roof work is accomplished on pitched roofs with a slope greater than 1:4. protective coverings shall be erected or No.6 Falling Material Where there is danger of men being struck by falling material. During storms or high winds. roof ladders. scrap. stays. workers shall not be working on a roof or scaffold that is exposed to the weather. and Scaffolding Page 185 . or work from fragile roofs or surfaces.1.7 Hot Surfaces Suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent men coming into contact with any hot surface.

1.1 Selection 9.2 Metal ladders.2. condition.3 Approved rescue equipment that meets the requirements of GI 6.2.3 Aluminum ladders shall not be used where there is a likelihood of contact with materials harmful to aluminum.0 Working Places.11 Work Over Water 9. wet cement. etc.1 A ladder must be of the proper length for the job to be done.2 Ladders and Stepladders The safety of a ladder depends on four important factors: selection.1. a guardrail system and toeboards. Such ladders shall have a warning notice attached to guard against use near electrical equipment. suitable life vests shall be worn and a safety belt or harness securely fixed to a dropline. February 1993 . over or near water. Ladders shall comply with the referenced ANSI or equivalent codes.020 in the form of life rings with life lines. and properly maintained. 9.2 Wherever the provision of a guardrail system and toeboards. and ladders which are wet shall not be used near electrical equipment with exposed live conductors..9.11. and Scaffolding Page 186 . where necessary.1. 9. 9. position and use. first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). fencing or other suitable barriers is impracticable. 9. fencing or other suitable barriers shall be provided for the protection of the worker.2. If it is to be used for access or as a working place.9. Ladders.1.11. etc. 9. or if for any reason men are outside the protection of these safeguards.1.1. such as caustic liquids. Men shall be thoroughly trained in the use of all protective and rescue equipment.1. it shall ris e to a height of 36 inches to 42 inches above the landing place or above the highest rung to be reached by the feet of the man using the ladder.1 Where men work on. 9.2.11. damp lime. a suitably equipped rescue boat shall be readily available. ladders with metal reinforced side rails.

2.2.2. 9. 9.2. that a man stationed at the base will be unable to control a ladder more than 6 meters (20 feet) in length. etc.0 Working Places.1 Each ladder shall be examined before use.2 Rungs shall be properly mortised into side rails. 9.3.3 Position 9. blocks.3.4 Metal reinforcing shall be on the underside of the rungs and where reinforcing is on only one side of the side rails. runways or scaffolds. The area at the base of a ladder must be kept clear.3.2.e. barrels. Side rails must be securely tied off to prevent movement. loose. decayed or damaged rungs or cleats. or with other faulty equipment shall be tagged and removed from service. Cleats shall be inset by 2. Ladders shall not be used in a horizontal position as platforms.2..3 Whenever possible. using side guys. Cleats shall be uniformly spaced 30.25 centimeters (7/8 inch).9. Rungs or cleats shall not be used to support planks. that too shall be on the underside. It must be understood.2. or stationing a man at the base. Those with split or broken side rails. one meter out to four meters up). Where secure fixing is impracticable. broken. shall not be used as a means of support.2. Ladders. 9.3. 9.9.5 Both side rails of a ladder shall be evenly supported at the upper resting place.2 Condition 9. 9. and Scaffolding Page 187 . or filler blocks used on the side rails between the cleats.1 The side rails of a ladder shall be equally supported on a firm level surface.2. missing. other measures must be taken to prevent movement by securing at the base.3. however. Boxes.2 Ladders shall not be supported on their rungs or cleats.5 centimeters (1 foot) between centers. February 1993 .2.2. ladders shall be set at an angle of 75o to horizontal ground (i.

4 Use 9.9 Where ladders have to be suspended. personnel shall check their shoes for freedom from grease.9. 9.2. the door should either be locked.2.1 Where an extension ladder is used fully extended.2.7 Ladder landing places shall be provided at least every 9 meters (30 feet) of height and shall be fitted with a guardrail system and toeboards. Here the rung or cleat should be level with the platform. Where long ladders are used. If a ladder is erected close to a doorway.2.4. the minimum overlap depends on the extension ladder length.6 Where there is a possibility of a ladder being struck by moving vehicles or equipment. and overlap should be as follows (examples): 9. or be secured in the open position with a man on guard or properly barricaded. a man should be placed on guard or a space at the base should be securely fenced off. They shall always step through.2.2. 9.75 to 10. oil or mud. 9.2 Before mounting a ladder. February 1993 .97 to 14.8 A ladder should always be placed so that there is space behind each rung or cleat for a proper foothold. Ladders.63 meters (36 to 48 feet) = 1. both side rails shall be lashed top and bottom so as to provide equal support. they shall also be lashed at the center to prevent lateral movement.3.4. 9. shut.3. 9. the rail extensions at the top of the ladder.22 meters (4 feet) overlap 10.9.52 meters (5 feet) overlap Splicing or lashing ladders together shall not be permitted. Holes in decking through which ladders pass shall only be enough to permit passage of the man using the ladder. not around.2.0 Working Places.3. particularly at the landing platform.3. There should be no obstruction in the way of a man's foot.97 meters (32 to 36 feet) = 1. and Scaffolding Page 188 .

and Scaffolding Page 189 .5 meters (15 feet) in length. offset with a platform between each ladder.1 centimeters (15 inches) but not more than 50.2. If ladders are to connect different landings.2. or if simu ltaneous two-way traffic is expected.08 by 10.5 meters (15 feet) long. 5.4.9.0 Working Places. When ascending or descending personnel shall face the ladder and keep both hands on the ladder.6 by 4.08 by 10.4.6 Job-made ladders shall be constructed for intended use. If a ladder is to provide the only means of access or exit from a working area for 25 or more employees. Ladders. The width of single cleat ladders shall be at least 38.2.5 A man working on or from a ladder must always have a secured handhold and both feet on the same rung or cleat.16 centimeters (2 by 4 inches) lumber shall be used for side rails of single cleat ladders up to 4. 9.08 by 15.4. securely fixed to a dropline (life line). Wood cleats shall have the following minimum dimensions when made of woods that meet ANSI requirements for ladders: February 1993 .5 meters (12 to 15 feet) in length.3 Single rung and single cleat ladder should be used by only one man at a time. a double cleat ladder shall be installed. Personnel shall not run up or down or slide down a ladder at any time. two or more separate ladders shall be used.2.6 meters (12 feet) in length. If the work to be done requires the use of both hands. Single cleat ladders shall not exceed 4.8 centimeters (20 inches) between rails at the top. Materials shall be raised or lowered using a handline after being securely tied or placed in a basket. or if the length required exceeds this maximum length.24 centimeters (2 by 6 inches) lumber for double cleat ladders from 3. Tools may be carried in pockets or on special belts provided there is no risk of injury and movement is not impaired.5 meters (15 feet) in length between supports (base and top landing). Only one person shall be on a ladder at a time. 5. A guardrail system and toeboards shall be erected on the exposed sides of the platforms. 9. 5. 9. Double cleat ladders on Saudi Aramco construction sites shall not exceed 4. a safety belt is required.4.4 Men ascending or descending ladders shall not carry tools and materials in their hands.16 centimeters (2 by 4 inches) lumber shall be used for side and middle rails of double cleat ladders up to 3.9.

7 Metal ladders shall not be used for work on electrical systems unless the ladders are specifically designed for that application. 30. or filler blocks shall be used on the rails between the cleats.8 cm (20 in. Cleats shall be uniformly spaced.2. the foregoing remarks on selection.75 in) 1.) THICKNESS 1.48 centimeters (12 inches) between centers. 9.) WIDTH 7. Whenever possible.2.2.9 cm (.8 cm (20 inches) Over 50. they should be placed at right angles to the work with either the front or back facing the work.1 To ensure stability.6 General 9. braces or back section. climb or sit on the stepladder top.52 cm (3. condition and use of ladders apply equally to stepladders. 9.2. 9.6. stepladders shall be spread to their fullest extent limited by manufacturer's braces when in use.62 cm (3 in) 9. all hardware and fittings shall be securely attached. The cleats shall be secured to each rail with three 10d common wire nails or other fasteners of equivalent strength. and Scaffolding Page 190 .6.) Cleats may be made of species of any other group of wood provided equal or greater strength is maintained. pail shelf.5 Stepladders Generally.2 Ladders and stepladders must not be painted.2.2 Do not stand.0 Working Places.75 in.4. and movable parts shall operate freely without binding or undue play. Ladders.2. 9. 9. Cleats shall be inset into the edges of the side rails one-half inch. Joints shall be tight.1 Ladders and stepladders shall be maintained in good condition at all times.5.LENGTH OF CLEAT Up to and including 50. The following requirements also apply: 9.5.20 cm (30 in.75 in. February 1993 .) and up to and including 76.9 cm (.2.9.

It is mild steel and normally supplied in lengths of 6.3. 9. The ends shall be cut square and cleanly.8 centimeters (1-29/32 inches) in diameter and nominal wall thickness 0.4 meters (21 feet).3. excessive rust and other defects.3 Scaffolding Components 9. laminations.3.3.2 Aluminum tubing shall not be used where there is likelihood of contact with materials harmful to aluminum such as caustic liquids.2 Tubing Ordinary scaffold tubing is 4.3. 9. February 1993 .3. etc.0 Working Places. it must not be used in the same structure.1 All scaffold structures shall be erected with metal components approved per ANSI requirements or equivalent. Ladders. They shall be examined regularly and care must be taken to ensure that moving parts are sound and well lubricated and that threads are not stripped.4 Fittings All fittings (couplers.2. 9.3 Where a ladder is carried by one man.3.4 centimeter (5/32 inch) and is referred to as two-inch nominal diameter tubing. and Scaffolding Page 191 .3 Aluminum Tubing 9. wet cement and sea water.9. the front end should be kept high enough to clear men's heads and special care shall be taken at corners and blind spots. Scaffold erection plans (drawings) shall be submitted to Loss Prevention Department for review prior to men being allowed to work on the scaffold. Tubes must meet ANSI or equivalent requirements and must be free from cracks and surface flaws.6. Scaffolds shall be stored to prevent damage and to permit easy access for use.9.) shall be of a metal type approved to ANSI or equivalent requirements. 9.1 Although the aluminum tubing is dimensionally interchangeable with steel tubing.3. clamps. the difference in the elastic modulus of the two materials results in greater deflection in aluminum tubing for the same loading conditions. 9. damp lime. A tube shall not deviate from a straight line by more than 1/600 of its length measured at the center of the tube length.

A load bearing coupler used for connecting two tubes together at right angles.6 Planks 9. Standard Coupler: Also known as a Right Angle or 90o Coupler. not more than half the depth shall be knot wood. Adjustable Coupler: Used for connecting two tubes together at any angle through 360o . 5 centimeters (2 inches) thick by 23 centimeters (9 inches) wide. On the edge of the plank.3 centimeters (1/2 inch). the grain shall not cross from face-toface within a distance of less than 30. 3 4 5 6 7 9.6. On the face of the plank. On the edge of the plank. and Scaffolding Page 192 .5 centimeters (1 foot).9. and shall conform to the following specifications: 1 2 All planking shall be Scaffold Grade to ANSI requirements. 9. Reveal Pin: Inserted into the end of a tube and adjusted to form a rigid horizontal or vertical member between two opposing surfaces.II. the plank must not be twisted by more than 1.1 Planks shall be of rough timber and graded as scaffold planks without defects (2" x 9").22) Base Plate: A 15 centimeter (6 inch) by 15 centimeter (6 inch) steel plate greater than 0. From end-to-end.2 February 1993 .9. It forms a solid anchorage to which a scaffold can be tied.3.64 centimeters (1/4 inch) thick providing a flat bearing surface for load distribution from posts.5 centimeters (1 foot). Ladders.3. Not to be used where a load bearing standard coupler is required.6. Screwjacks: Used for compensating variations in ground levels. It has an integral spigot and fixing holes for use with sills. not more than one third the width in any one place shall be knot wood. Scaffold planks shall meet the loading requirements of Table II.2.3. End-to-End Coupler: Also known as a Sleeve Coupler. On the face of the plank.3. Used for connecting two tubes end-to-end. the ends shall not be split up more than 30.5 Typical Scaffold Fittings (Figures II.0 Working Places. without fixed banding or the end bolted through.17 .

6.) placed at 0.5 Planks should not be stood on end unattended.) of equipment. 9.3.3.7 The design working load of each platform unit (i. prior to each use.3.3 Planks which are split. 9.) at the center of the span.6.3.3. 9.7 kg (50 lb.3. shoring for trenches.Planks shall not be painted or treated in any way that would conceal defects. including decay.6. Ladders.e. 9.4 Planks should be stacked on a suitable foundation. plank) shall be capable of supporting without failure one or more 91 kg (200 lb) person with 22.6.) : 113.0 Working Places.6 kg (250 lb.9 Platform units rated for two persons shall be designed and constructed to carry a working load of 227 kg (500 lb. decayed or warped shall not be used. but the parts affected may be cut off to produce shorter planks with the ends banded or bolted through.6. 9.8 Platform units rated for one person capacity shall be designed and constructed to carry 113. 9. Planks shall be inspected for defects.6.6 Scaffold planks shall not be used for shuttering for concrete. February 1993 .6. measures should be taken to tie or bond succeeding layers. or as sills for scaffolding. Where the height of a stack exceeds 20 planks.9.6 kg (250 lb. 9..46 meters (18 inches) to the left and right of the center of the span.3. and Scaffolding Page 193 .

6 kg (250 lb.3.9.7 to 9. 50 and 75 pounds per square foot respectively.12 Each platform. 9. medium and heavy duty uniformly distributed load requirements shall be 25. 25.6.2: WOOD SCAFFOLD PLANK LOADING CHART Permissible Span (ft) Douglas Fir or Southern Pine 2 in x 10 in Nominal or Loading Condition One worker or medium-duty Two workers or heavy-duty Three workers REFERENCE: ANSI A10.3.3.46 meters (18 inches) to the left and right of the center of the span. 9. where applicable.6. 50 and 75 lb.3.. Ladders.e. shall be designed and constructed to carry a uniformly distributed load as an alternate to the person loading of 9.6.9.10 Platform units rated for three persons shall designed and constructed to carry a working load of 341 kg (750 lb. medium and heavy duty scaffold (i. and Scaffolding Page 194 .3.8-1988 1-1/2 in x 9-1/4 in Actual 10 ft 8 ft 5 ft Spruce Rough Sawn 1-7/8 in x 9-7/8 in or 2 in x 9 in 8 ft 7 ft 5 ft February 1993 .6. 9.3.0 Working Places.6.) placed at 0.6.3. TABLE II.3. and at the center of the span. but are shown as alternates.7 to 9. Greater uniformly distributed loads shall be specially designed.10.11 The design loads in sections 9./ft 2 respectively).10 are not to be added to uniformly distributed loads for light. Uniformly distributed loads and person loading are not cumulative and the most restrictive loading shall be used for platform design.13 Light.) : 113.6.6.

Ladders.FIGURE II.0 Working Places.18: ADJUSTABLE COUPLER February 1993 .9.17: S TANDARD COUPLER FIGURE II. and Scaffolding Page 195 .

9. and Scaffolding Page 196 .4. the screwjack shall not be adjusted to more than two-thirds of the total length of the thread. the posts may be up February 1993 . Joints in posts should be staggered. joints in adjacent posts should not occur in the same lift. 9. asphalt pavement. and slippery surfaces. The base plate shall be of a type approved for supporting scaffolding posts. 9.4.4.) 9. All posts shall be vertical. 9. To avoid projections.4.4.5 If used to compensate for variations in ground level. (See manufacturer's specifications.2 Timber sills at least 23 centimeters (9 inches) wide by 3. 9.1 Foundations 9. made up ground.2 The inner row of posts shall be placed as close as possible to the face of the building or structure.e.4. and other loose or unsuitable material shall not be used for the construction or support of scaffolding.1.64 centimeter (1/4 inch) thick. 9.2. wooden floors.4 Requirements Common to All Scaffolding 9. Sand or madeup ground may need compacting to ensure there are no cavities.8 centimeters (1-1/2 inches) thick (not scaffold planks) will be required to spread the load on sand.4. barrels.2.2 Posts 9. therefore.1 A sound base is essential. etc.9. including components.4.1 Posts shall be pitched on 15 centimeters (6 inches) by 15 centimeters (6 inch) steel base plates and at least 0. the ground or floor on which a scaffold is going to stand must be carefully examined.0 Working Places..3 Where scaffolding is erected on a solid bearing such as rock or concrete. may need shoring from underneath. i.4 Concrete blocks. A sill shall extend under at least two posts. small timber pads may be used in place of sills and nailed to prevent the base plates sliding off. Such bases as floors.1.1. roofs.1.4. Ladders.1. shall be capable of supporting without failure at least 4 times the maximum intended load. Scaffolds.

These bearers must remain in position as they are a structural part of the scaffold.5 Board Bearers Board bearers shall be installed between bearers to accommodate differences in plank lengths.3.4. When coupled directly to the runners.2 Runners shall be vertically spaced no more than 2. Joints in runners should be staggered. The outer row of posts shall be positioned from the inner row of posts depending on the load requirements of the scaffold.4. 9. and the working platform shall be fully decked out. 9. These may be removed when no longer required to support platform units. and Scaffolding Page 197 . joints in adjacent runners should not occur in the same bay.to 41 centimeters (16 inches) away from the wall or structure as necessary.0 meters (6 feet.4 Bearers Bearers should be installed between posts and securely fixed to the posts bearing on the runner coupler and secured with standard couplers.3 Runners 9. not by joint pins. 6 inches) to give adequate headroom along the platforms. 9.4. the coupler must be kept as close to the posts as possible.4. where there is room to do so. the gap between the wall or structure and the inner posts shall be closed with planks on extended board bearers. 9. Runners should be secured end-to-end by sleeve couplers. Board bearers shall be secured to the runners between bearers where necessary to support platform units (planks).0 Working Places. i.e. provided that..3.4.1 Runners shall be securely fixed to posts with standard couplers and shall be horizontal.9. Ladders. February 1993 .

Rakers must be secured with proper couplers at the scaffold and coupled to a ground stake.2 Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at approximately 45degree angle from near the base of the first outer post upward to the extreme top of the scaffold. diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle of 45 degrees from the base of the first outer post to the last outer post and shall alternate directions to the top of the scaffold.25 and II. leveled and tied.4.6. These rakers are replaced by permanent braces when the scaffold has been plumbed. this bracing may be attached to the runners.) 9.8).1 It is essential that all scaffolds. and Scaffolding Page 198 . Such bracing shall extend diagonally from the inner and outer runners upward to the next outer and inner runners. tubes may be securely wedged between opposing surfaces on the building or structure by the use of reveal pins and coupled to the tie tubes (Figure II. with the exception of certain tower and mobile scaffolds (See 9.24.0 Working Places.4.9. Two-way ties or column box ties shall be evenly distributed over the February 1993 .) 9. they shall not exceed 50% of the total number of ties. Ladders. Joints in braces shall be made with end-to-end or parallel couplers.4. Where possible.26. be securely tied to the building or structure throughout their length and height to prevent movement of the scaffold either towards or away from the building or structure.6 Bracing 9.6.27). (See Figures II.7.4.2 Where the foregoing is impracticable. adjustable couplers may be used to fix the braces to the posts.23 and II.3 Temporary rakers (inclined load-bearing tube supports) brace the scaffold against the ground when setting out. as close as possible to the posts.6.1 Cross bracing shall be installed across the width of the scaffold at least every third set of posts horizontally and every fourth runner vertically. such bracing shall be duplicated at every fifth post.7 Ties 9.4. Where such a fixing is impracticable.9.7 and 9. 9. These braces should be fixed to the runners with standard couplers as close to the posts as possible. 9. Where reveal ties are used. (See Figures II. Only standard couplers or adjustable couplers may be used.4.4.7. On short but high runs. This should be done by connecting a tie tube to both runners or posts and coupling this to a two-way tie or column box tie assembly. When bracing cannot be attached to the posts.

8.9 meters (26 feet) vertically and 9. 9.8.4. etc. February 1993 .4. planks..7. it is necessary to check frequently for tightness.4 Planks shall be secured in position to prevent displacement by high winds. All tie assembly connections shall be made with standard couplers.1 meters (30 feet) horizontally and at each end of the scaffold.8.3 Ties shall occur at the top of the scaffold and at least every 7.5 Adequate space for men to pass in safety shall be provided and maintained wherever materials are placed on platform units or if any higher platform is erected thereon. 9. each plank resting on at least three supports.7 Platform units which have become slippery with oil or any other substance shall be cleaned. Ladders. 9.4.2. fabricated decks. 9.4. whenever practicable.9.4. planks shall be laid flush.3 Except on platform units adjacent to the surface of a cylindrical or spherical structure. (See Table II.8.8. and Scaffolding Page 199 . 9. and projecting nails.4. or otherwise removed and replaced.2 Supports for scaffold planks shall be spaced with due regard to the nature of the platform and the load it will bear.e.6 Platform units shall be kept free of unnecessary obstructions. 9. To ensure the security of reveal ties.0 Working Places. Planks shall extend over their end supports by not less than 15 centimeters (6 inches) and not more than 30.8 Platform Units 9.8.) 9.scaffold area.4.5 centimeters (12 inches). materials.) shall be closed planked with.8.4.1 All platform units (i.4. 9.

intermediate rails and toeboards shall be erected on the outside edges and exposed sides of the platform.10 Access Access to a working platform is best achieved by providing a separate ladder tower or a cantilevered access platform so as not to obstruct the working platform and to minimize the risk of persons falling through gaps in the guardrail system or platform units.9.9 All platform units shall be closed planked for the full width of the scaffold structure.9 Guardrail Systems and Toeboards 9.14 meters (45 inches) above the working surface. They can generally be classified as follows: February 1993 . and side rails shall extend 36 to 42 inches above the landing for mounting and dismounting. 9. Access must be provided to working platforms. solidly decked platforms shall be provided.91 meter (36 inches) and no more than 1.9.1 Guardrail systems (consisting of toprails and midrails) and toeboards shall be installed at all open sides and ends of all scaffolds and supports on no more than 3-meter (10-foot) centers from which men or materials could fall a distance of more than 1. midrails shall be installed equidistant between the working surface and the toprail.3 meter (1 foot) intervals shall be provided. Toeboards shall not be less than 10 centimeters (4 inches) in height by 2.9.2 Landings: Safe landings shall be provided at the top of all ladders. Where multiple ladders are required.9. 9.4.8 Slopes in platform units shall not exceed 1 vertical to 4 horizontal and stepping cleats at 0.4.8. Guardrails. Rings shall be eliminated above the landing level. 9. Toprails shall be no less than 0.11 Scaffold Ladders Scaffold ladders provide the means of access and egress for scaffolds.4. and Scaffolding Page 200 .4. 9.5 centimeters (1 inch) thick. Ladders.8.8 meters (6 feet).4.4.4.0 Working Places. Guardrail systems and toeboards shall be securely fixed to the inside of posts to withstand a lateral thrust of 200 pounds. 9.

The following clearance guidelines shall be used.4. pipes. and Scaffolding Page 201 .11. etc. • Side Clearance: The minimum clear distance to the nearest fixed object shall be 15 inches on each side of the centerline of single rung ladders.24) A straight ladder is a portable ladder that only consists of one section which determines its overall length. Its overall length is the sum of the length of all its sections measured along the side rails. Portable straight and extension ladders shall have a firm base and be positioned with a slope of 1:4. An extension ladder is a portable ladder that cannot support itself but can be adjusted in length. • Back Side Of Ladder: The perpendicular distance from the face of the rung on the climbing side to the nearest fixed object on the back side of the ladder shall not be less than 10 inches. the vertical toe clearances specified in the following sections. When unavoidable. Ladders. projecting objects while ascending or descending the ladder. 9.1 Portable Straight and Extension Ladders (Figure II.11. the minimum clearance distance may be reduced to 24 inches if deflector plates are provided.2 Vertical Ladder A vertical ladder is a type of fixed ladder which is permanently attached to the horizontal or vertical components of a scaffolding. horizontal obstructions (e. It consists of two or more sections which are arranged to permit length adjustment. • General: Safe clearances shall be maintained to prevent workers from bumping into. It cannot support itself or be adjusted in length. When unavoidable obstructions are encountered. shall apply. The main criteria to consider in the use of a vertical ladder is clearance.g. or snagging onto.4.) are encountered.0 Working Places. • Climbing Side: Ladders shall have a minimum clear perpendicular distance of 30 inches from the rungs to the nearest projecting object on the climbing side. beams.9. February 1993 .9.

Vertical Clearance: The minimum vertical toe clearance from horizontal obstructions shall be 1 1/2 inches below and 4 1/2 inches above the top edge of the rung.

Multiple Ladders: When two or more separate ladders are used with a landing platform, the side-step distance shall be a minimum of 15 inches from the centerline of the upper ladder to the near side of the lower ladder.

9.4.12

Workmanship 9.4.12.1 Scaffolding shall be erected, altered, and dismantled by experienced men working under the direction of a competent supervisor. 9.4.12.2 Posts shall be set accurately in place and checked vertically by using a spirit level or by using vertical lines on the building or structure. 9.4.12.3 Scaffolding couplers should be tightened with proper scaffolding spanners. The use of an ordinary spanner or tool giving greater leverage could damage the screw threads and render the coupler unserviceable. 9.4.12.4 Scaffolding materials shall not be thrown or dropped from heights.

9.4.13

Inspections All scaffolds shall be inspected regularly by a competent Supervisor and after adjustments, modifications, adverse weather conditions, etc. Erected scaffolds and platforms should also be inspected continuously, by those using the scaffold, to insure that the scaffold has not been altered and is in a safe working condition.

9.5

Fabricated Tubular Frame and System Scaffolding
Fabricated tubular frame and system scaffolding are composed wholly or partly of prefabricated sections. There are many types of fabricated tubular frame and system scaffolding available which vary in design and methods of erection; however, the same basic principles set out in 9.4 apply and the following matters warrant particular attention. All scaffolds must be erected as per manufacturer's direction and limitations. A scaffold plan needs to be submitted to Loss Prevention Department for review. (See Figures II.28 to II.31)

February 1993 - 9.0 Working Places, Ladders, and Scaffolding

Page 202

9.5.1 To be erected, altered and dismantled by experienced men, under the direction of a competent Supervisor. 9.5.2 Periodic inspections shall be made of all parts and accessories. Broken, bent, altered, excessively rusted or otherwise structurally damaged frames or accessories shall not be used. 9.5.3 All fabricated tubular frame and system scaffolding shall be constructed and erected to support four times the maximum intended loads. 9.5.4 Scaffold posts shall be pitched on steel base plates and on timber sills or pads as necessary. Screwjacks shall be used to compensate for variations in ground level. 9.5.5 Scaffolds shall be properly braced by cross braces and longitudinal diagonal braces for securing vertical members together. The cross braces shall be of such length as will automatically square and align vertical members so that the erected scaffold is always plumb, square, and rigid. All brace connections shall be made secure. 9.5.6 The frames or posts shall be placed one on top of the other with coupling or stacking pins to ensure proper vertical alignment of the legs. 9.5.7 The frames and posts shall be locked together vertically by pins or other equivalent suitable means. 9.5.8 Fabricated tubular frame and system scaffolding over 38 meters (125 feet) in height shall be specially designed by a Professional Engineer. In Saudi Aramco, scaffold heights are limited to a maximum height of 12.2 meters (40 feet), unless a scaffold plan has been reviewed by the Area Loss Prevention Division representative prior to construction. Scaffolds above 12.2 meters (40 feet) should be constructed using scaffold contractors; however no scaffolds shall exceed 38.1 meters (125 feet) unless the design has been reviewed by an Area Loss Prevention D ivision representative, Consulting Services Department and approved by a qualified engineer. (See also GI 8.001, section 6.1.1.)

February 1993 - 9.0 Working Places, Ladders, and Scaffolding

Page 203

9.6

Tube and Coupler Scaffolds
(Tube and Coupler Construction - Figure II.23) 9.6.1 Independent Tied Scaffold An independent tied scaffold (also commonly known as a double pole scaffold) consists of a double row of posts connected together longitudinally with runners and with bearers at right angles to the runners. Braces and ties are essential for stability. Independent tied scaffold is the most common form of tube and coupler scaffolding and is divided into three groups. In Saudi Aramco the height limitation of the tube and coupler scaffold shall not exceed 12.2 meters (40 feet) unless a scaffold plan proposing to use such a scaffold at a greater height has been reviewed by the Loss Prevention Department per the provisions of Section 9.5.8. 1 2 3 9.6.2 Light Duty: for painting, cleaning, etc. Medium Duty: when materials are deposited on the platforms. Heavy Duty: where the deposited material is of a more substantial nature.

Light Duty Tube and Coupler Scaffolds (For general requirements, see 9.4 and 9.5) 9.6.2.1 Design, Loading and Dimensions A light duty tube and coupler scaffold can have up to three working platforms in use at any one time, and the maximum distributed load on the platform shall be 1.2 kPa (25 lb./sq. ft) with posts 3.05 meters (10 feet) apart longitudinally and 1.83 meters (6 feet) transversely.

TABLE II.3: TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS--LIGHT DUTY Uniformly distributed load Post Spacing (longitudinal) Post Spacing (transverse) Not to exceed 25 p.s.f. 10 ft. 0 in. 6 ft. 0 in.

Working Levels 1 2 3 Reference: CFR 1910.28 9.6.2.2

Additional Planked Levels 8 4 0

Maximum Height 125 ft. 125 ft. 91 ft. 0 in.

Platform The platform between posts should be decked out with 23 centimeters (9 inches) wide by 5.1 centimeters (2 inches) thick planks. Bearers may

February 1993 - 9.0 Working Places, Ladders, and Scaffolding

Page 204

be cantilevered for use as brackets to carry not more than two planks between the building and inner post. 9.6.2.3 Limitations Light duty tube and coupler scaffolds erected in accordance with these directions may be used up to a maximum height of 38.1 meters (125 feet) and limited to a uniformly distributed load of 25 lb./ft 2. Light duty tube and coupler scaffolds departing from these directions shall be specially designed or designed to a higher rating such as medium or heavy duty. 9.6.3. Medium Duty Tube and Coupler Scaffold (For general requirements, see 9.4) 9.6.3.1 Design, Loading, and Dimensions A medium duty tube and coupler scaffold may have up to two working platforms in use at any one time. The maximum distributed load on each platform shall not exceed 2.39 kPa (50 lb./sq. ft) with posts not more than 2.4 meters (8 feet) apart longitudinally and 1.83 meters (6 feet) transversely. TABLE II.4: TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS--MEDIUM DUTY Uniformly distributed load Post Spacing (longitudinal) Post Spacing (transverse) Not to exceed 50 p.s.f. 8 ft. 0 in. 6 ft. 0 in.

Working Levels 1 2 Reference: CFR 1910.28 9.6.3.2

Additional Planked Levels 6 0

Maximum Height 125 ft 78 ft. 0 in.

Platform The platform between posts should be decked out with 23 centimeters (9 inches) wide by 5.1 centimeters (2 inches) thick planks. Bearers may be cantilevered for use as brackets to carry not more than two planks between the building and inner post.

9.6.3.3

Limitations Medium duty tube and coupler scaffolds erected in accordance with these directions may be used up to a maximum height of 38.1 meters (125 feet) and limited to a uniformly distributed load of 50 lb./ft 2. Medium duty tube and coupler scaffolds departing from these

February 1993 - 9.0 Working Places, Ladders, and Scaffolding

Page 205

directions shall be specially designed or designed to a higher rating such as heavy duty. 9.6.3.4 Bearers Bearers on medium duty tube and coupler scaffolds shall be 6.35 centimeters (2.5 inches) outside diameter steel tube and of nominal wall thickness of 0.4 centimeter (5/32 inch). 9.6.4 Heavy Duty Tube and Coupler Scaffolds (For general requirements, see 9.5) 9.6.4.1 Design, Loading and Dimensions A heavy duty tube and coupler scaffold has one working platform with a maximum distributed load of 3.6 kPa (75 lb./sq ft) on the platform. The posts shall be no more than 2.0 meters (6 feet, 6 inches) apart longitudinally and 1.8 meters (6 feet transversely). TABLE II.5: TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS--HEAVY DUTY Uniformly distributed load Post Spacing (longitudinal) Post Spacing (transverse) Not to exceed 75 p.s.f. 6 ft. 6 in. 6 ft. 0 in.

Working Levels 1 Reference: CFR 1910.28 9.6.4.2

Additional Planked Levels 6

Maximum Height 125 ft.

Platform The platform between the posts shall be decked out with 23 centimeters (9 inches) wide by 5.1 centimeters (2 inches) thick planks.

9.6.4.3

Limitations Heavy duty tube and coupler scaffolds erected in accordance with these directions may be used up to a maximum height of 38.1 meters (125 feet). Heavy duty tube and coupler scaffolds departing from these directions shall be specially designed.

9.6.4.4

Bearers Bearers on heavy duty tube and coupler scaffolds shall be 6.35 centimeters (2.5 inches) outside diameter steel tube and be of nominal wall thickness 0.4 centimeter (5/32 inch).

February 1993 - 9.0 Working Places, Ladders, and Scaffolding

Page 206

9.7

Free-Standing Tower Scaffolds
A free-standing tower scaffold consists of four or more posts connected together longitudinally with runners and bearers at right angles to the runners, forming a square or rectangular tower (see Figure II.32). Alternatively, a free-standing tower scaffold may be constructed of a fabricated tubular frame or system scaffolding (see 9.5). A free-standing tower scaffold has a single working platform and is a common form of access scaffolding for painters and others who do work of a light nature and of short duration. 9.7.1 General Requirements For general requirements, see 9.4 and where a fabricated tubular frame or system scaffolding is to be used, see 9.5. 9.7.2 Design, Loading and Dimensions A free-standing tower scaffold shall have only one working platform and the maximum distributed load shall not exceed the load rating which is determined by the platform unit type and the scaffold duty. The height from the base to working platform of a free-standing tower scaffold shall not exceed four times the minimum base dimension. In no case shall the minimum base dimension be less than 1.2 meters (4 feet). 9.7.3 Runners and Bearers The vertical spacing of runners and bearers shall be 2.0 meters (6 feet, 6 inches). The lowest runners and bearers shall be as near to the base as possible. Runners and bearers shall be secured to the posts with standard couplers. 9.7.4 Bracing Sway bracing is necessary on all four elevations to the full height of the scaffold. Plan bracing is also required at the base, at the top, and at every third lift to prevent racking. 9.7.5 Ties Free-standing tower scaffolds more than 9.8 meters (32 feet) in height shall be adequately tied to a building or structure. Where tying to a building or structure is impracticable, one of the following methods of ensuring stability shall be used (see Figures II.33 to II.35): 1 2 3 Guy wires at a slope of approximately 45o connected to the working platform level of the tower. Bottom corners of the tower securely anchored. Outriggers extending to the ground.

The strength of the guy wires or of the anchorage used shall be calculated, having due regard to the horizontal wind forces and other known forces which may be applied to the tower. These calculations shall be reviewed by Loss Prevention Department.

February 1993 - 9.0 Working Places, Ladders, and Scaffolding

Page 207

9.7.6

Platform The single working platform of a free-standing tower scaffold shall not project beyond the base area and the platform unit(s) shall be securely fixed in position.

9.7.7

Access Where the means of access to the working platform is outside the tower structure, due consideration must be given to the effect of such means of access on the stability of the scaffold. Where a sloping ladder would cause instability, a securely fixed vertical ladder may be used.

9.7.8

Limitations Free-standing tower scaffolds erected and used in accordance with these directions and with one working platform may be used up to a maximum height of 12 meters (40 feet) to the work platform. Free-standing tower scaffolds departing from these directions shall be specially designed.

9.8

Mobile Tower Scaffolds
(Figure II.31) The requirements for free-standing tower scaffolds in 9.7 also apply to mobile tower scaffolds with the exception that wheels are used in place of base plates and sills. 9.8.1 Foundations Wheels or casters, not less than 12.7 centimeters (5 inches) in diameter, and fitted with brakes, which cannot be released accidentally, shall be securely fixed to the bases of the posts by lock pins or dowels. A mobile tower scaffold shall only be used and moved on surfaces sufficiently firm and level to ensure stability. Where the scaffold is to be used on a suspended floor, it shall be designed to apply loads no greater than the bearing capacity of the floor. Temporary foundations or track laid on soft or uneven ground to facilitate the erection and movement of the tower shall be constructed and anchored so that its bearing capacity is not exceeded due to imposed loading from the tower. The track shall be level and properly secured. 9.8.2 Operation A mobile tower scaffold shall be moved only by pushing or pulling at the base. Force must not be applied at a height greater than 1.4 meters (4 feet, 6 inches) above the base. No men, equipment or materials shall be on the working platform or elsewhere on the structure while it is in motion. Wheel brakes shall be applied at all times when men are on the stationary mobile tower scaffold.

February 1993 - 9.0 Working Places, Ladders, and Scaffolding

Page 208

9.8.3

Limitations Mobile tower scaffolds, erected and used in accordance with these directions, supported on four wheels and with one working platform, may be used up to a maximum height of 12 meters (40 feet). Mobile tower scaffolds departing from these directions shall be specially designed and properly secured (See 9.7.5).

9.9

Scaffolds for Tanks and Vessels
Tube and coupler scaffolds for tanks and vessels shall be erected in accordance with 9.6. Secure tying to the structure is essential for stability. 9.9.1 Bracket Scaffolds 9.9.1.1 Brackets and bracket straps shall be constructed, fixed and erected in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 9.9.1.2 It is essential that the brackets, straps and welds are of sufficient strength to support the weight of the scaffold, men, tools and materials. 9.9.1.3 The bracket straps shall be welded to the wall of the tank by a certified welder. The weld shall be a full 5 millimeters (3/16 inch) fillet. Prior to welding on any tank, approval is required from Saudi Aramco Consulting Services Department. 9.9.1.4 The weld shall be made with the same type of electrode as used for the main tank weld joints. Before the bracket is attached to the strap, the weld shall be inspected by a competent welding inspector or welding supervisor who will approve and accept the weld. 9.9.1.5 Brackets shall be inspected prior to each use and damaged or defective brackets shall be removed from service. Brackets shall be vertical and horizontal spacing shall not exceed 2.5 meters (8 feet) on centers. 9.9.1.6 A rigid guardrail system and toeboards shall be securely fixed to the uprights of the brackets (see Section 9.4.9). Alternatively, 3/8 inch diameter wire ropes may be used in place of toprails and midrails providing that they are securely fixed and kept taut by the use of turn buckles.

February 1993 - 9.0 Working Places, Ladders, and Scaffolding

Page 209

9.9.1.7 Whenever men are working, the platform shall be fully decked. 9.9.1.8 Excessive storage or accumulation of materials or platform units (planks) shall not be permitted. 9.9.1.9 The scaffold shall be designed to support a minimum load of 1.2 kPa (25 lb./sq. ft). No more than two persons shall occupy any given 2.5 meters (8 feet) of bracket scaffold at any one time. Tools and materials shall not exceed 34 kg (75 lb.) in addition to person(s) occupying the area.

9.10

Special Scaffolds
Scaffolds to suit special applications and those required for unusual heights or for use in abnormal circumstances shall be of a special design, which has been reviewed by the Loss Prevention Department as per the provisions of section 9.5.8. Vehicle-mounted elevating and rotating aerial devices shall comply with ANSI A92.2-1990.

9.11

Scaffold Terminology
Where possible, the scaffold terminology used in this document is based on ANSI A10.81988: Scaffolding - Safety Requirements. A list of common ANSI scaffold terms is included, and in brackets are equivalent British Standard (BS 5973: 1990 scaffold terms, where an equivalent term exists. (1) Base Plate. A metal plate with a spigot or screwjack for distributing the load from a post or other load bearing tube. Bearer (Transom). A horizontal tube across runners to form the support for a platform or to connect the outer posts to the inner posts. Brace. A tube placed diagonally with respect to the vertical and horizontal members of a scaffold and fixed to them to give stability. Coupler. A device for locking together component parts of tube and coupler scaffold. Design Load. The maximum intended load; that is, the total of all loads including the worker(s), material and the equipment placed on the unit. Dropline. A vertical line from a fixed anchorage, which is independent of the work platform and its rigging, and to which the lanyard is affixed. Fabricated Tubular Frame Scaffold. A system of tubular frames (panels) field erected with bracing members.

(2)

(3)

(4) (5)

(6)

(7)

February 1993 - 9.0 Working Places, Ladders, and Scaffolding

Page 210

(15) Platform Unit. to rest in or on part of the brickwork. An elevated work surface composed of one or more platform units. attachable or built-in means of access to and from a scaffold or work unit. (22) Scaffold Deck 'Fabricated'. with no material storage other than the weight of tools. manually. fabricated decks. A separate. The rail system consists of a toprail and midrail and their supports.(8) Guardrail System. with storage of materials on the platform. Lanyard. A horizontal scaffold tube that extends from post to post. A wood board or fabricated component that is a flooring member./ft 2 such as for bricklayers with the weight of materials in addition to workers./ft 2 such as for masonry work. or both. (21) Scaffold Access. (20) Scaffold. (17) Putlog (Truss). Ladders. the putlog has a flattened end.0 Working Places. Special Duty: Scaffold designed and constructed to carry specific types of objects. and Scaffolding Page 211 . (9) (10) Load Ratings. (14) Platform. A horizontal rail approximately midway between the toprail and platform of a guardrail system. A flexible line to secure the wearer of a body belt or harness to a dropline or a fixed anchor. A work unit equipped with end hooks that engage the scaffold bearer. Medium Duty: Scaffolding constructed to carry a working load of 50 lb. The manufacturer's recommended maximum load. (16) Post (Standard). A fabricated tube upon which the platform rests. that supports putlogs or bearers and that forms a tie between the posts. (19) Runner (Ledger). (12) Midrail. A temporary elevated or suspended work unit and its supporting structure used for supporting worker(s) or materials./ft 2 and is intended for workers only. Light Duty: Scaffolding constructed to carry a working load of 25 lb. A rail system erected along open sides and ends of platforms. February 1993 . A timber. Vertical scaffold tube that bears the weight of the structure. (13) Plank. A scaffold assembly supported by casters and moved along (d) (11) Mobile Scaffold.9. concrete or metal spreader used to distribute the load from a post or base plate to the ground. and fabricated platforms. Maximum loading for the following categories: (a) (b) (c) Heavy Duty: Scaffolding constructed to carry a working load of 75 lb. (23) Sill (Sole Plate). Individual wood planks. (18) Rated Load. fabricated planks.

0 Working Places. A barrier secured along the sides and the ends of a platform unit to guard against the falling of material. A scaffold system consisting of tubing that serves as posts . bearers. (26) Toprail. A device used between scaffold components and the building or structure to enhance lateral stability. (27) Tube and Coupler Scaffold. Ladders. ties and runners. The uppermost horizontal rail of a guardrail system.(24) Tie. and special couplers that serve to connect the uprights and join the various members. braces. a base supporting the posts. February 1993 . (25) Toeboard. and Scaffolding Page 212 .9. tools and other loose objects.

9.0 Working Places.23: A TYPICAL INDEPENDENT TIED S CAFFOLD CONSTRUCTED USING TUBE AND COUPLER S CAFFOLDING February 1993 . and Scaffolding Page 213 . Ladders.FIGURE II.

Working Places. Ladders. and Scaffolding 214 Page .FIGURE II.24: A TYPICAL TUBE AND COUPLER S CAFFOLD February 1993 .

0 Working Places.FIGURE II.9.25: PLAN VIEW OF TW O -WAY TIE February 1993 . and Scaffolding Page 215 . Ladders.

9.FIGURE II.0 Working Places.28: A TYPICAL S YSTEM S CAFFOLD February 1993 . and Scaffolding Page 216 . Ladders.

and Scaffolding Page 217 .9.FIGURE II. Ladders.29: A TYPICAL S YSTEM S CAFFOLD BEING ASSEMBLED February 1993 .0 Working Places.

9.FIGURE II. and Scaffolding Page 218 .31: A TYPICAL FABRICATED TUBULAR FRAME MANUALLY PROPELLED MOBILE S CAFFOLD February 1993 . Ladders.0 Working Places.

0 Working Places.FIGURE II.32: A TYPICAL TUBE AND COUPLER MOBILE ACCESS TOWER February 1993 . Ladders. and Scaffolding Page 219 .9.

and Scaffolding Page 220 . Ladders.9.33: CROSS TUBE ANCHOR February 1993 .0 Working Places.FIGURE II.

The correct use of power tools can only be achieved by the proper training of workmen. Part 1910. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco Instructions And Standards: Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety. etc. Care.10.70-90 National Electrical Code (NEC) February 1993 . Health and Environmental Requirements . Machinery And Machine Guarding American National Standards Institute: ANSI A10. Many accidents have occurred because unskilled and untrained labor have been allowed to operate power tools in an incorrect manner.9-1983 Safety Requirements For Concrete Construction and Masonry Work ANSI B7.1-1988 Safety Code For The Use. shovels. hammers.g. Subpart "0". and by adequate site supervision. saws.Construction Safety Manual: Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 221 . screwdrivers. axes. And Protection Of Abrasive Wheels ANSI B15. chisels.Cartridge Operated Tools United States Code of Federal Regulations 29. wrenches. crowbars.3-1985 Safety Requirements For Powder Actuated Fastening Systems ANSI A10. by proper maintenance. It is the contractor's duty to ensure that his workmen are properly instructed in the selection and use of the correct tool for the job. however. e. Tools constructed of good quality materials should always be used. Poor quality tools increase the risk of accidents and also reduce the efficiency of work. allow many jobs to be carried out more efficiently and with greater speed and accuracy.0 HAND TOOLS AND POWER TOOLS Hand tools are those tools for which the hand provides the motive force. picks.1-1984 Safety Code For Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus NFPA . Power tools..

10. Insulation should be checked at regular intervals by a competent electrician.1. 10. where necessary. Screwdriver shanks are not designed to withstand the twisting strain applied by a pair of pliers or more grips in order to obtain additional leverage. Over-tightening of screws can lead to possible hand injury if the screwdriver slips. Screwdrivers should never be carried in the pockets of coveralls or other clothing. 10. On no account should screwdriver handles be subjected to blows from a hammer or similar instrument.1.4 Selection The majority of accidents are caused by using an incorrect tool for the job. only properly insulated and non-conductive tools should be used. the tool should be withdrawn from use for repair or disposal.1.2 Individual Hand Tools.1 Quality The contractor shall ensure that the finest quality tools shall be provided for all jobs where hand tools are used.1.1 Hand Tools. Precautions 10.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 222 .2. lightly oiled as a protection against corrosion.10. 10. repaired.1 Screwdrivers It is essential that a screwdriver has the correct size of tip to fit the slot of the screw. Proper racks and boxes shall be provided for the storage of hand tools. It is essential that the correct type. and before storage. and withdrawn from use. If the screwdriver fits the screw correctly. The contractor shall ensure that the storekeeper maintains a record of all tools issued.3 Repair and Storage All hand tools shall be regularly inspected before and after use. Where work takes place on or near electrical operations.5 Electrical Risks All uninsulated metal tools are conductors of electricity. size.2 Cleanliness The contractor shall ensure that hand tools are regularly cleaned and.1. the screw will be drawn into the correct position without unnecessary force being applied. February 1993 . General 10. 10. If wear or damage is observed. 10. A screwdriver can produce a serious wound. and weight of tool should be decided upon before any work is carried out.

nor should they be used as a hammer. the head should be reground with a slight taper around the edge to prevent chipping and reduce the tendency to re-mushroom.10. and the original shape and angle should be maintained.2. For heavy work of this nature. Spanner and wrench lengths are graded to provide sufficient leverage on the nuts for which they are designed. and the knurl.5 Spanners and Wrenches Only spanners and adjustable wrenches of the right size should be used. Eye protection should be worn at all times when a cold chisel is used. the chisel should be held by a second person using a pair of tongs.6 Pipe Wrenches Pipe wrenches must be large enough for the job. The chisel heads will mushroom in use. 10.3 Chisels Cutting edges should be kept sharp at all times. Hammer heads should be secured to wooden handles with proper wedges. Shafts of picks and shovels should be kept free from cracks and splinters.4 Picks and Shovels Picks and shovels shall be maintained in a serviceable condition at all times. February 1993 .0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 223 . a properly designed slugging wrench should be used. use box-end rather than adjustable wrenches. Pick head points should be kept sharp and heat-treated so that the metal wears down in use and does not splinter or chip off. Re-sharpened cold chis els should be suitably hardened and tempered to maintain them in a safe working condition.2. As soon as mushrooming is observed. 10. Hammer handles should be made from smooth timber or be m ade of an integral head and shaft of steel. 10.2. the jaw teeth must be kept clean and sharp. or jagged. Wood chisels should also be maintained in a sharp condition so that minimum pressure is exerted when making a cut. pin.2 Hammer It is essential that the right kind of hammer be selected for the job. Improvised extension to these tools is an unsafe practice and may cause the bolt tread to strip or cause shearing of the bolt. When possible. 10.10. On no account should ordinary wrenches be struck by a hammer when tightening nuts. If the chisel is to be struck. turned. only a wooden or soft mallet should be used.2. On jobs where it is necessary to use a sledge hammer for striking the chisel. Shovel blades should not be allowed to become blunt.2. split. Pipe wrenches should never be struck with a hammer. and spring should be kept free from damage. The jaw should first be checked for any sign of opening out or splitting.

and sufficient tension should be applied to ensure blade is maintained rigid. and lightly oiled. February 1993 . They are meant only for gripping around objects and should not be used as a wrench. Care should be taken when cutting soft metal with pliers to ensure the scrap portion does not fly off and cause injury.2. and the load should be positioned on the center line of the jack. 10. and the movable parts should be lightly lubricated.9 Hacksaws The correct type of blade should be selected to suit the material to be cut. and are free from defects and properly grounded.3.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 224 .2. The cut should be kept straight to avoid the blade buckling. All hand saws shall be regularly examined to ensure that the saw teeth are properly set so as to avoid binding in the timber which can cause the blade to buckle. General 10. When the saw is not in use. 10. it must be shored or blocked.7 Pliers Pliers should only be used when there are no other tools for the job. Extreme care should be taken when working under or near a raised load.1 Quality The contractor shall ensure that all portable power tools do not exceed 125 volts rating.2. If wire is cut under tension. All pliers should be kept free from dirt and grit. Once a load has been raised. They should be placed on a firm and solid support.2. they must be fitted with insulated handles. Where pliers are used for electrical work.10.10 Hand saws Many kinds of woodworking hand saws are available. then long handled pliers should be used. clean. The teeth should be kept sharp. and care should be taken to select the correct saw. 10. The blade should be set in a hacksaw frame so that the teeth are pointing in the forward direction.10. The jack should never be relied upon to hold the raised load in position by itself.8 Jacks Jacks should be marked with rated capacity and must be heavy enough and strong enough to raise and maintain the load. Two-man saws should be operated by pulling only. The cut should be wedged open to prevent the timber from pinching the blade.3 Power Tools. are manufactured of sound materials. 10. the blade should be protected by a slotted piece of timber or a sheath.

Power tools must not be left lying around the job site where they could be damaged.2. or electricity. In every line feeding a power tool. explosive cartridge.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 225 . Power for tools can be supplied by compressed air.1.4. It should always be sited in such a place so as to have adequate ventilation.10. The bit must be kept sharp. Rotating tools should be switched off and held until rotation has completely stopped before they are set down.2 Repair and Storage All portable power tools shall be stored in clean. or wheels. Precautions 10. All portable power tools must be equipped with properly functioning "dead man" switches.4.3. Tools must be disconnected before changing bits. This pressure should be maintained during the stopping process to prevent injury to the operator's feet and hands. cutters. there shall be an adequate filter and lubricator.4 Pneumatic Tools 10. 10.3 Pneumatic tools require clean air to operate efficiently.4.2 Individual Tools.4 During operation all air tools should be held firmly to prevent them spinning and jumping. All tools shall be returned to the storekeeper at the completion of each individual job.1 General 10.1.4. The contractor shall provide a schedule of systematic inspection and maintenance for all power tools.1 An air compressor shall always be under the supervision of a competent person. February 1993 .1 Jack Hammer and Concrete Breakers The tool bit retaining spring shall always be securely in position to prevent the bit from dropping out. 10.4.4.10. blades. dry conditions. 10. 10.2 All compressed air hoses shall be of the correct size to fit the tool being used. Any joint in the hoses shall be made with a proper coupler and secured by safety wire.1.4.1. 10. Compressors shall not be permitted to operate in confined spaces without the provision of adequate exhaust ventilation. The hose length shall be kept as short as possible and placed so as not to be subjected to damage.

38.10. All wheels shall be fitted with adequate guards in conformance with ANSI B7-1-1988. 10. except that when work requires contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane of the spindle. Such work rests shall be kept at a distance not to exceed one-eighth inch from the surface of the wheel.9 for other personal protective equipment requirements.4. B7.) Floor and bench-mounted grinders shall be provided with work rests which are rigidly supported and readily adjustable. In either case.Ear. shall be provided with safety guards (protection hoods) meeting the requirements of this paragraph.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 226 . the angular exposure shall not exceed 125o . No grinding machine shall be used unless the maximum speed is clearly marked on the case. (See Figure II. Care. used for external grinding.37 and II.) Cut type wheels used for external grinding shall be protected by either a revolving cup guard or a band type guard in accordance with the provisions of the American National Standards Institute. (See Figure II. February 1993 . and Protection of Abrasive Wheels. a wheel equipped with safety flanges shall be used.1-1988 Safety Code for the Use. (See Figures II. Care should always be taken to ensure that the grinding wheel is free from defect before mounting. Any defect may cause the wheel to disintegrate as it gains momentum. except as follows: • When the work location makes it possible. All other portable abrasive wheels used for external grinding. See I.37.2. the exposure shall begin not more than 65o above the horizontal plane of the spindle.3 Grinding Machine This tool is probably the most misused of all the power tools. Only persons who have been instructed in the proper selection and fitting of grinding wheels should be allowed to install wheels on tools.2.4.) Floor stand and bench mounted abrasive wheels. 10. Any other method of using the tool can cause serious bodily injury. The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides shall be not more than 90o .36. Safety guards shall be strong enough to withstand the effect of a bursting wheel.2 Rock Drill It is extremely important that the operator maintains a firm grip with both hands and stands in a balanced position. The proper size and type of wheel should be fitted to the tool so that the maximum permissible running speed of the spindle does not exceed the maximum periphery speed displayed on the grinding wheel. shall be provided with safety guards (protection hoods). eye and foot protection shall be required when working with this type of equipment.

Portable abrasive wheels used for internal grinding shall be provided with safety flanges (protection flanges) except as follows: • • If the wheels are entirely within the work being ground while in use.40. When safety flanges are required. The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides shall not exceed 180o . A grooved or damaged wheel must be replaced. All abrasive wheels shall be closely inspected and ring-tested before mounting to ensure that they are free from cracks or defects. When safety guards are required. they shall be so mounted as to maintain proper alignment with the wheel.10. The spindle nut shall be tightened only enough to hold the wheel in place. Only safety flanges of a type and design and properly assembled so as to ensure that the pieces of the wheel will be retained in case of accidental breakage. Materials should not be forced or jammed into the wheel.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 227 . and the guard and its fastenings shall be of sufficient strength to retain fragments of the wheel in case of accidental breakage. Grinding the materials on the sides of the wheel is an unsafe practice which can damage the wheel.) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and shall not be forced on.39. When wheels 2 inches or less in diameter which are securely mounted on the end of a steel mandrel are used.• When wheels 2 inches or less in diameter which are securely mounted on the end of a steel mandrel are used. Materials that require grinding shall be placed on the tool rest with moderate head-on pressure applied. (See Figure II. (See Figure II. shall be used.) All employees using abrasive wheels shall be protected by eye protection equipment. they shall be used only with wheels designed to fit the flanges. February 1993 .

FIGURE II.10.36: ABRASIVE/GRINDING WHEEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Dimensions Nature of the Abrasive Abrasive Grain Size Grade Structure Bond Maximum Speed Color Stripe = Speed February 1993 .0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 228 .

10. 3.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 229 . February 1993 . Whenever the nature of the work requires contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane. the exposure shall not exceed 125o . 2. 4.37: GRINDER GUARDS 1.FIGURE II. The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery should not exceed 90o. Work rests shall be kept adjusted to the wheel with a maximum gap of 1/8 inch. Tongue guards shall be kept adjusted closely to the wheel with a maximum opening of 1/4 inch. This exposure shall begin at a point not more than 65o above the horizontal plane.

MACHINE GUARDING February 1993 .0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 230 .10.38: BENCH GRINDER .FIGURE II.

Storemen may also need to be trained if they are required to clean and maintain the tools.g. etc. Use of cartridge operated tools will be in accordance with Saudi Aramco GI 2.3-1985 and the manufacturer's specifications and shall be subject to review and concurrence by the Loss Prevention Department. Warning to be posted where cartridges are stored: "DANGER .5.e. dry. mason.. However.2 Storage Safe and secure storage for cartridges and tools must be provided on the job site. must be removed at once. a wall or partition) is required. Storage must be fire proof.10. 10. issued by an accredited tool vendor or manufacturer's representative. Only one carton of each strength cartridge shall be open at any one time. plumber. Tools must be stored in their carrying cases. All empty cartons. A storage unit providing positive physical separation of cartridges and tools (i.10. which identifies the particular model that the person is qualified to handle.1 General Cartridge operated tools have a great advantage in that they can be used in almost any situation without the inconvenience of trailing leads or hoses. Cartridges and tools must not be stored together.3 Selection and Training of Personnel No person may operate. Must be physically fit and have full use of both hands and both eyes.100. February 1993 . joiner/carpenter.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 231 . 10. Should ideally be a tradesman. and intermediate packing. or repair any cartridge tool without possessing a certificate of competency. ANSI A10.5.NO SMOKING Cartridge Storage".5. Ventilation must be provided in the store. clean. Personnel for training must be selected with the following points in mind: 1 2 3 4 Must be over 18 years of age. it is essential that these tools be operated only by properly trained personnel who are over 18 years of age. all cartridges must be in their color coded boxes.5 Cartridge Operated Tools 10. but easily accessible location where constant supervision can be maintained. must be capable of being locked and should be sited in a clear. e. Only authorized personnel must be allowed access to the store. Cartons of cartridges must not be stacked against the wall and ventilation spaces must be left around the cartons. No loose cartridges must be in the carrying cases. The contractor shall ensure that each man required to operate such a tool will undergo a thorough training period and be certified by the tool vendor. electrician. maintain.

100 Work Permits). See Figure II.Training.5. A log inventory system of issuing and returning cartridges and tools against signatures must be initiated and maintained. Where tools will be used in restricted areas (as defined in GI 2. Only the minimum number of cartridges required for that particular shift's operation should be issued at any one time.5.4 Personal Protective Equipment Eye Protection shall be worn by the operator and his assistant whenever using the tools. The training must follow the manufacturer's instructions as contained in the handbook of each particular model.10.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 232 . Safety belts may be required in certain situations where the recoil from the tool could cause an operator to loose his balance. Any loss. Goggles must be of a satisfactory standard designed to withstand high speed impacts and/or.7 Use No person may operate. 10. either of tools or cartridges. Only personnel in possession of a user certificate will be allowed to withdraw tools or cartridges from the store. must be reported. penetrations. The manufacturer's operating instructions must be followed at all times. February 1993 . clean. must be given by a competent instructor. 10.6 Work Permits Work Permits will not normally be required for use on job sites. 10.5 Issue and Returns Contractors will ensure that a full register of the serial numbers of each tool is made and kept up to date. maintain or repair any cartridge tool without possessing a certificate of competency which identifies the particular model that person is qualified to handle. Ear muffs will be available for use at any time and shall be used in confined spaces.47: Cartridge/Tool Issuance Control.5.5. both theoretical and practical. at once. a Hot Work Permit must be obtained before work commences. 10. Cartridges and tools must not be left on the job site at lunch break or at end of shift but must be returned to the store for safekeeping. to Saudi Aramco project proponent.

imperative that the correct size and strength of cartridge required for the tool. the fixing.Cartridges are manufactured in different calibers and strengths. surface hardened steel. cast iron. Using a cartridge which is too powerful could cause a ricochet or a spalling or fracture of the material. and . glazed tile. glass blocks. Inspect the tool before use each day to ensure that it is complete. as follows: POWER LEVEL Low Low/Medium Medium/High Extra High NUMBER 3 4 5 6 COLOR CODE Green Yellow Red Purple/Black LETTER CODE L LM MH EX It is. .. and the material to be fixed onto be properly determined. and that the safety devices are in proper working condition. Never walk around with a loaded tool. There are three sizes: . All tools shall be used with the correct shield. Loaded tools shall not be left unattended. check to make sure that a cartridge is NOT LOADED. granite.27 long.27 short. or attachment recommended by the manufacturer. Driving into soft or easily penetrable materials shall be avoided unless materials are backed by another material that will prevent the pin from passing completely through and creating a flying missile hazard on the other side. in good condition (e. The following General Safety and Operating Rules are common to all types of tools: 1 As soon as the tool is removed from its carrying case. load it where you are working. guard. clean). etc. four strengths. terra cotta. Fasteners shall not be driven into very hard or brittle materials including.10. When loading a tool. Never try to operate the tool without the end of the barrel hard against the fixing surface. A wrongly sized cartridge will cause a stoppage or misfire. Tools shall not be loaded with a cartridge until just prior to the intended firing time. shall be immediately withdrawn from service and not used until properly repaired. point it away from you and anyone else.g. Any tool that is not in proper working order or that develops a defect during use. therefore. hollow tile.25 short. and. Careful inspection of all materials should be made before deciding on the use of a cartridge tool. Never leave the tool loaded when not in use. marble. but not limited to. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 February 1993 .0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 233 . slate.

5. Cartridges are of the 'Rim Fire' type and could explode accidentally if in receipt of a knock from a pin. Ensure that the correct strength cartridge is used for the pin. fixing and material involved. etc. February 1993 . or into any existing hole in the material. the tool must be made serviceable before being issued for use.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 234 . as far as the manufacturer's instructions indicate. clean. For the first.. then the tool must be held firmly in the firing position for at least 30 seconds to allow for a possible "Hang Fire" in the cartridge. or even a bunch of keys.8 Maintenance and Repair Before any repair/maintenance work is carried out. Before returning the tool to the stores. Too strong a cartridge may result in over penetration. Care must be taken to ensure that the operator has a secure and safe work area. Recoil from firing can throw an operator off balance. The removal of the misfired cartridge must be as per the manufacturer's instructions. or test firing use the weakest cartridge. Pins must not be fired into corner bricks. mortar joints. Tools must be dismantled. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10. especially when working from ladders or scaffolds. the tool should be re-triggered without moving the tool from the work face. maintain or repair any cartridge tool without possessing a certificate of competency which identifies the particular model that the person is qualified to handle.10. knives. and a similar distance from any welded joint. fixing. In the event of a misfire. Do not leave cartridges loose on the job site or in the carrying case or carry them in your pockets. check to make sure that the tool is NOT LOADED with a cartridge. Do not use nails. No person may operate. at least once every week and checked for defects and excessive wear before being cleaned and oiled. and must be at least four (4) inches (100 mm) away from the edge of concrete or brick work and one-half inch (12 mm) from the edge of steel.9 No pins shall be driven into a spalled area caused by an unsatisfactory shot. The tool must be held at right angles to the job when firing. Care should be taken to ensure that the new fixing is at least two inches away from any previous hole. If the shot again fails. to pry the cartridge loose. If any defect is found. or the fastener may rebound or ricochet. Safety belts should be used if necessary. ensure that it is clean and complete and that all cartridges are in their correct color coded box.

rain.4 All tools shall be used with extension cords which are as short as possible. Since there is no ground wire to carry this current away. All extension cords shall be fitted with grounding pin and blades to fit the socket outlet on the distribution board.Only manufacturer's authorized spare parts are to be used for repair/replacement. However.2 Before any electrical tool is used. etc. saw blades. Plugs and sockets must meet the National Electrical Code requirement with respect to grounding and polarity. 10. can form a conductive path from inside the tool to the surface through the ventilation holes or cracks.6. All electrical tools are hazardous when used damp or wet. Extension cords shall be of the three-wire conductor type. Test firing of repaired tools must be done in a safe location away from work and store or office areas. but with double insulated tools the moisture coupled with metal dust. the hazards are as great as with faulty grounded tools. 10. single phase. contact with electrified parts of the tool does not take place. Double insulated tools.1 General 10. 10.10.6.6. February 1993 . must be kept dry and should not be used without a ground fault circuit interrupter.1. External metal parts of double insulated tools (drill chucks.1.3 All electrical power hand tools shall be of the double insulated type or properly grounded. a careful check shall be made by the supervisor to ensure that the supply voltage is within the range marked on the information plate on the tool. damp locations. carbon dust.) are insulated from the electrified parts inside the tool and. like all electric tools. NO CARTRIDGES must be allowed in the repair/maintenance area.6. 10.6. condensation.. under wet conditions. under normal conditions. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs) are required for all 120 volt. etc.6 Electrically Operated Tools 10. the user can receive an electric shock. 15 and 20 ampere receptacle outlets on construction sites which are not a part of the permanent wiring system.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 235 .1. etc. high humidity.1 All electrically operated hand tools shall be rated and used at a voltage not exceeding 125V to ground.1.

This guard must not be removed.6.1. Taped joints shall not be permitted. February 1993 .6. Factors to be considered for adequate overcurrent protection are: type of conductors. receptacle (120 v) 40 feet from the electrical panel box.There may be three problems: (1) the size of the conductors. Precautions 10.1 Grinders All grinders shall be equipped with a protective guard which allows only the working part of the wheel to be exposed. Is this a problem? Yes .6. 12 AWG (wire size) copper conductors which run to a 20 amp. This circuit is protected by a 20 amp.2 Maintenance and Storage A proper inspection and maintenance routine shall be established by the contractor for all electrical tools. dust respirators should be used. Heavy duty construction type extension cords are required for 20 ampere circuits. 10 AWG so that the breaker can function at 20 amp.4 Individual Tools.6. the breaker size and receptacle should be reduced to 15 amp. No. 10.5 Where it is necessary to make electrical splices. when required. and a record of issue and receipt shall be maintained by the storekeeper. Example: Consider electrical equipment being used on a construction site that may require 15 or 18 ampere (amp. and length of run. circuit breaker. or the conductors changed to a No. 14 AWG or larger size for 100 feet of run length. In order to prevent an employee from receiving an electric shock.3 Personal Protective Equipment The contractor shall ensure that all operators are provided with eye.6. (See Figure II. Also conductor insulation would be subject to heat damage causing electrical leakage and fire. If there is any likelihood of harmful dust being emitted. dry place. head.10. size. (3) the circuit breaker size. and ear protection.) 10.) capacity. 10. Construction plans call for three No. The inspection and maintenance of all tools shall be carried out at least once in every working week by a competent electrician.4. All tools shall be stored in a clean.41.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 236 .Overcurrent protection shall be provided to extension cords in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code Article 240. (2) the length of cable run and. these shall be made with proper connector blocks or by plug and socket connectors. 10. Leaving the circuit the way it is would allow considerable electrical leakage without tripping the circuit breaker.

40.4 Radial Saws (Figure II. it shall be kept clean and properly adjusted to the work at all times. (See Figure II. Portable table saws must be unplugged for repair.) Fixed table saws shall be hard wired to an emergency electrical disconnect switch that has the capability of locking out in addition to having start/stop buttons at the operator's location. Operators shall wear eye and hearing protection.2 Drills Care should be taken not to drill too large a hole at one time. etc. The maximum running speed of the spindle must not exceed the maximum periphery speed marked on the grinding wheel. antikick-back devices. exposed portion of the blade must be guarded to the full diameter of the blade by a device that automatically adjusts to the thickness of the stock being cut. and the torque set up could twist the tool against the user's wrist. (See Figures II.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 237 . Drilling of large holes should be done in stages by using small bore drills and gradually increasing the size as necessary. Push sticks must be provided and used when necessary on all bench saws.4. • February 1993 .45) Radial saws must be provided with: • An upper hood to enclose the top portion of the blade down to a point that includes the end of the saw arbor.10.6. the drill may bind on breakthrough. The work area shall be cleaned to prevent excessive build-up of sawdust and scrap wood.6. Wheels should be checked for defects before mounting.6.43 and II.Grinders shall be clearly marked with their maximum running speed.4.) 10. 10. Anti-kickback dogs (on both sides of saw) designed to provide adequate holding power for all thicknesses of ripping stock.44. (See Figure II. and push-type start/stop buttons within easy reach of the operator. The sides of the lower. If this is not done. 10.) Portable table saws shall be provided with adjustable guards.4. or when not in use. Where a provision is made for a table saw riving knife to be fitted.3 Saws Hand operated circular saws shall be fitted with spring loaded guards which allow only the working part of the blade to be exposed. All defective wheels must be destroyed. maintenance.42.

" Start/stop buttons at the operator's position. Additionally.• An adjustable stop limiting the forward travel of the blade beyond the distance necessary to complete the cut in repetitive operations. in the case of fixed saws. • • • February 1993 . A marking on the hood showing the direction of the saw rotation.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 238 . A saw housing which automatically returns to the starting position. reading: "DANGER. a permanent label must be affixed to the rear of the guard.10. DO NOT RIP OR PLOUGH FROM THIS END. In addition. each saw must be wired to an emergency electrical disconnect isolation switch capable of locking out the saw.

0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 239 .39: "RING TEST" February 1993 .10.FIGURE II.

0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 240 .40: CORRECTLY MOUNTED GRINDING WHEEL February 1993 .10.FIGURE II.

E.FIGURE II.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 241 .41: WIRE CONVERSION CHART * Middle Ring American Wire Gauge * Outer Ring Allowance Ampacities Of Insulated Conductors Rate 0-2000 Volts. 60o To 90o ("THWN" 75o C Cable Temperature Ratings) * Inter Ring Metric or MM2 Note: Ambient Temperature Corrections Factors Must Be Applied As Per SAES -P-104 CMills = MM2 19735 Example 500 mcm AWS 500000 = 250MM2 (Reference N. Table 310-60) 19735 February 1993 .10.C.

10.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 242 .42: S ELF ADJUSTING GUARD February 1993 .FIGURE II.

Table must be secured in position.FIGURE II. Guarded start/stop buttons shall be provided at the operator's position.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 243 .43: TABLE S AWS • • • • • • Table saws must be provided with a hood that covers the saw at all times. Table saws used for ripping must be equipped with an anti-kickback device and spreader. The exposed part of the saw underneath the table must be guarded.10. All fixed table saws shall be hard wired to an emergency electrical disconnect switch capable of locking out the saw. February 1993 .

0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 244 .44: TABLE S AWS .10.MACHINE GUARDING February 1993 .FIGURE II.

FIGURE II. A marking on the hood showing the direction of the saw rotation. Saw stand shall be secured in position.45: RADIAL S AWS Radial Saws must be provided with: • An upper hood to enclose the top portion of the blade down to a point that includes the end of the saw arbor. In addition.Construction Safety Manual: Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 245 . exposed portion of the blade must be guarded to the full diameter of the blade by a device that automatically adjusts to the thickness of the stock being cut. An adjustable stop limiting the forward travel of the blade beyond the distance necessary to complete the cut in repetitive operations. The sides of the lower. Anti-kickback dogs (on both sides of the saw) designed to provide adequate holding power for all thicknesses of ripping stock. DO NOT RIP OR PLOUGH FROM THIS END. • • • • • • • February 1993 . a permanent label must be affixed to the rear of the guard. A saw housing which automatically returns to the starting position." Guarded start/stop buttons shall be located at the operators position. reading: "DANGER. All fixed radial saws shall be hard wired to an emergency electrical disconnect switch capable of locking out the saw.

and constantly in position while cutters are in motion. Bottom Guard: • Blade below table to be guarded to the greatest extent practicable. properly secured and adjusted. holders and backstops provided. in good condition.FIGURE II. jigs. Push Sticks: • Must be available for use on every hand-fed circular saw. and not slippery. or to a point not more than 12 mm above the material being cut where squared stock is being hand held. • Adjusted to extend from top of riving knife to a point as close as practicable to the surface of the material being cut. and used to feed materiala) throughout any cut of 300 mm or less b) during the last 300 mm of any cut more than 300 mm in length Push sticks should also be used to remove cut material from between the saw blade and the fence.46: THE WOODWORKING MACHINE REGULATIONS Circular saws are included under types specified as woodworking machines. Duties Of Employed Persons: • Employees using woodworking machines must use and keep properly adjusted guards and other safety devices and use push sticks.10. • Guards to be of substantial construction. Top Guard: • Guard to be strong and easily adjustable. • Floors to be level. free of loose material. Guards: • Cutters to be guarded to the greatest practicable extent. February 1993 .0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 246 . Training: • No person should be employed on a woodworking machine who has not been trained and instructed in its operation. Working Environment: • Sufficient space to be provided around machine to allow work without risk of injury.

0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 247 .10.February 1993 .

47: CARTRIDGE/TOOL ISSUANCE CONTROL Date Issued Cartridge Quantity Returned Returned Used Unused Returned Unexploded Tool Issued (Type/MDL) Received By Cert No.FIGURE II.0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 248 . Name/ Signature Issued By Remarks Warning: Above items can only be issued to workers with valid training certificate Storekeeper: February 1993 .10.

10.Safety Officer: February 1993 .0 Hand Tools And Power Tools Page 249 .

The lower flammable (explosive) limit (LEL) is typically on the order of 1% to 2% by volume. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2. For most paint solvents in the Saudi Aramco system.1 Flammable Materials In paint systems.2 Flash Point (Definition) The flash point is defined as the lowest temperature at which a liquid will give off sufficient vapor to ignite when exposed to an open flame. 29 CFR 1910. it is normally the organic solvent vapor that is flammable. 11. 11.1.11.1 Flammability Hazards of Coating Materials 11. and insufficient air.003 Work Permit System Safety Requirements For Abrasive Blast Cleaning Breathing Apparatus Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards: SAES -A-105 SAES -B-067 SAES -H-102 Noise Safety Identification and Color Coding Safety Requirements for Painting Steel Structures Painting Council. toxic fumes.1.1000 Air Contaminants. all the solvents (except for the water based paints) present a fire hazard. 11. dust. In the Saudi Aramco paint system. The danger of fire exists virtually always when solvents are in use. Steel Structures Painting Manual.0 PAINTS AND COATINGS In addition to the usual hazards associated with construction activities. chemical burns.100 GI 6. Volumes 1 and 2.3 Flammable (Explosive) Limits (Definition) The lower and upper flammable (explosive) limits define the range of vapor/air concentrations that are potentially explosive. This section of the manual discusses these hazards and how to minimize them. the flash point is less than the normal ambient temperatures in Saudi Arabia. workmen engaged in surface preparation and paint application can be exposed to the dangers of fire. a level readily obtained in February 1993 .Construction Safety Manual: Paints And Coatings Page 250 . explosion.021 GI 8.1. United States of America Code of Federal Regulations.

flame-cutting. The degree of toxicity can be measured by the Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) expressed as parts per February 1993 . 11. These toxic materials can enter the body through breathing. ingestion or skin absorption. Work areas should be kept as clean as practicably possible.2 Health Hazards Associated With Paints Many paint ingredients are harmful to humans..1. 11. Flammable paints should be kept in a special building or in a sun shelter. All electrical lighting and equipment shall be explosion-proof when required in areas where solvent vapors are likely to be present. smoking areas. electrical motors and associated equipment must be de-energized before spray painting to eliminate explosion hazards. 11. Fire extinguishers should be located at the work area and the area Loss Prevention representative/Fire Chief shall agree upon their suitability.4 Fire Precautions Solvents in paints constitute a significant fire and explosion hazard when in the presence of ignition sources.the area near opened solvent containers and near the nozzle of a spray painting gun in operation. some people are immediately sensitive to some ingredients and almost everyone will be affected to some degree if exposed for sufficient time.2. dust from cleaning operations or application of the paint can generate toxic materials. However. unless conditions warrant greater clearance.g. Ventilation equipment should be used to maintain a maximum level of solvent concentration. Most solvents are toxic to some degree depending on exposure. All electrical equipment such as switches. or sparking tools. polyesters) and additives (organotin). There are two major groups of irritants: toxic materials and dermatitic or skin irritating materials. binders (epoxies. Other toxic materials in paints include pigments (lead). e. Solvents and solvent based paints shall not be applied to surfaces exceeding Saudi Arabia summer ambient temperatures.1 Toxic Materials The most abundant toxic materials found in paints and coatings are solvents. panel boards. Also. The use and storage of flammable paints and solvents shall be kept to restricted areas and these areas should be suitably marked with the appropriate warning signs.11. No painting should be carried out within 75 feet of potential ignition sources. most people can withstand these materials over a short time and in small quantities. welding.0 Paints And Coatings Page 251 . typically below 10% of the LEL.

11. • • • • 11. Wear the appropriate personnel protective equipment for the work being carried out. Certain binders such as epoxy resins may also irritate the skin. Avoid touching any part of the body and wear protective equipment (e. Adequately ventilate all painting areas and provide National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH).g. Tywag suits. paint removers. can cause infections or ulceration. if left untreated.003 . gloves.3 Prevention of Health Hazards Many solvents and coatings contain hazardous ingredients. and the required safety precautions implemented. 11. Other chemicals used in paint related work should be handled with care (e. A high quality air supply is also required for life support (refer to GI 8.) when handling dermatitic materials.million (ppm) or milligrams of particulate per cubic meter (mg/M3) of solvent in air over an exposure of 8 hours a day five days a week with no ill effects.11. Personnel involved in painting shall wash thoroughly before eating and at the end of the day. studied carefully. and the paint curing/drying process. Use ventilation control or respirators when working with paint removers containing toxic solvents. etc.3 Ventilation in Confined Spaces A supply of clean air is a necessity for all operations involving the application of coating materials.0 Paints And Coatings Page 252 . February 1993 . acid and alkaline cleaners). and dispose of coating residue in accordance with the recommendations of the Environmental Engineering Division. The following precautions should minimize health hazards: • • Identify and seal all toxic and dermatitic materials when not in use. Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA)-approved or equivalent respiratory protection where necessary. Minimize dust during surface preparation. A copy of the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) should be obtained for all materials used.2. Process and Control Services Department.Breathing Apparatus).2 Dermatitic Materials Dermatitic materials irritate the skin which. Solvents have a tendency to dissolve and remove natural oils and fats from skin. All workmen spray painting shall wear chemical cartridge respirators or airline hoods depending upon the hazards of the paint.g.2.

supplied air respiratory protection is required in confined spaces. iron shot. impact tools. Breathing Apparatus. Air required for breathing apparatus shall meet the requirements of GI 8. Chemical cleaning using paint removers. SAES -H-102. Ventilating to 10% of the LEL considerably reduces the likelihood of fire or explosion. Hand or power tool cleaning includes grinders. Natural ventilation through open man ways. Other types of blast cleaning use high pressure water or steam.003. especially in small enclosures and always during spray painting. grit. As a general rule. February 1993 .6. and the discharge should be located near the bottom. forced ventilation shall be used. this level will no doubt exceed the Permissible Exposure Limits for toxic materials. are used. chisels. There are several methods for preparing surfaces and these include: • • • Blast cleaning where abrasives in the form of sand. Ventilation requirements are proportionally greater for vessels with a capacity smaller than 1580 m3 (10. The preparation of air used for life support involves the following factors: PEL's of nuisance and toxic dusts. gas and vapor content. etc. Supplementary fans may be necessary to ensure good air circulation. alkali. air temperature. Hence. or solvents.0 Paints And Coatings Page 253 . hammers. rotary wire brushes. positioned to eliminate dead air spaces. etc. The recommended ventilation requirements for various vessel capacities are shown in Table II.000 BBL's or 56. sanders. fume. is rarely sufficient to keep local vapor concentrations to a safe level in terms of PELs or LELs. TABLE II. however.4 Surface Preparation Equipment and materials that are used in surface preparation for paints and coatings can be hazardous if used carelessly. ref.Ventilation is a necessity when painting in confined areas because solvents tend to be heavier than air and migrate to lower levels.6: VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONFINED SPACES Volume of Confined Area m3 16 80 160 800 1600 4000 + BBL 100 500 1000 5000 10000 25000 + Required Air Mover Capacity L/s 472 1180 2360 4720 7080 9440 cfm 1000 2500 5000 10000 15000 20000 11.000 cu ft). The fresh air inlet of the ventilation system should be located near the top of the confined space.11. slag. acids or detergents.

must be followed. hose. the appropriate precautions listed in GI 2.7. zinc. and where necessary. workers handling abrasive supplies or clean up crews) within the range of rebound abrasive contaminants shall wear approved (NIOSH/MSHA or equivalent) dust-filter respirators for the specific airborne hazards. The breathing apparatus and air quality specification shall meet the standards referenced in GI 8.2 Hydroblast and Steam Cleaning Hydroblast cleaning uses a high pressure ambient temperature water jet and steam cleaning uses a high pressure and high temperature steam jet. and also operated and maintained to the manufacturer's instructions.g.4. Breathing Apparatus.0 Paints And Coatings Page 254 . To prevent ignition of hydrocarbons in classified areas. The abrasive blast cleaning operator shall wear an air supplied protective hood approved (NIOSH/MSHA or equivalent) for the type of abrasive material being used and any other toxic contaminants (lead.100.1 Abrasive Blast Cleaning This section covers blast cleaning using abrasives in the form of sand. maintenance. iron shot. Particular attention should be paid to eye protection to guard against flying particles. A bonding system that bonds nozzle. blasting equipment and the material being cleaned shall be provided. These types of equipment are used for removing dirt or rust scales and the personal protective equipment requirements are shown in Table II. Where blast cleaning assistants could be exposed to silica sand dust or toxic contaminants. Suitable respirators should be used if contaminant levels exceed Permissible Exposure Limits.3 Hand and Power Tool Cleaning This section briefly covers the safety aspects of hand and power tools used for surface preparation.4. Noise. etc. Abrasive blast cleaning operators shall have pre-placement physical examinations. Personnel (e. including chest X-ray and pulmonary function tests with repeat tests at least every two years. Work Permit System. and this bonding system shall be grounded to prevent a build up of static charges. 11. February 1993 . ear protection should be provided to prevent long term hearing loss per SAES -A-105. grit.003.) that are present. slag or similar materials. Extreme care should be used if tools have the ability to create sparks. Ground continuity tests shall be conducted periodically to ensure proper grounding. Extra caution should be exercised when using such equipment.4. 11. then self-contained or air supplied breathing apparatus shall be worn by the assistant. Tools should be correctly selected for the purpose.11.11.

Where operators are using equipment such as blast cleaners or power tools. personal safety precautions must be taken to protect personnel from materials and conditions that present fire hazards or cause personnel to experience dermatitic or toxic effects (such as inhalation effects. toxic and dermatitic characteristics. When using chemical cleaners. and are generally used at elevated temperatures. For all of the above chemical cleaners. gasoline. alkalines.5 General Safety in Surface Preparation Instruction and training of operators about correct use of the cleaning agents and equipment are essential. Safety precautions regarding these solvents are included in sections 11. Solvents such as kerosene. Chemical cleaning agents such as solvents shall not be used for cleaning personnel. 11. skin burns. greases and rust. February 1993 . Acid cleaners are generally composed of strong acids. Alkaline cleaners are composed of highly alkaline salts with wetting agents and/or soaps.2. Never point a cleaning gun or nozzle at anyone or any part of your body.4. The following solvents shall not be used for cleaning purposes due to the very toxic nature: benzene.11.1 and 11. appropriate eye and body wash facilities shall be available in the immediate area to minimize the effects of chemical burns in the event of an accident. Surfaces other than those receiving preparation should be protected from damage due to cleaning operations. Detergent cleaners are comparable to alkaline cleaners except they are generally used at low temperatures (60 to 100 degrees Celsius). acids and detergents) used to assist in the removal of surface contaminants such as light oils. Extra caution should be taken on scaffoldings. emulsifying. They remove contaminants by chemical attack and are primarily used to remove metal scales such as rust. and chlorinated hydrocarbons. carbon tetrachloride. mineral spirits.0 Paints And Coatings Page 255 . Hazards associated with solvents include their flammable. they must have safe footing.4.4 Chemical Cleaning This section is concerned with four types of chemical cleaners (organic solvents. or eye irritants). dispersing and solubilizing surface contaminants. and turpentine are used to dissolve and remove oil contaminants.11. They function by wetting.

Power tools should be properly grounded to prevent electric shock. face shields.7 gives a summary of essential personal protective equipment that must be worn by personnel carrying out specific duties.5 Personal Protective Equipment Personal protective equipment is required for the majority of operations that involve surface preparation or paint application. In addition. 11. February 1993 . a hard safety hat and safety spectacles. Table II.0 Paints And Coatings Page 256 . all personnel on Saudi Aramco industrial facilities and potentially hazardous areas must wear safety shoes. The amount and type of personal protection depends on the work being carried out and the location. Fire and explosion hazards always exist when using solvents. Other protective details such as gloves. especially in confined areas.Equipment such as blast guns and power tools must have automatic controls that shut off the flow of abrasive and propellant if for any reason the operator releases the control switch. All manufacturers recommendations on protective guards shall be implemented. overalls and hearing protections should be addressed to either the area Loss Prevention or Industrial Hygiene offices. Adequate ventilation must be provided.11.

10.10) Polyurethane (SAPCS .5.9.10.5.11 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TO BE WORN (Confined space) See key Surface preparation Hand or power tool operations Abrasive blast cleaning Operator Other workmen in the vicinity Hydroblast and steam cleaning Chemical cleaning Paint application (spray) Epoxy and coal tar epoxy (SAPCS .5.4.6.11 1.6.10.5.25) Paint application (brush) Epoxy and coal tar epoxy (SAPCS .25) Note: 3.8.9.11 1.11 1.10.11 2.0 Paints And Coatings Page 257 .10.5.5.4 and 6) Inorganic zinc (SAPCS -1A.10.11 2.11 1.11 6.10.10.6.6.10.11 6.10.10.11 1.6.11 2.11 4.10.11 6.5.7.8.11 1.11.11 1.9.4.6 ft or more) if a guard rail system is not in place. February 1993 .4.9.9.10.4 and 6) Inorganic zinc (SAPCS -1A. The workman should always refer to the MSDS for complete details.11 2.11 3.10.6.4.9.6.10.5.10.10.11 6. 11A and 17) Chlorinated rubber (SAPCS .1.6. 11A and 17) Chlorinated rubber (SAPCS .11 1.11 2.6.6.7.9.8.4.6.10.1.11 6.10.10.6.5.10.10.10.2 and 3) Alkyd (SAPCS .11 3.11 2.TABLE II.10.10.5.4.4.11 1.5.5.9.10.11 2.11 6.10.6.11 1.9) Bituminous (SAPCS .4.10.10.11 2.11 4.11 2.2 and 3) Alkyd (SAPCS .82 m .10.10.11 4.11 Safety belts / harnesses shall be used when these operations are performed above ground levels (1.10. and / or in confined spaces.5.11 2.6.7: PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TO BE WORN OR USED DURING SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINT APPLICATION TYPE OF WORK PERFORMED PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TO BE WORN (Outside) See key 3.5.10.9) Bituminous (SAPCS .6.11 3.10) Polyurethane (SAPCS .6.6.10.6.

SAMS No.6.2 General Safety In Paint Application All personnel involved with the application of paint to surfaces should wear the appropriate personal protective equipment for the work being carried out at a given location. solvent based painting materials also present a fire and explosion hazards. Refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for information concerning the hazards associated with their use. SAMS No. SAMS No.6. 21-432-353 Helmets (hard hats). 21-370-500 Face shield (1). chemical cartridge. many pigments and some binders are toxic in addition to having potential dermatitic hazards. 11. SAMS No. 7. In that. 21-426-121 Goggles. respirable air fed hood and filter. 21-370-800/810/820 Dust respirator. February 1993 . 21-441-055 (MSA) / SAMS No. 11. 11. Operators and their assistants should know how to operate and de-energize the equipment in accordance to manufacturer's recommendations.6 Paint Application There are numerous hazards associated with paint application and this section is concerned with air and airless spraying. SAMS No. All pressurized equipment should be handled carefully. 2. 21-432-630 Ear protection. 21-432-XXX Gloves.7 due to the nature of the work being performed. additional care should be taken to provide adequate ventilation in confined spaces. 21-441-050 (American Optical) Safety Shoes. rubber. SAMS No. wherever practicable. 21-327-110 Gloves (leather and fabric). Spraying paint using air or airless systems can be very hazardous and should only be used by trained operators. 10. Also. Some examples of these jobs are above ground and water operations. SAMS No.11. 8.7: 1. SAMS No. 6. SAMS Nos. 5. 21-472-200 / 21-472-221 / 21-472-300 / 21-472-350 11. No spray gun should be pointed at anyone or part of the user's body. The spray painting operation should be conducted from the upwind side of the object being coated. etc.1 Paint Materials The majority of paint solvents. together with brush and roller painting. safety impact. use of special paints. 21-434-249 Gloves. 3. For some paint jobs personal protective equipment may have to exceed the requirements specified in Table II. 4.0 Paints And Coatings Page 258 . 9. SAMS No. OSHA-approved. 21-444-934 Respirator. SAMS No. painting shall not be carried out near an ignition source.Key to Table II.

The heating operations shall be at ground level and at a minimum distance of 4. The transferring of hot tar to its required location shall be carried out using the safest mode of transport available (preferably pumped). 11. fire and toxicity.Before using airless spray equipment. Users and erectors of such equipment should be trained about its use and limitations.5 m (15 feet) away from fuel gas cylinders. Lifting of hot asphalt in buckets is not allowed.0 Paints And Coatings Page 259 .9 of the Construction Safety Manual.7 Scaffolding and Ladders Details concerning the use and hazards associated with scaffolding and ladders are included in Section II. The area around spray painting activity should be enclosed by hardboard fence or equivalent to protect outside personnel from paint over spray. Only good condition. buildings or similar structures. cotton overalls. Also. 11. leather gloves. This section is provided to highlight areas of paints and coating operations not covered under an individual sub-heading.9 General Safety for Paints and Coatings Safety precautions concerning various stages of paints and coatings are mentioned under their respective sub-headings of Section 11. the following shall be provided for all personnel directly involved in tar operations: face shields. respiration protection may be required in confined spaces. and hazards associated with this type of work include body burns. • • In addition to personal protective equipment (safety shoes.11. correctly erected equipment shall be used that meets industry standards (ANSI) or equivalent. safety glasses and hard hats). Tar heating operations shall be carried out using approved fuel gas in the correct cylinders. Prompt professional medical aid shall be available to any person receiving paint injuries. all guards recommended by the manufacturer shall be in place and the system shall be in good order and correctly grounded to prevent static build-up. Precautions that are required for tar operations include: • • The heating of tar shall not be carried out on roof tops or in similar potentially hazardous locations. and heat resistant aprons. 11. February 1993 . The temperature of the asphalt shall be monitored with a temperature gauge and must not exceed 4500F at any time during the tarring operations.8 Tarring Operations Tarring operations are commonly used in roof work.

Blast Cleaning . Hazards (physical and radioactive): yellow/black. they shall be re-tested every quarter to ensure that air quality remains satisfactory.100).Personnel involved with using paints. or a lookout is posted around the site. Equipment .* Colors . orange and blue. Paints and Solvents . Also. operators and assistants shall be trained on the equipment's use and operation.Before any equipment is used. Once compressors providing breathing air have conformed to the requirements of GI 8.. Personal Protective Equipment .e. well marked safe area away from the work area and protected from the sun's heat.11.Abrasive blast cleaning equipment and abrasive materials shall be suitable for the work to be carried out. substandard products will be removed from Saudi Aramco facilities. solvents and cleaning equipment (i.003. Personal Health . Bulk storage of paints and solvents shall be in a designated. Warning signs shall be posted in hazardous areas with suitable warnings of the potential dangers (i. * Breathing Air . Emergency stops: red. * * * * * * * February 1993 .Areas where hazardous work is being carried out (such as abrasive blast cleaning and airless spraying) shall be suitably barricaded to keep personnel out of the hazardous area. Personal protective equipment shall be in good condition. have an automatic shut-off system and all safety guards installed.003. the equipment shall be in good working order. Colors reserved for safety use within Saudi Aramco are red. yellow and black. Danger signs: red. Work Permits .e.Before breathing air used for respiration purposes. sand blasting) shall be in good health and have medical examinations by professional medical staff at least every two years. Signs and Barricades . Potable water: blue. "No entry.. appropriate personal protective equipment must be worn that meets both the manufacturers requirements and those of Saudi Aramco. or the timing of the work shall be such that only the work crew doing the job is present at the site. sand blasting in progress"). green. showers.The Saudi Aramco work permit system shall always be used where necessary for all aspects of paints and coatings (reference GI 2. Emergency safety equipment and instructions (eye wash.The amount of paints and solvents stored at the site shall be restricted to a day's requirements.Depending on the work being carried out and its location. Some equipment identified by color coding that may be required by painters include: Fire protection: red. first aid): green.All color coding shall conform to the requirements in SAES -B-067: Safety Identification and Color-Coding. it must be checked to ensure it meets the quality requirements referenced in GI 8.0 Paints And Coatings Page 260 .

* Assistants .11.No one shall work alone in hazardous areas. February 1993 . An assistant shall always be available or the "buddy" system used.0 Paints And Coatings Page 261 .

Construction Safety Manual: Concrete. and operations.1 General All equipment and materials used in concrete construction and masonry work shall meet the applicable requirements for design. used where they may contact energized electrical conductors.2 Reinforcing Steel Employees working more than 1. placing and tying reinforcing steel in walls. 12. construction. 12.0 CONCRETE..3 Bulk Concrete Handling Bulk storage bins. Wire mesh rolls: Wire mesh rolls shall be secured at each end to prevent dangerous recoiling action. maintenance. When work is to be accomplished outside a work platform.75 cubic meter (1 cubic yard) capacity or greater shall be equipped with protective guardrails installed on each side of the skip.1 Concrete Mixers Concrete mixers equipped with 0.75 cubic meter (1 cubic yard) or larger loading skips shall be equipped with a mechanical device to clear the skip of concrete. or insulated with a non-conductive sheath whose electrical and mechanical characteristics provide the equivalent protection to a handle constructed of non-conductive material. CONCRETE FORMS.4. shall be provided with proper work platforms with a guardrail system. testing. etc. February 1993 .4.4. shall be constructed of non-conductive material.8 meters (6 feet) above any adjacent working surfaces. inspection. columns. Guying: Reinforcing steel for walls. 12. and similar vertical form work structures shall be guyed and supported to prevent collapse and to guard against possible wind pressures. or silos shall have conical or tapered bottoms with mechanical or pneumatic means of starting the flow of material.4 Concrete Placement 12.3 Bull Floats Handles on bull floats.2 Guardrails Mixers of 0. a safety belt shall be worn that is securely fixed to a dropline or anchor. piers. columns. Employees shall not be permitted to work above vertically protruding reinforcing steel unless it has been bent over or capped. 12. AND SHORING 12. containers.12. Concrete Forms And Shoring Page 262 . 12. piers.

February 1993 .10 Pneumatic Hose Nozzleman applying a cement. the wheels of ready-mix trucks shall be blocked and the brakes set to prevent movement. these areas shall be strengthened.5 Vertical Shoring 12.4.12.4.0 Concrete.4. ready-mix truck spotter shall be used to back ready-mix trucks.9 Back-Up Man. And Shoring Page 263 .4.12. Prevent aggregate and loose material from accumulating on the top and sides of the bucket. and vibrator crews shall be kept out from under concrete buckets suspended from cranes or cable ways. 12. shored to meet the intended loads. sand.5 Concrete Buggies Handles of buggies shall not extend beyond the wheels on either side of the buggy. 12. Truck Spotter Back-up man. or equipment on top of form work becomes necessary. Riding of concrete buckets for any purpose shall be prohibited.6 Pumpcrete Systems Pumpcrete or similar systems using discharge pipes shall be provided with pipe supports designed for 100 percent overload. The rotating blades shall be guarded at the top and outer perimeter.7 Concrete Buckets Concrete buckets equipped with hydraulic or pneumatically operated gates shall have positive safety latches or similar safety devices installed.4.4. 12. material. Concrete Forms.5. 12.4 Powered Concrete Trowels Powered and rotating-type concrete troweling machines that are manually guided shall be equipped with a control switch that will automatically shut off the power whenever the operator removes his hands from the equipment handles. Compressed air hose in such systems shall be provided with positive fail-safe joint connectors to prevent separation of sections when pressurized. 12.1 General Requirements When temporary storage of reinforcing rods. 12.4.8 Discharging on Slope When discharging on a slope. and water mixture through a pneumatic hose shall be required to wear protective head and face equipment. Installation of knuckle guards on buggy handles is recommended to protect the hands. 12.

Drawings or plans showing the jack layout. and capable of carrying the maximum intended load. working decks. the spacing between towers and cross brace spacing shall not exceed that shown on the layout. A clear area shall be maintained at 1-1/2 times the highest point of the form work. All shoring equipment shall be inspected prior to erection to determine that it is as specified in the shoring layout. Re-shoring shall be provided when necessary to safely support slabs and beams after stripping. Personnel not engaged in the pour operation shall stay clear of the pour area.2 Tubular Welded Frame Shoring Metal tubular frames used for shoring shall not be loaded beyond the safe working load recommended by the manufacturer. erected. supported. shall be available at the job site. And Shoring Page 264 . pivoted cross braces shall have their center pivot in place. ext ension devices. Personnel shall not be allowed under or in close proximity of the form work during pour operations. Concrete Forms. 12.0 Concrete. February 1993 . 12.1 General Provisions Form work and shoring shall be designed. or adjustment screws shall be in firm contact with the footing sill and the form. Any equipment found to be damaged shall not be used for shoring. coupling pins shall align the frame or panel legs. rigid. and all locking devices shall be in the closed position. and maintained so that it will safely support all vertical and lateral loads that may be imposed upon it during placement of concrete. All base plates.12. All locking devices on frames and braces shall be in good working order. braced. Erected shoring equipment shall be inspected immediately prior to and immediately after the placement of concrete. or where such members are subjected to superimposed loads due to construction work done. Devices for attaching the external lateral stability bracing shall be securely fastened to the legs of the shoring frames. Any shoring equipment that is found to be damaged or weakened shall be immediately reinforced or re-shored.6.6 Forms and Shoring 12. shoring. shore heads.The sills for shoring shall be sound. and scaffolding. form work. and all components shall be in a condition similar to that of original manufacture. When checking the erected shoring frames with the shoring layout.5.

All base plates. Concrete Forms.3 Tube and Coupler Shoring Couplers (clamps) shall not be used if they are deformed. or have defective or missing threads on bolts. 12. or other means taken to eliminate the hazard. extension devices. And Shoring Page 265 . When checking the erected shoring towers with the shoring layout. shore heads. Such rods shall be adequately braced where not encased in concrete. in all areas in which persons are required to work or pass. The jacks or other lifting devices shall be provided with mechanical dogs or other automatic holding devices to provide protection in case of failure of the power supply of the lifting mechanism.6.Stripped forms and shoring shall be removed and stockpiled promptly after stripping. Lateral and diagonal bracing of the forms shall be provided to prevent excessive distortion of the structure during the jacking operation. or other defects. and all interlocking of tubular members and tightness of couplers shall be checked. wire ties. malleable iron. Imposition of any construction loads on the partially completed structure shall not be permitted unless such loading has been considered in the design and approved by the engineer-architect. broken. or adjustment screws shall be in firm contact with the footing sill and the form material and shall be snug against the posts. cut. 12. All vertical lift forms shall be provided with scaffolding or work platforms completely encircling the area of placement with intermittent tie breaks to ensure that superimposed loads on the scaffold/work platforms cannot pull down the entire scaffold works.12. and other form accessories not necessary to subsequent work shall be pulled. The material used for the couplers (clamps) shall be of a structural type such as drop-forged steel.2 Vertical Slip Forms The steel rods or pipe on which the jacks climb or by which the forms are lifted shall be specifically designed for the purpose. Gray cast iron shall not be used. Jacks and vertical supports shall be positioned in such a manner that the vertical loads are distributed equally and do not exceed the capacity of the jacks. February 1993 . the form structure shall be maintained in line and plumb.0 Concrete. the spacing between posts shall not exceed that shown on the layout.6. During jacking operations. Lifting shall proceed steadily and uniformly and shall not exceed the predetermined safe rate of lift or concrete cure. or structural grade aluminum. Protruding nails.

or when the surface shored is sloping. And Shoring Page 266 . bent.12. they shall not be used if timber is split. February 1993 . is rotted. bent. Timber shall not be used if it is split. Whenever single post shores are used in more than one tier. or is otherwise structurally damaged. rewelded. dented. the shoring shall be designed for such loading. the layout shall be designed and inspected by a structural engineer. and diagonal bracing shall also be installed. or otherwise structurally damaged. Adjusting devices shall not be used if heavily rusted. Lay-out to be submitted to Saudi Aramco for approval. When form work is at an angle.4 Single Post Shores For stability. is rotted. cut. dented. cut. Such bracing shall be installed as the shores are being erected.0 Concrete. has sections removed. All timber and adjusting devices to be used for adjustable timber single post shores shall be inspected before erection. or having broken weldments or other defects. single post shores shall be horizontally braced in both the longitudinal and transverse directions. has sections removed. All base plates or shore heads of single post shores shall be in firm contact with the footing sill and the form materials. All nails used to secure bracing or adjustable timber single post shores shall be driven home and the point of the nail bent over if possible. or sloping. Concrete Forms. or having broken weldments or other defects.12.6. If they contain timber. Adjustment of single post shores to raise form work shall not be made after concrete is in place Fabricated single post shores shall not be used if heavily rusted. re-welded.

Construction Safety Manual . Mechanical Equipment And Materials February 1993 . Mechanical Equipm ent And Materials Page 267 .III.III.

Precautions to be taken for Operating Cranes near Overhead Power Lines Operating Cranes Heavy Equipment Operator Licensing Information.100.1 Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety. Powered Platforms. GI 6. GI 7. Attachment No.029.087. III.Cranes and Rigging Equipment Saudi Aramco Crane Safety Handbook Riggers Handbook American Petroleum Institute: API SPEC 2C API SPEC 2D Specification for Offshore Cranes Operation and Maintenance of Offshore Cranes February 1993 . Work Permit System Electrical Safety for Boom or Derrick Type Hoisting Equipment Reporting and Recording Of Motor Vehicle Accidents Marine and Offshore Cranes and Rigging Mobile Heavy Equipment Operator Testing and Certification Cranes and Heavy Equipment Accident Reporting Personnel Work Platform Operations Crane Lifts: Types and Procedures Inspection. and Mobile Aerial Baskets Refinery Instruction Manual: 1.0 CRANES AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT SAUDI ARAMCO INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS ALL REFERENCED STANDARDS ARE INCORPORATED INTO THIS SECTION.025.027. GI 7. GI 7.024. GI 7.026.028. GI 7. Health and Environmental Requirements . Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2. GI 2.702. Testing and Maintenance of Wire Rope Slings Inspection and Testing of Cranes. GI 7. 1.030. GI 7. Elevators.808.1.029.Construction Safety Manual: Cranes And Lifting Equipment Page 268 .

training and experience has successfully demonstrated the ability to solve or resolve problems relating to safe crane operations and procedures (e. ANSI B30. ANSI 30.). 2. 5.g. ASME B30.1. 5. 6.16. Crane and Rigging Specialist. by possession of a recognized pertinent degree or certificate of professional standing. 3. or who by extensive knowledge. 7. A lift plan required as a part of this procedure must provide the following information: 1. ANSI B30. Tower and Pillar Cranes Mobile and Locomotive Cranes Derricks Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks Side Boom Tractors Overhead Hoists Articulating Boom Cranes 1. A competent person shall supervise all lifts.22. ANSI B30.14.1).Contractor Liaison Notice No. ASME B30. Rigger Technician. 4.2. Crane radius Boom length Safe working limits of the crane (load chart) Weight of the load Ground and site conditions Placement of the crane Swing and tail clearances Necessary communication to be used February 1993 .5. Safety Requirements Overhead and Gantry Cranes Hammerhead Tower Cranes Portal.2 Saudi Aramco Crane Operations (General Requirements) Before beginning any crane operation.3. the supervisor and operator should complete the preoperation checklist (Figure III. etc. ANSI B30.0 Cranes and Lifting Equpment Page 269 . ASME B30.4.4.1 Competent Person A competent person is a person who.8. 8. Procedure for Obtaining Crane and Heavy Equipment Operator's Licenses for Expatriate Employees (See Appendix F) AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI A10.6. 1. ANSI B30.

and Facilities Inspection Unit. The Heavy Haul Unit. must account for wind force. Rigging sketch for critical or hazardous lifts Rated capacity of rigging components Sling angles Strain calculations Wind velocity Load moment indicator Other One competent person shall be placed in charge of the lift with the responsibility of explaining in detail.5 meters) February 1993 . Contact the Vehicle & Heavy Equipment Training and Testing Unit (Tel. as applied to the load and boom.025. down drafts. critical lifts. The outriggers must be fully extended prior to the lift.5 Effect of Wind Speeds on Crane Ope rations When wind velocities are above 32 km/h (20 mph). All lifts above ground level.000 Absolute Limit Of Approach 20 feet (6 meters) 25 feet (7.6 Overhead Power Lines There is an area surrounding every power line that is referred to as the absolute limit of approach. Rigging hardware 11. There are no exceptions. side loads. The absolute limit of approach varies according to the following table: Line Voltage Up to 250. 875-4347/874-1857) to operate specific mobile heavy equipment. Nos.. 13.1. 17. Explanation of hand signals 10. Crane Lift Plan). i. (See GI 7. Abqaiq should be contacted and lift plans/work permits submitted. (See TABLES III.9. Cranes shall have a valid Crane Safety inspection sticker issued by the Saudi Aramco Crane. and 7.2. and the rubber tires must be off the ground (see Figure III.) 1.4 Special Crane Operating Procedures Heavy lifts. 14.) 1. (See GI's 7. Transportation Dept. etc.1 and III. Wind forces are greater at height by as much as 35% or more.3 Saudi Aramco Crane Operator Qualifications A valid SAG heavy equipment license and Saudi Aramco Crane Operator Certificate are required for all contractor mobile crane operators. 12.027.0 Cranes and Lifting Equpment Page 270 . the duties of all involved in the lift before the actual lift commences. the rated load and boom lengths shall be reduced according to manufacturer specifications. 15..028.) 1. Communication.e.000 volts Over 250. 16. It is strictly forbidden to move any crane boom or load line or load into this are unless the line has been de-energized or insulated.030. (See GI 7.2. and crane personnel work platform operations require special procedures outlined in the Saudi Aramco General Instructions.) 1.

NO GO DO NOT OPERATE DURING STORMS AND AT NIGHT LIGHTNING. NO GO BARRICADE CRANE CAB SWING AREA TAG LINES IN USE CLEAR OVERHEAD POWER LINES CLEAR AREA OF PERSONNEL 1-1/2 x BOOM LENGTHS NO LIFTS OVER WORKERS OR CRITICAL PROPERTY TRIAL LIFT. FOR DAMAGE HOOK SAFETY LATCH IN PLACE RECORD WEIGHT OF LOAD RECORD WEIGHT OF CRANE GEAR. HOOKS.1: PRE-LIFT OPERATION CHECKLIST • • • • OPERATOR: CURRENT SAUDI ARAB GOVERNMENT CRANE OPERATORS' LICENSE CURRENT SAUDI ARAMCO OPERATORS' CERTIFICATE OUTRIGGERS: FULLY EXTENDED LEVEL GROUND COMPACT SOIL HEAVY PAD SUPPORTS LOCKING PINS/LOCKS SET NO HYDRAULIC LEAKS NO DAMAGE GOOD CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND OPERATION: CURRENT CRANE SAFETY INSPECTION STICKER CLEAR 360o VISIBILITY NO SHADES/CURTAINS IN CAB LOAD CHARTS IN CAB CLEAR VISIBILITY WIND.FIGURE III. ABOVE 20 m/h (32 km/h).1. etc.0 Cranes and Lifting Equpment Page 271 . ADD CRANE GEAR WEIGHT TO TOTAL WEIGHT February 1993 . FLOAT LOAD ONE METER OFF GROUND TO CHECK BALANCE CLEAR VIEW OF SIGNAL MAN (RIGGER) DO NOT PULL LOADS WITH CRANE LOAD RADIUS INDICATOR MAN LIFT WORK PERMIT ANTI-TWO BLOCK OPERATIONAL LMI (LOAD MOMENT INDICATOR) OPERATIONAL RIGGING: CHECK ALL RIGGING FOR DAMAGE CHECK SLING LOAD CAPACITY CHECK BLOCK.

0 Cranes and Lifting Equpment Page 272 . MIRRORS. WINDOWS. SKYLIGHTS AND COMPARTMENTS TURN OFF SWITCHES STOP ENGINE February 1993 .1. SIGNALS.• • - LIFT PLAN APPROVED USE LOAD WEIGHT MEASURING DEVICE FOR UNKNOWN LOADS TRAVELING: BLOCK SECURED TIRES PROPERLY INFLATED AND IN GOOD CONDITION BRAKE LIGHTS. OVERHEAD AND SIDE RESTRICTIONS ESCORT VEHICLES REQUIRED WITH FLASHING BEACON LIGHTS SPEED TO BE MAINTAINED FOR SAFE LIMITS (SLOW AS POSSIBLE) PARKING: BOOM AND HOOK BLOCK(S) LOWERED TO TRAVEL POSITION APPLY SWING BRAKE AND POSITIVE SWING LOCK TIE DOWN HOOK BLOCK(S) RETRACT STABILIZERS RETRACT OUTRIGGERS EXTEND STABILIZERS AND LATCH ONTO FLOAT PADS WEIGHT OF CHASSIS OFF THE TIRES LET ENGINE IDLE 3-5 MINUTES REMOVE ALL FOREIGN MATERIAL FROM CAB(S) CLOSE ALL DOORS. HORN OPERATIONAL ROUTE PLAN CHECKED FOR FIRM GROUND.

length of slings. Contractor:__________________________________________________ J.: ______ ______ ______ _______ Others: __________________________________ _______ __________________________________ _______ Total (Gross Load Weight): _______ • • • 6. Abqaiq) Footnote: This form is to be filled out for the following lifts: 1. Weight of load _______lbs/kgs Effective weight of jib headache ball ______ lbs/kgs Weight of hoist rope below boom tip______ lbs/kgs Weight of other rigging ______ lbs/kgs Total load weight _____ lbs/kgs Effective weight of jib _____ lbs/kgs (see jib chart) Weight of load block _____ lbs/kgs Weight of spreader bar _____ lbs/kgs Hoisting clearance ________ft/m. Contractor:______________________ Date:__________________ Crane Operator:_______________________ Date:__________________________ Approved:_______________________ Date:__________________ Reviewed by:_____________________ Date:_____________________________ (Competent Person) (Saudi Aramco Site Representative) Approved:_______________________ Date:__________________ (Heavy Haul/Rig Move Unit. •Type of crane to be used ______________________ •Boom length (total) _______________________ft/m •Jib length ______________________________ft/m Stowed Erected N/A (lbs/kgs) o o o Jib: _______ o o o Extension: _______ Hookblock (Main): ______ _____ _____ _______ o o Aux. 10. Lift quadrant zone ___________________ .027. Involving personnel platforms (as per GI 7.) 11. • • • • 7. No. Wind speed:__________mph (Maximum 20 mph) 14. weight of component and sling angles). Crane Inspection Sticker valid: Yes:o No:o Date of expiry:________________________________________________________________ 3.FIGURE III. Sketch and supplementary information for crane lift is required to be attached to this plan. Load moment indicator: Yes:o No:o Type:_________________________________________ 16. Within safety zones of power lines. Ground and site conditions:______________________________________________ 13. Description of load:___________________________________________________ 5. At all construction sites and operating plants. Refer to GI 7.Cranes And Lifting Equipment Page 273 . etc.. 3.028 for appropriate derating based on type of lift. 7. Boom Head: ______ _______ o o Headache Ball: ______ _______ Slings. February 1993. Operating radius ___________ft/m. Crane capacity at operating radius __________ (Note: Do not make lift if total load is greater than crane capacity shown in Item 10. Transportation Dept. 4.2: LIFT PLAN FOR CRANES 1. Operator Saudi Aramco certified: Yes:o No:o 4. Associated with offshore and marine sites and operations. Work permit required: Yeso No:o 15.030). type of component. component diameter.:_____________________________________________ 2. Shackles. Crane capacity for jib configuration:____________ 12. safe working load (SWL) capacity.028 and 7. 9. 2. 8. (Note: The sketch of the crane should include the following rigging information: size of each component.0.

68 51.76+ Miles/H 0-1.96-24.9 1.38-20. in the major units.24-29.62-32.64 40.52-60.48 88.48-49.004 .04 12.44-86.6 TABLE III.53-28.02 24.84-5.05 55.6 75.1-46 47.0 Cranes And Lifting Equipment Page 274 .25 64.2-37.014 .20 32.11 5.15-3.28-38.2-63.71+ KM/H 0-1.95 39.1 . FORCE OF WIND IN POUNDS PER S QUARE FO O T MILES PER HOUR 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 FORCE PER SQUARE FOOT.05-11.1. the internationally accepted reference for wind force: Beaufort Numbers 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Description Calm Light Air Light Breeze Gentle Breeze Moderate Breeze Fresh Breeze Strong Breeze Near Gale Gale Strong Gale Storm Violent Storm Hurricane Knots 0-1 1-3 4-6 7-10 11-16 17-21 22-27 28-33 34.44 31.04-115. relative to Beaufortwind Scale Numbers.6-6.58-5.2: WIND SPEED DEFINITION The following table lists speed. 045 February 1993 .45 4.73 11.036 .32-101.53 2.18 8.05 32.TABLE III.55-24.2 103.62-8.15 1.51-1.45 73.87 17.4 19.51 0.52 7.9 8.4-72.04-3.11 28.44 20.3-31.064 .31-16.6 Reference: GROVE COLES CRANE SPECIFICATION BULLETIN NO.15-54.72 62.88-18.5 12.36-11.24-13.92 117.4 .80 14.40 41-47 48-55 56-63 64+ M/Sec 0-0.56-73.1: WIND S PEED (MILES PER HOUR ) VS .69-10.84 1.4 20. POUNDS .15 25.07 3.65-18.

February 1993 . Testing and Maintenance of Wire Rope Slings American National Standards: ANSI B30. The safe working load and serial number shall be clearly marked on the sling and the lifting gear.029. Personnel Work Platform Operations Inspection. GI 7.3 and III.20. Mobile and Locomotive Cranes Slings Hooks Below the Hook Lifting Devices Manually Lever Operated Hoists Saudi Aramco Crane Safety Handbook (See Appendix E) Saudi Aramco Riggers Handbook Saudi Aramco Inspection Procedures 07-AIP-0I-P Inspection of Steel Wire Rope Slings 2. stamping. ANSI B30. either by tagging. Slings shall not be tagged with an safe working load in the field. ANSI B30. Safe Working Load (SWL) Slings and other rigging equipment must be constructed according to a recognized standard.027. ANSI B30.2. or embossing. Before use. this load should never be exceeded.9. ANSI B30. engraving.10. Approval by the Inspection Department and subsequent review by the Loss Prevention Department is required. all new equipment should be subjected to a proof load test by the manufacturer and certified.5. The safe working load of rigging equipment is the maximum load which the equipment should be subjected to.6).Construction Safety Manual: Slings And Lifting Gear Page 275 .0 SLINGS AND LIFTING GEAR (RIGGING) Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 7. Riggers shall not use lifting gear unless the safe working load is clearly visible (see Figures III.21.1.

2. 10 random broken wires in one lay.2. and load tested by a recognized manufacturer.3. All attached fittings (hooks. and riggers should be trained to look for the safe working load marked on each sling. 2. They shall be forbidden to use any equipment unless the safe working load is clearly visible.3 Logger chains or chains used to secure truck loads shall not be used for rigging.2.1 Grades Only alloy steel chain complying with ASTM A391 shall be used. and excessive wear. One broken wire at the fitting. Chain Slings 2. Each grade of chain should be clearly tagged by the manufacturer.2. 2. 2. Hooks. 4 broken wires in one strand of a rope lay. etc.) shall be as prescribed by the manufacturer. Communications and Facilities Inspection Unit [CCFIU] (see Figure III. Other grades are subject to approval by the Saudi Aramco Crane.2 Damaged slings shall be destroyed if there are: 2.. Damaged chains must be returned to the manufacturer for repair or destroyed.2. watch for bent links.3.1 * * * 2.0 Slings And Lifting Gear Page 276 .2. 2. and eyebolts shall be equal to or exceed the safe working load of the chain.5). cracked welds.3. In particular.1 Wire rope is the most common type of sling in use on construction sites. shackles. Homemade wire rope slings shall not be allowed at Saudi Aramco unless they meet all standards and pass inspection by CCFIU.2 Repairs Modern chains are produced under closely controlled factory conditions using proper heat treatment and testing procedures.3. February 1993 . rings.3 Wire Rope Slings 2. It is essential that each wire rope sling is properly constructed and used. On-site welding repairs cannot provide the necessary controlled conditions to safely repair a damaged chain.2 * Severe localized abrasion or scraping.2.2. All wire rope slings shall be manufactured. inspected.

0 Slings And Lifting Gear Page 277 .3.3.2 Repaired Slings The use of repaired slings is prohibited. 2. or excessively worn.3 * Kinking. crushing.4 Synthetic Webbing Slings These are manufactured from woven man-made fiber.3.4.2.6).2.3.2.3.4 * 2.6 * 2. February 1993 .4 Wire rope clips (bulldog clips or crosby clips) shall not be used to make slings. birdcaging.1 Name or trademark of manufacturer Rated capacity for each type of hitch Type of material Removal from Service Slings which have been damaged or are defective in any way shall be immediately removed from service.2. deformed. Their strength lies in the width of their bearing surface. Proof load test and documentation of testing is required from the manufacturer (see Figures III. Evidence of heat damage. and non-vertical lifting (see Figure III.3.3 Each sling shall bear a permanent manufacturer's identification stating the safe working load (SWL) in tons and serial number. These slings must not be subjected to point loading. 2. Synthetic web slings shall be marked with a stitched in label to show: (a) (b) (c) 2.2.3 and III. 2.2. cut up and destroyed. 2.4.5 * 2. End attachments are cracked.2. Bent or opened hooks.7 * 2. Severe corrosion. or any other damage causing distortion.7).3. sharp edged objects.

1. 2.0 Slings And Lifting Gear Page 278 .4 * There is other damage visible such as: melting or charring.2 All associated rigging hardware shall equal or exceed the safe working load rating of the rope sling.5. kinks or hackles.5.1.5.2.3.3.3.5. knots. February 1993 .5 Synthetic and Natural Fiber Rope Slings 2.4 2.5.5.5. damaged fittings.2 * There is considerable filament or fiber breakage (a light fuzzing is acceptable) on the surface. Name or trademark of manufacturer Manufacturer's code or stock number Rated loads for the types of hitches used Type of natural or synthetic material Date of manufacture 2.1 2.1.3.5 2.3 2. 2. The fibers are cut.5.5. badly abraded or seriously worn.1 * 2.3 Slings shall be removed from service and destroyed when: 2.2 2.1 Each synthetic and natural fiber rope sling shall be permanently marked to show: 2.3 * There are particles of broken filament or fibers inside the rope between strands.1.2.5.5.1.5.

away from extremes of heat.9.7 Hooks 2.4 Contractors shall maintain a job site log of slings containing the following information: ID. the bend [bow] of the hook). 2.2 Loads should be applied on the hook only in the part designed to take them (i. or the sling slipping on the load. This can be caused by the sudden application of the crane brake. the jerking of the load by poor operation.11). Therefore. full details of periodic inspections (see Figure III.2 As the angle between the legs of a multiple sling increases. and a Sling Inspection Report shall be completed and filed for review by the Crane Inspector to comply with GI 7.1 Slings will undergo shock loading when a load is suddenly lifted or when the hoisting is abruptly stopped. number.0 Slings And Lifting Gear Page 279 . the safe working load decreases.7.e. A shock load can increase the normal working load by as much as five times its value.029.2. 2.6.13). lightly lubricated. and inspected. Slings must be stored in a location where they are not liable to suffer mechanical damage. or should be moused with wire and a shackle used or the hook should be designed so that the slings cannot be displaced (Figure III. 2. and especially dampness.9).6. 2. Point loading can result in over stressing the hook causing it to open or break. February 1993 .7.6 Care of Slings The following points must be considered in the storage and handling of slings: 2. date in service.6.1 Hooks should be fitted with a safety catch on the hook opening. 2. The included angle should be no more than 900 and must never exceed 120o under any circumstances (see Figure III. 2.6.3 Before storage.6. safe working load as stated in proof load certificate. chain and wire rope slings should be cleaned.5 All rigging shall be inspected at least every six months per ANSI B30. cold.2. point loading shall not be permitted.

7.1 Standard eyebolts are the weakest and are dependable only for vertical lifts. 2. 2.9.2 Spreader bars shall be permanently identified with the safe working load.4 The hook shall be removed from service for the following reasons: 1.3 Spreader bars shall be stored away from moisture. and inspected to ANSI B30.8.20. February 1993 . If there are visible cracks If it is twisted 10o out of place If there is a 15% throat opening beyond the manufacturer's specification A thorough examination shall be carried out each year by a qualified inspector.3 Safety hoist rings (swivel eyes) are bolted in place with a calibrated torque wrench and maintain maximum capacity at all angles.10. 2.3 Hooks should be regularly inspected for signs of damage. and protected from physical damage.1 All spreader bars shall be manufactured. but are unsafe at less than 45 degrees with the horizontal.2.8 Spreader Bars 2. For such situations. 2. 2. 2.). tested. 2.9. 2.8.2 Shouldered eyebolts can be used at slight angles.0 Slings And Lifting Gear Page 280 .7. manufacturer's name and serial number. 2.9 Eyebolts And Safety Hoist Rings Sometimes machinery or other equipment is delivered to the site with eyebolts attached as lifting points.9. 3.8.2. the design and function of each of the three basic types of eyebolts should be known (see Figure III.

2.12.2. and the various methods of loading.11 Rigger The job of rigger requires thorough training. mild steel bolts or similar items are not acceptable replacements for shackle pins (see Figure III. The man assigned must be wellacquainted with the capabilities of the crane being used. hand signals. February 1993 . The pins are separate but matched parts of the shackles.2. They should be tested by the manufacturer and marked with the safe working load. so care must be taken to use the correct pin for each shackle.0 Slings And Lifting Gear Page 281 .). Rebar.10 Shackles Shackles (clevis) are used for making connections in rigging. the different functions of lifting gear.

2.FIGURE III.3: IDENTIFICATION TAGS February 1993 .0 Slings And Lifting Gear Page 282 .

FIGURE III.4: INSTALLING A WEDGE S OCKET ON A ROPE February 1993 .0 Slings And Lifting Gear Page 283 .2.

FIGURE III.7: S YNTHETIC WEBBING S LINGS February 1993 .0 Slings And Lifting Gear Page 284 .2.

8: S LING LOADING FIGURE III.9: EYEBOLTS February 1993 .2.0 Slings And Lifting Gear Page 285 .FIGURE III.

FIGURE III.2.0 Slings And Lifting Gear 286 Page .12: WIRE ROPE S LING INSPECTION LO G Contractor:______________________________________ Location: __________________________ BI/JO Number: ___________________________________ Project Title: ______________________ Sling# Diameter Length SWL Date-In Service Date-OutService Inspector Signature (Date) February 1993 .

002 Mobile Heavy Equipment Operator Testing and Certification Cranes and Heavy Equipment Accident Reporting Procedures Inspection. The only safe way of using mechanical equipment is to have properly trained operators.15 31-SAIP-8. but it outlines some of the hazards likely to be encountered from specific items of equipment and their use. Replacement or Retirement from Service Pressure Relief Valves .003 GI 447. running equipment that is well maintained and carrying out the work for which it was designed.3.026 GI 7. Quality Assurance and Regulation GI 447.16 31-SAIP-10. This section cannot cover all the situations which could arise.01 20-SAIP-3.030 GI 8. Inspection.003 Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards: Inspection Procedures 17-SAIP-6.02 31-SAIP-8.Construction Safety Manual: Mechanical Equipment Page 287 .New Installation.Routine Test.10 31-SAIP-8. Change in Set Pressure.05 31-SAIP-8.01 31-SAIP-1.025 GI 7.01 31-SAIP-1. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 7.01 Diesel Electric Generating Set Welding Generator Pumps Compressor Vibrating Roller CAT Motor Grader Road Rollers Scraper Concrete Mixers February 1993 .0 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT The widespread use of mechanical e quipment in the construction industry improves the quality and efficiency of the work but it can lead to situations which are potentially hazardous. and Testing Requirements Of Elevating / Lifting Equipment Breathing Apparatus Pressure Relief Valves .

4-81 Safety Requirements For Personnel Hoists ANSI-B 15.0 Mechanical Equipment Page 288 . Operators shall be trained in the procedures and functions relevant to a specific piece of equipment.025).31-SAIP-12.1.1-88 Safety Standard for Low and High Lift Trucks Mobile and Locomotive Cranes 3. Health and Environmental Requirements .1-86 Safety Code for Jacks ANSI B30.04 31-SAIP-12.2 Licensing Requirements Operators of mobile heavy equipment must be in possession of a Saudi Arab Government (SAG) license for that particular class of machinery and a Saudi Aramco certificate issued by the Saudi Aramco Heavy Equipment Operator Testing and Training Unit (see GI 7.05 Schedule 'D': Diesel Fork Lift Truck Electric Fork Lift Truck Saudi Aramco Safety. 3. ANSI-B 56. It is recommended that contractors train and test all equipment operators and issue them with written authorization specifying the equipment which they are competent to operate. February 1993 . they must be fully aware of the capabilities and limitations of the machine and have a knowledge of the day-to-day maintenance that it requires.1-84 Safety Code for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus ANSI-B 30.1 Operators 3.Mechanical Equipment AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS: ANSI-A 10.3.1.5.1 Qualifications Only trained personnel shall operate any mechanical equipment.

and the cable drum on winches and concrete mixers.2 All machinery should be inspected before being placed in service and at regular intervals thereafter. the operator must check oil. 3.3. 3.g. the main drive shafts on pumps and dumpers.1 Multi-Piece Tire Rims and Locking Rings As safety equipment like tire cages. Guards must be installed on equipment before it arrives on site and maintained in position at all times while the equipment is operating. restraining bars.3. Inflate tires inside a strong restraining device (tire cage) by increasing the tire pressure very slowly. V-belt drives. Before making any repairs.3.3.3 Maintenance schedules should be established for each piece of equipment and strictly followed. guards.5 At the start of each shift.3 General Requirements 3. and revolving shafts.2 Machinery Guards All moving parts of machinery must be shielded by guards. 3. 3. Safety equipment (e. that all gauges are operating and that the machine is functioning smoothly. pulleys. This is particularly true with gears. governors) must be checked daily. and hydraulic levels. limit switches. All of these are present on most of the static equipment used on or around construction sites. fuel.. February 1993 . Guards removed for routine maintenance or for repair must be replaced before the equipment is returned to service. all required work permits must be obtained. Other examples of equipment which must be guarded include cooling fans on compressors and generators.4 No repair. racks and clips during tire check-out cannot fully protect employees working on or near the tire repair area.3. or replacement of parts on moving machinery is permitted. always deflate the tire first before making repairs. adjustment. water.1 Before any mechanical equipment is used in a Saudi Aramco restricted area. all equipment must be stopped and deactivated so that it cannot be unintentionally started.3. fans.3.2. 3.0 Mechanical Equipment Page 289 . 3.

use flashing lights. Windows must be kept clean at all times and should be replaced if the glass becomes pitted.7 When vehicles are left unattended (even overnight).11 All equipment must be located so that exhaust fumes will not affect workers in the area. If this is not possible. goggles and full face shield must be worn. and other hydraulic equipment must be lowered to the ground before the operator leaves the machine.1 All employees on site must know the dangers of compressed air. operators must dismount from machines while maintenance or repair work is being carried out.3.0 Mechanical Equipment Page 290 . cones. 3.8 Unless otherwise instructed. 3.6 Equipment traveling or working on the highway must have lights and reflectors. Never use compressed air to dust off clothing or machinery. parking brakes applied and the wheels chocked. The ignition key should be removed and/or battery cables disconnected to avoid start-up by unauthorized personnel. Gasoline-driven equipment shall not be used inside a building or other confined space. scraper bowls.4 Compressors Compressors are one of the most common pieces of equipment used in construction work. or other warning devices to alert approaching traffic. Cabs must be kept clean and clear of such items as rubbish and loose tools.3.3. Horseplay with compressed air must be strictly forbidden. cracked or broken. 3. 3.10 Where the operator of a mobile machine cannot see the area all around his machine. Park equipment clear of the roadway.3. 3. When compressed air is used in special cleaning/purging tasks. engines must be stopped. There is a considerable difference in the quality of the air used for these two functions.4. an attendant must be in a position to direct and assist the operator. February 1993 .3. 3. 3. They can be used to supply air for portable power tools or to supply air to sustain men working with breathing apparatus in extremely hazardous atmospheres.3. Blades.3.9 Cabs fitted to equipment must give 360o visibility.3.

3.3. 3.4. fuel.1 All chains. and revolving shafts must be guarded. and the air receiver must be periodically inspected. They must be equipped with an automatic high temperature alarm. 1.4 When compressors supply air for breathing: 1.3 Before start up.) 2. The air must be tested periodically to be certain it is safe to breathe (see Administration.4. There must be a filter to remove oil mist.4 The mixer drum and the area around the machine must be thoroughly cleaned at the end of each day's operation. gears.2 Compressors must be properly designed.3. sand and aggregate bins.) 3.4.5..0 Mechanical Equipment Page 291 . February 1993 .3 Men must not be allowed to work under or near the loading skip unless it is held in position by a safety chain or catch or positively blocked.) The air intake must be located so that it does not draw in exhaust gas.5. 3. inspected.10.5 Concrete Mixers and Batching Plants A concrete mixer of some type will be used on almost every construction site. and the lifting mechanism must be in good order. 3.) 3.5. 3.002/3.5. oil and water levels and the air reservoir should be drained of trapped water. 3. a daily check should be made of the compressor's pressure relief valve. and a power shovel.3.2 Safety chains and catches must be operative. The operating manual for the particular type of compressor used should be strictly followed. tested and maintained. I.) 4. Relief valves shall be installed in accordance with GI 447. The principles of good maintenance and properly trained operators apply equally whether it is only a small mixer for masonry work or a full batching plant with a large capacity cement silo.

5.5 Cement bags must not be allowed to accumulate in the mixer area. Loose fitting clothes shall not be worn around moving machinery. and the barricades should only be removed to allow access for vehicles delivering material.3 When repairs or maintenance are being carried out on a hydraulically operated dump truck. commonly used for construction work.6 A hooped access ladder must be firmly attached to silos for access to the top manhole.5. and the release mechanism should function smoothly.6. 3. they should be collected and disposed of at regular intervals during the day.6. 3.8 Personal protective equipment such as respirators.3. 3. often travel on the public highway. 3. the dump body should be fully lowered. If it is necessary to have it February 1993 . 3.5.2 Dumpers are not designed to carry passengers.6 Dumpers and Dump Trucks Dumpers and dump trucks. and goggles shall be worn.5. 3. Lockout and tag system rules must be posted in a conspicuous location throughout the plant and workers must be thoroughly trained in the lockout/tag procedures.7 The approach to the sand and aggregate bins should be barricaded.0 Mechanical Equipment Page 292 . 3.3. 3. It must be strictly forbidden for employees to ride in the skip or on the engine cover. This is a means to disable process/mechanical electrical 'control' equipment during repairs and maintenance.5. Men must not be allowed to work inside the silo unless they are wearing a safety belt with a lifeline and an attendant is posted outside ready to assist in case of emergency.1 The latch on dumper skips must be in good working order. Therefore it is essential that they be properly maintained.6.9 Lockout and tag system is required in batching plants to ensure the safety of repair and/or maintenance personnel. ear muffs.

6 meter (2 feet) from any fixed object. All cab glass shall be safety glass or equivalent. it must be blocked. They are used in applications where large volumes of earth need to be moved over uneven ground. 3. II.2 Operators of excavators must possess a valid Saudi Arab Government license for the machine and a valid Saudi Aramco certificate issued by the Saudi Aramco Heavy Equipment Operator Testing Unit.7.7.7 Excavators Excavations are carried out using very specialized equipment which roughly falls into two categories: 1) fixed position machines. backhoes. face shovels. but are not limited to. transport and deposit excavated material all in one cycle of operation. they also help to level the ground over which they operate. 3. February 1993 .in the raised position.0 Mechanical Equipment Page 293 . The "fixed" excavator loosens the soil and loads from a stationary position. "Moving" machines include. topography.7. The choice of equipment to be used is determined by the size of the project. scrapers. loaders. but are not limited to. The permit must be counter-signed by the Power Distribution Department (PDD) and the area Utilities Services Department. draglines and grabs.4 All vehicles with cabs shall be equipped with windshields and powered wipers. 3. They remove.) 3. bulldozers.6. Do not rely on the hydraulic ram to support the raised body for an extended period. Their loss of mobility is compensated by the fact that greater force can be applied at the excavation face.3 Outriggers must be fully extended when operating a mechanical excavator so fitted.1 The excavation work permit may require that underground pipelines or cables be located by manual digging.3.2 of this manual. graders and trenching machines. and 2) moving machines. (Also see General And Civil. In this process. They are useful to perform specific excavation tasks at a single location.5 Excavators with a swinging motion must have a clearance of at least 0.7. 3. Cracked or broken windshields or windows shall be replaced. volume of earth to be hauled out and many other factors. 3.7. Fixed position machines include. 3.4 An attendant must be appointed and be available at all times during excavation to assist and guide the operator.

8. 3.8. 3.4 The truck shall be equipped with overhead protection.3.7.8. 3.5 When traveling with a load on the forks.3 Special equipment fitted to the truck.7.7 Do not excavate closer than 10 feet to the nearest pipeline or other equipment in place. 3. 3.6 If the load being carried obstructs the operator's forward view. 3. 3.6 Booms on excavators must be latched before travel. level ground. in addition to or in place of the forks.2 A specific course of instruction should be established for fork lift drivers. sometimes used in materials handling yards and for placing loads where there are firm ground conditions.8. This type of equipment has a limited use in construction operations.1 It is essential that drivers be fully trained and experienced.8. however. They are. must be designed for the specific machine.3. 3. February 1993 . he should travel in reverse. Operators of fork lift trucks must have a valid Saudi Arab Government heavy equipment license and a valid Saudi Aramco certificate.0 Mechanical Equipment Page 294 .8. the forks should be as low as possible to maintain stability.8 Fork Lift Trucks Fork lift trucks are designed to operate on firm. They must be able to manipulate loads smoothly and efficiently. They should not be allowed to use the vehicles on site until they have taken the course.

Clean up all combustible trash around the generator. The operator should be responsible only for the mechanical function of the machine. There may be other potential fire hazards not listed. Sheds constructed of combustible materials placed around generators and wooden base frames are prohibited.3. 3. helpers and other workers should never place any part of their bodies between the mast uprights.3 The machine must be properly grounded before each use.8.7 Operators. Conduct daily inspections of all generator sets using this guide. 3. loaders.9. Generator sets shall be located at least 50 feet from buildings or materials that may catch fire. or other moving parts of the fork lift truck.0 Mechanical Equipment Page 295 . Fire extinguishers must be readily accessible. Inspect all wiring for damage or improper splices/repairs. Clean up all fuel spills and place clean sand around area when required.2 The side panels to the engine cover are designed to give access to the machinery for maintenance or repair. 3.1 All pulleys. One CO2 extinguisher for the generator and a dry chemical extinguisher for the engine drive is recommended.9.3. Check hose and pipe connections for wear and cracks.4 Fire Prevention Guide for Portable Generators The following is a typical check list of the major items to look for.9 Generators A competent electrician shall be available to ensure that electrical connections are properly made. Stay well within limits of the truck body or cab. 3.9. therefore a thorough inspection must be made. 3. and fans must be totally enclosed or otherwise guarded. They must be closed at all times when the engine is running. cross members. Exhaust piping system shall be kept away from work areas and combustible materials. • • • • • • • • • • • Repair all fuel leaks. February 1993 . belts. Electrically ground all generator sets (system and frame ground).9.

February 1993 .10.4 Blades.1 Before moving his machine. Before leaving his machine.10. planers. knives.10.3 The engine shall not be left running when the driver is not at the controls. and routers must be barricaded and only authorized and trained personnel allowed within the barricaded area. This equipment shall be equipped with rollover protection.0 Mechanical Equipment Page 296 . 3.5 If there is work to be done underneath such hydraulic equipment. The wheels should be properly chocked.10. 3. the equipment must be blocked in position. 3. blades. Only that part of the blade necessary to carry out the work shall be exposed at any one time. a driver must shut off the engine and remove the ignition key. A valid Saudi Arab Government heavy equipment license and a valid Saudi Aramco certificate issued by the Saudi Aramco Heavy Equipment Operator Testing Unit are required for each operator of such equipment.10. scraper bowls.11 Woodworking Machinery Only fully trained operators may be allowed to use woodworking machinery. Scrapers.10 Graders. etc. must be lowered to the ground before the driver leaves his unit. the driver must walk around it to see that the area is clear. 3. essential that a banksman be appointed to warn the operator of hazards that cannot be seen from the operator's position. 3. etc. Dozers. 3. This machinery is inherently dangerous since the hazardous parts..11. therefore.3. 3. Loaders And Miniloaders Heavy earth moving equipment only allows the operator a limited view of the immediate area.3. cannot be fully enclosed. It is.1 The area around saws.2 Men must not be allowed to sit or lie in the area around the machine.

3.11.11.) February 1993 .0 Mechanical Equipment Page 297 . (See General And Civil.3.2 The ground around such machinery must be kept clear of off-cuts and other tripping hazards. 3. II of this manual.3 Machinery should be securely anchored to prevent movement during use.

Receiving. manual material handling work can be replaced by the use of machines. The storage and movement of the various materials must be carefully arranged to make optimum use of the machines so that efficient service can be provided and ensure that all vehicle. Planning for materials handling operations begins as the production schedule is being drawn. Fire fighting equipment should be located throughout the area.13 Typical n Construction Materials Store Yard).1.165 GI 1131. costly. How construction materials are handled can have a considerable effect on the efficiency of production and on the safety record of the site. inefficient.1. there are many areas in which labor intensive. February 1993 .001 Identifying.013 GI 1131.1 Planning Successful mechanization of material handling requires that the correct machines be available and properly used. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 355. 4.921 4. Ordering. 4. However. it is not possible to mechanize material handling to the same extent as it would be in a more stable operation. Contact the Fire Prevention Group of Loss Prevention for i formation (see Figure III. Issuing And Disposing Of Hazardous Materials Vehicle Loading Use of Trailer Brakes Use of Trailer Safety Chains GI 1130.1 Selection of the storage area should be made with due consideration for drainage and protection from rain and sandstorms (see Figure III. Because of the temporary nature of site work and the frequent change of the work place.13 Typical Construction Materials Store Yard).4. crane and heavy equipment operators hold current Saudi Arab Government License and Saudi Aramco Certification where required.4. Ensure that the layout of storage areas provides for adequate access for necessary mechanical equipment. 4.2 Open storage areas should be planned to minimize the reversing and maneuvering of trucks especially into and out of confined areas.0 MATERIALS HANDLING Materials handling forms a large part of construction work.1. Storing.3 Access ways must be wide enough to allow for the passage of fire trucks.0 Materials Handling Page 298 . and frequently dangerous.

2.8 On larger projects.0 Mechanical Equipment Page 299 .2 Machine Transport A wide variety of mechanical equipment is available for transporting and distributing materials on and around a job site. and valves should be maintained fully assembled and securely closed. 4. All machined surfaces must be covered and fully protected from exposure to the weather. They range from simple equipment such as a dumper or a tractor and trailer to more sophisticated equipment such as a concrete pump or a large crane. racks. the movement of materials could justify the employment of a loading and unloading gang.5 Protection should be provided for materials such as cement. and distribution stage.1. and other bulk material which could be damaged by moisture. equipment. 4.1.6 All machinery. there should be a man appointed as a materials controller responsible for materials from the planning stage through to the final unloading. storage. the staffing of the storage areas can then be considered. insulation.7 The quantity of material on site at any one time must be restricted to a minimum stock. Once these factors have been established.9 Routinely. 4. February 1993 . Unfortunately they are also a common source of injuries and damage.1. Such a policy should greatly reduce losses due to pilferage or damage (see Figure III.1 Dumpers Dumpers are one of the most commonly used pieces of construction equipment and have proved very useful in transporting concrete and other small loads around site. 4. whereas small jobs would probably need only one man assigned to this responsibility. 4. on most sites.1. or pallets should be used to ensure that all materials are stored off the ground. 4. 4.3. Flammable stores shall be kept separated.4 Cribbing timber.1.4.1.13 Typical Construction Materials Store Yard).

and loads must be securely tied down before being transported. The equipment is designed for the movement of material only.Dumper drivers must be properly trained and experienced and must hold a current Saudi Arab Government license.3 Conveyor Belts and Monorails Conveyor belts and monorails are occasionally used for transporting concrete.000 pounds). thorough consideration must be given to their use. On/off switches shall be clearly marked and readily accessible. If they are to be used for towing. Because of the nature of the materials stored in such an area. a proper towing eye with a shackle or pin must be provided.072 kilograms (20. In addition to the normal precaution of good maintenance. Dumpers must be regularly maintained with particular attention to brakes.0 Mechanical Equipment Page 300 . Materials should be stored on shelving or with small items such as nuts and bolts. such as paints. Notices warning of the dangers associated with these materials should be posted in the hazard area. Adequate fire fighting equipment must be readily available in the area. chemicals.. 4. the trailer can still be brought to a controlled stop by the tractor. it is essential that an indoor stores shed. fuels. They have the advantage of being able to move large amounts of concrete very speedily to the area where it is required. Trailers used for carrying pipes should be fitted with side stops. 4. it is essential that safety chains or wire ropes be fitted between the tractor and trailer so that if the towing connection should break or become separated for some reason. Because of the many problems associated with them. Passengers must not be allowed to travel in the skip or anywhere else on the machine. Trailer and its load shall not exceed the towing capacity of the tractor and shall be fitted with an independent braking system if it is designed to carry more than 9.2. steering. rollers.3. in bins suitably marked with the contents. however. The issuing and receiving of stores must be under the control of a responsible person.2. February 1993 . or aggregate on site. under the control of a responsible person. placing concrete by this method can significantly reduce the number of dumpers employed or the crane usage time expended on a civil engineering contract. etc. 4. should be separated and stored in an isolated flammable storage area (see Appendix C).3 Site Stores For small or valuable materials which cannot be conveniently stored in outside areas. gears and pinch points shall be guarded. be established on site. The safe loads allowed on racks and the maximu m stack heights should be established. They require a complete maintenance program. The operation of this equipment demands specialized knowledge of concrete technology. 4. sand.2. etc.2 Tractors and Trailers Tractors and trailers are useful for moving larger loads around the site. All hazardous material. the main considerations must be security and fire prevention.4 Concrete Pumps Concrete pumps are used for the placement of concrete in difficult situations. and skip release mechanism. All pulleys.

4.4

Manual Handling
There are many areas of construction work where mechanization cannot take the place of sheer muscle, and it is in such areas that the majority of injuries occur. The inevitable results of lifting incorrectly are strained backs, slipped discs, sprains and strains, and a complexity of internal injuries. It is, therefore, essential that workers be trained in the correct methods of manual handling. Safe lifting can only be carried out by the proper use of the right muscles. Back and abdominal muscles are weak, while the leg and thigh muscles are strong. The spine has a natural and comfortable shape when a man is standing upright; however, if he bends, the spine arches and becomes weaker. If the spine can be kept in a straight position when lifting, the strain of the lift goes to the strong muscles of the leg and thigh and loads can be lifted safely, with much less physical effort. This is the basic principle of manual handling. 4.4.1 There are four significant points in a proper lift: 1. 2. Grip: A good grip makes maximum use of the palm of the hand, the ball of the thumb, and base of the fingers. Back: The back must be kept straight to maintain its most natural and strongest position. This means that the knees and ankles must be bent and the chin kept well into the chest. The body must be positioned as close to the load as possible so as to act as a counterweight. Feet: The feet should be apart the width of the hips with one foot slightly in front of the other so that a natural lead off is obtained. Arms: The arms must be kept as close as possible to the body.

3. 4. 4.4.2

The important factor in manual handling is that a man should know his capabilities and ask for assistance with loads beyond his capabilities. In dual lifting, partners should be approximately the same height and weight so that the load does not become unevenly distributed. 4.4.3 Loads, even when properly lifted, can slip. The man lifting must be prepared for such a possibility and wear the proper protective equipment. Safety footwear is mandatory to protect feet and gloves should be worn to protect hands from laceration or splinters and to give some protection if the fingers are trapped between the load and the other surfaces.

February 1993 - 3.0 Mechanical Equipment

Page 301

FIGURE III.13: TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS S TORE YARD

February 1993 - 3.0 Mechanical Equipment

Page 302

ATTACHMENT III.1: HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATOR LICENSING INFORMATION GENERAL INFORMATION All crane and other heavy equipment operators working on Saudi Aramco projects are required to have a valid heavy equipment operator Saudi Arab Government (SAG) license and a Saudi Aramco Heavy Equipment Operator Certificate. This applies to Saudi Aramco employees as well as contractor employees. Saudi Arabs and non-Saudi citizens employed by Saudi Aramco or contractors working on Saudi Aramco projects may obtain their SAG license by following the established procedure. SAUDI ARAMCO EMPLOYEES (SAUDI AND NON-SAUDI) WITHOUT HEAVY EQUIPMENT LICENSE Application forms for SAG Heavy Equipment License are completed and processed at the Saudi Aramco License Unit, Building # 510, Dhahran. (Saudi Aramco employees in all other areas apply to local Saudi Aramco License Unit). After completion of an eye examination and blood test, the applicant is scheduled for an operator competency test by the Heavy Equipment Operator Training/Testing Unit, Dhahran (Tel. 874-1857). Upon successful completion of the test, application forms are returned to the Saudi Aramco License Unit for processing through the SAG Traffic Department, Dammam, for SAG License issue. SAUDI ARAMCO EMPLOYEES (NON-SAUDI) WITH HOME COUNTRY HEAVY EQUIPMENT LICENSE Employees with valid home country licenses need only apply through the Saudi Aramco License Unit, Building # 510, Dhahran (Saudi Aramco employees in all other areas apply to their local Saudi Aramco License Unit). After completion of an eye examination and blood test, application forms are forwarded by the Saudi Aramco License Unit for processing to the SAG Traffic Department, Dammam, for SAG License issue. A company test is not required. CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES (SAUDI AND NON-SAUDI) WITHOUT HEAVY EQUIPMENT LICENSE Application for SAG Heavy Equipment License is made directly to the SAG Traffic Department, Dammam. Upon completion of the eye examination and blood test, the contractor company representative contacts the Saudi Aramco Heavy Equipment Operator Training/Testing Unit (Tel. 874-1857) for scheduling of the competency test. (Application form is to accompany contractor employee to the test site). After the successful completion of the competency test, the test sheet is attached to the application form. The application form is then taken to the SAG Traffic Department, Dammam, for processing and license issue.

February 1993 - 3.0 Mechanical Equipment

Page 303

CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES (NON-SAUDI) WITH HOME COUNTRY HEAVY EQUIPMENT LICENSE Contractor employee with a valid home country license need only apply for SAG license to the SAG Traffic Department, Dammam, for processing and license issue. A competency test is not required for SAG license. On receipt of the SAG license, the contractor company representative contacts the Saudi Aramco Heavy Equipment Operator Training and Testing Unit (Tel. 874-1857) for scheduling of the Saudi Aramco certification test.

February 1993 - 3.0 Mechanical Equipment

Page 304

IV. Electrical And Radiation

February 1993 - Construction Safety Manual: IV. Electrical And Radiation

Page 305

1.0 ELECTRICITY
The human senses (smell, taste, hearing, etc.) do not provide a warning of an electrical hazard. The great majority of electrical accidents result in burns. Fire and explosion from sparks in flammable atmospheres can and does lead to loss of life and serious damage to property. All electrical installations, no matter what voltages are used, should always be treated with great caution. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2.100 GI 6.012. Work Permit System Isolation, Lockout And Use of Hold Tags

Power Distribution Instruction: No. 10.0. No. 11.0. No. 50.0. Power Distribution System Operations Hold Orders, Clearances and Permission to Test Safety Grounding

Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards: Electrical Power Manual (SAES-P series) SAES -B-064 Onshore And Near Shore Pipeline Safety

Operations Instructions Manual: No. 1.111. NFPA 70: ANSI/IEEE C2-90 National Electrical Safety Code ANSI B30.5. 29 CFR 1926 Mobile and Locomotive Cranes Subpart N - Cranes, Derricks, Hoists, Elevators And Conveyors US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety And Health Administration (OSHA) Electrical Connections National Electrical Code

February 1993 - Construction Safety Manual: Electricity

Page 306

1.1

Voltage
The severity of electric shock is not entirely dependent upon the voltage of the power source. The ratio of the voltage to resistance determines the current that will flow through the body and the resulting injury. In terms of a formula this ratio is: Current through the body = Voltage applied across the body Resistance of the body + contact resistance

The hazard is greater if working conditions are wet or if the worker perspires freely. This produces a combination of wet skin and body salt which provides low resistance to current flow.

1.2

Temporary Installations
Distribution of electricity on a construction site is different from a permanent installation. As construction work proceeds, the type of equipment in use changes. From excavation to completion, there is a constant need for convenient means of connecting equipment. This requires a variety of voltages, phases, and current in different places at different times. Load requirements will vary considerably. All temporary electrical systems shall conform to the National Electrical Code. 1.2.1 The contractor is responsible for the temporary electric supply system on a construction site and the safety measures associated with the National Electrical Code. 1.2.2 Cables on site are subject to rough treatment. Special care should be taken to ensure that the grounding conductor remains intact. If the conducting wire breaks, the supply will not be interrupted under a ground fault condition and the system will no longer be safe. Only UL, FM or other recognized testing lab approved extension cords bearing appropriate lab trademarks shall be used. Damaged or spliced cords are not acceptable to Saudi Aramco. 1.2.3 Special care shall be taken to ensure that the correct fuse or breaker ratings are strictly enforced and that the Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs) are installed properly on all circuits. 1.2.4 All installation work must be carried out by qualified, experienced electricians. Before connecting temporary electrical installations to existing installations, prior approval must be obtained from the Saudi Aramco proponent department.

February 1993 - 1.0 Electricity

Page 307

This is to ensure that no overloading of electrical devices will occur and system protection will not be compromised. 1.2.5 A competent person must be made directly responsible for the overall safety of the installation. Its general usage, its maintenance, and any alterations and extensions to the system should be under his control. He must be at the site whenever work is being done. Before any part of a newly installed electrical system or its equipment is energized, it must be thoroughly tested. Safety can be ensured by regular inspection and maintenance.

1.3

Hand Tools and Lighting
1.3.1 Many injuries, fires, and explosions have resulted when extension lights with defective cords or fittings have been used or when bulbs have been broken, exposing the live filament wire to an explosive atmosphere. All electrically operated tools shall be rated and used at a voltage not exceeding 125V. The use of 220V is prohibited. 1.3.2 Defective extension lights and electric hand tools shall be repaired or replaced. A defective electrical tool or cord can cause burns, falls as a result of sudden shocks, or even fatalities. 1.3.3 Portable electric tools, extension lights and cords should be inspected each time they are issued and returned. This should be part of a tool store procedure. Frequent random checks should be made where those tools, lights and plugs are being used on site. Portable hand lamps shall comply with the following: (1) (2) (3) Metal shell, paper-lined lamp holders shall not be used. Hand lamps shall be equipped with insulated handle. Substantial lamp guard shall be attached to the handle or holder. Metallic lamp guards shall be grounded. Three-wire power cords with grounding conductor shall be used.

1.3.4 Failure of electrical equipment, because of misuse, is a frequent cause of shock. Workers are prone to abuse extension cords by pulling them over sharp metal objects, hanging them across equipment, kicking them, or letting them be run over

February 1993 - 1.0 Electricity

Page 308

by industrial equipment. They often strain the cords during use, causing the plug and fixture to part and expose live wires. 1.3.5 Many accidents occur when lower volt equipment is plugged into higher volt systems. Before any portable tool or extension light is plugged in, the voltage required for the tool or light must be the same as the power source, and the plugs must be checked for damage. 1.3.6 The importance of grounding all portable tools and lights cannot be emphasized too strongly. All non-current carrying metal parts of any electrical equipment must be properly grounded. This will reduce the electrical shock hazard. 1.3.7 In hazardous areas, more stringent rules apply as to the type of equipment which may be used. Explosion proof light fittings for extension lights is one example. As with all work carried out on Saudi Aramco installations, Work Permits must be obtained and the type of equipment to be used discussed and agreed upon before the permit is issued. 1.3.8 General Precautions: Only qualified electricians should make repairs and carry out maintenance checks. All extension lights must be fitted with protective guards, so if accidentally dropped, the lamp remains intact. Up to a 120 volt maximum rated AC portable lighting system may be used for illuminating inside confined spaces and vessels, provided it is protected by an externally located ground fault circuit interrupter and also meets the provisions of GI 520.001 Section 5.5.5.1 and 520.001-4 (Supplement 4) - "Confined Space Entry Procedure" (Abqaiq Plants). 1.3.9 Ground fault circuit interrupters shall be used on all electrical circuits including portable power electrical supplies (see NFPA Handbook of the National Electric Safety Code, Section 305-b for GFCIs) on temporary wiring. 1.3.10 The National Electric Safety Code defines requirements for the construction and use of portable extension and electric cords in industrial service. This code shall be followed by construction groups.

1.4

Work on Live Equipment
1.4.1 Whenever workmen are required to work on energized equipment, the job must be planned thoroughly and the workmen should proceed with caution.

February 1993 - 1.0 Electricity

Page 309

1.5 Overhead and Underground Cables On any construction site. If there is any doubt. (See OSHA 29 CFR 1926 Subpart N. A foreman or supervisor should also be in attendance while this work is being carried out. Protective equipment must be used correctly. 1.5 Work on live equipment can be as safe as work on isolated equipment if the following are observed: 1 2 3 4 There must be a thorough knowledge of the equipment and the job to be done. 1.) February 1993 . 1. If re-routing existing cables is necessary.4. 1. and all necessary work permits must be obtained. and he must know how to isolate the equipment. there must be another electrician standing by. there must be a thorough knowledge of the work involved. a check must be made before the work is started.4 Work platforms and equipment used near energized equipment shall be properly grounded. The work must be correctly planned before starting. the exact voltages should be known.2 Employees must never work alone on live equipment.0 Electricity Page 310 .1.4. In addition to the man doing the job.1) High voltage or overhead lines are usually uninsulated. any kind of metallic object coming near or in contact with them can cause a hazardous situation. This is important as it determines the type of personal protection required for the work and the procedures established in the work permit. personal protective equipment must be available. the advice of the supervisor or responsible person should be sought.Before any work on live equipment starts.3 Before starting a job.4.1 Overhead Lines (Figure IV. High voltage can easily arc across a considerable distance. Contact should be made with the appropriate Saudi Aramco department at the planning stage of the job to determine the work permit requirements. this should be done before the main contract starts.5.4. If there is any doubt about voltages. 1. Therefore. power supplies may have already been installed below ground or overhead. route and depth of any underground cables and the recommended safe clearances.

energized lines and February 1993 . or Determinations Existing conditions shall be determined before starting work. 1. Tests. 1. Access below the powerlines shall be restricted by barriers to where the "goalposts" are located (see Figure IV. grounded. so that no part of any mobile crane. Underground cables. High voltage overhead lines have been mistaken for telephone cables. and certified as such by Saudi Aramco.5.1 Initial Inspections.1.0 Electricity Page 311 .) 1. earth moving equipment.3 Underground Cables Normal depth of underground cables varies between 46 centimeters (18 inches) and 0. The area must be barricaded until the damaged cable has been made safe. but not be limited to. Unless cables have been laid very deep. by an inspection or a test.2 The Contractor Should Arrange for Power Lines to be: 1 2 3 Re-routed clear of all construction work or placed underground if possible. exposed during excavation work should be assumed to be energized and not repositioned or moved until certified to be de-energized. etc. (See SAES -B-064. due to the work.2.6. Protected by barriers and timber or wire "goal-posts". The need for caution in working with overhead lines cannot be over-emphasized.1).5. can mean that the "as built" depth is no longer correct). Accidental damage to any cable exposed during excavation shall be immediately reported to Saudi Aramco. It should never be assumed that there is enough clearance. operation or maintenance of above grade or below grade onshore pipelines. it should always be checked. can approach the live cable. It should never be assumed that a cable or line is "dead".1. No mechanical excavations should be started before test trenches have been dug by hand and cable locations established. 1. (Changes in ground level. Clearance distances should be agreed upon with Saudi Aramco. it should always be proved. Made "dead".5. Exposed buried cables in open trenches should be properly supported and the area barricaded. heavy vehicles should not be allowed to pass over them.1 Spacing Between Powerlines and Pipelines Special precautions are required during installation.6 Overhead Power Transmission and Distribution The standards given in this section provide minimum requirements for safety and health during construction.9 meter (3 feet). Such conditions shall include.

1.1. including power and communication lines. condition of poles.100 and GI 6.6. Operating voltage of equipment and lines shall be determined before working on or near energized parts.6.equipment. the crew leader shall determine that all members in his crew are clear and that protective grounds installed by his crew have been removed. First-aid fundamentals including cardiopulmonary resuscitation.012 shall be followed. and Remote field crews shall have an employee certified in First-Aid. and all circuits will be identified. and a prominent tag and lock for each such independent crew shall be placed on the line or equipment by the designated crew leader.2 De-energizing Lines and Equipment The procedures outlined in GI 2. tagged.3 Emergency Procedures and First Aid The Contractor shall provide training or require that his employees are knowledgeable and proficient in the following: 1 2 3 1. He shall release his clearance to Saudi Aramco. Upon completion of work on de-energized lines or equipment. ropes and at least one skiff shall be provided. and tested. Electrical equipment and lines shall be considered energized until determined to be de-energized by testing and grounding.6. Guards or barriers shall be erected as necessary near to adjacent energized lines.0 Electricity Page 312 . locked. spotlights or portable lights for emergency lighting shall be provided as needed to perform the work safely. Night Work When working at night.6. February 1993 . Equipment shall be checked for potential and protective grounds shall be applied.5 Work Near/Over Water When crews are engaged in work over or near water and when danger of drowning exists. and the location of circuits and equipment. a separate "clearance" shall be given to each crew by the Saudi Aramco Power Dispatcher. 1. When more than one independent crew needs to work on the same line or equipment at the same time. 1. suitable protection such as buoyant work vests shall be worn. Life rings.4 Procedures involving emergency situations.

or All live-line tools shall be visually inspected and wiped clean before use each day. 1.6.8. A-frame.1. 1. and hydraulic tools which are used on or around energized lines and equipment shall be of the insulating type. illuminated warning devices shall be attached to the trailing end of the longest pole and haul truck brake lights shall not be obscured.000 volts per foot of length for 3 minutes when the tool is made of wood.3 Storage No materials or equipment shall be stored under energized bus. cross arms. the load shall be thoroughly examined to ascertain if the load has shifted.2 Pole Hauling During pole hauling operations.6.4 Framing During framing operations.6. all loads shall be secured to prevent displacement and a red flag shall be displayed at the trailing end of the longest pole. Tools with any hazardous defect shall be removed from service. or near energized equipment.6.1 Unloading Prior to unloading steel.8.1.8.000 volts per foot of length for 5 minutes when the tool is made of fiberglass.6 Hydraulic Fluids All hydraulic fluids used for the insulated sections of derrick trucks. or 75.8 Material Handling 1.7 Live-Line Tools (Hot Sticks) Only live-line tool poles having a manufacturer's certification meeting the following requirements shall be used: 1 2 100. 1. or similar equipment unless the pole or structure is adequately supported. 1. February 1993 .6. poles. binders or stakes have broken. aerial lifts.8.0 Electricity Page 313 . or the load is otherwise hazardous to employees. energized lines.6. 1. Precautions shall be exercised to prevent blocking of roadways or endangering other traffic. When hauling poles during the hours of darkness. and similar material. employees shall not work under a pole or a structure suspended by a crane.6.

Protective grounds shall be installed so that it is not possible for workers to come in contact with a grounded component and an ungrounded component simultaneously. and then the equipment.4 Removal of Grounds for Testing Purposes Grounds may be temporarily removed with the permission of the Power Dispatcher. Grounding cables shall first be disconnected from the line or equipment and then be disconnected from ground. Extreme caution shall be exercised while the equipment/line is not grounded.1. and be grounded. or as close as practicable to. 1.2) Grounding cables shall be connected to ground first.1 Isolation and Voltage Testing Equipment to be worked on when it is deenergized shall be isolated from the system and tested for voltage using test equipment rated for the system. 1.9. thereby.6. the line section must be grounded and short circuited at each end of the line section and the conductor to be worked on shall be grounded at each work location.6. 1.2 Applying and Removing Grounds (See Figure IV. rapidly diminishing the electrical February 1993 . This provis ion shall not apply to electric construction crews when setting or removing poles.6. Non-conductive tag lines or other suitable devices shall be used to control loads being handled by hoisting equipment.6. Grounding cables shall be at.9.6. 1.6.5 Attaching the Load The hoist rope shall not be wrapped around the load.0 Electricity Page 314 .9. 1.6.8.5 Groundi ng Electrode When grounding electrodes are utilized.9 Grounding for Protection of Workers 1.9. the work location. Grounding cables shall be installed and removed using hot sticks or insulating gloves and protective apparel. such electrodes shall exhibit low resistance to ground.9.3 Grounding Distance If the work is to be performed at more than one location in a line section.1.

precautions shall be taken to avoid contact with energized lines or equipment.6. Ladders shall be provided for access to pad or pile-type footing excavations in excess of 1. Before installing or removing wire or cable. Unless using protective equipment suitable for the voltage involved. they shall not be climbed until made safe by guying. February 1993 .) When working in unstable material. Even in desert areas.10. unguarded pole holes are a hazard. ladders. gin poles.hazard to personnel. or other mechanized equipment near energized lines or equipment. Tag lines shall be of a non-conductive type when used near energized lines.1 Metal Tower Construction When working in unstable material. When setting. 2 AWG standard copper.2 meters (4 feet). insulated tools (or other operating equipment) must be used by personnel. 2.10 Overhead Lines Prior to climbing poles. Where poles or structures may be unsafe for climbing. bracing.52 meters (5 feet) deep shall be either sloped to the angle of repose as required or shored if entry is required. derricks.4. Lifting equipment shall be bonded to an effective ground or it shall be considered energized and barricaded when utilized near energized equipment or lines. Pole holes shall not be left unattended or unguarded. employees standing on the ground shall avoid contacting equipment or machinery working adjacent to energized lines or equipment. (See Section II.1.6. or removing poles using cranes. And Shoring for depth and slope criteria. or other adequate means. 1. provision shall be made for cleaning out auger-type footings without requiring an employee to enter the footing unless shoring is used to protect the employee. 1.0 Electricity Page 315 .6.6 Grounding Cables And Clamps Grounding cables and clamps shall be capable of conducting the anticipated fault current and shall have a minimum size of No.9. Excavations. or other elevated structures. an inspection shall be made to determine that the structures are capable of sustaining the additional or unbalanced stresses to which they will be subjected. scaffolds. the excavation for pad or pile-type footings in excess of 1. Trenching. 1. Otherwise. strains to which poles and structures will be subjected shall be considered and necessary action taken to prevent failure of supporting structures. Aframes. moving.

Tower assembly shall be carried out with a minimum exposure of employees to falling objects when working at two or more levels on a tower. No one shall be permitted under a tower which is in the process of erection or assembly.A designated employee shall be used in directing mobile equipment adjacent to footing excavations. extraordinary caution shall be exercised to maintain the minimum clearance distances required. If the lines are not de-energized. An employee shall be utilized to determine that required clearance is maintained in moving equipment under or near energized lines. the lines shall be de-energized when practical. Except during emergency restoration procedures. February 1993 . except where the use of such lines would create a greater hazard. Guy lines shall be used as necessary to maintain sections or parts of sections in position and to reduce the possibility of tipping. Tag lines shall be utilized to maintain control of tower sections being raised and positioned. the location of use for such equipment shall be graded and leveled. No one shall be permitted to remain in the footing while equipment is being spotted for placement.0 Electricity Page 316 .1. Equipment and rigging shall be regularly inspected and maintained in safe operating condition. erection shall be discontinued in the event of high wind or other adverse weather conditions which would make the work hazardous. except as may be required to guide and secure the section being set. Where necessary to assure the stability of mobile equipment. Erection shall be set on firm level foundations and when the cranes are so equipped. outriggers shall be used. The loadline shall not be detached from a tower section until the section is adequately secured. Adequate traffic control shall be maintained when crossing highways and railways with equipment. When erecting towers using hoisting equipment adjacent to energized transmission lines. Members and sections being assembled shall be adequately supported.

proper clearance authorization shall be secured and the line grounded on both sides of the crossover. the line being strung shall be grounded on either side of the crossover or and worked on as if energized. guard structures. In addition. and the clearance authorization required.0 Electricity Page 317 . When the existing line has been de-energized. Anchors. tielines. or the line being strung or removed shall be worked on as if energized. the conductor being installed or removed shall be grounded. Pulling lines and accessories shall be inspected regularly and replaced or repaired when damaged or when dependability is doubtful. Conductors being strung in or removed shall be kept under positive control by the use of adequate tension reels. sock connections. a briefing shall be held setting forth the plan of operation and specifying the type of equipment to be used. Where there is a possibility of the conductor accidentally contacting an energized circuit or receiving a dangerous induced voltage buildup.2 Stringing/Removing De-energized Conductors When stringing or removing de-energized conductors. the provisions of the following paragraphs shall be complied with. to further protect the employee from the hazards of the conductor. rope nets or guard structures shall be installed unless provision is made to isolate or insulate the workman or the energized conductor. February 1993 . riggings.6. The manufacturer's load rating shall not be exceeded for stringing lines. Where practical the automatic re-closing feature of the circuit interrupting device shall be made inoperative. pulling lines. When crossing over energized conductors in excess of 600 volts. and adequately supported.1. grounding devices and procedures to be followed. Guard structure members shall be sound and of adequate dimension and strength.1. and hoists shall be of ample capacity to prevent loss of the lines. or other means to prevent accidental contact with energized circuits. crossover methods to be employed. and all load-bearing hardware and accessories.10. Prior to stringing operations.

and be leveled and aligned in accordance with the manufacturer's operating instructions.0 Electricity Page 318 .Conductor grips shall not be used on wire rope unless designed for this application. All pulling and tensioning equipment shall be isolated. When working on bare conductors. nor shall any employee be permitted on the crossarm. Reliable communications between the reel tender and pulling rig operator shall be provided. When stringing adjacent to energized lines. particularly during switching and ground fault conditions. shall have ample capacity. except on dead end structures.10. and overhead ground conductor during stringing operations. or effectively grounded. While the conductor or pulling line is being pulled (in motion) employees shall not be permitted directly under overhead operations. Each pull shall be snubbed or dead ended at both ends before subsequent pulls. 1. it shall be determined whether dangerous induced voltage buildups will occur in the system. sub-conductor. insulated. Reel handling equipment. Stringing and clipping operations shall be discontinued during electrical storms. including pulling and braking machines. A ground shall be installed between the tensioning reel setup and the first structure in order to ground each bare conductor. each bare conductor.1. Except during emergency restoration procedures. clipping and tying crews shall work between grounds at all times. work from structures shall be discontinued when adverse weather (such as high wind or ice on structures) makes the work hazardous. operate smo othly. The grounds shall remain intact until the conductors are clipped in. A transmission clipping crew shall have a minimum of two structures clipped in between the crew and the conductor being sagged.3 Stringing Adjacent to Energized Lines Prior to stringing parallel to an existing energized transmission line. the tension stringing method or other methods which preclude unintentional contact between the lines being pulled and any employee shall be used. sub-conductor. During stringing operations.6. and overhead ground conductor shall be grounded at the first tower adjacent to both the tensioning and pulling setup and in increments February 1993 .

• • Work on dead-end towers shall require grounding on all deenergized lines.6. (See Power Distribution Instruction No.2 meters (10 feet) of working areas where conductors. sub-conductors. A ground shall be located at each side and within 3. and overhead ground conductors shall be bonded to the tower at any isolated tower where it may be necessary to complete work on the transmission line. When work is to be performed in a manhole or unvented vault.218 kilometers (two miles) from a ground. or other suitable guard.so that no point is more than 3.0 Electricity Page 319 . Conductors. February 1993 . When performing work from the structures. sub-conductors. GI 2. clipping crews and all others working on conductors. or overhead ground conductors shall be protected by individual grounds installed at every work location. hand holes. temporary cover. 1. shall be enforced. When a grounding mat is used.100. such as a manhole or an unvented vault.1. provided that the line is not left open circuited at the isolated tower at which work is being completed. Such grounds shall be removed at the last phase of aerial cleanup. • • • • The grounds shall be left in place until conductor installation is completed. Work Permit System. 50. sub-conductors. Before an employee enters a street opening. Grounds may be removed as soon as the work is completed. it shall be promptly protected with a barrier. it is recommended that the grounding mat be roped off and an insulated walkway provided for access to the mat. the grounds shall be placed and removed with a hot stick. and overhead ground conductors shall be grounded at all dead-end or catch-off points.11 Underground Lines Warning signs shall be promptly placed when covers of manholes. or overhead ground conductors are being spliced at ground level. It is recommended that splicing be carried out on either an insulated platform or on a conductive metallic grounding mat bonded to both grounds. Except for moving type grounds.) All conductors. or vaults are removed. The two ends to be spliced shall be bonded to each other.

• • 1.) they shall be protected as necessary to avoid damage.11. February 1993 . Where unsafe conditions are detected.. a manhole where energized cables or equipment are in service.1 1. someone on the surface must be aware of this type of entry and know the expected duration of the task. Work Permit System. the cable to be worked on shall be identified by electrical means unless its identity is obvious by reason of distinctive appearance. by testing or other means. taking readings. Before cutting into a cable or opening a splice. GOSP. the work shall be ventilated and otherwise made safe before entry. Work in Manholes While work is being performed in manholes. for the purpose of inspection. such as near a gasoline service station. When multiple cables exist in an excavation. etc. efforts shall be made to determine the location of such facilities and work in accordance with GI 2. housekeeping. water. working alone. When working on buried cable or on cable in manholes. metallic sheath continuity shall be maintained by bonding across the opening or by equivalent means.6.0 Electricity Page 320 . refinery. telephone. the atmosphere of the manhole or excavation shall be tested and found safe or cleared of the combustible gases or liquids (See GI 2. the cable shall be identified and verified by the proponent department. from entering for brief periods of time.100. other than for emergencies.6. in order to prevent the exposure of employees to the hazards created by damage to dangerous underground facilities. etc. This shall not preclude the employee in the immediate vicinity from occasionally entering a manhole to provide assistance. Provisions shall be made for an adequate continuous supply of air.2 Trenching and Excavating During excavation or trenching.1. an employee shall be available in the immediate vicinity to render emergency assistance as required. This requirement does not preclude a qualified employee. gas.11. However. Before entering or using open flames in a manhole excavation in an area where combustible gases or liquids may be present. or similar work if such work can be performed safely.100). When underground facilities are exposed (electric.• No entry shall be permitted unless forced ventilation is provided or the atmosphere is found to be safe by testing for oxygen deficiency and the presence of explosive gases or fumes.

12 Construction in Energized Substations When construction work is performed in an energized substation. 1. Signs indicating the hazard shall be posted near the barricade or barrier. materials.12. and equipment in the vicinity of energized facilities.0 Electricity Page 321 . All mobile cranes and derricks shall be effectively grounded when being moved or operated in close proximity to energized lines or equipment. or improper wiring.1 Barricades and Barriers Barricades or barriers shall be installed to prevent accidental contact with energized lines or equipment. (See OSHA 29 CFR 1926 Subpart N. transformers or breakers. 1. shall be provided. a temporary fence affording similar protection. safety precautions shall be detailed in the work permit (See GI 2.4 Substation Fences When a substation fence must be expanded or removed for construction purposes.3 Mechanized Equipment Use of vehicles. when the site is unattended.1. or the equipment shall be considered energized.100). tower steel. February 1993 .6. (See GI 2.2 Control Panels Work on or adjacent to energized control panels shall be performed by designated employees.100) When work is to be done in an energized substation.1. and other equipment in restricted or hazardous areas shall at all times be controlled by designated employees. Extreme caution shall be exercised in the handling of busbars.6. Adequate bonding and grounding interconnections shall be maintained between temporary fence and permanent fence. gin poles.6. 1. vibration. authorization shall be obtained from the local power service dispatcher and a work permit shall be issued. cranes.12.12.6. Precaution shall be taken to prevent accidental operation of relays or other protective devices due to jarring. 1.) Fenders shall not be required for low-boys used for transporting large electrical equipment.6.12.

If breathing has stopped.1. Employees will be trained in First Aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). switch off the power supply. If this is not instantly possible. In brief. Call for first aid assistance.0 Electricity Page 322 . dry blanket. the sequence for dealing with an electrical accident is: 1 If at all possible. or properly insulated equipment. release the victim from contact with the conductor by using dry gloves. The Saudi Aramco emergency number is 110. dry wood. 2 3 February 1993 . a doctor.All gates to all unattended substations shall be locked. 1.7 Electric Shock Speed is essential in dealing with any electrical accident. rubber sheets. and an ambulance. dry clothing. A copy of "The Treatment for Electric Shock" placard in Arabic and English should be prominently displayed so that everyone knows what to do in an emergency. except when work is in progress. begin CPR and continue as necessary.

"made dead" or protected by timber "goal posts" and barriers.1.1: TEMPORARY CROSSING FOR CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT Overhead power lines are usually uninsulated and any kind of metallic object coming near or in contact with them can cause a hazardous situation.0 Electricity Page 323 . February 1993 .FIGURE IV. Clearance distances should be agreed upon with Saudi Aramco before work starts. High voltage can easily arc across considerable distance. Overhead lines should therefore be rerouted.

1.0 Electricity Page 324 .2 PROPER USE OF INSULATING TOOLS AND PROTECTIVE APPAREL Note: Grounding Cables Shall Be Isolated And Removed Using Insulating Tools And Protective Apparel February 1993 .FIGURE IV.

they cannot be perceived by any of our five senses. and shielding are the usual methods of reducing radiation exposure.1. February 1993 . The material tested does not retain any radioactivity when testing is completed. that is. X-rays and gamma rays both have properties which should be understood. such as x-rays generated by equipment or gamma rays emitted spontaneously by radioactive materials. Even though they penetrate the body. For all practical purposes.Construction Safety Manual: Ionizing Radiation Page 325 .003-2. testing of welds in pipes and pressure vessels. they ionize gases.2 Time Time is a useful method of protection because high dose rates can be accepted over very short periods of time. the radiation intensity decreases with the inverse square of the distance. they can be absorbed and scattered by matter. the cumulative dose must remain at acceptable limits given in GI 150. and by far the most important.g. dose rates at close distances can be extremely high. time. It is essential. they affect photographic emulsions. they travel in straight lines at the speed of light. However.1. that unshielded sources are kept at a sufficient distance from personnel so as not to pose a health hazard to them.003 00-AID-08 Ionizing Radiation Protection Radiation Safety Manual Saudi Aramco Forms: Saudi Aramco 2654 Personal Radiation Exposure Saudi Aramco Standard Drawings: AB-36895 Radiation Warning Sign 2. therefore.2. are widely used in industry for non-destructive testing. Conversely. they can be harmful to the living cells of the body.. 2. INSTRUCTIONS AND FORMS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: 150. without damaging the material. e.1 Distance Distance is an effective method of protection because gamma and x-rays obey the inverse square law. the radiation produced by x-ray equipment or emitted by radioactive sources are the same. even for low activity sources.0 IONIZING RADIATION Ionizing industrial radiation.1 Methods of Protection Against Radiation Distance. 2.

003-2 for occupational or non-occupational people. 2.2. Radiation workers are further categorized as Competent Persons or Radiographers. Under no circumstances shall the doses exceed those limits given in GI 150. No occupational exposure is allowed for persons less than 18 years of age. or tungsten. February 1993 .1 Radiation Workers A radiation worker is an occupationally exposed person or employee whose job involves routine use of ionizing radiation and who has reasonable chance of being exposed to radiation from a radioactive source.2 Classification of Personnel and Exposure Limits In order to control human exposure to industrial radiation. On the other hand. 2.003-2) are imposed on persons who are. depleted uranium. a direct-reading pocket dosimeter and an integrating permanent dosimeter (film badge or thermoluminiscent dosimeter [TLD]). materials of high density. such as lead.2.0 Ionizing Radiation Page 326 . 2. 2.1. Consequently. pregnant. precautions against emitted radiation are necessary until the electric power is turned off and locked out.003-2.2. to absorb unwanted radiation and facilitate handling. are used to absorb emitted radiation.2.2 Non-Radiation Workers Non-radiation workers should not receive more than those dose limits given in GI 150. In the use of x-ray equipment.2. Radiographers must wear two personal dosimeters when working with radiation. Competent Persons do not normally use radiation sources. Classification does not guarantee safety. but by training and experience are capable of supervising both routine operations and emergency situations involving radiation.3 Exposure Limits Radiation doses to workers should always be kept as low as reasonably achievable (ALARA). Special controls (see GI 150. Radiographers are expected to safely use radiation sources in the course of their work and must be in possession of a valid "Saudi Aramco Permit to Use Material/Equipment Producing Ionizing Radiation" before they can work with a radioactive source. all employees and contractors are classified as either radiation workers or non-radiation workers according to their training and need to use radiation sources. sealed sources are housed in shielded containers or bunkers. or are capable of being. safety procedures and adequate equipment must be used at all times. radioactive materials constantly emit radiation and cannot be switched off.3 Shielding To lessen harmful radiation.

0 Ionizing Radiation Page 327 . Under no circumstance is equipment to be transported in an unassembled or open condition.003) has full responsibility in all matters concerning the safe use. 2.3. A weekly report on the condition of all equipment should be passed to the supervisor.3.3 Responsibilities for Safe Handling The Radiation Protection Committee (see GI 150. 2. and the Loss Prevention Department. in populated work areas.1 Contractor The contractor appoints competent persons to be responsible for the immediate supervision and the enforcement of instructions and standards. storage. Personnel involved in performing non-destructive testing must be certified and hold a valid "Permit to Use Material/Equipment Producing Ionizing Radiation". He must report the results of these audits to the applicable department responsible for the operation.2 Competent Person Each radiographer will check at the beginning of each shift on the zeroing and recharging of dosimeters and on the condition of the equipment. One radiation monitoring instrument must be available for each source in use.0034 and 00. Upon arrival at the job site and prior to operating with any sealed source.AIP-08. Radiation areas must contain radiation warning signs (see Figure IV. Radiographer At the start of each shift. 2. In addition. the radiographer must ensure that non-radiation workers are not subject to radiation levels that would exceed that which is permitted. The area will be monitored with approved survey meter to ensure safe area for non-radiation workers is maintained.3. radiographers must ensure that all equipment is in safe working order. February 1993 . Equipment must be transported to the work site with safety locks in place.3. Also he must be familiar with all equipment and procedures so that the proper corrective action can be taken in any emergency situation involving radioactive equipment. and transportation of industrial sealed sources and x-ray machines used on Saudi Aramco property.2. Further guidance on industrial radiography is provided in GI 150. The radiographer must also make sure that he is wearing a valid TLD or film badge and a direct-reading pocket dosimeter which has been charged and zeroed.Over exposure shall be reported to the Saudi Aramco proponent. 2.3) and be clearly displayed around the circumference of the radiation area. A competent person familiar with all of Saudi Aramco radiation use requirements will make field audits to ensure compliance with Company instructions and standards. All malfunctions must be reported to the supervisor or Competent Person immediately. a rope or tape barrier shall be erected around the radiation area. the Occupational Medicine Services Unit.

3. (See Figure IV. by source and responsible competent person in charge of source. Additional information is available from Purchasing Services Division. 2. All permanent or temporary storage areas (bunkers) must be approved of by the Saudi Aramco Radiation Protection Committee. Radiation readings must be taken at the perimeter of the storage area and the radiation level must be within the acceptable limits given in GI 150.) • A log shall be maintained of radiation sources in storage.0 Ionizing Radiation Page 328 . every sealed source must be returned to a storage area approved by the Saudi Aramco Radiation Protection Committee. February 1993 .5 Storage Areas Upon completion of work or at the end of each work period. logged in or out.4 Shipping and Transportation Government Permits are required for shipping radioactive materials into and out of Saudi Arabia. Transporting radiation sources to work locations requires a locked container located out of the passenger compartment. Storage is usually within fenced area.2.2. Radiation signs must be fixed to the barriers of all storage areas.003. The vehicle shall have radiation signs on the front and rear. Sources may not be stored in the back of a truck whether or not they are under lock and key.

2.RADIATION February 1993 .3: S TANDARD S IGN .0 Ionizing Radiation Page 329 .FIGURE IV.

Chemicals And Operations February 1993 .V.Construction Safety Manual: V. Chemicals And Operations Page 330 .

INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 355. Both gases are heavier than air at normal temperatures. if the container is exposed to heat or flame. In the liquid form. there is a high risk of February 1993 . Storage and Handling Fuel Gas Code 1. i.7 Liquid Petroleum Gas American National Standards: NFPA 54-88 ANSI A10. and they react vigorously with oxidizing materials. These gases can be highly dangerous. The approximate ratios of gas volume to liquid volume are 275:1 for propane and 240:1 for butane.10-81 Safety Requirements for Temporary and Portable Space Heating Devices & Equipment Used in the Construction Industry NFPA 58-89 Liquefied Petroleum Gases. an odorizing agent is added for the obvious reason of facilitating detection in the event of accidental escape of the gas. LPG is a term applied to combinations of hydrocarbons known under various trade names and also widely known as propane and butane.Construction Safety Manual: Liquefied Petroleum Gases Page 331 . they are gaseous and can be changed into a liquid by the application of moderate pressure.020 Control of Compressed Gas Cylinders Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards: SAES -D-5 SAES -B.057 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Equipment. The gases form an explosive mixture with air. The i precautions covered in this section are directed to those industrial operators who handle these gases.e. Any leakage will form a gas cloud which will settle at the lowest possible level. relatively large quantities of LPG can be safely transported and stored in suitably designed containers.. Installation Safety Requirements: Refrigerated and Pressure Storage Vessels Saudi Aramco Bottled Gas Manual: Part 1.1 General These gases are colorless. heavier than air. stores personnel and the actual operators using the gases. This could happen at some considerable distance from the source of leakage. but for commercial usage. It may ignite if a flame or sparks are present. and normally odorless.1. At normal temperatures.0 LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GASES Liquefied Petroleum Gases (LPG) are now being widely used n the construction industry.

February 1993 .3. LPG cylinders must be stored at least 6. connections. 1. 1. and piping shall be made of stainless steel. To reduce the risk of explosion. rubber/plastic hoses are prohibited.2 The building should be fenced-off and signs should be displayed both in Arabic and English: "No Smoking".5 All gas valves.2 They must be stored and used in an upright position.0 Liquefied Petroleum Gases Page 332 .1. fittings. Water and dry chemical fire extinguishers shall be available. The storage place should be detached from any other buildings and constructed of non-combustible material.2.3 Handling of Cylinders 1.1 Cylinders.explosion. should be stored under cover for protection against the elements. whether empty or full.3. It should preferably be a well-ventilated one-story building with all doors leading directly to the outside.3 Natural ventilation points should be positioned at both high and low levels. the cylinders must be equipped with relief valves or fusible plugs. 1.2 Storage 1.2.4 All electrical fixtures should be of an explosion-proof type.2. 1.2.1 meters (20 feet) away from oxygen or oxidizers or must be separated from them by a fire wall rated at 30 minutes.1 Cylinders must not be dropped or allowed to come into violent contact with each other. 1. brass or copper. 1. thus preventing the liquid from passing through the relief valve regulator and into the equipment.2. 1.

3 They must not be placed in or near excavations or any low level area. 1.3 A leaking cylinder must be immediately removed to an open space. if flammable gas meter is unavailable: 1 2 3 4 1.1. 1.1. clear of all buildings and people or any potential source of ignition. Sound of escaping gas.3.5 Care should be taken that the valve assemblies are not damaged. February 1993 . 1. and pipings should be regularly inspected for damage or leakage.3.3.4 The cylinder must be placed with the leak uppermost.4. connections. Smelling Touching: Listening: Looking: Leaking cylinder may be colder than those around it. The main valve should be closed and the valve cap in position when the cylinder is not in use. hoses.3. Localized condensation or frosting.0 Liquefied Petroleum Gases Page 333 .4.4 Leakage 1.1 Cylinders. 1.4. 1.4 They must be placed on level ground and secured to prevent accidental tipping over.2 Small leaks may be confirmed by using soapy water. 1.6 Smoking is not permitted when handling cylinders. valves. Detection can be carried out by the following methods.4.

pits. 1.1 Full or empty cylinders which are loaded on vehicles must be placed in an upright position. the cylinder must be placed outside the building out of direct sunlight and the gas piped to appliances inside. 1.2 The vehicle should have fire fighting and first aid equipment. 1.5 The supplier must be notified immediately.5.4. it should burn with a steady blue flame with bluegreen base cones.2 The cylinder must be secured in an upright position. 1. be adequately secured to prevent movement. February 1993 . 1.6. 1.6 Operation 1.5. 1.5. and have valve caps in place.5 Transportation 1.0 Liquefied Petroleum Gases Page 334 .4 The regulator capacity must be suitable for the equipment being used. away from excavation.6.6.1.6.3 The regulator and other equipment is to be connected and a test made to ensure that all joints are gas tight.3 The vehicle must also display all the necessary warning notices. and other low lying areas. a check is to be made to ensure that there is sufficient ventilation for the burner and that all combustible materials are removed from the work area.5 Before lighting.1.6. 1.1 In permanent or semi-permanent installations. 1.6.6 Once the burner has been lit.

The cylinder should be approached from the opposite direction to the source of fire.1.4 If cylinders are equipped with automatic relief valves and the fire exposure is severe.7.7. water hoses played on those cylinders will prevent increased internal pressure and minimize the risk of explosion. (See Loss Prevention Booklet. 1. ignited jets of gas from these valves can extend as far as 6 meters (20 feet).7 A dry chemical fire extinguisher must be readily available at the work area.6.5 In the case of a small fire arising from gas leakage.3 Cylinders which have been exposed to fire conditions must be adequately cooled with water before any attempt is made to remove them.7.7. 1.6. In such condition.6 If a fire does not directly involve other cylinders in the vicinity.7 All cylinders which have been involved in a fire must be returned immediately to the supplier. February 1993 . it is possible to extinguish the fire by immediately turning off the cylinder valve. alerting the supplier that the cylinder was involved in a fire. 1. no attempt should be made to extinguish the fire.0 Liquefied Petroleum Gases Page 335 . "Hazards of Gas Cylinders") 1.7.2 The action to be taken in such an instance is to evacuate the area immediately and call the Fire Protection Department. 1. 1.7 Action in Case of Fire 1.8 Shut off valves shall be installed at the main tank supply and at the operating source.7.1 When cylinders are exposed to severe fire conditions and are engulfed in flames. 1.7. cylinders are likely to explode immediately. 1.1.

hard foundation away from drains. February 1993 . No attempt should be made to give an unconscious person anything to drink.1. 1. they must be thoroughly washed out with water.8.8.9 First Aid If LPG has been inhaled. the LPG supplier should be consulted on the size of the tank required and the most suitable fittings for that particular installation. kept warm and rested. including relief capacity. Medical aid must be obtained as soon as possible. the affected person must be removed from the area. If the person is breathing.8 Bulk Installations Before any bulk storage installation is undertaken. 1.1 Temporary tanks are to be installed above ground on a dry.4 All pipeline systems must be tested to a safe working pressure after completion of the assembly.8. 1. culverts. All items used must be of approved design and comply with the appropriate standards.0 Liquefied Petroleum Gases Page 336 . and not allowed to move about.8. oxygen must be administered by a competent person. 1. 1. 1. If liquid has gone to the eyes.3 Only trained personnel are to install bulk tanks and equipment. or hollows where it would be possible for any leaking gas to collect.1.2 Tanks should not be exposed to heat or direct rays of the sun and they must be adequately protected against accidental or unauthorized interference. mouth-tomouth resuscitation should be applied. If the affected person is not breathing.5 Fire water protection shall be provided.8.

710 GI 441. however.Construction Safety Manual: Plant Operations Page 337 . It is therefore necessary for anyone expecting to work in an area where oil or gas is handled to know the rules and regulations and obey them. This can be accomplished through discussions with operations management for the area and with the construction engineer. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2. will be helpful in locating applicable instructions and standards. either inside or outside Restricted Areas. With this responsibility. February 1993 . A meeting of all concerned prior to starting a job shall be conducted and a Hazard Identification Plan shall be prepared for review by Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department.014 SAES -A-005 Schedule 'D': Saudi Aramco Safety.0 PLANT OPERATIONS The safe processing and movement of oil from underground to ship or transmission pipeline is the primary Saudi Aramco objective. Because of the large number of instructions which might be applicable to a specific job.1 Additional Information On Saudi Aramco Instructions and Standards There are a number of additional instructions and standards which apply to construction operations. The following. Health and Environmental Requirements . he also has authority to issue work permits and stop any work if it is not in accordance with proper procedures. Every plant area in Saudi Aramco operations has a specific set of operating instructions and the operating supervisor for that area has full responsibility for safety precautions. it is not practical to list all of them.2. The contractor must determine which of these apply to him and ensure that his supervisory staff is familiar with them.100 GI 2.Plant Operations Work Permit System Mechanical Completion & Performance Acceptance of Plant/Unit Repair Procedures on Hydrocarbon Pipelines Safety Instruction Sheet 2. Failure to follow the operating rules can result in not only destruction of Saudi Aramco property but also death of construction and operating personnel. Any construction operation which could affect the safety of oil processing and movement must be planned and performed in accordance with the operating procedures of the area in which the job is located. This type of disaster must be prevented.

1 of this Manual.0 Plant Operations Page 338 . If the job involves work on equipment which is in service. Without a proper permit.2 Producing Instruction Manual This manual is designed to provide producing operating personnel with instructions on operating practices and procedures for specific operations.2. The Saudi Aramco construction engineer is familiar with the Engineering Standards and will assist the contractor. GI. provides the information needed to obtain such certificates and explains how to use them. a specific set of written procedures will have to be prepared and approved in advance by Operating and Safety personnel. (See Work Permit System. 2. No deviations will be February 1993 . Section II.1. The contractor must use all applicable engineering standards in the performance of his job. the contractor personnel must call the operations supervisor to perform the service. The contractor must strictly follow these procedures.2 Work Permit System Any contractor planning to do work in a restricted area must obtain a work permit from the operations supervisor for the area.1. 2. The work permit is a written permission to proceed with the work in accordance with the plans and the restrictions written on the form. Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention personnel will advise and provide guidance on fire and safety problems. the contractor must have personnel with a valid certificate to receive work permits. To obtain this permit.100. switches. 2. Its design and use is similar to the Producing Instruction Manual except that it applies to refinery operations.4 Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards These provide detailed instructions on how to do specific jobs and establish minimum standards to follow. Failure to do so will result in immediate shutdown. Work Permit System. The contractor would find it useful to know in advance what these procedures are and how they affect him. push buttons.1.2.1.3 Refinery Instruction Manual This manual is designed for use in refinery operations. 2. or other devices in an operating area. 2.) 2. a delay for which the contractor will be responsible.3 Operation of Plant Equipment It is expressly forbidden for any construction personnel to operate any valves.1 General Instruction Manual This manual is one which provides general instructions applicable to all Saudi Aramco areas and operations. work will not be allowed in the area. If the work dictates such action. The contractor will find most of the instructions applying to him in this manual.

Saudi Aramco holds Disaster Drills to ensure the smooth functioning of its Disaster Plan. it may be necessary for the contractor to shut down the job and even move his equipment to permit access for operating and maintenance personnel.710. The operating personnel will initiate alarm procedures and direct activities in controlling the emergency. The contractor should familiarize himself with this instruction before he starts work. They will be checked out by Security and should assemble at a point outside the area and await further instructions from the Saudi Aramco Disaster Commander.0 Plant Operations Page 339 . Each person working for the contractor must know exactly what to do when the emergency evacuation or stop work alarms are sounded and do it without delay. the contractor should contact the Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department for clarification and assistance. The Disaster Control Plan does not normally require the assistance of any construction personnel.2. Saudi Aramco personnel are trained to handle the emergency. outlines the procedures and requirements for accepting new plants or additions to plants after they have been completed by the contractor.5 Commissioning GI 2. When the emergency alarm is sounded for any reason. The contractor is required to participate in these drills just as if it were an actual emergency.4 Shutdown and Maintenance in Plant Operations Shutting down a plant is the sole responsibility of operating personnel. all contractor personnel will immediately shut down their job. Construction personnel should not. construction personnel will notify operating personnel immediately. make it safe. be involved in any operational activity. This is to assure that the plant is safe to operate in every respect. If there is any question on the fire and safety aspects of this instruction. and proceed in an orderly manner to the designated assembly point. If the emergency is the result of a construction operation.6 Emergency Procedures: Saudi Aramco Disaster Plan It is necessary for all contractors to familiarize themselves with the Disaster Control Plan for the plant and area in which the job is located. Mechanical Completion and Performance Acceptance of Plant/Unit. This emergency activity must be done as requested.permitted without the prior approval of the operation supervisor. In certain emergency situations. Close contractor 2. Periodically. 2. February 1993 . supervision will be required in these types of jobs. under any circumstances. 2.

February 1993 . Immediately shut off the vehicle engine and do not try to restart it. leave this to operations. 2.6. 5. Check the wind direction by looking at the windsock. Get out of the vehicle and walk to a safe location generally in a crosswind direction away from the point of release.2.1 Gas Release Emergency Procedures If there is a reason to suspect a gas release in the area through which you are driving: 1. Inform plant operation employees of the situation.2.0 Plant Operations Page 340 . Do not go and investigate. 3. 4.

due to the potential hazards associated with high pressure liquids and gases.000 GI 447.102.11/90) February 1993 . INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 2.003. or Retirement from Service Pressure Relief Valves .00 GI 434. Quality Assurance And Regulation GI 447.002 Work Permit System Pressure Testing Safely Mechanical Completion And Performance Acceptance Of Plant/Unit Pipeline Hydrotest Water Disposal Pipeline Repair and Maintenance Pressure Relief Valves .Routine Test.0 PRESSURE TESTING It is essential that safe practices be observed during pressure testing.100. Inspection. Change in Set Pressure.710 GI 432.3. Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards: SAES -K-001 SAES -A-004 SAES -A-005 SAES -A-007 SAES -B-55 Refrigerant Piping Pressure Testing Safety Instruction Sheet Hydrostatic Testing Fluids And Lay-Up Procedures Plant Layout Construction Specification Manuals: Form Saudi Aramco 2642 Engineering (Pressure Test Report . GI 2.Construction Safety Manual: Pressure Testing Page 341 . GI 2.New Installation.11/90) Form Saudi Aramco 2642-1 Engineering (Pressure Test Information Sheet .

1.1 SAES -A-004 (Pressure Testing) The person in charge of hydrostatic testing should have read SAES -A-004 and GI 2.3. and fully understand the safety requirements and procedures involved with pressure testing. Temporary supports and braces may be required. And Alcohols ANSI B 31.Flanged And Butt-Welding Ends. All persons who will work on the pressure test must be informed of the potential hazards and the necessary safety precautions.4-89 Liquid Transportation Systems For Hydrocarbons. vessels. Ninth Edition API-STD-620-90 Design and Construction of Large. Anhydrous Ammonia.8-89 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping System American Society of Mechanical Engineers Standards: Section VIII. 3.3-90 Chemical Plant And Petroleum Refinery Piping ANSI B 31.5-88 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flange Fittings ANSI B 31.1 Preparation 3. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 3. Liquid Petroleum Gas. Eighth Edition American National Standards Institute: ANSI B 16.2 Supports Piping. Welded. supports and foundations designed for gas service shall not be overloaded by the extra weight of the test liquid. Low Pressure Storage Tanks. A work permit shall be issued prior to commencement of hydrostatic test operations.American Petroleum Institute Standards: API-STD-600-91 Steel Gate Valves . February 1993 .102.1.0 Pressure Testing Page 342 .

3. 3. 3.1. 3.6 Vacuums On vessels or tanks which could collapse if subjected to a vacuum.0 Pressure Testing Page 343 . February 1993 .3. or vessels with welds never previously tested during the stepwise increase in pressure to the strength test pressure.4) or blind flanged and vented or disconnected. investigations shall be carried out to verify whether or not temporary restraints are required to restrict the movement of pipings and joints during testing.2. The actual pressure at which the system under test will be approached for close inspection shall be specified in the test procedure.1. corroded piping or vessels. they must be of adequate rating for the pressure to be encountered.2 General Requirements 3.1.2 Pressure relief valve(s) shall be used to prevent over pressuring of the equipment. in accordance with SAES -A-004. If isolation valves are used in lieu of blinds.2. to vent air / gas from the item while it is being filled with the test liquid. 3. due to possible valve leak. 3.1. Drains must be installed at a suitable location to allow removal of the test liquid. the equipment may be approached.2.3 Vents and Drains Vents of adequate capacity shall be installed at high points.1 Do not approach system never previously tested.3. provisions shall be made to ensure that no over-pressurizing can occur in equipment that is not being tested.1. there must be sufficient vent relief capacity to assure that the vessel cannot be subjected to a vacuum by draining the test fluid or by sudden cooling. Hazardous gases or vapors must be vented clear of any area where personnel are working or where there is any possible source of ignition.5 Pipings And Joints Prior to testing. adequate restraints shall be provided. After the strength test pressure has been reached and held for a specified interval.4 Valves Where isolation valves are used to contain test pressures.3 Any ancillary equipment not under test must be isolated by valves (subject to part 3. when necessary.

11 Air shall not be used to displace test fluid from underwater equipment unless it has been determined that the equipment will not float.8 A system under test shall be depressurized (with the exception of pressure due to a liquid head) before any work is done to stop leaks or repair weakness.2. Alternatives must be approved by a deviation from standard or they may be used if they are specifically permitted by SAES -4-004.2 Salt water must not be used for testing any material subject to stress corrosion cracking in the presence of chloride ions (such as stainless steel type 304 or 18.5 The equipment / vessel shall have adequate vacuum relief capacity to avoid damage or collapse. 3.2. and time for personnel to check for leaks. Pump discharge gauges must be visible to the pump operator for the duration of the test.3 Test Liquid 3. 3.102.2. In tightness tests. 3.3. including the tightening of bolts. February 1993 . bolts may be tightened without depressurizing. 3.3.7 The pressure rise during a pressure test should be gradual and under control to allow time for material to strain. when draining the test liquid. 3.2.3. 3. 3. 3. see SAES -A-004 and GI 2.8 CrNi).3.9 A block valve is required on the line from the test pump to the equipment under test. if specifically approved in the written test procedure.0 Pressure Testing Page 344 .4 Only calibrated test gauges shall be used and they should be mounted in the upright position.2.2.1 Water is a normally the preferred test liquid.6 Lines should be drained and dried mechanically when the test liquid is corrosive or otherwise hazardous.2.

as per the requirements of GI 432. contraction or hydrostatic heads must be taken into account.0 Pressure Testing Page 345 .4 Possible changes in pressure due to thermal expansion.3.5 Written procedures approved prior to testing shall be followed for the disposal of test mediums containing chemical additives for control of corrosion or bacteria. Pneumatic testing other than as specified in SAES -A-004 may be done only with the explicit permission of the Consulting Services Department. 3. February 1993 . 3.3. Testing with air or other gases under pressure can be hazardous due to the explosion potential.3.3.000.3.3 Pneumatic (gas) testing may be required as per SAES -A-004.

or heat. There are too many chemicals and too many possible combinations to deal with them individually here. The chemical must not be allowed to accidentally mix with other substances in transportation. In the literature there are tables of hazardous chemical reactions. GI 355. and disposal of hundreds of chemicals. use. storage and disposal. or use. transport.001. GI 355. storage. Receiving. transportation. In addition.4.003 GI 355. of the thousands of chemicals in existence. inhale it. the names of others with which it is likely to react dangerously can be found. it must be safely disposed of or recycled.Construction Safety Manual: Chemicals Page 346 . When dealing with an unfamiliar chemical. It must not be subjected to undue shock. While almost all of these chemicals are beneficial in some way. The exposure to hazards associated with a material depends largely on its proper identification. Storing. handling. or allow it to contact their skin. 10. materials which may be completely harmless in one application may be deadly in another. GI 355.740.0 CHEMICALS There are thousands of chemicals in existence and hundreds of new ones are being developed for commercial use every year. they can be dangerous too. In the references listed. No. storage. In fact. If the name of the chemical is known.015. GI 330. it is always wise to assume that it is hazardous. Salt Water Chlorination February 1993 . Cataloging.87.Safety Regulations LPG Plant. 5. usage.001. Ordering And Tracking Of Hazardous Materials Receiving. Storing and Issuing Explosives Deterioration And Disposal Of Explosives Refinery Instruction Manual: No.004 GI 355. The proper identification and labeling of chemicals is a very important safety precaution. When the chemical is no longer needed. And Issuing Hazardous Material Disposing Of Hazardous Materials Handling And Storing Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) For disposal Requisitioning. there are many sources of information on the identification. precautions should be taken to ensure that employees do not swallow it. Caustic And A Dip Diluting Plant 20 . it is difficult to find any that are absolutely harmless. When dealing with a potentially harmful chemical.001. pressure. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 150.002 GI 355.015-1 Asbestos Regulation Bulk Deliveries of Oil Field Treatment Chemicals from Local Vendors Identifying.

NFPA 704. NFPA 325M. Sulfuric Acid Safety Regulations . Inhibitor. There is no single identification system which can briefly indicate the hazards for all these conditions.Manufacturer's literature on chemicals approved by US. 13. NFPA 491M. Department of Labor Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials . the materials with which it may come in contact. NFPA 49.0 Chemicals Page 347 .No.4.850.Air And Water Unit Operating Instruction Manual: No. N.1 Hazard Identification System The hazardous nature of a material is related to the manner in which it is transported. Handling Procedure Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards: Saudi Aramco Bottled Gas Manual Saudi Aramco Chemical Hazard Bulletins (CHBs) American National Standards: ANSI 288. Saudi Aramco uses NFPA 704 Identification of Fire Hazard Materials. Basic Classification of Flammable and Combustible Liquids Fire Hazard Properties of Flammable Gases.Dr. Standard Practice for Respiratory Protection American Petroleum Institute: API 2202-91 Dismantling And Disposing Of Steel From Tanks Which Have Contained Leaded Gasoline National Fire Protection Association Standards: NFPA 321. February 1993 . and how it is disposed of or recycled. stored or used. and Volatile Solids Hazardous Chemical Data Manual of Hazardous Chemical Reactions Standard System For The Identification of Fire Hazards of Materials Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents in the Work Environment American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) .2. Irving Sax 4.244. Liquids. 5.

The severity of the hazard ranges from nuisance chemicals that produce no injury. If the concentration of the chemical in the air exceeds the threshold limit value (TLV) or MAC. a respiratory hazard may exist.) 4. good mechanical ventilation must be provided or the work must be done outdoors. the most prominent means of entry of a hazardous chemical into the human body is through the respiratory tract by inhalation.2 and V. If these methods fail. Hydrogen sulfide. It is important that the right kind of device for the particular hazard be obtained. transportation. to some extent. It should be remembered that although a zero health hazard rating indicates that the material offers no hazards to fire fighters beyond that of ordinary combustible material subjected to fire. of the Saudi Aramco Material System Catalog are marked by the use of hazard identification labels. Therefore it is necessary to keep the worker from breathing the vapor by limiting the amount of vapor through careful handling or through the use of local exhaust ventilation. blowers. some gases paralyze the sense of smell. dusts. Ordinary automotive gasoline. does the same thing.4. or a mixture of these. The next most important means of entry is through skin absorption. to chemicals that on short exposure can cause severe injury or death. February 1993 . In the case of a chemical spill.0 Chemicals Page 348 . it may not be possible to control the maximum allowable concentration.). swallowing. For industrial workers. or skin contact.1). the maximum allowable concentration (MAC) of the vapor should be known and not exceeded. The container may not be so marked.1 Inhalation Pathway Hazard Chemicals may be in the form of gases.A. then respiratory protective devices are needed. as this seldom occurs in industry. Class 26. A zero (0) rating indicates little or no hazard and a four (4) indicates a high degree of hazard. 4. dust masks must be provided and their use enforced. Where exhaust ventilation is not available. (See Breathing Apparatus. Exhaust ventilation. The degree of possible injurious health effects. Whenever dusty material is handled.2. fans.10 of this Manual. vapors. and proper handling procedures must be used to keep the dust from entering the worker's breathing zone. it does not mean that the material is harmless if inhaled or swallowed. The system is based on four different symbols or numbers arranged in a diamond pattern (see Figure V. at low concentrations.2 Health Hazards Hazards to health arise from inhaling. (Reference: Chemical Hazard Bulletins. can very quickly paralyze the olfactory nerves so that harmful concentrations cannot be detected through smell. Section I. When handling a volatile liquid. Many of the materials in the Chemical Section.which indicates the fire hazards associated with any chemical and also describes the hazards which might be encountered in storage. susceptibility of the materials to burning and to release of energy are rated by numbers (see Figures V. Furthermore. Some gases are harmful in concentrations which cannot be detected by their odor.) Dust is a common hazard. use or disposal of the chemical. but it is indicated in the catalog description of the chemical.2. The senses of sight or smell cannot be depended upon to warn of chemical hazards. The least hazardous pathway is through swallowing the chemical.

which flush the material from the eyes or skin. etc. for poison information. Dermatitis resulting from contact with harmful chemicals is a common work injury. and that they must wash their hands free of harmful chemicals before smoking. gloves. If such methods are not adequate. The main precaution is to ensure that employees know that the material is hazardous if swallowed. acids and caustics) is to provide a physical barrier in the form of goggles.2. The second step. swallowing chemicals does not occur frequently. it is not wise to induce the patient to vomit.2.3. Saudi Aramco Emergency Medical Services. if they have stopped breathing.3.2 First Aid In case of accidental swallowing of chemicals. The third step is to provide eyewash fountains and safety showers. suits. Field treatment should only consist of February 1993 . drinking a large amount of water. but they are far more common. The hospital must be informed of the chemical injury or chemical swallowed and the person should be moved to the hospital immediately for medical treatment. Ventilation is also recommended. Thorough washing of the hands and face before meals.2 Skin Hazards Skin contact/exposure hazard may not be as dangerous to life as respiratory hazards. In the case of caustics or corrosives. 4. 4. in the case of materials which act rapidly on the human body.3 Showers and Eyewash Fountains For skin hazards. Personal cleanliness is important.1 Artificial Respiration Persons overcome by harmful gases and vapors must be taken out into the fresh air and.3 Emergency Treatment 4. 4. face shields. if there is no heartbeat. such as corrosive chemicals (i.3 Hazards of Swallowing Chemicals In industry. 4. the best treatment is thorough water washing under the emergency shower or eyewash fountain. hoods. daily bathing. aprons. followed by medical treatment. Never store harmful chemicals in food containers or handle chemicals near food. commence cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). Telephone 877-8056. Call emergency assistance immediately by telephoning 110. is recommended. 4.4. Proper handling methods are the first step in protection. suitable respiratory protection must be provided. given artificial respiration.3. The type of personal protective equipment required depends on the hazardous characteristics of the chemical and the way it is used. drinking or eating.Fine droplets of liquid form whenever liquids are sprayed or splashed so suitable precautions must be taken to prevent the fine droplets of liquid from entering the worker's breathing zone.e. and a regular change of clothing will reduce harmful contact with chemicals.0 Chemicals Page 349 .

The eyes or skin must be washed for quite a long time to remove the chemical. safety showers or eyewash fountains should be provided. insulated or shaded from the sun or the line must be only a very short branch from a main water line that is used frequently enough to keep the water from overheating in the sun. Emergency showers shall be properly identified with signs and color background in accordance with SAES -B-55. water will remove the acid quickly. but it is necessary to hold the eyelids open with the fingers. This will be painful. 2 Caustic alkalis such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide are much more difficult to wash from the skin or eyes. but all should be easily activated. In the case of materials that are immediately harmful to the eyes or skin.4. The piping must be buried. but it is absolutely necessary. These water flushing devices are required. CAUTION: There are two important points that workers must be taught about the correct use of emergency fountains and shower: 1 Before removing goggles. If the water piping to the shower or fountain is exposed to the sun. It is necessary to wash the eyes holding the eyelids open with the fingers for at least fifteen minutes to free the eyes of bases or caustics.0 Chemicals Page 350 . because working procedures and personal protective equipment may fail. the user must get under the shower or use the eyewash fountain to wash off as much of the chemical as possible. The patient should then be taken to the hospital for treatment. It is a mistake to start for the hospital without first doing everything possible to flush out the harmful chemical. Emergency showers and eyewash fountains should be checked daily. February 1993 . In the case of acids. They should be within 6 meters (20 feet) of the exposure site and accessible in an unobstructed straight line from the work location. painful as this may be. face shields. At least fifteen minutes of thorough washing are required in the case of acid contact to skin or eyes. Strong alkalis of this type mixed with water feel slippery to the touch. The skin should be washed until the slippery feeling has gone and washing should be continued for at least 15 minutes. and roll the eyes around under the shower or in the eye fountain to make sure that all acid is removed.flushing away the chemical. Some emergency showers or eyewash fountains are designed so that standing under or near them activates the water supply. the water will become so hot during summer that it could scald the user. Others have hinged gates which are pushed to activate the shower. or other personal protective equipment. A person who is blinded by a chemical must immediately be taken to the shower or eyewash fountain.

4. Section I. must be available in case all effective fire prevention measures fail to prevent a fire.4.6 Transportation. damage to containers. 4. and any extra amounts should be cleared from the work area.4. NFPA 491M.2 Smoking and the use of sparking devices near flammable liquids or finely divided combustible solids must be prohibited. (See Fire Prevention.0 Chemicals Page 351 . The proper fire extinguisher should be at the job site and readily available at all locations where a fire hazard is possible. such as fire extinguishers or water streams.4 The use of fire fighting equipment. Ordinary sand is a good extinguishing agent for smothering small fires. rough handling and shock should be avoided. All flammable materials should be stored according to the specifications of their Chemical Hazard Bulletins. undue heat from the sun or other sources. Slop liquids or trash should be cleared away immediately. accidental mixing with other materials. which could allow the hazardous materials to come into contact with people who are unaware of the dangers.1 Only the necessary amount of hazardous materials should be brought into the work place. Specific recommendations for the particular material may be obtained from the Area Loss Prevention Office. Storage and Disposal 4. The Saudi Aramco Chemical Engineering Response Team or Fire Protection Department also handles spills which occur during February 1993 . 4.11 of this Manual).1 Transportation During transportation. hazardous materials must be protected against shock. lists many of the chemicals which are likely to have dangerous reactions with other chemicals.4.3 Blocking off air to a burning object is often possible in acid dip tanks or rubbish containers where a cover can be provided and dropped down on the container to smother the flames.6. Hazardous materials must not be allowed to accumulate. The fire hazards of most common materials can be found in the references given in this section. Chemicals should not be allowed to mix with other chemicals unless it is known that no harmful reaction will occur.4. 4. (CHBs) or Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). As a general precaution.5 Reactivity Hazards The manual of Hazardous Chemical Reactions. and theft. 4.4.4 Fire Hazards 4.4. usually not more than one day's supply.

4.6. • • • • • • • • • • • Waste paints and related products Asbestos Resins Wood preservative products Insecticides and pesticides Flushing fluids / chemicals Compressed gases (acetylene. solid and semi-solid material. undue heat. compressed gases. Specific storage recommendations for hazardous materials contained in the Saudi Aramco Chemical Hazard Bulletins (CHBs) and manufacturer-provided Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) should be followed. because of the quantity involved. physical.004) Hazardous/toxic waste is liquid. or unplanned mixing. Empty containers previously used to hold hazardous material must be washed free of the material or destroyed. labeled. oxygen. pose a hazard to human health and/or the environment if it is improperly managed. The following are some examples of waste materials which are considered hazardous/toxic. chlorine) Flammable / combustible liquids (gasoline. diesel oil) Corrosive liquids (acid) Cleaning fluids Explosives February 1993 . which.3 Containers Hazardous materials must be stored in containers that are safe for the transportation and use of the material. chemical or infectious characteristics. Incompatible chemicals should not be stored together. 4. There are some cases where separating walls or specified distances are required.0 Chemicals Page 352 .transportation. 4.6.2 Storage A vehicle transporting hazardous chemicals must be suitably The NFPA fire codes contain recommendations for safe storage of flammable liquids.4. Containers must be labeled with the appropriate hazardous materials label to indicate the actual contents. and typical highly combustible or explosive solids. the concentration.6. Precautions must be taken to avoid shock. and are to be disposed of in accordance with established Saudi Aramco procedure. All safety factors must be observed when transferring material from one container to another and the receiving container must be labeled to correctly describe the contents. and/or the biological. its hazardous classification rating and the quantity disposed of.003 and 355.4 Disposal (See GI 355. A list of hazardous materials shall be kept by the contractor indicating type and quantity of materials used in each case.

The material will be provided to AM & RD in containers clearly marked "Hazardous Material" only. the c/u should use the more conservative methods of disposal. MHED (Materials Handling Engineering Division) at telephone number 872-7419 or from individual specialist units listed below: Specialist Unit Central Area Storehouse Dept. (LPD) Process And Control Systems Dept.) Obtain advice as needed from the Hazardous Materials Advisor. MSDS. If this is not possible. prior to arranging for disposal of the material the contractor/user should notify the AM&RD (Al Midra and Reclamation Division). In cases where procedures overlap.0 Chemicals Page 353 .• • • • • Flammable solids Poisons and infectious chemicals Radioactive materials Magnetized materials Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB (electrical transformer oil) The disposal of hazardous material must be conducted by the contractor/user (c/u). Step 2: The c/u must follow manufacturers or literature safety guidelines (Material Safety Data Sheets. February 1993 . Chemical Hazard Bulletins.2A. (FPD) Step 3: Telephone Number 872-7419 876-6725 873-8779 875-3131 877-8425 874-1402 874-3345 The hazardous waste material must be adequately sealed up in containers to prevent leakage and labeled to denote composition or content.) in addition to the Saudi Aramco procedures contained here. Hazard rating codes assigned to SAMS material indicate the degree of hazard. etc.4. Step 4: Request a safety inspection of the material by the Hazardous Material Advisor. (CASD) Laboratories Dept. The latter is obligated to perform the following: Step 1: The hazardous material must be identified by composition or content. (I&EAD) Fire Protection Dept. CHBs. with no other conflicting or confusing words. (P&CSD) District Medical And Support Services (DM&SS) Industrial And Environmental Affairs Dept. (See Figure V. (LP) Loss Prevention Dept.

7 Work on Equipment Which Has Contained Tetraethyl Lead (Organic Lead Compounds) 4. This person may request that the material be delivered directly to Delivery Point Code (DPC). AM & RD before a large volume of hazardous waste material is to be delivered. MHED. The hazard with tetraethyl lead is that. (See GI 355. storage and disposal of Polychlorinated Biyphenyls (PCBs). To make it easier to detect spills of tetraethyl lead.1 Introduction Tetraethyl lead (TEL) is an organic compound of metallic lead which is used to improve the octane rating of gasoline.0 Chemicals Page 354 . being a liquid it gives off vapors which can come into contact with the body by breathing or skin contact. February 1993 . Tetraethyl lead is very hazardous as its vapors can be inhaled. Hazardous Materials Advisor.003. absorbed through the skin. Step 6: Follow the directives of the Hazardous Materials Advisor.) Step 7: Transport the hazardous material to Dhahran Reclamation Yard using own truck or request suitable vehicle from the Transportation Department by following their established procedure. This compound is highly poisonous. Chemical Storage Segment. AM&RD.004 for any deviation from this established procedure for the handling.4. or ingested through contaminated food or cigarettes. Reclamation Operations Section. Material Disposal Unit.Step 5: When a large quantity of hazardous material needs to be disposed of. it has been dyed a bright orange color.7. Reclamation Operations Section (ROS). The best protection is to avoid any contact. 280 Reclamation Chemicals Storage And Handling Facility located near Abqaiq GOSP 3. Note: See GI 355. Step 8: Contact Assistant Superintendent. 4. inform the: a). b).

4. repairing. February 1993 .5% and transfer to a final burial site. or dismantling tanks which have contained leaded gasoline requires special training and special precautions. it also presents a fire hazard. Before entering any tank. Using regular monitoring of TEL workers.0 Chemicals Page 355 . The workers must be medically certified and periodically examined before and during the course of the work. the Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department and the Industrial Hygiene Services. it is wise to determine whether leaded gasoline (TEL) sludge may be encountered. or sludges containing organic lead compounds. stored. Wherever drums of the compound are transported. 4. and storage areas. Work in cleaning. 2. Wherever leaded gasoline is blended. before marking excavations in or around refineries or gasoline storage depots. Likewise. The Saudi Aramco Industrial Hygiene Services and the Loss Prevention Department should be notified when work is to be done in TEL tanks or in areas with TEL contaminated equipment.Tetraethyl lead. any overexposure to TEL should be reported to the Saudi Aramco proponent department. are likely to be found in the following places: 1. or used. 3. Since tetraethyl lead is delivered dissolved in organic solvents. In controlled disposal sites designated to receive organic-lead-containing materials. or stored.7. trucks.2 Precautions Tanks that have once contained leaded gasoline (TEL) are considered dangerous thereafter even though they may have been used in other service for years. handled. The sludge removed from leaded gasoline tanks is decontaminated by spreading and weathering prior to mixing with inert solids to reduce the total lead concentration to no more than 0. an inquiry should be made as to the tank's previous service and a work permit obtained. Such tanks should be permanently marked on the manholes with a sign warning that the tank has contained leaded gasoline and must not be entered without special precautions. Sludge pits where lead-bearing sludge from the leaded gasoline tanks has been buried must be marked with permanent warning signs. Leaking drums can contaminate ships' holds.

1: IDENTIFICATION OF MATERIALS BY HAZARD S IGNAL DIMENSIONS AND ARRANGEMENT February 1993 .4.FIGURE V.0 Chemicals Page 356 .

FIGURE V.2: EXPLANATION OF HAZARD RATING CODES February 1993 .4.0 Chemicals Page 357 .

FIGURE V.3: IDENTIFICATION OF HEALTH HAZARD.0 Chemicals Page 358 .4. FLAMMABILITY AND REACTIVITY February 1993 .

VI. Marine Page 359 . Marine February 1993 .Construction Safety Manual: VI.

February 1993 .1 Design All cofferdams in excess of 1.Cofferdams Page 360 .3 Construction All cofferdam construction work must be performed in strict compliance with the design drawings and specifications. Any unexpected soil or hydrographic conditions encountered during the construction must be reported immediately to the design engineer for evaluation and a possible mo dification of the structure. although some leakage.0 COFFERDAMS A cofferdam is an enclosure constructed to exclude water from a work area during construction.2 Before Work Starts Any cofferdam which is to be constructed in a navigable waterway or which would constitute an obstruction or hazard to the operation of small boats or pleasure crafts must be approved in advance by the Manager.2 meters (4 feet) in depth must be designed by a qualified engineer. Cofferdam construction ranges from simple dikes to complicated timber or steel structures. The most common type of cofferdam encountered in Saudi Aramco is constructed from steel sheet piling. Any deviations from the design encountered in the actual construction of the cofferdam must have the approval of a qualified engineer. All work m be accomplished by qualified craftsmen in ust accordance with accepted trade practices. They should be as watertight as practicable. The steel piling is generally braced by a system of horizontal wales and struts which are designed to resist external forces.1. The piles must be driven to design and penetration specifications and must encounter the pre-specified driving resistance. Saudi Aramco Marine Department. 2. and floating debris. 1. They must be strong enough to withstand the forces caused by water.Construction Safety Manual . Health and Environmental Requirements Excavations Work Over Water 1. soil conditions. 1. Cofferdams must satisfy two basic requirements: 1. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco Instructions and Standards: Schedule 'D': Part 19 Part 20 Saudi Aramco Safety. must always be expected. requiring pumping. The latter will be responsible for coordinating its approval with the approval of required Government agencies.

3. Such failures often occur with little or no warning.1. 1.0 Cofferdams Page 361 . and machinery shall be mounted on a cantilevered platform outside of a cofferdam. These shall be provided with standard guardrails.3.2 Overhead Loads Sump pumps.5 Inspection 1.4.1 General inspection should be carried out daily or after any weather condition or incident which might affect the safety of the cofferdam.5. 1.4. means shall be provided for controlled flooding of the work area. ramps or bridges on cofferdams shall have at least two exit points.1 If overtopping of the cofferdam by high waters is possible. 1.4.1. 1. equipment.3 Dislodgment of Struts and Wales All internal supporting structures must be secured against accidental dislodgment. and throughout the area. Notices shall be posted at the entrance to the job site. which could present a hazard to the workmen engaged in construction within the confines of the cofferdam.3.4 Potential Hazards The construction and the use of cofferdams have three primary hazards which merit special consideration.1 Structural Collapse Cofferdam structures may collapse as a result of the imposition of unexpected structural loads or the failure of the soil inside the cofferdam structures as evidenced by an upward heave or "blow-out" of the bottom. This will eliminate overhead obstructions. The use of locking devices on wedges will prevent their accidental removal and the resulting collapse of the structure. 1. 1. therefore a means of rapid exit from the enclosed cofferdam structures must be provided for all workmen engaged in work inside the structures. 1.3 Walkways. February 1993 .2 Emergency evacuation warning signals shall be provided and procedures developed.

6.5. Minor leaks over a large area can be sealed by dropping light granular material into the water surrounding the cofferdam. February 1993 .3 Leaks can indicate a movement of the piles.2 Where large leaks are encountered which cannot be sealed as described above or there is an indication that the piling has moved.5.1.1 Small leaks can be sealed by lead caulking in the clutches from the inside of the cofferdam. The material will be sucked into the gap between the piles where it will form a seal. Serious leaks should be reported at once to the engineer in charge of operations.5. the cofferdam area shall be immediately evacuated of all personnel and the problem brought to the attention of the design engineer for correction. 1.1. 1.0 Cofferdams Page 362 .4 Pump intake fastenings and the pumping sump should be carefully checked at the start of each shift.6 Leaks 1. 1.6. 1.2 The security of all wedges should be carefully checked at the start of each shift.

Including Safety Rules Operating Procedures for Barges Including Safety Rules Operating Procedures for Marine Oil Recovery and Storage Barge/Vessel.Safety of Life at Sea International Labor Office .257 International Maritime Organization .001.001. GI 1192.0 MARINE OPERATIONS This section. is only concerned with the transportation of material.001. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions : GI 6. GI 1192.020.002. February 1993 . Personal Flotation Devices for Work Over. GI 1193. GI 1198. 2. Including Safety Rules Marine Port Information and Regulations Navigation Warnings Requesting.001.Marine Operations Page 363 . at Sea. Launches and Barges Whistle Signals for Use Between Tugs and Barges or Tugs and Self-Propelled Vessels When Berthing Rig/Barge Moving Safe Operation of Self-Propelled Jack-Up Barges GI 1187.002.2. Tanajib or West Pier SAG Regulations and Practice as Applied to All Types of Marine Craft at the Port of Ras Tanura Collision & Damage By or To Marine Equipment or Craft Operating Practices for Harbor Tugs.504.1 Other Publications US. GI 1186.003. Coast Guard . GI 1194. GI 1185. Offshore Vessels and Launches. GI 1193. equipment. and personnel to off-shore job sites.Construction Safety Manual .Accident Prevention on Board Ship. Tugs.001. Marine Operations.502. GI 1196. and in Port. GI 1186. On or Near Water Death or Injury Aboard Seagoing Vessels Marine Craft Fueling.001. GI 1192. This is carried out through the Saudi Aramco Marine Department by using company-owned and/or contractors' crafts.001.502. Assigning and Dispatching Pollution Control Vessels. GI 1199.

sensitive to water. 2.2. 2. They must travel in the passenger designated areas. Personnel are expected to act in a responsible manner at all times.3. a swell can produce violent movement.4 Preparation for Transportation by Sea 2. life vests must be worn while working on. In particular they must not obstruct his view or movements.1 Unexpected movements of the vessel even in good weather must be anticipated and guarded against. Sea conditions can change rapidly. explosives gases. 2. Lashing must be adequate.0 Marine Operations Page 364 .2 General All safety precautions that are applicable onshore apply and must be enforced while offshore. 2.1 Loose and movable parts of material and equipment must be properly secured against movement.2 Life vests must be available for all personnel. over or near the water.2. Information on weights and measurements must be included for any shipment that requires a manifest (Saudi Aramco Form 9063).4.4. etc. Work over water may be either offshore or on a site connected to the shore. 2. The hazards and the precautions for both situations are similar. February 1993 . 2. Each person shall wear and know how to inflate a life vest (see Figure VI.) or cargoes with special characteristics (e.3 Behavior on Floating Craft Personnel embarked on floating craft must obey the instructions of the person in charge of the vessel. or pilferage). Such material and equipment must always be prepared as if for very rough weather.3. including the wearing of personal safety equipment.4. Tarpaulins or plastic coverings must be of adequate strength and well secured. Personnel should keep away from the ship's side and make use of handrails at all times.g. They should not enter or climb on top of the pilot house and machinery space are similarly out of bounds.. the Marine Department carries the ultimate responsibility for the safe loading and distribution of cargo on the floating craft under its jurisdiction.1). Tank compartments being transported should be either empty or completely full. delicate. In addition.2 The Marine Department must be informed in advance so that they may prepare for the transportation of any hazardous cargo (acids.3 Although the actual loading may be performed by another department. Even with no wind.

2 Rags.6 Care of Tools and Equipment 2. Proper disposal does not mean throwing the unwanted items overboard. Doors and drawers should be kept closed. When not in use.7 Housekeeping Because of the confined space frequently encountered in Marine Operations. 2.1 Protective coatings reduce the corrosive effects of salt water and salt-laden air on tools and equipment. Any spilled grease or oil must be cleaned up. papers. Trash cans and ashtrays should be used. Fire hose and rope must be coiled or flaked down clear of passageways. Nuts. 2.3 Objects that are dropped from any height can cause injury or damage. 2. especially when erecting stages and platforms.1 Tools must not be scattered around. and scrap must be properly disposed of. and threads should be covered with grease or a similar protective coating.6. and they may be impossible to recover.6. thus polluting the environment. they should be protected by being returned to their boxes or being covered. Tidal predictions and weather forecasts are not completely accurate so a generous safety margin must be allowed. 2.7.2.6. allowance must be made for wave action and the rise and fall of the tide.7. bolts. housekeeping is even more important offshore than onshore.2.0 Marine Operations Page 365 . cigarette butts. February 1993 .2 Electrical and radio equipment must not be left exposed.5 Tide and Sea Effects During pile driving and general offshore work. For this reason. 2. small hand tools should be secured by lanyards when working over or near water. 2.

FIGURE VI.1: IF YOU WORK OVER, ON OR NEAR WATER

February 1993 - 2.0 Marine Operations

Page 366

3.0 DIVING OPERATIONS
Accidents involving divers and their equipment are generally serious, because diving operations are undertaken in an element unnatural to man. What would be considered to be a minor incident on land could cause crippling injury or even death in a diving operation. Due to the extreme hazards of this occupation, divers must rely on their training, experience, and initiative to avoid accidents. For this reason, the strictest compliance with regulations, standards, and instructions must be observed at all times in order that everything possible is done to minimize the possibility of an accident. INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS Saudi Aramco General Instructions: GI 1197.001 Procedures and Safety Rules for Diving Operations (See Appendix G)

The US. Navy Diving Manual is to be used as the standard for all Saudi Aramco diving operations. US. Navy Diving Manual: NAVSHIPS 0994-001, March 1970 British Admiralty Diving Manual: B.R. 181, 1972 United Kingdom Statutory Instruments S.I. NO. 1229 Offshore Installations (Diving Operations) Regulations, 1981

Saudi Aramco Instructions and Standards Saudi Aramco Bottled Gas Manual TM 6.1 Medical Diving Emergencies (Technical Memorandum - Saudi Aramco Medical Services Organization {SAMSO})

3.1

Employment of Qualified Divers
All divers shall be at least twenty-one (21) years old. 3.1.1 Divers must be qualified and experienced in all aspects of underwater inspection, construction, repairs, and salvage works, including oxy-arc cutting, thermal lancing, and the use of pneumatic and hydraulic tools.

February 1993 - Construction Safety Manual: Diving Operations

Page 367

3.1.2 Divers shall be fully conversant with the use and operation of US. Navy Decompression Tables, recompression chambers, and therapeutic decompression procedures. 3.1.3 Familiarity with the use of SCUBA, Hookah, and surface supplied helmets (Swindel, Aquadyne, Kirby-Morgan, etc.) and knowledge of their maintenance and repair is required. 3.1.4 Divers will be required to show evidence of their training and experience by providing certificates from a competent authority. 3.1.5 All divers must be fluent in both reading and writing the English language and be able to depict the results of an underwater inspection by the use of sketches. 3.1.6 Evidence of medical fitness in accordance with 3.4 must be produced at the prescribed intervals.

3.2

Diving Equipment
All equipment used in connection with diving and submarine operations shall be produced by a reputable manufacturer. They must be of good quality and constructed of sound material, in accordance with appropriate and accepted standards. Equipment should be able to operate efficiently in the prevailing high temperatures of the Arabian Gulf. 3.2.1 Compressors Compressors for supplying breathing air must be fitted with adequate filtration and purification devices. They must be able to provide the air at a rated pressure and capacity to cover the maximum depth required during the operation. 3.2.1.1 The air intake of compressors shall be remotely located with reference to any exhaust system in the area to prevent contaminants from entering the compressor intake. 3.2.1.2 All the safety devices and relief valves on high pressure compressors must be operating properly.

February 1993 - 3.0 Diving Operations

Page 368

3.2.1.3 Detergent lubricating oils or oils with viscosity less than SAE 30 must not be used. Care must be taken not to overfill. 3.2.1.4 Compressed air supplied for breathing shall be certified Compressed Gas Association grade D or better. 3.2.2 Reserve Air Supply A reserve supply of air must be provided, maintained, and immediately available in the event of a primary air supply failure, whether in the form of a standby compressor or high pressure cylinders (or volume tanks) on the surface. If the reserve is in the form of high pressure cylinders (or volume tanks), it should be of sufficient capacity to enable the diver or divers to reach the surface safely while carrying out any necessary decompression step on the way. Reserve supply for recompression chambers should be sufficient to allow required surface decompression to be carried out. 3.2.3 Bail-Out Equipment In case there might be a ruptured, cut, or irretrievably fouled hose, each diver should be equipped with "bail-out" equipment, either in the form of a "bail-out" cylinder, a diver's life vest, or a pneumo hose. 3.2.4 Maintenance All plant (including safety) and diving equipment must be regularly maintained. Correct records must be kept of this maintenance. 3.2.4.1 All SCUBA tanks, recompression chambers, volume tanks, high pressure cylinders, and storage vessels must be regularly checked and tested at the prescribed intervals in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and Saudi Aramco regulations. 3.2.4.2 As indicated in the Saudi Aramco Bottled Gas Manual, air cylinders not in sea water use are to be inspected internally and hydrostatically tested, at intervals not to exceed five years. They should be appropriately stamped to denote this inspection. 3.2.4.3 Each item of plant and diving equipment should be regularly inspected by a competent person at periodic intervals, and after the equipment has been modified. The maximum period between inspections should be three months.

February 1993 - 3.0 Diving Operations

Page 369

3.2.4.4 All hoses used for carrying compressed air or other gases must be checked for wear and abrasion and subjected to test pressures at least once every three months. Hose, fittings and connections should be of the screw thread type and properly fitted to the hoses. Hoses used in oxygen breathing systems must be grease and oil free. 3.2.4.5 Any pressure gauge showin g an error of more than two and one half percent (2.5%) must be adjusted or replaced. 3.2.4.6 Communication systems must be checked for correct operation. Every wire must be checked for continuity and, if they are combined with the life line, for wear. 3.2.4.7 A supply of suitable protective clothing such as diving suits, coveralls, gloves, and hoods must be available at all times. Insulated gloves shall be provided to divers performing welding and burning operations. 3.2.4.8 Gas cylinders taken under water shall be hydrostatically tested, inspected and stamped every two years.

3.3

Safeguards
When divers are preparing to enter or leave the water, or are in the water, or diving operations are underway, the International Code Flag "A" ("I have a diver down, keep well clear of area and maintain a low speed.") must be flown. (See Figures VI.2 and VI.3.) Communications - A two-way voice communication system shall be used between: 1. Each surface-supplied air or mixed-gas diver and a dive team member at the dive location. Two-way communication system shall be available at the dive location to obtain emergency assistance.

2.

In addition, special lights and day marks for "vessels engaged in surveying or underwater operations" should be shown in accordance with Maritime Regulations (Figure VI.3).

February 1993 - 3.0 Diving Operations

Page 370

3.3.1 Any person involved in an activity which could be a hazard to divers in the vicinity, such as those in charge of submarine blasting or masters of vessels about to move, start propulsion engines, or operate pumps, must be forewarned. 3.3.2 Adequate arrangements must be made to provide a safe means of access to and egress from the water. It must be kept in mind that a diver may be unconscious as a result of an accident. 3.3.3 Proper surface support and other facilities for the safe conduct of diving operations must be provided. 3.3.4 In all cases of emergency, the diving supervisor, the foreman diver, or the person in charge of a diver or divers must be the sole arbiter as to action to be taken. All personnel, whether connected with the diving operation or not, should take instructions from him. 3.3.5 Safe Operation of Divers 3.3.5.1 Bottom time and decompression time will be controlled by the diving supervisor or person in charge of diving. 3.3.5.2 On all work requiring four divers or more, a diving supervisor shall be present to facilitate coordination between divers and the surface. 3.3.5.3 All diving operations requiring more than two divers (using air for breathing) in water of a depth greater than 30 meters (100 feet), require the presence of a diving supervisor. 3.3.6 At all times when a diver is in the water, a stand-by diver must be on deck with a stand-by rig, fully dressed and ready to dive. 3.3.7 No diver working in water 9 meters (30 feet) or less shall be required to work longer than a twelve (12) hour shift without having a proper rest except for emergencies.

February 1993 - 3.0 Diving Operations

Page 371

3.3.8 Repetitive diving should not be done as a routine. If the task necessitates the use of "repeats", efforts should be made to obtain additional divers. When this is impracticable, the tables must be strictly adhered to in order to avoid decompression sickness, which could require therapeutic treatment and could endanger the health of divers and delay operations. 3.3.9 Therapeutic decomp ression must take precedence over all other operational requirements. 3.3.9.1 Divers must remain in the vicinity of a recompression chamber for a period of twelve (12) hours after the last dive. 3.3.9.2 In the case of therapeutic decompression the period in 3.3.9.1 shall be extended to twenty-four (24) hours. 3.3.9.3 In mild cases of decompression sickness which have been treated under Tables 1, 1A, 2, 2A and 5 (US. Navy Diving Manual), a diver can be returned to work at the discretion of the diving supervisor. After treatment for a case of "bends" under Tables 3, 4, 6 and 6A, a diver will not be permitted to dive again until he has been examined and passed as fit by a physician. 3.3.9.4 Each diver will maintain a personal logbook. Entries shall include but are not limited to the following: • • • • • • • • • • • Diver's name. Name and address of the employer of divers. Date. Name of the Diving Supervisor. Name of the vessel, barge, or installation from which the diving operation is carried out. Maximum depth reached on each occasion. Time he spent under water on each occasion. Type of equipment used by the diver. Work carried out by him on each occasion. Details of decompression sickness or other illness/injury suffered by the diver. Any other factor relevant to health.

February 1993 - 3.0 Diving Operations

Page 372

• •

Each daily entry will be signed by the diver and also by the diving supervisor. Divers must retain their logbooks for a period of not less than two years from the date of the last entry in the logbook.

3.3.10

Recompression Chamber A recompression chamber must be on site during all diving operations in excess of 18.5 meters (60 feet). Whenever a recompression chamber is not available, only "no decompression" dives are permitted. 3.3.10.1 The maximum rate of ascent is 18.5 meters (60 feet) per minute in the case of air decompression and 7.6 meters (25 feet) per minute in the case of oxygen decompression. 3.3.10.2 Only necessary articles are allowed in the recompression chamber. No tobacco or any ignition source, including electrical shall be allowed in the chamber. Smoking shall never be permitted in the chamber whether under pressure or not. 3.3.10.3 The chamber shall be kept clean and dry. 3.3.10.4 Personnel in a chamber under pressure shall ensure that both they and all loose materials are kept clear of all atmosphere inlet and exhaust openings. The exhaust, which is under pressure, is especially dangerous because it subjects anything near it to a high suction pull capable of causing extreme bodily harm .

3.3.11

SCUBA Special Care The use of SCUBA equipment in water over 18 meters (60 feet) in depth should be restricted. 3.3.11.1 SCUBA equipment shall not be used to depths greater than 45 meters (150 feet). 3.3.11.2 SCUBA equipment should never be used for dives requiring decompression.

February 1993 - 3.0 Diving Operations

Page 373

3.3.11.3 In open water, SCUBA divers shall always be attached to a clearly visible float by a life line. In no case shall SCUBA divers be allowed to swim free. 3.3.11.4 In enclosed or restricted water such as beneath structures, either a lifeline or the "buddy" system must be used. There will be no untethered solo diving. 3.3.11.5 When using SCUBA equipment, divers will always wear an inflatable life jacket of the approved type. 3.3.11.6 No SCUBA diving should be carried out during darkness.

3.4

Physical Fitness
All divers must be physically fit for diving and have a certificate to this effect issued by a qualified medical practitioner: one who has experience and knowledge of the medical requirements for diving. 3.4.1 The medical certificate should state "Fit for Diving" and be not more than twelve months old. 3.4.2 Doctors carrying out medicals for divers should be aware of the importance of the condition of heart, lungs, chest, ears, nose, throat, and teeth. An EKG and chest Xray are mandatory on an annual basis, while a long bone X -ray should be performed every three years. 3.4.3 For British divers, a current British Diving Fitness Register is acceptable and, likewise, any recognized fitness register for other nationalities. 3.4.4 All divers should be trained in First Aid/CPR, and on all diving operations, there should be an approved First Aid Kit suitable for use under hyperbaric conditions on site as recommended in the US. Navy Diving Manual.

February 1993 - 3.0 Diving Operations

Page 374

Nurses with special training will also be integrated in this group which shall constantly keep abreast with current practices.5. 3.4 Diving Medical Team This will come under the jurisdiction of the director of Preventive Medicine Services and will be a multi-disciplinary group headed by the senior Occupational Medicine specialist. In the case of sports divers. on call at either of the above numbers. 3.m.2 Commercial Divers The diving supervisor will immediately arrange recompression according to the appropriate table and report the incident to the coordinator manning the diving emergencies numbers. 7 days per week. February 1993 . Specific responsibilities are as follows: 3. He should state his exact location and follow the instructions given to him by the coordinator answering the number.5. He has to know the following two diving emergencies numbers to call if requiring help: 678-1248 from 6 a.3 Coordinator.1 Sports Divers All divers must have an experienced person in charge with good knowledge of decompression sickness. He shall also inform the duty diving medical consultant who can be at the Saudi Aramco Preventive Medicine Services Division on 877-8916 (after work hours on 878-1697 or 878-0890).5. will receive the information on diving medical emergencies. and 378-3691 from 6 p.m. He shall send a monthly report of all incidents involving therapeutic decompression to the senior Occupational Medicine specialist. the coordinator may elect to proceed with treatment using the appropriate table without notifying the diving medical team in cases of minor decompression sickness. 3.3. the duty diving medical consultant shall be notified immediately.5. Diving Emergencies The coordinator. In all type II bends and possible gas embolism cases. he will direct them to the nearest available recompression chamber and alert its operator. The diving medical team will provide this service to the Marine Department.m.3.5 Medical Diving Emergencies: Procedures and Responsibilities Every incident/accident involving diving personnel shall be reported on Saudi Aramco Form 3208 with the responsible supervisor submitting a follow-up report on Saudi Aramco Form 681. It will be comprised of a group of physicians with an interest and training in hyperbaric medicine who shall rotate as duty diving medical consultants. In commercial diving incidents.0 Diving Operations Page 375 . Offshore emergency response procedures are given in Appendix B. until 6 a.m. 7 days per week. until 6 p.

maintenance. 3.1. Wearing of personal flotation devices are required as follows: 3. 3. or work activities shall be responsible for having their personnel follow the requirements regarding the wearing of personal flotation devices.17 At any time when deemed necessary by the boat skipper.1.6 Personnel Transfer at Sea The following is to be used as guidelines for the transfer of persons at sea from vessel to vessel or from vessel to platform (or structure).1.Personal Flotation Devices for Work Over.3. installation or craft.0 Diving Operations Page 376 . installations.11 When transferring to or from any water craft or to or from one water craft to another. Failure of an employee to heed the instructions given by the person in charge of the marine craft or aircraft shall require the passenger to be removed from the craft with disciplinary action to follow by the employee's department. February 1993 . 4. ship captain.020 . On or Near Water. 4. supervisor. and manning of the recompression chambers. Personal Flotation Devices.5.7 When working or riding on the deck of a marine vessel or craft during rough seas at the discretion of the person in charge of the vessel or craft.4 Supervisors or persons in charge of personnel in facilities.1.5 Marine Department The Marine Department is responsible for the provision. These references are pertinent items from Loss Prevention Department GI 6. 3. 3.1. Requirements. ship captains and aircraft pilots shall enforce the wearing of personal flotation devices in their vessels or aircraft. A.1.3 Marine craft skippers. 3.3. or the person in charge of the marine vessel.

The Marine Department expects all Saudi Aramco and contractor personnel working around marine facilities to strictly adhere to Company safety rules and regulations. no defect) personal flotation devices for each of their personnel. gloves.0 Diving Operations Page 377 . B. Contractors shall provide (fully functional.3.020. The proponent Saudi Aramco organization shall be responsible for ensuring that contractors comply with the applicable requirements of this GI 6. February 1993 .2. Saudi Arab and contractor vessel crews shall also be issued with proper working uniforms and personal protective equipment such as shoes. They shall also provide their personnel with the necessary instructions or training on the proper way of wearing personal flotation devices. glasses and hard hats.4.

0 Diving Operations Page 378 .2: INTERNATIONAL CODE FLAG "A" February 1993 .3.FIGURE VI.

Construction Safety Manual: Appendix A Page 379 .Appendix A February 1993 .

Rules Of Competition. Contractor Safety Competition. Contractor's Competition Job Safety Evaluation.P.I. Saudi Aramco Safety.Construction Safety Manual: Index to Appendix A Page 380 .INDEX TO APPENDIX A This Appendix contains the following information: * * * * * Project Management And Contractor's Safety Competition Site Registration Form. Hazard Identification Plan (H. February 1993 .). Health and Environmental Requirements.

Number: Peak Number Of Employees: Contractor Site Representative: Saudi Aramco Site (PMT) Engineer: Project Mgmt.Construction Safety Manual: Safety Competition Site Registration Form Page 381 . Signed:________________________________________ Saudi Aramco Project Manager February 1993 . Code: Name Of Contractor's Safety Representative: Contractor's Site Phone Number: Site Location: Signed:____________________________________________________(Contractor's Representative) Job Title:__________________________________________________ Company:__________________________________________________ Date:_______________________________________________________ Saudi Aramco Department:____________________________________________________ Proponent This form is to be completed and sent to the local Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Office with a copy to the designated senior Project Engineer.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY COMPETITION SITE REGISTRATION FORM Date: ____________________________ To: Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department Name Of Contractor: Contractor's Address: Contractor's Phone Number: Job Description: Job Number: Starting Date: Estimated Completion Date: B.A. who is a member of the proponent Project Management Team (PMT).I. Department: Telephone Number: Telephone Number: Org.

The Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention representative will report to the site office before he starts his inspection. A contractor shall have a minimum of three ratings within the six month period. b. The Saudi Aramco Project Management Team shall receive a copy of the inspection sheet. Remedial steps shall be taken to rectify faults and improve the score rating. a copy of the six-month summary sheet will be provided to any contractor. b. 2. and they should distribute it to the appropriate contractor. If it is inconvenient for a member of the Project Management Team or contractor's personnel to accompany the Loss Prevention representative during the inspection. a.) February 1993 . An unscheduled site inspection will be carried out by the Loss Prevention Department once before the 25th day of every even month. c. Representatives of Project Management and the contractor shall be invited to accompany the Loss Prevention representative during the inspection. Multiple contractors working on the same BI shall be entered. a. Contractor and related sub-contractor exceed 50 for the entire six month period. These scores shall be final. A contractor working on one BI at one location shall be evaluated. 4. A contractor working on more than one BI shall have an entry in the competition for each BI.2 CONTRACTOR SAFETY COMPETITION. scored and ranked separately. the Loss Prevention representative will conduct the inspection alone . then the Loss Prevention representative will make the final decision. scored and ranked separately. RULES OF COMPETITION CONTRACTOR SAFETY COMPETITION JOB SAFETY EVALUATION RULES OF COMPETITION 1. At the end of the competition. evaluated. 5. 3.awarding appropriate scores. If during the inspection there is a difference of opinion over the points awarded. (This also applies to consortium partners provided they meet requirements in 2 above. A contractor working on the same BI at separate sites shall be evaluated by site but the final score will be averaged.A. Estimated completion time exceeds the competition time period. A contractor on a Budget Item (BI) who meets the following criteria shall be registered in the competition by the responsible Proponent (PMT). d.Construction Safety Manual: Contractor Safety Competition Rules Page 382 . The competition shall be run over a six-month period (January to June and July to December) and shall be assessed according to the requirements of Schedule 'D' of the contract documents.

then he would be deemed to have broken the rules and forfeit the right to be included in the awards for the duration of that competition for which he was eligible. Every hazard report Saudi Aramco Form 3744 issued and not corrected within 24 hours. each site under the BI will be scored separately but averaged with all sites for that BI by contractor. Should it be found that the contractor has not entered into the required logs details which at a later date are determined to have occurred. then he will still be eligible to compete in the final assessment.. e. 13.g. shall be reflected in column #18 under Special Items. lost work day cases.. etc.g. Following each inspection by the Loss Prevention representative. e. restricted duty. 11. the first work day after the 25th is acceptable. then that section will OK from the possible percentage score. no scaffolding. Should a contractor incur a second hazard report. the original copy of the form SA-6710 shall be submitted to the superintendent. Building 3121. Room 113. Any contractor who experiences a job related fatality. cranes. 8. For those rare cases where there are multiple sites and multiple contractors on a BI. Should any contractor find he has completed the project before the end of the competition period due to meritorious performance or reasons beyond his control. Should a registered contractor not retain an average of 50 or more employees for the entire competition period.2 Contractor Safety Competition Rules Page 383 . fires. 10. SCORING: Where a section is inapplicable to a particular site. 12. 14. Exceptions to the above guidelines shall be reviewed by Project Management Team and Loss Prevention during initial registrations. accidents.A. 9. not later than the 25th day of each even month. they will be dropped from the competition. In cases of holidays or rescheduled days off. Dhahran.e. 7. 6. February 1993 . Violations noted during an initial inspection which have not been corrected by the next general and/or follow-up inspection shall be deemed a repeat violation and a "0" score will be given for the entire section under consideration. etc. and fire resulting in SR 10. a penalty of 500 points shall be deducted from the total score. will cease to be eligible for an award. Any item of concern not specifically covered on the Evaluation Form A-6710. disqualification for the rest of the competition period shall result.000 worth of damage on any one of their sites within the competition period. or serious incident that results in the hospitalization of five or more employees. Central Area Loss Prevention Division.

POINT ASSESSMENT: Points will be assessed based on the gravity/severity of violations encountered and will range from 0 to 100.65 66 . Any questions that may arise concerning this job safety evaluation may be submitted to the proponent department for resolution.A. please contact your Area Loss Prevention Office.100 Overall percentage performance will be calculated as follows: Points Scored x 100 = Contractor Rating: ___________ Points Possible Every endeavor will be made to provide an accurate assessment at each inspection.80 81 . and for the current competition rules. OVERALL PERFORMANCE RATING: Unsatisfactory= Fair= Good= Excellent= 0 . Any contractor who persistently returns poor scores or violates the competition rules may be subject to corrective action by the proponent department. depending on the judgment of the Loss Prevention Department representative. Points can be given from 0 to 100. February 1993 .95 96 .2 Contractor Safety Competition Rules Page 384 . Please Note: For more information on the Contractor Safety Competition.

FIGURE A.2 Contractor Safety Competition Rules Page 385 .A.1: CONTRACTOR'S COMPETITION J OB S AFETY EVALUATION February 1993 .

2 Contractor Safety Competition Rules Page 386 . February 1993 .1: CONTRACTOR'S COMPETITION J OB S AFETY EVALUATION C ONTINUED.A.FIGURE A.

Company Representative may direct CONTRACTOR to suspend all or part of the WORK pursuant to Schedule "A" until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. will assist CONTRACTOR by explaining good safety practices. immediately take all corrective action required to comply. or such party or parties designated by him. CONTRACTOR shall also take. Costs incurred by CONTRACTOR as a result of such WORK suspension shall be for CONTRACTOR's account and any resultant CONTRACTOR performance delays shall not be deemed excusable here-under. specifications and standards as are made known to CONTRACTOR by SAUDI ARAMCO. however. CONTRACTOR may request copies of all applicable rules and regulations from SAUDI ARAMCO's Loss Prevention Department. It is understood. applicable Saudi Arab Government Safety Regulations and all SAUDI ARAMCO Safety and Loss Prevention rules and regulations. Such corrective action shall. CONTRACTOR shall. and ensure that its employees. 2. be taken at CONTRACTOR's expense. Paragraphs 5 through 27 of this Schedule (which supplement but do not limit the requirements of the Construction Safety Manual). or cause to be taken. CONTRACTOR shall maintain the SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Safety Manual and applicable SAUDI ARAMCO GIs at the WORK Site. Deviations From Safety Rules Any deviation by CONTRACTOR from SAUDI ARAMCO's Loss Prevention rules and regulations must be approved in writing in advance by Company Representative. that rendition of such assistance by SAUDI ARAMCO will in no way relieve CONTRACTOR of its responsibilities as set forth in this Schedule 'D'. Saudi Aramco Assistance CONTRACTOR may request assistance from SAUDI ARAMCO with respect to the implementation of its Loss Prevention requirements. Failure To Comply Should CONTRACTOR fail to comply with the requirements of this Schedule 'D'. upon being advised of its noncompliance. HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Compliance With Safety Rules . Company Representative.3 SAUDI ARAMCO SAFETY. February 1993 . CONTRACTOR shall comply with the provisions of the SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Safety Manual and SAUDI ARAMCO's publication entitled "Loss Prevention Requirements for Contractors". 1. any additional measures which Company Representative may direct to protect against injury to or death of any person or damage to or loss of any property during CONTRACTOR's performance of the work. and such other related requirements. Specifically.Construction Safety Manual: Contractor Safety And Loss Prevention Requirements Page 387 . 3. unless provided otherwise in this Contract. SAUDI ARAMCO shall notify CONTRACTOR in writing.Schedule 'D' CONTRACTOR shall at all times comply with. If CONTRACTOR fails to take such corrective action promptly. 4. pointing out unsafe WORK Site conditions. agents and subcontractors comply with. and by applying his/their experience and judgment in order to assist CONTRACTOR in improving WORK safety.A.

not later than fifteen (15) working days following the execution of this Contract. 9. Personal Protective Equipment CONTRACTOR shall.5. It shall include a specific plan to hold a ten minute safety discussion organized and implemented by each craft or crew supervisor on at least one day in each working week. which by this reference is made part of this Contract.012 (Isolation. provide. 8. The name and address of the Safety Supervisor shall be submitted to Company Representative no later than the Program's submission: The Program shall outline specific essential measures to be taken by CONTRACTOR to prevent injuries to persons and damage to property and to ensure compliance with this Schedule 'D'. to coordinate the Program. The Program shall be organized and implemented by each craft or crew supervisor.A. other applicable GIs and Operator Instruction Manuals (OIMs). as a minimum. Saudi Aramco will reject tools which are found to be defective. February 1993 . Tools And Portable Power Tools CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all tools provided by CONTRACTOR are of the best quality with proper safeguards and are suitable for the use intended. Company Representative shall give guidance on Restricted Area locations. Electrical hand tools shall be properly grounded or be of the double insulated type. CONTRACTOR shall appoint a qualified full-time Safety Supervisor approved by SAUDI ARAMCO. CONTRACTOR shall ensure full implementation of the Program. in advance.100 (Work Permits) and GI 6. for SAUDI ARAMCO's approval. Lockout and Use of Hold Tags). It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ascertain. Work Permits CONTRACTOR shall obtain a work permit (SAUDI ARAMCO Form 924) each shift for any WORK to be carried out during such shift in any SAUDI ARAMCO specified "Restricted Area". whether the WORK area is designated a Restricted Area. All work permit procedures shall be carried out by CONTRACTOR in accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO GI 2.3 Contractor Safety And Loss Prevention Requirements Page 388 . maintain and enforce the use of the items of personal protective equipment listed in SAUDI ARAMCO's Construction Safety Manual. 6. Welding And Cutting Equipment All welding and c utting equipment shall be of a SAUDI ARAMCO approved type and maintained in good condition. Loss Prevention Program CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a Loss PREVENTION Program to Company Representative. 7. All tools shall be free from defects and maintained in good condition.

3 Contractor Safety And Loss Prevention Requirements Page 389 . Furthermore. Cartridge Operated Tools Cartridge operated tools shall be used only with the prior written approval of Company Representative. sound material. Cranes And Rigging Equipment CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all lifting appliances and every part thereof. Electrical Installations And Equipment All material and equipment used in temporary electrical installations shall be of SAUDI ARAMCO approved type and maintained in good condition.030). CONTRACTOR shall ensure that only SAUDI ARAMCO approved tools shall be used and that they shall be maintained in good condition in compliance with the SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Safety Manual.A.030). 11. 13. adequate strength and free from defect and are properly inspected and maintained. February 1993 . CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all 120 volt single phase 15 and 20 ampere receptacle outlets which are not a part of the permanent wiring of any building or structure shall have ground fault circuit interrupters for personal protection. 12. Scaffolding CONTRACTOR shall provide and cause to be used scaffolding. 15. slings. 7. Certified riggers shall be provided (GI. 7. from a ladder or from a boatswain's chair. Ladders CONTRACTOR shall ensure that only metal or timber ladders of SAUDI ARAMCO approved type are provided and used for ingress to and egress from WORK places where other means of ingress and egress are not available. 14. hooks.025). shackles and other equipment used for raising or lowering on a lifting appliance shall be of a SAUDI ARAMCO approved type and maintained in good condition. and all other plant or equipment for anchoring or fixing such appliances shall be of good mechanical construction. All cranes and lifting equipment must be inspected and certified by SAUDI ARAMCO before being permitted to operate on SAUDI ARAMCO property (GI. including all working gear. All chains. All mobile heavy equipment and crane operators must possess a valid Kingdom of Saudi Arabia heavy equipment operator's license and be certified by SAUDI ARAMCO to operate such equipment (GI 7.10. platforms or temporary floors for all WORK which cannot be done safely from the ground. All scaffolding shall be constructed of SAUDI ARAMCO approved metal components and erected to comply with the requirements of the SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Safety Manual. Mechanical Equipment CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all mechanical equipment provided is of a SAUDI ARAMCO approved type and maintained in good condition.

000 to CONTRACTOR's plant or equipment. Transportation CONTRACTOR shall ensure that passengers shall travel only in vehicles that are provided with SAUDI ARAMCO approved passenger seats. CONTRACTOR shall maintain. Injury And Damage Reporting CONTRACTOR shall ensure that an immediate oral report is made to Company Representative in the case of all: • • • • • • Fatal injuries.All moving parts of any equipment shall be securely guarded so as to prevent access to the moving parts by persons working on or passing through the WORK Site. in any amount.026) This record shall be available for inspection at all reasonable times and shall be submitted to SAUDI ARAMCO on request. serious injury to five or more CONTRACTOR employees.003. 7. 17. a current record showing all: • • • • • • WORK injuries Fires Incidents of property damage over SR10. Injuries requiring medical attention which result in lost time.001 and GI 6. This requirement shall apply while traveling to and from the WORK Site and during travel on the WORK Site. SAUDI ARAMCO may convene an engineering review or investigation committee in accordance with the requirements of GI 6. Seat belts shall be installed and used in all vehicles carrying personnel (except in the case of buses where seat belts are mandatory only for the driver).000 Motor vehicle collisions Incidents involving damage to SAUDI ARAMCO equipment and property Damage and near misses to cranes and heavy equipment (GI 7.. in a format approved by Company Representative. a written report shall be submitted promptly to Company Representative. or damage to SAUDI ARAMCO equipment or property. Saudi Aramco Plant Operations CONTRACTOR shall ensure that CONTRACTOR's personnel and the personnel of its subcontractors do not open or close any valves or electrical switches.026). 16. Damage. Fire. February 1993 . Damage and near misses to cranes and heavy equipment (GI.3 Contractor Safety And Loss Prevention Requirements Page 390 . For accidents involving CONTRACTOR employee fatalities. Damage over SR 10. 18. to SAUDI ARAMCO's equipment or property. In addition. or operate any other piece of SAUDI ARAMCO plant without the prior approval of SAUDI ARAMCO and then only under the direct supervision of the supervising operator or plant foreman.A.

which by this reference is made part of this Contract.3 Contractor Safety And Loss Prevention Requirements Page 391 .108 which are by this reference made part of this Contract. Fire Prevention CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain in good working order adequate fire fighting equipment. approval is obtained from Company Representative. the timber shall be of suitable quality and of adequate strength.010 and OIM. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that prior to any concrete being poured into any supported formwork structure. CONTRACTOR shall obtain prior written approval from Comp any Representative before any timber supporting structure is erected. Life vests shall be worn by CONTRACTOR's personnel when working over water as prescribed in SAUDI ARAMCO GI 6. steel units shall be used. 24. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all employees are made aware of the precautions to be taken. Store yards shall be laid out in accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO Standards (SAES -B-7A.19. When a CONTRACTOR employs 50 or more workmen at a WORK Site the CONTRACTOR shall provide a February 1993 . Formwork CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all formwork supports are constructed to SAUDI ARAMCO approved standards. 21. fire lanes and compatibility of materials. Ionizing Radiation CONTRACTOR shall ensure that radioactive sources shall be used in compliance with the "General Rules and Regulations for the Use and Handling of Radioactivity and Radioisotopes" as promulgated by the Saudi Arabian Atomic Energy Department and with prior written approval of SAUDI ARAMCO.A. Excavations CONTRACTOR shall ensure that any excavation work carried out during the course of the WORK is done according to the requirements of SAUDI ARAMCO GI 1021. 20. First-Aid Facilities The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain first-aid facilities at the WORK Site in accordance with Articles 134 and 135 of the Saudi Labor Laws. 1. Work Over Or Adjacent To Water Adequate lifesaving and rescue equipment shall be provided by CONTRACTOR on every seagoing vessel. 22. All CONTRACTOR's personnel shall be properly trained in the use of such equipment. As far as practicable. Where the WORK requires a timber supporting structure. and at every work station where WORK is being carried out over or adjacent to water. Where the WORK requires the use of ionizing radiation either by the CONTRACTOR or by some other organization approved by SAUDI ARAMCO.020. SAES -B-7C) and NFPA 231 A with respect to spacing of rows. 23.

001. the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the handling of such materials is performed in accordance with currently accepted industry practices for the handling of such material. CONTRACTOR shall include in its Loss Prevention Program its procedure for the disposal of solid and liquid wastes. to transport injured personnel to the nearest health care facility. CONTRACTOR must provide SAUDI ARAMCO proof that the hazardous wastes have been properly disposed of at a licensed hazardous waste disposal facility. chemical.2 Subject to any specific requirements in Schedule "B".3 Contractor Safety And Loss Prevention Requirements Page 392 . Transportation And Disposal Of Hazardous Materials And Waste 25. handles hazardous materials. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that in handling of hazardous materials. 25. sludge.1 Follow Saudi Arab Government regulations in disposing of hazardous waste materials.2 CONTRACTOR shall also provide SAUDI ARAMCO proof of an established land treatment/disposal program which is designed to ensure that hazardous constituents placed in or on the treatment/disposal zone are degraded.A.2 above. SAUDI ARAMCO shall approve such procedure before disposal of any waste by CONTRACTOR.3.1 When a CONTRACTOR. scrap and sewage) and shall also identify the steps to be taken to treat the wastes or otherwise prevent them from polluting the ground water or the sea or from becoming a public nuisance. The procedure shall detail specific locations for the disposal of each type of waste (construction. properly supplied and marked. the CONTRACTOR shall: 25. transformed or immobilized within the treatment zone to prevent migration to ground and/or surface waters. such material is properly containerized and labeled in accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO GI 355. The CONTRACTOR shall submit this program to SAUDI ARAMCO for approval prior to the disposal of any hazardous material by the CONTRACTOR. especially liquids. Handling.3 In addition to the requirements of sub-paragraph 25. where the CONTRACTOR is required to dispose of wastes determined to be hazardous. 25. sanitary. February 1993 .3. 25. in the course of performing his obligations under the Contract.qualified nurse and a dedicated emergency vehicle (ambulance). 25.

3 Contractor Safety And Loss Prevention Requirements Page 393 . Sandblasting CONTRACTOR shall comply with SAUDI ARAMCO GI 6. transportation and use of explosives. 27.26.A. Explosives CONTRACTOR shall promptly advise Company Representative of any requirements for explosives and only use such explosives after the written approval of Company Representative.021 and Construction Safety Manual requirements on sandblasting. February 1993 . Contractor shall comply with the general rules and requirements for the handling and use of explosives issued by the Ministry of the Interior and all Saudi Aramco requirements per the Saudi Aramco Construction Safety Manual for the storage.

4 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION PLAN (HIP) INTRODUCTION In reviewing the safety requirements for our design and construction activities (i.e. from most severe and probable to least severe and probable) during the initial design phase.A. modified or rebuilt plants or facilities).Construction Safety Manual: Hazard Identification Plan Page 394 . The hazards identified are classified as A. The attached Hazard Identification Plan (HIP) provides the method for conducting such a review. B or C according to their degree of potential human impact considering severity and probability (i. new.e. it is difficult for even the most experienced engineer and/or contractor to identify all the potential safety hazards that may be encountered unless a systematic potential-hazard review is conducted as a part of a Hazard Identification Plan (HIP). or eliminating it altogether. This allows for a change in the methodology or operating procedure in the direction of reducing the risk associated with the hazard to an acceptable level. February 1993 .

Hazard areas identified on a location map and color coded. B. • Class "C" Hazards: A condition or practice likely to cause minor (non-disabling) injury or illness or non-disruptive property damage. loss of life or body part and/or extensive loss of structure.A. Consideration will be given to the following potential hazards: • • • • • • III. Contractor will submit this list to Saudi Aramco representative. February 1993 . regulations.HAZARD IDENTIFICATION PLAN: Brief description of work to be accomplished. facilities. or C. Potential hazards to the general public. Hazard Classification Once the hazards are identified. Potential fire / electrical hazards. Conduct Hazards Identification Review. Potential hazards that may be encountered from outside sources. Statement of corrective action to be taken.M. and contractor personnel. • Class "B" Hazards: A condition or practice likely to cause serious injury or illness (resulting in temporary disability) or property damage that is disruptive. • Class "A" Hazards: A condition or practice likely to cause permanent disability. etc. Potential hazards to P. ground condition. II. they are classified as Class A. (To include on-site tour) Record hazards identified on location map. but less severe than Class "A". Hazardous materials identification/handling/storage. procedures. B. equipment or material. Incompatible interface with existing plants. List Potential Hazards • • • • Each hazard will be classified A.T. I. engineering specifications.4 Hazard Identification Plan Page 395 . or C.

A. Following are examples of typical hazards that can be encountered: 1) Above Ground Potential Hazards • • • • • • • • • • 2) Overhead power lines. and determine what corrective action should be taken. poles High cliffs / dangerous overhangs Fuel / chemical / pressure vessels and systems Ground Level Potential Hazards • • • • • • • • • • • • Electrical wires Roadways Ditches High water table Tie-downs Obstruction Unstable soil Fences/walls Traffic flow Guide wires Nearby buildings. "Overhead Power Lines" Corrective Action: • • Obtain work permit before starting any work under or near electrical power lines. No activity in area under power line until power lines have been disconnected and/or relocated. list KV rating Bridges. Corrective Action Example: "A" Hazard. houses Possible flood or wash out areas February 1993 . schools.IV.4 Hazard Identification Plan Page 396 . Example: "A" Hazards Overhead electrical power lines over building site • • Electrical power rating. by-passes Micro wave / communication towers Houses Traffic flow Facilities close-by Aircraft flight path Trees. (KV) Show power lines on location map. Corrective Action List all hazards identified in the HIP outline.

A.• • 3) Adverse weather conditions Hazards from nearby plants or operations.4 Hazard Identification Plan Page 397 . etc. Underground Potential Hazards • • • • • • • • Buried utilities High water table Building foundations Underground water waste Unstable soil Chemical / trash dump area Voids in the earth (caves) Underground fuel / chemical / pressure systems and vessels 4) Interface Potential Hazards • • • • • • • • • • • • Existing emergency evacuation plans Emergency communication system Traffic flow Special personnel Protective equipment requirements Hazardous waste disposal Hazards from other outside operations Escape routes Evacuation alarms Access control Flammable liquid / chemical / pressure vessel storage Gas release into proposed area 5) Off-Shore Potential Hazards • • • High wind / sea conditions Night time operations Inclement weather conditions • Fog • Rain • Lightning Marine vessels and materials adrift Electrical hazards • • February 1993 .

Construction Safety Manual .Appendix B: Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 398 .Appendix B: Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response February 1993 .

B. It is the responsibility of management to ensure that all employees are familiar with the proper response to fire and other serious emergencies. Any further questions on search and rescue procedures should be forwarded to your area Loss Prevention Department office or the Saudi Aramco contract proponent. Effective emergency planning requires that employees be familiar with emergency procedures before a crisis.1 SEARCH AND RESCUE PROCEDURES This Appendix outlines Saudi Aramco search and rescue procedures for on. 1-503-1). February 1993 .Construction Safety Manual: Search And Resuce Procedures Page 399 . Fire and Other Serious Emergency Response Procedures (Supplement No. Included in this appendix are the following: • • • Control of Remote Area Travel And Search And Rescue Procedures (GI 6.and off-shore facilities. Offshore Emergency Response.025).

B.Safaniya Producing Offshore Disaster Control Plan .Construction Safety Manual .501 OI 1. October 1989 Other references include: Saudi Aramco Corporate Loss Prevention Manual (CLPM) Mobil Oil Corporation .3: Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 400 .503-2 OI 1.2 EMERGENCY/DISASTER PLANNING AND RESPONSE It is the responsibility of every contractor employee to become familiar with emergency response procedures for both offshore and onshore operating facilities.501-1 OI 1.503 OI 1.011 Overall Disaster Control Procedure . Dhahran Area Guidelines for Preparing Emergency Response Plans.Safaniya/Tanajib Area Tanajib Disaster Control Center Commander Safaniya Support Personnel Assignment Disaster Control Command Center .503-5 OI 1.501-2 OI 1.500 Disaster Contingency Plan.503-1 OI 1. The following Operating Instructions Manuals (OIMs) give facility-specific emergency response guidance/procedures: Saudi Aramco Operating Instruction Manual (OIM): OI 1.527 OI 10.503-4 OI 1.503-3 OI 1.502 OI 1.501-3 OI 1.Safaniya Producing Offshore Emergency Response Offshore Emergencies Only Safaniya Offshore Jack-Up Test Barge/Well Platform Disaster Control Plan Safaniya Offshore . May 1991 February 1993 .Tanajib Personnel Assignment Onshore Control Unit .Guidelines for Emergency Response and Disaster Contingency Planning for Saudi Aramco.B.Offshore Casualty Evacuation Personnel Accountability Offshore Facilities Safety Zones and Safety of Navigation Around Offshore Installation Work Around Offshore Producing Facilities General guidelines for preparing emergency response plans can be found in the following Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department publication: GI 70.

Disaster: A disaster is an emergency which poses a more serious threat to the safety of workers. The following guidelines (B 3. the hazards of the facility operations.) and procedures Emergency response training and drills 3.3 and Figures) are extracted from the publication "Guidelines For Preparing Emergency Response Plans". the environment or property at a facility or site and which cannot be brought under control using the resources and procedures for emergency response in place for the facility or site.2.2 Definitions 1. This can be accomplished by developing emergency response plans that address immediate concerns within the contractor's operations and which also interface. as required. Ensure that the emergency plan with the latest issue date is being used and it incorporates all amendments to date. February 1993 .The potential for emergencies and disasters exists at all construction sites and facilities and their associated costs can be devastating in terms of employee casualties. the environment or property at a facility or site and which can be brought under control using the resources and procedures for emergency response in place for the facility or site.2.B. etc.1 General Provisions 1. etc. 4. It must have provision for any future amendments as addendum or reissues. Contractors should refer to these guidelines for developing their own plans as appropriate. Contractor's plans will need to be tailored to their specific operations and resources and the nature of their work with Saudi Aramco. Emergency: An emergency is an abnormal incident posing a threat to the safety of workers.1 and B 3. B. These are generally used by Saudi Aramco operations as a framework for plan development.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 401 . paying particular attention to the need for interfacing with local Saudi Aramco emergency planning procedures. loss of capital investment. business interruption. with emergency response procedures developed by Saudi Aramco organizations. The disaster preparedness policy must be provided in the front of the plan. These events cannot be avoided but the contractor can reduce their frequency of occurrence and severity of damage with effective preparation/planning. The emergency telephone numbers must be provided in the front of the plan. residents. The emergency reporting instructions must be provided in the front of the plan. 2. equipment. B. Whether an emergency becomes a disaster depends on the following: • • the type of facility. A facility/site emergency response organization's structure and responsibilities Development of credible emergency/disaster scenarios and their consequences Establishment of emergency control resources (human. 5. residents. The purpose of the emergency plan is to provide guidance on the following: • • • • 2.

and mutual aid capabilities of outside agencies. Disaster Command Post (DCP): A designated safe location near the emergency site from which the Incident Commander directs emergency control efforts. Disaster Command Center (DCC): The location where the Emergency Manager and support staff assemble to respond to an emergency. (This will also remain an onshore centralized location for an offshore emergency response episode. At some onshore facilities. 6.) During an offshore search and rescue (SAR) operation.B. It is a centralized location for monitoring the facility response and also serves as a command center for coordinating all communications. This equipment provides the means for contact with the DCC and for field coordination. the capabilities of emergency personnel.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 402 . Staffing from pertinent technical and support groups assures accessibility to all required resources for an overall effective emergency response. communication equipment and support information similar to a DCC. February 1993 . At offshore facilities. the environment or property at a facility or site.• • • 3. 5. the DCP would be a safe location designated by the Incident Commander which should be equipped with a telephone. A designated helicopter pilot will report to SAR control center to act as a search coordinator. Emergency Planning: This involves the development of a specific plan which details actions to be taken by trained personnel during an emergency in an effort to efficiently control it and minimize its net negative impact on workers. Table Top Exercise: This is a disaster management simulation where key personnel face a hypothetical disaster situation developed by a skilled moderator. 4. the DCP is a specially equipped vehicle outfitted with facility maps. the proximity of neighboring communities or other facilities. radio communication and personal protective/identification equipment. residents. rescue and medical treatment activities during the emergency episode. He directs operations and coordinates fire fighting. including the allocation and distribution of information. this will become the SAR control center. Weaknesses are identified by evaluating the results of the exercise and corrected by revising the plan. This type of planning also extends to developing emergency control strategies and instituting training and drills for all facility personnel. at a minimum.

including the senior fire officer. The structure of this group is typified in Figure B. the senior management person at the facility. His specific responsibilities are to: (1.1. Planning Committee: A planning committee is a body comprising of members from key functional groups within the organization.7. Emergency/Disaster Response Organization: The Emergency/Disaster Response Organization is a structured working group whose function is to control an emergency or disaster. This is set up to develop an emergency plan using the broad expertise of its members. and manpower organizational capabilities for his facility or site. He is usually.B. A.) establish the Disaster Control Post (DCP) at a safe location near the emergency site February 1993 . Planning Coordinator: An individual who is qualified to develop an emergency plan to direct its development through a planning committee. His specific responsibilities are to: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) assume control of the DCC implement the Emergency Plan receive updates on control measures taken by the Incident Commander assess the situation and direct actions to minimize damage and loss of life maintain contact with upper management declare the emergency "under control" and authorize the "all clear" signal (b) Incident Commander The Incident Commander is responsible for suppression and control tactics at the site. 8. This individual is required to process great depth of knowledge of emergency response and disaster control practices and procedures. He can review and use Saudi Aramco approved emergency plans from other similar facilities or sites in the development or modification of his facility/site plan. 9. The Shift Superintendent usually fills this position and provides direction to all personnel at the scene. coordinates logistical efforts and has the authority for the final decision in any emergency action. Key Positions (a) Emergency Manager The Emergency Manager is responsible for the overall organization and strategy of the emergency response.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 403 . The organization is basically compris ed of the following positions with their delegated responsibilities. but not always.

B. and request assistance through the Emergency Manager coordinate mutual aid personnel and equipment determine the need for evacuation All normal plant functions and emergency support services report directly to one of the above positions according to their reporting relationships given in Figure B. They take directions from the Incident Commander through the appointed senior fire officer at the DCP.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 404 . Emergency/Disaster Support Staff/Teams (a) Fire Protection/Rescue This function is usually performed by a combined team of facility/site fire protection personnel.1.(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) develop and implement control tactics approve use of all emergency related resources keep the Emergency Manager informed evaluate mutual aid needs. The responsibilities of the senior fire officer are as follows: • (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) • (1) (2) (3) Fire-Fighting provide initial evaluation to the Incident Commander deploy fire fighting personnel and equipment advise Incident Commander of the need for outside resources keep Incident Commander current on fire control status direct outside fire fighting organizations clean-up and restore fire protection equipment and supplies Rescue locate and rescue missing persons render essential first aid and life support remove victims to designated safe locations for medical treatment (b) Process This function is usually performed by an operations representative who is responsible for advising the Emergency Manager in the following areas: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) operations. unit isolation and emergency shutdown activities special fire protection needs materials or process in the affected area actions taken affecting the process process equipment involved in the control of the incident February 1993 .B. hydrocarbon movement.

Incident Commander.B. and Process Coordinator advised of factors influencing emergency activities. assign an engineer to serve as an emergency events recorder prepare damage assessment reports collect and preserve evidence for the incident investigators perform post-incident engineering for repair work (3) (4) (5) (6) (e) Security This function is usually performed by the facility Security Supervisor whose responsibilities are as follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) ensure integrity of the plant perimeter provide necessary staffing to control use of emergency gates prevent entry of unauthorized personnel direct the flow of traffic away from the disaster scene direct emergency resources to the appropriate staging area provide escorts for emergency vehicles when requested advise Incident Commander on security matters act as liaison between the Frontier Force.(c) Maintenance This function is usually performed by a maintenance representative who is responsible to: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) assemble maintenance manpower in the maintenance shops assist operators in isolating and shutting down units as directed repair of emergency equipment assist utilities personnel in bypassing or repairing critical utility components provide fuel for emergency vehicles and firewater pump engines transport foam and other emergency supplies (d) Engineering This function is usually performed by an operations engineering representative whose responsibilities are as follows: (1) (2) provide mechanical and process related information keep the Emergency Manager.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 405 . the Incident Commander and Government Affairs (f) Loss Prevention This function is usually performed by the Loss Prevention Advisor/Engineer whose responsibilities are as follows: (1) help evaluate hazardous situations and materials February 1993 .

3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 406 .B. and field sanitation facilities on request of the Incident Commander purchasing and contracting requirements coordinating claims actions providing necessary accommodations for emergency response personnel (2) (3) (4) (h) Medical This function is usually performed by district medical personnel whose responsibilities are as follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (i) establish a triage area at the scene provide on-site emergency medical care advise the Emergency Manager of the number of injured and any need for additional medical assistance notify appropriate hospitals and clinics of the anticipated number of casualties advise the Emergency Manager of special medical transportation needs keep records of victims and their treatment External Relations This function is usually performed by the area Government Affairs representative whose responsibilities are as follows: (1) (2) (3) establish and maintain communications with civil authorities communicate the incident status to government organizations as appropriate request approval from the Emergency Manager for any government inspections and/or investigations during the emergency February 1993 . and cost analysis aspects of the incident. potable water. purchasing.(2) recommend actions and equipment necessary to protect personnel direct Loss Prevention staff to perform gas testing or other emergency/disaster services and interface as needed with Industrial Hygiene assign Loss Prevention staff to record or log emergency/disaster activities for future use coordinate with services as necessary regarding safety equipment (3) (4) (5) (g) Services This function is usually performed by a staff engineer who coordinates support services and obtains a cost code from the area Finance representative to account for all financial. His responsibilities are as follows: (1) contact the on-call Area Representative who will provide safe and sanitary food.

and record all message traffic. February 1993 . A planning coordinator must be assigned. (l) Environmental This function is usually performed by an assigned environmental specialist whose responsibilities include providing environmental monitoring services and spill containment/recovery advice to the Emergency Manager and Incident Commander. isolation and shutdown unit(s) as instructed and stabilize units not involved) await further orders after the units have been shutdown and secured assign an operator to check firewater mains pressure and start fire pumps control the plant air systems. 2.e. steam systems.(4) inform community leaders of incident status. Their responsibilities are as follows: (1) (2) (3) account for personnel by head count procedures report missing persons implement the facility emergency operating plan for a specific situation (i. etc. Task 2: Establish Scope and Objectives 3. B. potential dangers which might require evacuation and recovery efforts (j) Operations/Utilities This function is usually filled by plant/site foremen who direct the activities of plant operators.B.. or A planning committee/coordinator team must be established. EARS.2. telephone lines.3 Plan Development Action Items Task 1: Assign (or Establish) Planning Coordinator (or Team) 1. A scope and written objectives must be developed for the site. and other utilities and advise the Incident Commander on their status inform the Incident Commander and Maintenance of system failures evacuate personnel if instructed by the Incident Commander (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (k) Communications This function is usually performed by an operations employee who reports to the DCC to manage radio transmissions. operate special equipment such as DVD.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 407 .

Some examples of potential emergency/disaster situations for the explosion scenario are: • • • • boiling liquid expanding vapor explosion (BLEVE) of storage. describe all scenarios on separate sheets and assign a rank order to each in Part E (Evaluation) based on likelihood of occurrence.B. explosions. vapor releases.g. tank fires. select the credible worst case emergency/disaster situation to represent that scenario (e.) The following information is useful in identifying emergency/disaster situations (initiated on-site or off-site) within each generic scenario: • Fire Fires are generally caused as a result of ignition of a gas (or liquid) hydrocarbon leak under pressure. Similarly. Generally.2 for scenario development): • • • Planning Coordinator/team to identify emergency/disaster situations. the largest tank fire) and fill out Part A (Description) and Part B (Possible Causes) of the Scenario Analysis Sheet (Figure B. (Use Figure B.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 408 . this occurs if the response is not quick to contain the fire to a manageable limit before it approaches a disaster level. Develop emergency/disaster scenarios specific to the facility or site as follows. Unburned liquid hydrocarbon pools in the ground and fuel the fire to increase its intensity and spread. All situations within this scenario can lead to disasters if fire spreads beyond the capabilities of the fire fighting systems/personnel in place. liquid releases. etc. Some examples of potential emergency/disaster situations for the fire scenario are: • • • • congested multiple process unit area fire flammable liquid tank storage area fire wharf loading and unloading area fire Explosion Flammable vapor releases are one of the most significant sources of explosions and the potential for casualties and property damage is high.) For each generic scenario. "Assess the Consequences of Scenarios".2). pump fires.g. natural disasters. sphere. Group these situations into generic scenarios (e. (The "consequences" of Part E will be developed as part of Task 4.Task 3: Identify Emergency/Disaster Scenarios 4. bullet or process vessel runaway (exothermic) process chemical reaction gas explosion from a large volume release of refrigerated LPG unconfined vapor cloud e xplosion (UVCE) from a flammable vapor release February 1993 .

g. Another source of such information is the Saudi Aramco Risk Analysis Manual. Complete each scenario analysis sheet started in Task 3 by describing the incident size. The impact of natural disasters to cause other related process disasters should be recognized in the planning stage. A likely situation for a hazardous material spill is from the tanker vehicle transporting it to the facility or during its transfer from the tanker vehicle to its process usage or storage point. flooding. etc.). or refrigerated tank tank overfill LPG tanker accident resulting in containment failure high pressure gas pipeline rupture • Toxic Vapor Release (TVR) Toxic materials may or may not be flammable but could be in a high enough concentration to pose a health risk when released as a vapor. and catalysts in various processes. Historical data on disasters at similar facilities or sites coupled with weather data can help in predicting the frequency of natural disasters for the area. February 1993 .3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 409 . the possibility of release of flammable vapor poses a great risk. Some examples of potential emergency/disaster situations for the TVR scenario are: • • • • rupture of pipeline or well blowout releasing H2S vapor rupture of storage container releasing chlorine/ammonia vapor rupture or leak of amine regenerator overhead accumulator piping/flange to release H2S vapor failure of H2S compressor seal releasing the vapor • Hazardous Materials Spill Hazardous materials are used as solvents. duration and effect on operations. Other examples of potential emergency/disaster situations for the Hazardous Materials Release/spill scenario are: • • • TEL/TML gasoline antiknock compound liquid release rupture of storage container or associated piping releasing chlorine/ammonia liquid rupture of storage container or associated piping releasing sulfuric acid liquid • Natural Disaster Each facility or site is susceptible to natural disasters (e. Some examples of potential emergency/disaster situations for the FVR scenario are: • • • • failure of piping connection to pressurized storage sphere (or bullet). reagents. high winds. Task 4: Assess the Consequences 5.• Flammable Vapor Release (FVR) In the petroleum industry.B.

6. Identify and list the entities responsible for supplying food. domino effect of sequential explosions. effect on surrounding population. Impact (including severity of potential damage. Controllability of incident based on level of emergency/disaster training of personnel and adequacy of equipment available within a facility or site.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 410 . maximum fire areas. 9.B. toxic vapor cloud. shelter.3). Amount of advance warning. After the Scenario Analysis sheets have been completed for each scenario. The plan coordinator selects the scenario which represents the most likely event with the severest consequence(s) as the basis for developing the emergency response plan. potential casualties. Display the list of critical items on the entrance to the critical items store. This choice should be approved by Contractor management. or other undesirable product of the emergency/disaster episode. Growth spread of impact area resulting from the spread of a fire. Assign a team member to develop the facility's response. additional manpower. (b) (c) 11. Task 5: Review Emergency Control Needs 7. assign a rank order in Part E based on consequences.2) after considering the following factors for each scenario: • • • • • • Size (including explosive potential. maximum vapor cloud volume). transportation. Reaction (or response) time and effectiveness of facility resources to control incident. Use the Disaster Control Tasks Checklist to determine all tasks required (see Figure B. emergency equipment. and total duration). Ensure that these critical items are stored together at one easily accessible location (or the critical items store itself if accessible). and establish available needed resources are as follows: (a) Develop an inventory list of critical supplies and equipment needed to control the emergency disaster scenarios in Tasks 3 and 4. Develop and document the assigned response. February 1993 . Task 6: Available/Needed Resources 10. external mutual aid. medical support and cost accounting. The methods to identify. maximum spill volume and area. Enter an estimate of the magnitude of potential consequences in Part E (Evacuation) of the Scenario Analysis Sheet (Figure B. 8. water. estimate.

call out lists. (above) have been met List contingencies to cover failure of any of those entities indicated in item 11.12.g. List emergency response skills required to control all scenarios selected in Tasks 3 and 4. Establish a telephone and personnel list of 24-hour contacts at all mutual aid entities. etc. etc. 17. Determine and document that the equipment and supplies provided through mutual aid are compatible with emergency/fire protection equipment at the site. tapes. office equipment (e. camera. Compare required skills with available skills of construction/site personnel. Supply the DCC (and alternate) with: • • • telephone. Consider the need to provide an alternate location for the DCC in case the original location is rendered unusable. Establish a Disaster Command Center (DCC). Establish the needed time range for all outside resources to reach the site. 20.g. Determine that the resource needs in item number 10. fax. Survey alternate outside sources to determine their ability to supply resources which may be in short supply. 16. and other radio communication/alarm equipment emergency power and lighting reference materials (e. 22. etc.g. 15.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 411 . 18. flip charts. 21. 19. emergency response manuals.) 13. Establish a Disaster Command Post (DCP) vehicle/safe location near the emergency site. develop an inventory of equipment and supplies that any mutual aid entity is expected to bring with them when they respond.) and emergency equipment (e. If a mutual aid agreement has been established. dictating machines. to supply the needed items. Measure the response/travel time needed by all mutual aid entities to respond to an emergency/disaster at the site. stationery items. drawings. February 1993 . 14. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs).B. battery powered megaphones. photographs. List and detail all high cost items and their corresponding authorization levels. spare batteries. maps. 23. • 24. flashlights.

B. Task 8: Develop Emergency Response Procedures 32. Ensure that the DCP is set up with supplies similar to the DCC (except on offshore facilities where the DCP may only have a telephone. 31. Reporting Emergencies: (1.5 (Emergency Reporting Instructions). manual pull box alarms. Establish an emergency/disaster response organization.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 412 . (Emergency telephone numbers or local 110 instructions should be posted near or on all telephones. hat) 26.25. 28. (3. Verify and document that all assigned individuals are aware of their responsibilities. Additionally. Ensure there are sufficient personnel to fill all assigned positions and alternates/substitutes identified and on standby to fill critical positions should it become necessary.) Determine how significant does an incident have to be to be reportable. or public address systems.4. telephones. Ensure that the planned facility/site emergency response procedures are structured according to the logical progression of action items given in Figure B. Develop a physical method to identify each individual in the organization chart by position (ID. duties of the position reporting relationship reporting location 29. ensure that the DCP also has the following: • • • • • self-contained breathing air megaphone binoculars safety/environmental monitoring equipment means of identification (vest.) Suggested wording for reporting emergencies (or drills) is shown in Figure B. radio communication and personal protective/identification equipment). Ensure that each assigned position has a documented detailed description of its responsibilities. (a) February 1993 .) Report to senior operations person in control room using radios. badges. Such a description must include: • • • 30. Task 7: Emergency Response Organization 27.) (2. vests).

3. (4. February 1993 . "stop-work". "evacuation". as applicable.) Assess The Situation: The Incident Commander must follow-up on every emergency declared by reporting to the incident site to assess: • • • • (d. Non-essential plant personnel are to be evacuated to preassigned assembly areas at a safe distance from the incident scene. Support groups such as Security.e.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 413 .) Initiate The Alarm: All emergency related signals (i.e. 4. Medical and Fire Protection are to report to their preassigned locations and must commence any preauthorized emergency response related actions. existing hazardous conditions and their likelihood to escalate. Mobilization Of Resources: 1. contact external groups to mobilize their resources to the scene as developed in Task 6 (Available/Needed Resources).Also see section VII. etc. different dialing and radio frequencies) should be in the appendix of the plan. Plant personnel assigned to the emergency response organization are to proceed to their preassigned locations and await instructions from the Emergency Manager or Incident Commander. if needed. 2.) the emergency response actions taken or being taken additional actions and resources required to control the situation extent of damage to property and harm or negative impact to life. (b.B.) Details of the telephone and radio systems (i.) and.A (Reporting Emergencies) of the plan (see Task 9: Write the Plan). Actions are taken by facility/site personnel to mobilize the facility's internal resources (human. equipment. (c. Authority and criteria for sounding the different alarms must be clearly stated in the plan. Supervisory or assigned personnel are to take head count and DCC is to organize search and rescue for any missing personnel. and "all clear") and expected actions relating to each signal alarm must be established and followed.

but is not limited to: • demands of caring for injured and homeless February 1993 .EARS. (e) Suppression/Control Of Incident: A separate control procedure must be written for each generic incident scenario developed in Task 3 (Identify Emergency Scenarios). radio and telephone).g. on the emergency episode and others are to maintain a fire watch if there is danger of reignition. Stand Down And Fire Watch The Emergency Manager gives the "stand down" order to emergency response personnel. Investigate And Report Incident investigation of causes and reporting can be made according to prescribed procedures. This procedure is based on facility operating instructions detailing the rapid and safe sequential shut down of process units/equipment involved or affected by the particular incident scenarios. Direct Voice Dispatch .3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 414 . 3. 2.g.5. (f) Post Incident Actions: There are follow-up actions needed once an emergency is declared under control by the Emergency Manager. Emergency Alert and Response System . GI.). At least two methods of in-plant communication should be available (e. A telephone number with a pre-recorded message providing essential up-to-date information on the incident (e. The fire watch is set up by Fire Protection following consultation with the Emergency Manager. This includes. some are assigned to gather evidence. At this time.003 (Guide For Committees Investigating Major Incidents) are two sources which provide guidance for developing such procedures. radio.g.DVD. These actions are: 1. 6. etc.B. some personnel are released from duty. One in-plant radio channel is reserved as the main communication link between the Emergency Manager and Incident Commander. telephone. Restore Operations This covers all post-emergency control actions which must be followed to restore normal operations at the facility. At least two methods of communication are necessary for external contacts (e.001 (Notification Requirements For Incidents) and GI 6. 113 in Dhahran) will be established.

Ensure that the plan has a Corporate Policy Statement on emergency/disaster preparedness. Develop procedures for the (onshore/offshore as applicable): • • • • • • • • • • • • • following emergencies/disasters emergency unit shutdown individual equipment isolation process unit fire tank farm fire marine dock fire off-site pipeline leak personnel rescue medical emergencies toxic/flammable/corrosive gas leak evacuation from units and buildings process upsets breaches of security (including terrorism or sabotage) For more information refer to the Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department "Guidelines for Preparing Emergency Response Plans" manual. The plan manual must be reviewed and signed off by all outside mutual aid entities expected to respond to an emergency at this site. Complete the emergency reporting form given in Figure B. February 1993 .B.5 and follow the instructions contained therein to report such event(s). Task 9 . 36. and is prepared in conformance with the format and instructions presented in the Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department "Guidelines for Preparing Emergency Response Plans" manual.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 415 .• • • 4. repairing damaged equipment to bring process equipment on-line collecting evidence for the reporting requirement determining secondary hazards that may have developed Revise The Plan All new information gained as a result of the incident should be analyzed to determine what improvements could be made to the facility's Emergency Response Plan. 34. These improvements should be integrated into the Plan and all emergency response personnel should be retrained and drilled to ensure that they are familiar with and proficient in following upgraded procedures.6.Write the Plan 35. A typical Emergency Response Plan will follow the outline given in Figure B. 33.

3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 416 . Hold and document critique sessions following all drills. • • • • 38. document and follow the emergency response training/drill items given below to ensure that all personnel expected to participate in emergency response are proficient in its theory and practice. 42. Establish a procedure to ensure that all suggestions from the critique sessions are incorporated into your manual.Task 10 .g. (a) (b) develop a document and drill schedule in your manual ensure that these include full scale disaster simulations 39. 40. Develop. 44. 45.B. documented tickler date) and update the plan at least once a year through the plan coordinator. Task 11 . Keep a current list of all document manual holders and periodically forward them copies of any amendments. Keep a record of all amendments and maintain it in the front of the plan document manual.Review and Revise the Plan 43. Provide for regular reviews (e.Emergency Response Training and Drills 37. simulations and/or actual incidents. 41. table top exercise classroom training of personnel simulation of DCC operations during an emergency field simulations/drills of credible scenarios Ensure that alternates (or standby) personnel are also trained and drilled on emergency response Train and familiarize all personnel with the provisions of your emergency response manual. February 1993 .

1: TYPICAL EMERGENCY ORGANIZATION CHART February 1993 .FIGURE B.B.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response 417 Page .

____of____scenarios Consequences: (1 = most severe) • No. Description of the Scenario: __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ Possible Causes: __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ Expected Size or Duration: __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ Effect on Operations: __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ Evaluation and Ranking: __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ Likelihood: (1 = most likely) • No. E.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response 418 Page .____of____scenarios B. D. C.B. Location/equipment-specific notes: __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ Reviewed by: _________________________________ Date: ____________ February 1993 .FIGURE B. • • F.2: S CENARIO ANALYSIS S HEET FOR (LOCATION) Unit/Equipment: ____________________________________ Scenario No.: _________ Type of Emergency: • ______Fire • ______Explosion • ______Flammable Gas • ______Toxic Gas • ______Hazardous Materials Spill • ______Natural Disaster A.

Available on demand. facility personnel must do the following to minimize negative impact of an emergency/disaster: • • • • Notify emergency response organization. Call for all available material reserves and resources. Pre-impact Preparation If time permits. 3. Warning • • Alarm/communication systems to alert employees and local community of an emergency/disaster.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 419 . Evacuation • • • • Evacuation of persons from affected areas and non-essential workers from adjacent areas lowers the risk of casualties.FIGURE B. 4. Control of access and exit points. "Alert". Compatible with each other. February 1993 . Evacuation system testing and training. "Evacuation" and "All-Clear" signals must be recognized by all affected population. These resources must be: • • • • Known in advance.3: EMERGENCY/DISASTER CONTROL TASKS CHECKLIST 1. Dead count requirements.B. Mobilization and Utilization of Human and Material Resources The effectiveness of an emergency response depends on the quality and supply of human and material resources. Used in an organized and controlled manner. and they must know how to proceed in each case. 2. Contact appropriate resource for weather data and other emergency/disaster information Evacuate all affected areas.

treatment and relocation of casualties are: • • • Access of medical personnel to site. Transportation to move casualties to such facilities. 10. Control and Authority • System of overall control and distribution of authority by chain of command.and transport them to safety. • • • Communication equipment/system in place. 6. Communications Efficient and accurate communications are a necessary part of effective emergency response actions. Temporary hospital facilities and equipment.5. Coordination • Coordination of call-out personnel and staging of resources to ensure proper level of support is available where needed. 8. Compatibility of facility communication equipment with that used by mutual aid organizations. Incident Suppression/Control • • Selective use of assembled resources. 11. Continuing Assessment • Continuing assessment of the situation by knowledgeable observers to redirect emergency/disaster response actions as needed. Back-up communications equipment/system. February 1993 .B. Training and experience of emergency response team (especially Incident Commander). 9. Search and Rescue • • Identify likely search and rescue situations from generic scenarios. Care for Casualties Factors to be addressed in the care. Establish resources (qualified personnel and equipment) and procedures to locate victims . 7.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 420 .

3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 421 .g. isolated fires from explosions. etc. Continuity of Operations • • Plan to continue operations unaffected by emergency/disaster by manpower reassignment. downed electrical lines. Secondary Hazards • The plan should identify hazards created as a result of the emergency/disaster (e. Emergency Teams and Equipment Recovery • • System to check and replace emergency equipment damaged during or immediately after the emergency/disaster.• • 12. 17. Ensure that sufficient manpower/equipment is on standby to handle escalation of emergency/disaster to other units. Control access to scene of emergency/disaster. Personnel responsible to contact outside agencies and/or mutual aid organizations. guarding property and patrolling dangerous areas.B. Outside Community Order Request Government Affairs representative to contact appropriate law enforcement authorities and community leaders to address the following: • Evacuation. 15. 14. structural damage to buildings. February 1993 . traffic and crowd control. Security Adequate security personnel/system be in place to: • • Control traffic. 13. • 16.) Determine and plan to provide additional resources needed to control these hazards. Restore Normal Operations • Maintenance personnel should maintain a current status list of plant utilities and services lost during the emergency/disaster and the estimated time to restore them. Call-out list for management personnel. System to provide shift relief to emergency/fire fighting crews and replenishment of fire fighting materials and other consumables.

shelter and financial assistance as needed.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 422 . February 1993 . clothing.B. Personnel Needs • Plan to provide emergency/disaster workers and other affected personnel with sanitary food.18. water.

POST-INCIDENT ACTIONS February 1993 .4: FLOW DIAGRAM OF TYPICAL OFFSHORE EMERGENCY RESPONSE EMERGENCY INCIDENT 1.FIGURE B.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 423 . REPORT THE EMERGENCY 3. ASSESS THE SITUATION 4.B. INITIATE THE ALARM 2. CONTROL THE INCIDENT 6. MOBILIZE RESOURCES 5.

the reporting individual. etc. gas leak.) (north/south/east/west) There are ___________(no. try the following in the order listed: telephone xxx-zzzz radio frequency xxx. 2. if an operator.FIGURE B. 4. 3.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 424 . ENSURE THAT YOU HAVE A RESPONSE THEN IF NECESSARY REPEAT THE ABOVE INFORMATION AND ANSWER QUESTIONS. DO NOT HANG UP. 1. If the number is busy or unavailable.5: EMERGENCY REPORTING INSTRUCTIONS TELEPHONE: XXX-XXXX I have an emergency to report: I am calling from _____________________________________________________ My name is _________________________ My badge number is _______________ I see a _____________________________________at ________________________ (fire.xx (other for the facility) (if busy see below) After the message has been given successfully. should return immediately to the emergency site to do whatever he can safely do to improve the emergency situation. February 1993 .B.) of people hurt and requiring medical assistance.

Assess The Situation D. Natural Disaster 7. Revise The Plan IX. Sections should be separated by dividers with extended tabs naming each section. Scope B. Saudi Aramco b. Contractors 2. Emergency Response Actions A. Non-Saudi Aramco E. Fire Fighting Supplies 3. Post-Incident Actions A.B. Definitions Emergency Response Organization A. Title Page Reporting Emergencies Emergency Response Personnel Roster Table Of Contents Introduction A. Explosion 5. VII. IV. Fire 4. I. External Resources a. Communication Equipment 5. Investigate And Report C. V. Internal Resources a. Functional Responsibilities VI. Hazardous Materials Release 6. Emergency Equipment 2. Reporting Emergencies B. Mutual Aid February 1993 .FIGURE B. Mobilization Of Resources 1.6: EMERGENCY PLAN . Other Site Specific Incidents VIII. Vapor Release 2. Stand Down And Fire Watch B. Suppression/Control of Incident 1. When To Implement C. Restore Operations D. Appendices A. II. Toxic Vapor Release 3. Drawings 4. II. Plant Personnel b.S AMPLE TABLE OF CONTENTS Suggested headings are shown below. Chain Of Command B. Plans. Support Groups c. Materials And Equipment Inventory 1.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 425 . Facility Maps. Initiating The Alarm C.

B.a. Operating Instruction Manuals (OIMs) And Other References February 1993 . Exceptions To Generic Scenarios C.3 Emergency/Disaster Planning And Response Page 426 . Non-Saudi Aramco B. Saudi Aramco b.

Appendix C: Fire Safety Checklist Page 427 .Appendix C: Fire Safety Checklist For Evaluating Construction Materials Store Yard February 1993 .Construction Safety Manual .

FENCING SITE A.1 FIRE SAFETY CHECKLIST FOR EVALUATING CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS STORE YARD (Based on NFPA 231-APPENDIX C) PROTECTION OF OUTDOOR STORAGE I. and between piles and the boundary line fence for the storage site. February 1993 .1 Fire Safety Checklist Page 428 . 1. All-weather roads adequate to carry fire department apparatus. directly opposite each other (180o ) are required to permit ready access of fire apparatus to any part of the storage area regardless of wind direction and location of fire. 2. access to the seat of the fire with hose streams from the ground. LOW HEIGHT and SMALL AREA are the ideal conditions. Adequate fire department protection. B. PILING OF MATERIALS A. E. F. (b) B. Available water supply of sufficient pressure and quantity. between piles and buildings. Reasons for this are (a) stability of the pile under normal and fire conditions (containers maximum: 2 high). Travel time to site. D. C. Run-off from fire fighting water should be considered. Kept clear at all times. III. Sufficient clear space from combustible structures or other storage which could be an exposure hazard. Drainage from fuel spills should travel away from all storage.C. SELECTION OF A SITE A. 1. AISLES must be maintained between individual piles. 1. 1. No danger of flooding. B. Two 15' gates. primary factor. to allow access to all sides of the piles.C. Enough clearance from storage site to highways or major roads. II. Entire site should be fenced to control access.

(b) IV. C. February 1993 . Generally less hazardous materials should be stored upwind and more hazardous materials downwind. DRIVEWAYS of minimum 15 feet width are required to permit travel of fire apparatus to all parts of the storage area. at all times.C1 Fire Safety Checklist Page 429 . V. more hazardous ones downwind. Communications -.a reliable means of communication with the Saudi Aramco Fire Protection Department shall be provided. ARRANGEMENT OF BUILDINGS should also consider the effects of wind on the spread of fire. since they also act as firebreaks to limit the spread of fire. Normally this will be a Saudi Aramco system telephone. ARRANGEMENT OF MATERIALS is important to reduce the speed of the spread of fire. BUILDINGS A. 1. D. leave plenty of clear fire.break space between buildings (50 feet minimum). 1. allowing greater chance to contain it within the pile or "block" of origin. 1. Aisles minimum of 10 feet wide. Piles or "blocks" of small piles are arranged with combustibles and noncombustibles in alternate locations (a) This technique tends to isolate a fire. FIRE PROTECTION A.1. 2. One approach is to have less hazardous shops and sheltered activities upwind. 1. Again. and alternate hazardous shops or stored goods with those structures housing less hazardous goods or activities. Driveway and aisle widths should be increased to at least equal the height of piles of goods. this will help counteract unfavorable winds. 2. B. Buildings within storage yards should be at least 50 feet from the nearest storage pile. This checker board pattern of materials also helps reduce reliance on wind direction to control the spread of a fire. In addition to the above. WARNING: Prompt NOTIFICATION of the Fire Protection Department is mandatory and absolutely necessary to prevent out-of-control fires. This space should remain c lear and free of combustible materials.

These hoses are easily handled by one man and can deliver significant quantities of water. and other equipment such as nozzles.) Size of loop piping.C1 Fire Safety Checklist Page 430 .Saudi Aramco Engineering Standard B-7C requires type 509-G hydrants for protection of outdoor storage. etc.B.) Materials . 6" diameter minimum. 1. (Block valve(s) to isolate either 50% of the piping and hydrants. Details of Water Supply Connect to main with gate valve. E. (b) 2. 2. These 1 -1/4" diameter hoses allow one person to apply about 100 gallons/minute without difficulty. Each hose reel will have a valve at the tie-in to the 6" loop. repairable. No temporary storage will be allowed to obstruct access for fire fighting. the 2-1/2" hoses used by the Fire Protection Department can require 4 to 5 trained men to handle. Standard Live Hose Reels shall be provided throughout the storage areas to allow fast application of firewater onto any location within the store yard. Standard Fire Hydrants .carbon steel pipe. February 1993 . Provide a looped system valved to feed hydrants from either direction. Two inch steel (galvanized) lines shall be used to feed these hoses. not at a constant rate. housed. Depending on system pressure. suitably located. sufficient 2 -1/2" hose. the more you will be surprised at the size the fire has attained. Full coverage of the interiors of all buildings must also be provided. Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided throughout the storage area and the buildings located as to be quickly available for use at any point. and maintained ready for use. Hydrants and all fire fighting equipment shall be accessible for use at all times. hydrant wrenches. (Good mechanical strength. In areas where there is no Fire Protection Department within reasonable distance. The longer you wait to apply water on a small fire. C. It is for this reason that fire hydrants are not normally provided with hose or used by construction yard personnel. okay for temporary yards. The need to notify the Fire Protection Department and man these live hose reels as fast as possible cannot be over-emphasized. (a) Fire areas increase as an increasing multiple of time. D. WARNING: 1. shall be kept on the site.

fire extinguishers and the fire warning system shall be on site at all times when the yard is otherwise unoccupied. The site shall be kept free from accumulation of unnecessary combustible materials such as empty cartons or other packing or packaging materials.VI. All electrical equipment and installations to comply with National Electrical Code. Motor vehicles shall be garaged and repaired outside the yard area. GUARD SERVICE A. at a safe distance from the storage yard. February 1993 . Supervised rounds are suggested to verify the entire property is periodically observed. Changes to the original storage yard layout must be reviewed and concurred by Loss Prevention Department. C. 2. D. YARD MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS A. Means of communication necessary to summon assistance during emergency situations shall be provided.C1 Fire Safety Checklist Page 431 . All essential features of this "Checklist" shall be clearly illustrated on a site drawing of the proposed yard. Employees' smoking areas shall be clearly designated and no smoking strictly enforced outside these "safe" areas. Guards trained in the use of live fire hose reels. Two copies of this drawing (done accurately to scale) will be submitted and once approved. one signed copy shall be kept at the site for periodic review. Fuel handling shall comply with NFPA 30. A site layout plan of the materials storage yards shall be submitted to the Loss Prevention Department Area Fire Prevention Engineer for review. B. in a noncombustible structure or unsheltered. VII. Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 1.

Appendix D: Crane Safety Handbook Page 432 .Construction Safety Manual .Appendix D: Saudi Aramco Crane Safety Handbook February 1993 .

E -1660.D.1 CRANE SAFETY HANDBOOK Notice: For utility. February 1993 . Loss Prevention Department.Appendix D: Crane Safety Handbook Page 433 . the crane safety handbook is bound under separate cover. Additional copies may be acquired by contacting the Support Services Unit.Construction Safety Manual . Dhahran. One copy will be distributed to each holder of the Construction Safety Manual.

Construction Safety Manual .Appendix E: Suggestion Form Page 434 .Appendix E: Suggestion Form February 1993 .

Appendix E: Suggestion Form Page 435 . Loss Prevention Department Saudi Arabian American Oil Company E-1770 Dhahran. Saudi Arabia Please consider the following suggestion(s) relative to the Saudi Aramco Construction Safety Manual: ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _______________________________________ (Signature) ________________________________________ (Date) ________________________________________ (Address) ________________________________________ Contact Telephone Number ________________________________________ Contact FAX Number February 1993 .SUGGESTIONS FOR THE SAUDI ARAMCO CONSTRUCTION SAFETY MANUAL MANAGER.

Construction Safety Manual .Appendix F: Distribution Form February 1993 .Appendix F: Distribution Form Page 436 .

Appendix F: Distribution Form Page 437 .Address For Distribution Construction Safety Manual MANAGER Loss Prevention Department Saudi Arabian Oil Company E-1770 Dhahran. My present address is: Name:__________________________________________________________________________ Company:_______________________________________________________________________ Address:________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________ (Signature) ____________________________________ (Date) ________________________________________ Contact Telephone Number ________________________________________ Contact FAX Number February 1993 . Saudi Arabia Please continue to send me changes or additions to the Saudi Aramco Construction Safety Manual.

Construction Safety Manual: Appendix G: Sanitary Code Page 438 .Appendix G: Sanitary Code February 1993 .

Appendix G: Sanitary Code Page 439 .006 SASC-A-010 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR RECREATION AREAS AND FACILITIES.GI 151. INCLUDING BEACHES.IMPLEMENTING THE SAUDI ARAMCO SANITARY CODE . CAMPGROUNDS AND MARINAS CAMPS AND COMMUNAL LIVING FACILITIES FOOD ESTABLISHMENTS SWIMMING POOLS. WADING POOLS AND SPAS SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT WASTE WATER AND SEWERAGE SYSTEMS WATER SASC-C-010 SASC-F-010 SASC-P-010 SASC-R-010 SASC-S-010 SASC-W-010 February 1993 .

Appendix H: General Instructions Master Index February 1993 .Construction Safety Manual: Appendix H: GI Master Index Page 440 .

028 7.002 6.718 5.026 7.025 6.102 2.708 2.020 6. Elevators. Multiple/Tandem.012 6. Critical Crane Lifts Inspection. Testing and Maintenance of Wire Rope Slings Inspection and Testing of Cranes.GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS (GI) MASTER INDEX GI Number 2.027 7. and Mobile Aerial Baskets 6. Lockout and Use of Hold Tags Personal Flotation Devices for Work Over. Powered Platforms.100 2.029 7. On or Near Water Safety Requirements for Abrasive Blast Cleaning Control of Remote Area Travel and Search/Rescue Procedures Reporting and Recording of Motor Vehicle Accidents Traffic and Vehicle Safety Mobile Heavy Equipment Operator Testing and Certification Lifting/Elevating and Mobile Equipment Accident Reporting Procedures Personnel Work Platform Operations Heavy Crane Lift.025 7.001 6.030 February 1993 .710 2.Construction Safety Manual .029 6.711 2.Appendix H: GI Master Index Page 441 .021 6.702 2.030 7.003 Title Work Permit System Pressure Testing Safely Electrical Safety for Boom or Derrick Type Hoisting Equipment Gas Testing Procedures Mechanical Completion & Performance Acceptance of Plant/Unit Fire and Safety Watch Contractor Sites Allotment Procedure Loss Prevention Policy Implementation Notification Requirements for Incidents (Including Fires) Guide for Committees Investigating Major Incidents or Engineering Reviews of Other Incidents Isolation.

Inspection.004 355.New Installation. Change in Set Pressure.002 150.003 8.Appendix H: GI Master Index Page 442 .Routine Tests.003 February 1993 . Storing and Issuing Explosives Deterioration and Disposal of Explosives Control of Compressed Gas Cylinders Performance Qualifications For Welders and Welding Operators Operational Chemical Cleaning of Boilers Pipeline Hydrotest Water Disposal Pipeline Repair and Maintenance Repair Procedures on Hydrocarbon Pipelines Pressure Relief Valves .006 330.00 441.Dhahran Area Disaster Control .014 447.001 432. Replacement or Retirement from Service Pressure Relief Valves .Remote Areas Ionizing Radiation Implementing the Saudi Aramco Sanitation Code Bulk Deliveries of Oil Field Treatment Chemicals from Local Vendors Identifying.081 402.020 401.002 Safety Requirements for Scaffolding Prescription Safety Glasses Air-Supplied Breathing Apparatus Protective (Safety) Footwear Disaster Contingency Plan .Ras Tanura Asbestos Regulations First Aid/CPR Training and First Aid Kits . Storing and Issuing Hazardous Material Disposing of Hazardous Material Handling and Disposing of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) Requisitioning.00 434.005 70.001 355.015-01 355.015 355. Cataloging.Refinery and Terminal . Ordering and Tracking Hazardous Materials Receiving.500 80. Receiving.87 355.003 151.8.500 150. Quality Assurance and Regulation 447.001 150.002 8.001 8.003 355.002 355.

Assigning and Dispatching Pollution Control Vessels. Tanajib or West Pier SAG Regulations and Practice as Applied to All Types of Marine Craft at the Port of Ras Tanura Collision & Damage By or To Marine Equipment or Craft Operating Practices for Harbor Tugs.475.165 1131.215 Blasting Near Existing Facilities Use of Explosives in Construction Confined Space Entry Procedure Special Regulations for the Use of Explosives in Seismic Operations Street and Road Closure.502 1193.000 1127.001 1021. Tugs.001 1198. Including Safety Rules Operating Procedures for Barges Including Safety Rules Operating Procedures for Marine Oil Recovery and Storage Barge/Vessel. Reinstatement and Traffic Controls Transportation Engineering Procedures for Heavy-Lift/Over-Sized Equipment Vehicle Loading Use of Trailer Brakes Use of Trailer Safety Chains Transporting Explosives in Comp any Owned/Leased/Rented Motor Transport Vehicles Death or Injury Aboard Seagoing Vessels Marine Craft Fueling.002 520.700 1130.001 475.001 618. Offshore Vessels and Launches.002 1194.921 1183.001 1192.Appendix H: GI Master Index Page 443 .013 1131.001 February 1993 .504 1187. Including Safety Rules Marine Port Information and Regulations Navigation Warnings Requesting.001 1192. Excavation.003 1186.001 1196.001 1197.002 1192.502 1186. Launches and Barges Whistle Signals for Use Between Tugs and Barges or Tugs and Self-Propelled Vessels When Berthing Procedures and Safety Rules for Diving Operations Rig/Barge Moving 1185.001 1193.

001 1310. Unneeded Communication Equipment Radio Asset Control And Accountability Program (RACAP) Residential Telephone Service Business Telephone Service Inside Aramco Communities and Facilities Business Telephone Service Outside Aramco Communities and Facilities Data Circuits.015 1600.003 1601.002 1602.000 1321.001 1602.Appendix H: GI Master Index Page 444 .001 1781.003 1603.1199. Message Switch And Facsimile Terminals Inspection/Maintenance .Fire Protection Equipment Fire Reports February 1993 .00-1 Safe Operation of Self-Propelled Jack-Up Barges Transportation of Dangerous Articles Onboard Saudi Aramco Aircraft Request for Air Medical Evacuation Destruction of Obsolete/Damaged.002 1602.001-1 1787.

Appendix I: List Of Figures February 1993 .Construction Safety Manual .Appendix I: List Of Figures Page 445 .

5 Figure I.8 Figure I.19 Figure II.24 Figure II.4 Figure II.Minimum Timber Requirements Timber Trench Shoring . Face Shields And Helmets Protection Against Radiant Energy Specialized Hand Protectors Typical Self-Powered Platform For Building Maintenance Respiratory Protection Clearance Considerations For Safety Equipment Know Your Fire Extinguisher 43 44 69 76 77 78 79 86 87 94 II.7 Figure II.3 Figure II.14 Figure II.8 Figure II.27 Hold Tag Lockout Clip (Typical) Excavations Made In Type A Soil Simple/Multiple Bench Unsupported Vertically Sided Excavations Made In Type B Soil Single/Multiple Bench Excavations Made In Type C Soils Excavations Made In Layered Soils Excavations Made In Layered Soils Examples Of Trench Shields Guide To Safe Distance Back From Top Of Slope For Storage Of Materials Or Placing Equipment Examples Of Screw Trench Jacks Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring Typical Installations Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring Waler Systems For Soil Type B Example Of Timber Shoring Protective Systems Timber Trench Shoring . General And Civil: Figure II.3 Figure I.1 Figure I.Minimum Timber Requirements Timber Trench Shoring .LIST OF FIGURES I.20 Figure II.11 Figure II.6 Figure II.10 Figure II.3B Figure II.2 Figure I.26 Figure II.6A Figure II.18 Figure II.21 Figure II.25 Figure II.22 Figure II.1 Figure II.6 Figure I.13 Figure II.4A Figure II.16 Figure II.23 Figure II.Appendix I: List Of Figures Page 446 .9 Preliminary Accident Report Contractor Monthly Safety Report Injury Summary Protective Goggle.2 Figure II.9 Figure II.5 Figure II.3A Figure II.4A Figure I. Spectacles.Minimum Timber Requirements Standard Coupler Adjustable Coupler Typical End To End Coupler Screwjack Typical Reveal Pin Typical Base Plate A Typical Independent Tied Scaffold Constructed Using Tube And Coupler Scaffolding A Typical Tube And Coupler Scaffold Plan View Of Two-Way Tie Plan View Of Column Box Tie Plan View Of Reveal Tie 121 122 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 192 192 192 192 192 192 210 211 212 212 212 February 1993 .12 Figure II.17 Figure II.4 Figure I.7 Figure I.15 Figure II. Administration: Figure I.

11 Figure III.43 Figure II.Appendix I: List Of Figures Page 447 .12 Figure III.Machine Guarding Radial Saws The Woodworking Machine Regulations Cartridge/Tool Issuance Control 213 214 214 215 216 217 217 217 225 226 227 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 III.36 Figure II.42 Figure II.40 Figure II. Mechanical Equipment And Materials: Figure III.46 Figure II.29 Figure II. Electrical And Radiation: Figure IV.33 Figure II.2 Figure III.35 Figure II.32 Figure II.13 Pre-Lift Operation Checklist Lift Plan For Cranes Identification Tags Installing A Wedge Socket On A Rope Two-Legged Chain Sling: Major Components Sling Fixings Synthetic Webbing Slings Sling Loading Eyebolts Crane Hooks Shackles Wire Rope Sling Inspection Log Typical Construction Materials Store Yard 266-267 268 277 278 278 278 279 280 280 280 280 281 297 IV.5 Figure III.28 Figure II.9 Figure III.3 Figure III. Chemicals And Operations: Figure V.Machine Guarding Ring Test Correctly Mounted Wheel Wire Conversion Chart Self Adjusted Guard Table Saws Table Saw .10 Figure III.47 A Typical System Scaffold A Typical System Scaffold Being Assembled A Typical System Scaffold Base In The Process Of Being Assembled And Leveled A Typical Fabricated Tubular Frame Manually Propelled Mobile Scaffold A Typical Tube And Coupler Mobile Access Tower Cross Tube Anchor Outriggers In Use Driven Tube Anchor Abrasive/Grinding Wheel Grinder Guards Bench Grinder .3 Temporary Crossing For Construction Equipment Proper Use Of Insulating Tools And Protective Apparel Standard Sign .1 Figure V.Figure II.30 Figure II.38 Figure II.1 Figure III.7 Figure III.45 Figure II.34 Figure II. Flammability And Reactivity 351 352 353 February 1993 .31 Figure II.41 Figure II.3 Identification Of Materials By Hazard Signal Dimensions And Arrangement Explanation Of Hazard Rating Codes Identification Of Health Hazard.Radiation 318 319 324 V.1 Figure IV.44 Figure II.2 Figure IV.2 Figure V.37 Figure II.39 Figure II.4 Figure III.6 Figure III.8 Figure III.

1 Figure B.4 Figure B.Appendix I: List Of Figures Page 448 .5 Figure B.2 Figure B.1 Contractor's Evaluation Competition Job Safety 380-381 Appendix B: Figure B. On Or Near Water International Code Flag "A" Signals 361 373 373 Appendix A: Figure A.Sample Table Of Contents 412 413 414 418 419 420-421 February 1993 .VI.6 Typical Emergency Organization Chart Scenario Analysis Sheet For (Location) Emergency/Disaster Control Tasks Checklist Flow Diagram Of Typical Offshore Emergency Response Emergency Reporting Instructions Emergency Plan .3 Figure B.1 Figure VI.2 Figure VI. Marine: Figure VI.3 If You Work Over.

Construction Safety Manual: Appendix J: List Of Tables Page 449 .Appendix J: List Of Tables February 1993 .

Administration: Table I.Construction Safety Manual: Appendix J: List Of Tables Page 450 .4 Table II.2 Table II.Medium Duty Tube And Coupler Scaffolds .1 Table II. General And Civil: Table II.1 Table III.2 Wind Speed (Miles Per Hour) vs.Heavy Duty Ventilation Requirements For Confined Spaces Personal Protective Equipment To Be Worn Or Used During Surface Preparation And Paint Application 131 191 201 202 203 248 252 III.5 Table II.Light Duty Tube And Coupler Scaffolds .1 Basic Personal Protective Equipment 75 II.6 Table II. Force Of Wind In Pounds Per Square Foot Wind Speed Definition 269 269 February 1993 . Mechanical Equipment And Materials Table III.7 Maximum Allowable Slopes Wood Scaffold Plank Loading Tube And Coupler Scaffolds .LIST OF TABLES I.3 Table II.

Appendix K: Forms February 1993 .Construction Safety Manual: Appendix K: Forms Page 451 .

Please copy these for use in your safety program.Construction Safety Manual: Appendix K: Forms Page 452 . February 1993 .• Appendix K contains originals of many of the forms which have appeared as figures throughout the Manual.

PRELIMINARY ACCIDENT REPORT: Detailed Report Required Within 3 Days Accident Location: Company: Date Of Accident: Personnel Injured: Control No_________________ Time Of Accident: Badge Number: Type Of Injuries: Property Damage And Estimated Cost Damage: Description Of Accident: Witness Statement(s) What Caused The Accident: What Corrective Action Has Been Taken Signed:_______________________________________________________________Badge No:________________________ Date Of Report:________________________________________________ Name (Printed):_____________________________________________________________________ Company:___________________________________________________ Job Title:_________________________________ .

.

:________________JOB No:_______ 1. (B) Attendance: (C) Instructor(s): Prepared By:_____________________________ Contractor Safety Officer:_____________________________________ Signed By:____________________________________ Saudi Aramco Representative:____________________________ Date:___________________________ . Fires: 3. 4. 2.000): 4. 5. Crane.CONTRACTOR MONTHLY SAFETY REPORT PROJECT TITLE:___________________________________ LOCATION:_________________________________ CONTRACTOR:_______________________________________________________________________________________ BUDGET ITEM No:._______________________________________ CONTRACT No. 3. Work Injuries: 2. Incidents Involving Damage To Saudi Aramco Equipment: 6. Safety Meeting: (A) Topics Discussed: 1. Motor Vehicle Accidents: 5. Incidents Or Property Damage (Over SR 10. Heavy Equipment & Manlift Accidents: 7.

Why Total Lost Time Injuries This Month: Total Days Lost: Total Man-hours Worked This Month: Report Prepared By:________________________________ Signature:_________________________________ .:________________________Month & Ye ar:____________________ Contractor:__________________________________File No. How. Where. Name Of Injured Badge Numbe r Craft Date Of Accident Carry Over Yes/No Days Lost This Month Nature Of Injury And Part Of Body Affected Brief Description Of Accident State What.:_________________________ Injury No.INJURY SUMMARY (PAGE ___OF___) Project:__________________________________Project No.

Title And Telephone:_______________ .

Abqaiq) Footnote: This form is to be filled out for the following lifts: 1. Crane capacity for jib configuration:____________ 12.028 and 7. Transportation Dept. Operator Saudi Aramco certified: Yes:o No:o 4. Wind speed:__________mph (Maximum 20 mph) 14. . Ground and site conditions:______________________________________________ 13. Load moment indicator: Yes:o No:o Type:_________________________________________ 16. safe working load (SWL) capacity. Crane Inspection Sticker valid: Yes:o No:o Date of expiry:________________________________________________________________ 3. No. 8.LIFT PLAN FOR CRANES 1. •Type of crane to be used ______________________ •Boom length (total) _______________________ft/m •Jib length ______________________________ft/m Stowed Erected N/A (lbs/kgs) o o o Jib: _______ o o o Extension: _______ Hookblock (Main): ______ _____ _____ _______ o o Aux.0. Work permit required: Yeso No:o 15. Associated with offshore and marine sites and operations. Crane capacity at operating radius __________ (Note: Do not make lift if total load is greater than crane capacity shown in Item 10. Sketch and supplementary information for crane lift is required to be attached to this plan. 7. 3.) 11. Description of load:___________________________________________________ 5.030). 4. length of slings. 10. Contractor:______________________ Date:__________________ Crane Operator:_______________________ Date:__________________________ Approved:_______________________ Date:__________________ Reviewed by:_____________________ Date:_____________________________ (Competent Person) (Saudi Aramco Site Representative) Approved:_______________________ Date:__________________ (Heavy Haul/Rig Move Unit. (Note: The sketch of the crane should include the following rigging information: size of each component. weight of component and sling angles). Involving personnel platforms (as per GI 7. Contractor:__________________________________________________ J. At all construction sites and operating plants.028 for appropriate derating based on type of lift. Boom Head: ______ _______ o o Headache Ball: ______ _______ Slings. etc. type of component. component diameter. • • • • 7. Lift quadrant zone ___________________ .027. Shackles. 2. 9.. Refer to GI 7.: ______ ______ ______ _______ Others: __________________________________ _______ __________________________________ _______ Total (Gross Load Weight): _______ • • • 6. Within safety zones of power lines. Weight of load _______lbs/kgs Effective weight of jib headache ball ______ lbs/kgs Weight of hoist rope below boom tip______ lbs/kgs Weight of other rigging ______ lbs/kgs Total load weight _____ lbs/kgs Effective weight of jib _____ lbs/kgs (see jib chart) Weight of load block _____ lbs/kgs Weight of spreader bar _____ lbs/kgs Hoisting clearance ________ft/m. Operating radius ___________ft/m.:_____________________________________________ 2.

WIRE ROPE SLING INSPECTION LOG Contractor:______________________________________ Location: __________________________ BI/JO Number: ___________________________________ Project Title: ______________________ Sling# Diameter Length SWL Date-In Service Date-OutService Inspector Signature (Date) .

Name/ Signature Issued By Remarks Warning: Above items can only be issued to workers with valid training certificate Storekeeper: Safety Officer: .CARTRIDGE /TOOL ISSUANCE CONTROL Date Issued Cartridge Quantity Returned Returned Used Unused Returned Unexploded Tool Issued (Type/MDL) Received By Cert No.

4. the reporting individual. if an operator.) (north/south/east/west) There are ___________(no. try the following in the order listed: telephone xxx-zzzz radio frequency xxx. If the number is busy or unavailable. etc. 3. DO NOT HANG UP. 1.xx (other for the facility) (if busy see below) After the message has been given successfully. 2. ENSURE THAT YOU HAVE A RESPONSE THEN IF NECESSARY REPEAT THE ABOVE INFORMATION AND ANSWER QUESTIONS.) of people hurt and requiring medical assistance. . gas leak.EMERGENCY REPORTING INSTRUCTIONS TELEPHONE: XXX-XXXX I have an emergency to report: I am calling from _____________________________________________________ My name is _________________________ My badge number is _______________ I see a _____________________________________at ________________________ (fire. should return immediately to the emergency site to do whatever he can safely do to improve the emergency situation.

Number: Peak Number Of Employees: Contractor Site Representative: Saudi Aramco Site (PMT) Engineer: Project Mgmt. Signed:________________________________________ Saudi Aramco Project Manager . who is a member of the proponent Project Management Team (PMT).I.PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY COMPETITION SITE REGISTRATION FORM To: Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Department Date: ____________________________ Name Of Contractor: Contractor's Address: Contractor's Phone Number: Job Description: Job Number: Starting Date: Estimated Completion Date: B. Department: Telephone Number: Telephone Number: Org. Code: Name Of Contractor's Safety Representative: Contractor's Site Phone Number: Site Location: Signed:____________________________________________________(Contractor's Representative) Job Title:__________________________________________________ Company:__________________________________________________ Date:_______________________________________________________ Saudi Aramco Proponent Department:____________________________________________________ This form is to be completed and sent to the local Saudi Aramco Loss Prevention Office with a copy to the designated senior Project Engineer.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful